SJ-20100414142254-017-ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20.21) Base Station Controller Radio Parameter Reference

ZXG10 iBSC
Base Station Controller

Radio Parameter Reference
6.20.21
ZTE CORPORATION
NO. 55, Hi-tech Road South, ShenZhen, P.R.China
Postcode: 518057
Tel: +86-755-26771900
Fax: +86-755-26770801
URL: http://ensupport.zte.com.cn
E-mail: support@zte.com.cn
LEGAL INFORMATION
Copyright © 2011 ZTE CORPORATION.
The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or
distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written
consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by
contractual confidentiality obligations.
All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE
CORPORATION or of their respective owners.
This document is provided “as is”, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions
are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose,
title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the
use of or reliance on the information contained herein.
ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications
covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE
CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter
herein.
ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice.
Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information.
The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History
Revision No. Revision Date Revision Reason
R1.4 20101030 Revise the global resource parameters.
R1.3 20100730 Add a field “Impact on sevice” for each parameters; optimize
description of some parameters
R1.2 20100620 Revise the parameter category based on DLD parameter division
results
R1.1 20100530 Updated(In Chapter 1 Overview, the description of "Change

mode" in "The Format to Explain Parameters" is updated.)
R1.0 20100430 First edition
Serial Number: SJ-20100414142254-017
Publishing Date: 20101030
Mo Shenghua
Contents
About This Manual ......................................................................................... I
Chapter 1 Overview .................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Introduction to BSS Radio Parameters................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Method of Modifying Radio Parameters ............................................................... 1-2
1.3 Method of Modifying Parameters in Batch ............................................................ 1-6
1.4 The Format to Explain Parameters .....................................................................1-11
1.5 Precautions on Parameter Adjustment............................................................... 1-12
Chapter 2 BSC Function Parameters........................................................ 2-1

2.1 Radio Basic Property.......................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt) .................................................. 2-2
2.1.2 Load indication allowed (LoadInd) ............................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Send confusion message allowed (ConfusionMsg) ..................................... 2-3
2.1.4 Inter-Cell handover allowed (InHoEnable) .................................................. 2-3
2.1.5 Send assignment failure allowed (ExDRSendAssFail)................................. 2-4
2.1.6 Load indication valid time (LoadValidTime)................................................. 2-5
2.1.7 Load indication period (LoadIndPrd) .......................................................... 2-5
2.1.8 Automatic resource indication threshold (ResourceIndThs) ......................... 2-6
2.1.9 Resource adjust threshold (ResourceAdjustThs) ........................................ 2-7
2.1.10 BSC MAX reset number (BSCMaxResetNum).......................................... 2-8
2.1.11 MR report enable (MrRptEnable) ............................................................. 2-9
2.1.12 HBTS scan site number (HBTSScanSiteNum).......................................... 2-9
2.1.13 Range of BARANG............................................................................... 2-10
2.2 Other Parameters..............................................................................................2-11
2.2.1 Length of super vision (LcsSuperVision) ...................................................2-11
2.2.2 Length of radio (LcsRadio) ...................................................................... 2-12
2.2.3 LCS wait intra BSS handover timer (LcsWaitInTraHO) .............................. 2-13
2.2.4 Monitor physical context request (RmsT9108, 100ms) .............................. 2-13
2.2.5 Timer for MSG waiting (TWaitMsg, 100ms) .............................................. 2-14
2.2.6 Timer for RANCSEST Waiting (TWaitRancsEst, 100ms) ........................... 2-14
2.2.7 Timer for RANCSCLECOM Waiting (TWaitRancsCleCom, 100ms) ............ 2-15
2.2.8 Timer for CCM waiting (CcmWaitTimer) ................................................... 2-16
2.2.9 Get static param timer (GetStaticParamTimer, 100ms).............................. 2-16
2.2.10 Starting time for oriented retry (RmsT10, 100ms).................................... 2-17
I
2.2.11 TFO Enable (TFOControl_0) ................................................................. 2-18
2.2.12 Codec type optimization enable (TFOControl_1) .................................... 2-18
2.2.13 Codec mismatch resolution enable (TFOControl_2) ................................ 2-19
2.2.14 AMR Optimization Mode (TFOControl_3) ............................................... 2-20
2.2.15 External cell load notify (Info_0_0) ......................................................... 2-20
2.2.16 Neighbor cell load valid duration (Info_0_1,10s) ..................................... 2-21
2.2.17 LMU build request deal or not (Info_1_0) ............................................... 2-22
2.2.18 MBMS request deal or not (Info_1_1) .................................................... 2-22
2.2.19 Channel request reserved field deal or not (Info_1_2) ............................. 2-23
2.2.20 MS power hold in handover option (Info_0_9)......................................... 2-23
2.2.21 Level threshold of target cell (Info_0_10)................................................ 2-24
2.3 Channel Allocation Control Parameters.............................................................. 2-25
2.3.1 Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable) ..................................................... 2-25
2.3.2 Threshold for TRX switched from FR to HR (HRThs) ................................ 2-26
2.3.3 AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold (AmrHRThs) ............................. 2-26
2.3.4 HR channel fragment finishing support (HRDfragSupport)......................... 2-27
2.3.5 HR channel percentage threshold (HRTsPercentage) ............................... 2-28
2.3.6 User priority for EMLPP (PriThreshold) .................................................... 2-28
2.3.7 Preferred speech version (PreferSpeechVer H) ........................................ 2-29
2.3.8 Preferred speech version (PreferSpeedchVer F)....................................... 2-30
2.3.9 Reserved channel first (RsvChanFirst)..................................................... 2-30
2.3.10 EMLPP channel reserved time (EMLPPThs, %) ..................................... 2-31
2.3.11 TRX PS busy threshold (TrxPSBusyThs)................................................ 2-32
2.3.12 Resource pool for PS rate (PsAbisThs, %) ............................................. 2-32
2.3.13 Maximum PS uplink user per TS (MaxPsUserPerTs_0) ........................... 2-33
2.3.14 Maximum PS downlink user per TS (MaxPsUserPerTs_1)....................... 2-33
2.3.15 Extended uplink dynamic allocation support (ExUpDynSupport) .............. 2-34
2.4 Timer 1 ............................................................................................................ 2-35
2.4.1 Blocking/unblocking period (T1, 100ms)................................................... 2-35
2.4.2 Global resetting period (T4, 100ms)......................................................... 2-36
2.4.3 Protection period for global resetting (T13, 100ms)................................... 2-36
2.4.4 Circuit resetting period on BSS side (T19, 100ms).................................... 2-37
2.4.5 Circuit group blocking/unblocking period (T20, 100ms) ............................. 2-38
2.4.6 RLSD message receive protection timer (T9101, 100ms).......................... 2-39
2.4.7 Channel activation protection timer (RmsT9103, 100ms) .......................... 2-39
2.4.8 MSC clear command protection timer (T9104, 100ms).............................. 2-40
2.4.9 SCCP connection protection timer (T9105, 100ms) .................................. 2-41
II
2.4.10 Protective time waiting for access (RmsT1, 100ms) ................................ 2-41
2.4.11 Protective time for applying to channel (RmsT2, 100ms) ......................... 2-42
2.4.12 Protective time for link establishment response (RmsT3, 100ms)............. 2-43
2.4.13 Protective time for P0 confirms the message HO/ASS COM (RmsT4,
100ms)................................................................................................. 2-44
2.4.14 Encryption mode modification time (RmsT5, 100ms)............................... 2-44
2.4.15 SAPI3 link establishment time (RmsT6, 100ms) ..................................... 2-45
2.4.16 External handover protective time (RmsT8, 100ms) ................................ 2-46
2.4.17 Protective time for No.7 signal instantaneous disconnection (T3,
100ms)................................................................................................. 2-46
2.4.18 Protective time that PO responses external handover completion
message (RmsT7, 100ms)..................................................................... 2-47
2.4.19 HBTS scan begin time (HBTSScanBT) .................................................. 2-48
2.4.20 HBTS scan cycle (HBTSScanCyc, 3600s).............................................. 2-49
2.5 Timer 2 ............................................................................................................ 2-49
2.5.1 Protective time for RF channel release (RmsT9, 100ms)........................... 2-50
2.5.2 Queue period of assignment (RmsT11, 100ms) ........................................ 2-51
2.5.3 Acknowledgment interval for periodic status (RmsT12, 100ms) ................. 2-51
2.5.4 Mode modification process time (RmsT13, 100ms)................................... 2-52
2.5.5 Protective time of UM assignment completion (RmsT14, 100ms)............... 2-53
2.5.6 Waiting time for oriented retry (RmsT16, 100ms) ...................................... 2-54
2.5.7 Queue timer for handover (RmsTqho, 100ms).......................................... 2-54
2.5.8 First overload period of flow traffic control (mT11, 100ms) ......................... 2-55
2.5.9 Second overload period of flow traffic control (mT12, 100ms) .................... 2-56
2.5.10 Time of micro-micro handover delay (Tmicro, 100ms) ............................. 2-57
2.5.11 BSIC decoding period (Tbsic, 100ms) .................................................... 2-57
2.5.12 Handover protecting timer to WCDMA/FDD (RmsT3121, 100ms) ............ 2-58
2.5.13 Immediate assignment period (RmsT3101, 100ms) ................................ 2-59
2.5.14 Handover period of source cell (RmsT3103, 100ms)............................... 2-60
2.5.15 Assignment period (RmsT3107, 100ms) ................................................ 2-60
2.5.16 Channel release period (RmsT3109, 100ms).......................................... 2-61
2.5.17 Channel deactivation delay (RmsT3111, 100ms) .................................... 2-62
2.5.18 Continue timer for mode modify (TModeModifyConn, 100ms).................. 2-62
2.5.19 Handover protecting time to UTRAN (mT7, 100ms) ................................ 2-63
2.5.20 Time of destination instance waiting for available resources when forced
disconnection (RmsT15, 100ms) ............................................................ 2-64
2.5.21 Protecting time of FUC response to system message broadcast
(BcProtect, 100ms) ............................................................................... 2-65
III
2.5.22 HO performed ack timer (TwaitHoPFMAck, 100ms) ................................ 2-65
2.5.23 Round trip delay (RtdDefault, 20ms) ...................................................... 2-66
2.6 GPRS Maximum Retrying Times ....................................................................... 2-67
2.6.1 MAX times of BVC block retry (BVCBlkMax) ............................................ 2-67
2.6.2 MAX times of BVC unblock retry (BVCUnblkMax)..................................... 2-68
2.6.3 MAX times of BVC reset retry (BVCRestMax) .......................................... 2-69
2.6.4 MAX times of NS block retry (NSBlkMax)................................................. 2-70
2.6.5 MAX times of NS unblock retry (NSUnblkMax) ......................................... 2-71
2.6.6 MAX times of NS alive retry (NSAliveMax) ............................................... 2-71
2.6.7 MAX times of suspend retry (SuspendMax).............................................. 2-72
2.6.8 MAX times of resume retry (ResumeMax)................................................ 2-73
2.6.9 MAX times of radio access capabilities update retry (UpdateMax) ............. 2-74
2.6.10 Max times of PFC create retry (DownLoadBssPFCMax) ......................... 2-74
2.6.11 Max times of PFC modify retry (ModifyBssPFCMax) ............................... 2-75
2.7 GPRS Timer .................................................................................................... 2-76
2.7.1 BVC block/unblock retry time (BssgpT1, 100ms) ...................................... 2-76
2.7.2 BVC reset retry time (BssgpT2, 100ms) ................................................... 2-77
2.7.3 Suspend retry time (BssgpT3, 100ms) ..................................................... 2-78
2.7.4 Resume retry time (BssgpT4, 100ms)...................................................... 2-79
2.7.5 Access capability update retry time (BssgpT5, 100ms) ............................. 2-80
2.7.6 PFC creating retry time (BssgpT6, 100ms)............................................... 2-81
2.7.7 PFC modifying retry time (BssgpT8, 100ms) ............................................ 2-82
2.7.8 BVC flow control period (CellFcPer, 10ms)............................................... 2-82
2.7.9 MS flow control period (MsFcPer, 10ms) .................................................. 2-83
2.7.10 Timer that monitors block/unblock procedure (NS_T1, 100ms) ................ 2-84
2.7.11 Timer that monitors reset procedure (NS_T2, 100 ms) ............................ 2-85
2.7.12 NC-cycle of NS-VC test process (NS_T3, 100 ms).................................. 2-86
2.7.13 Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC (NS_T4, 100 ms) .................. 2-86
2.7.14 Max attempt period of reset (NS_T5, 100 ms) ........................................ 2-87
2.7.15 TFI and USF release timer (T3169, 10ms) ............................................. 2-87
2.7.16 TBF release timer (T3191, 10ms) .......................................................... 2-88
2.7.17 TBF release time of downlink transmission (T3193, 10ms) ...................... 2-89
2.7.18 TBF protect time when radio link failure (T3195, 10ms) ........................... 2-90
2.7.19 PS channel delay release timer (PSRelDelay, 100ms) ............................ 2-91
2.8 AMR Half Method Parameters........................................................................... 2-91
2.8.1 AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHalfAcs)................................................ 2-92
2.8.2 Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds) ....................................................... 2-93
IV
2.8.3 Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)......................................................... 2-94
2.8.4 Initial codec mode (IsAmrICM) ................................................................ 2-95
2.8.5 Start mode (AmrStartMode) .................................................................... 2-95
2.8.6 Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb) ........................................................... 2-96
2.9 AMR Full Method Parameters ........................................................................... 2-97
2.9.1 AMR Full Active Codec Set (ArmFullAcs)................................................. 2-97
2.9.2 Threshold of AMR (AmrThresholds)......................................................... 2-98
2.9.3 Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)......................................................... 2-99
2.9.4 Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM) ...............................................................2-100
2.9.5 Start mode (AmrStartMode) ...................................................................2-100
2.9.6 Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb) ..........................................................2-101
2.10 GPRS Other Parameters 1.............................................................................2-102
2.10.1 Cn ......................................................................................................2-102
2.10.2 Nn ......................................................................................................2-103
2.10.3 Xn ......................................................................................................2-104
2.10.4 Max allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data blocks
(N3101)...............................................................................................2-105
2.10.5 Times of packet uplink ACK/NACK retries (N3103) ................................2-106
2.10.6 Max allowed number of continuous losses of uplink RLC/MAC control
message (N3105) ................................................................................2-107
2.11 GPRS Other Parameters 2 .............................................................................2-108
2.11.1 NACC support (NACCSupport).............................................................2-108
2.11.2 LLC Transfer support (LLCTranSupport) ...............................................2-109
2.11.3 BSC's net operation mode (NMO)......................................................... 2-110
2.11.4 Page coordination support (PagCoordination)........................................ 2-110
2.11.5 Satellite transmission at GB interface indication (IsSatelliteGB) .............. 2-111
2.11.6 Extended RLC send window allowed (IsWindowExpend)........................ 2-112
2.11.7 TBF establish support (TBF_EST) ........................................................ 2-112
2.11.8 Signal extended uplink TBF support (Signal_EUTBF)............................. 2-113
2.11.9 Highest coding scheme of signal TBF (SigTBFMaxCode)....................... 2-113
2.11.10 Optimized POC service support (PocSupport) ..................................... 2-114
2.11.11 Highest coding scheme of POC service in GPRS (PocAttSelt_0)........... 2-115
2.11.12 Highest coding scheme of POC service in EGPRS (PocAttSelt_1) ........ 2-115
2.11.13 Maximal users of POC service on shared PS channel0
(PSCapaThs_UL)................................................................................. 2-116
(PSCapaThs_DL)................................................................................. 2-117
2.11.15 SAPI0 ~ SAPI15 (LLCTranSupport_0 ~ LLCTranSupport_15) ............... 2-117
V
2.11.16 LLC Pre-Transfer on NACC (Info_1_10) .............................................. 2-118
2.11.17 PDU buffer time (Info_1_16, 10ms) ..................................................... 2-119
2.12 BVC Flow Control Parameters........................................................................2-120
2.12.1 BVC flow control support (BVCFlowCtrl) ...............................................2-120
2.12.2 MS flow control support (MSFlowCtrl) ...................................................2-121
2.12.3 Flow control mode (FlowCtrlMode) .......................................................2-122
2.12.4 Parameter of flow control mode 1 (FlowCtrlMode1Para).........................2-123
2.12.5 Parameter of flow control mode 2 (FlowCtrlMode2Para).........................2-123
2.12.6 BVC flow control R MIN value (BVCFlowCtrlRMin, 100 bps)...................2-124
2.12.7 MS flow control R MIN value (MSFlowCtrlRMin, 100 bps) ......................2-125
2.12.8 PFC flow control procedures support (PFCFlowCtrl) ..............................2-125
2.12.9 Coefficient of BVC bucket size (Info_2_0) .............................................2-126
2.12.10 Coefficient of MS bucket (Info_2_16) ..................................................2-127
2.12.11 CBL in BVC/MS flow control (Info_1_9) ...............................................2-127
2.13 FUC Flow Control Map Parameters ................................................................2-128
2.13.1 Flow Control Reason ...........................................................................2-129
2.13.2 Emergency Call...................................................................................2-129
2.13.3 Call Rebuilt .........................................................................................2-130
2.13.4 Call Response.....................................................................................2-130
2.13.5 Calling ................................................................................................2-131
2.13.6 Location Update ..................................................................................2-131
2.13.7 GPRS Access .....................................................................................2-132
2.13.8 Restore...............................................................................................2-133
2.13.9 Flow control map slim adjust (bit)..........................................................2-133
2.14 EDGE Parameters.........................................................................................2-134
2.14.1 PFC support (PFCSupport) ..................................................................2-134
2.14.2 R99 Ind (R99Ind).................................................................................2-135
2.14.3 Enhanced radio status procedures support (EnRadioStu).......................2-136
2.14.4 RS......................................................................................................2-137
2.14.5 RR .....................................................................................................2-138
2.14.6 RA......................................................................................................2-138
2.14.7 RM .....................................................................................................2-139
2.14.8 RB......................................................................................................2-140
2.14.9 RG .....................................................................................................2-141
2.14.10 RE....................................................................................................2-141
2.14.11 ABIS resource dynamic manage (Info_1_8).........................................2-142
2.15 eMLPP Set ...................................................................................................2-143
VI
2.15.1 Strategy for preemption when assign (AssPreemptstrategy)...................2-143
2.15.2 Strategy for preemption when handover (HoPreemptstrategy) ................2-144
2.15.3 Maximum forced handover times when assign (AssForcedHoTry) ..........2-145
2.15.4 Maximum forced handover times when handover (HoForcedHoTry) .......2-145
2.15.5 Maximum forced release times when assign (AssForcedRelTry).............2-146
2.15.6 Maximum forced release times when handover (HoForcedRelTry)..........2-146
2.15.7 Preemption duration when assign (AssPreempTimer, 100ms) ................2-147
2.15.8 Preemption duration when handover (HoPreempTimer, 100ms) .............2-148
2.15.9 Timer for start forced release when assign (AssForceRelTimer)..............2-148
2.15.10 Timer for start forced release when handover (HoForceRelTimer).........2-149
2.15.11 Interval for search forced handover target when assign
(AssForceHoInterval, 100ms) ...............................................................2-149
2.15.12 Interval for search forced handover target when handover
(HoForceHoInterval, 100ms).................................................................2-150
2.15.13 Interval for search forced release target when assign
(AssForceRelInterval, 100ms)...............................................................2-151
2.15.14 Interval for search forced release target when handover
(HoForceRelInterval, 100ms) ................................................................2-151
2.15.15 Queue timer for assign (RmsT11, 100ms) ...........................................2-152
2.15.16 Queue timer for handover (RmsTqho, 100ms) .....................................2-152
2.15.17 Queue indicate when assign (QueueIndAss) .......................................2-153
2.15.18 Queue allowed when handover (QueueIndHo) ....................................2-154
2.15.19 Forced release indicate when assign (PreemptionIndAss) ....................2-154
2.15.20 Forced release allowed when handover (PreemptionIndHo) .................2-155
2.15.21 Forced handover indication for assign (ForcedHolndAss) .....................2-155
2.15.22 Forced handover indication for handover (ForcedHolndHo) ..................2-156
2.15.23 Wait resource timer after forced handover (ForceHoWait, 100ms).........2-157
2.15.24 Wait resource timer after forced release (ForceRelWait, 100ms) ...........2-157
2.15.25 Enough low priority for preemption (LowestPriority)..............................2-158
2.15.26 Enough call duration for preemption....................................................2-158
2.15.27 Forced handover target penalty time (ForceHoPenalty)........................2-159
2.15.28 Priority of emergency service (EmergServicelPrio)...............................2-160
2.16 Ater Timer Parameters...................................................................................2-160
2.16.1 Ater wait SCCP connection timer (TAterWaitConn, 100ms) ....................2-161
2.16.2 Ater wait resource timer (TWaitAterRes, 100ms) ...................................2-162
2.16.3 Ater wait resource release timer (TAterWaitRel, 100ms).........................2-162
2.16.4 Ater handover monitor timer (TAterMoniterHO, 100ms) ..........................2-163
2.16.5 Ater wait resource acknowledge timer (TWaitAterResAck, 100ms)..........2-164
VII
2.16.6 Ater block circuit timer (TAterCicBlk, 100ms) .........................................2-165
2.16.7 Ater block circuit group timer (TAterBlkCicGrp, 100ms) ..........................2-165
2.16.8 Ater reset circuit timer (TAterRstCic, 100ms) .........................................2-166
2.16.9 Ater reset timer (TAterRst, 100ms)........................................................2-167
2.16.10 Ater reset guard timer (TITCRst, 100ms).............................................2-168
2.16.11 Ater block a interface circuit timer (TBIkACic, 100ms) ..........................2-168
2.16.12 Ater block a interface circuit group timer (TBIkACicGrp, 100ms) ...........2-169
Chapter 3 External Cell Parameters.......................................................... 3-1

3.1 GERAN External Cell Parameters ....................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 External cell ID......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Cell type (CellType) .................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 MCC (MCC)............................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.4 MNC (MNC)............................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.5 Frequency band (FreqBand) ..................................................................... 3-4
3.1.6 BCCH frequency (BcchArfcn).................................................................... 3-4
3.1.7 LAC (LAC) ............................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.8 CI............................................................................................................ 3-6
3.1.9 NCC ........................................................................................................ 3-6
3.1.10 BCC ...................................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.11 GPRS service support (PsSupport).......................................................... 3-7
3.1.12 Cell reselection offset (ReselOff_0, 2db) .................................................. 3-9
3.1.13 Cell reselection offset (ReselOff_1, 2db) .................................................. 3-9
3.1.14 Temporary offset of cell reselection (TempOffset_0, db) .......................... 3-10
3.1.15 Cell reselection temporary offset (TempOffset_1, db) ...............................3-11
3.1.16 Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime_0, 10s) .................................3-11
3.1.17 Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime_1, 10s) ................................ 3-12
3.1.18 HCS exist (HCS_EXIST_0) ................................................................... 3-13
3.1.19 HCS exist (HCS_EXIST_1) ................................................................... 3-13
3.1.20 Threshold of HCS signal level (HCS_THR_0)......................................... 3-14
3.1.21 Threshold of HCS signal level (HCS_THR_1)......................................... 3-15
3.1.22 HCS priority (PrioClass_0) .................................................................... 3-15
3.1.23 HCS priority (PrioClass_1) .................................................................... 3-16
3.1.24 Allow SOLSA MS to access (EXC_ACC) ............................................... 3-17
3.1.25 Cell reselection status (CellBarAc2) ....................................................... 3-17
3.1.26 LSA ID (LSA_Id)................................................................................... 3-18
3.1.27 RAC (RAC) .......................................................................................... 3-18
3.1.28 Access minimal signal level (RxLevAsMin_0) ......................................... 3-19
VIII
3.1.29 Access minimal signal level (RxLevAsMin_1) ......................................... 3-20
3.1.30 Maximum initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCCH_0) ........................... 3-21
3.1.31 Maximum initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCCH_1) ........................... 3-22
3.2 UTRAN External Cell Parameters...................................................................... 3-23
3.2.1 External UTRAN ID (Ec3GID) ................................................................. 3-24
3.2.2 UTRAN cell type (CellType3G) ................................................................ 3-25
3.2.3 MCC (MCC)........................................................................................... 3-25
3.2.4 MNC (MNC)........................................................................................... 3-26
3.2.5 UTRAN cell frequency (Arfcn3G)............................................................. 3-26
3.2.6 LAC (LAC) ............................................................................................. 3-27
3.2.7 RNC ID (RNC_ID) .................................................................................. 3-28
3.2.8 C ID (C_ID)............................................................................................ 3-29
3.2.9 Scrambling code or cell parameter (ScCodeCellPara)............................... 3-29
3.2.10 TX diversity indication (DiverSity) .......................................................... 3-30
3.2.11 RAC (RAC) .......................................................................................... 3-30
3.2.12 UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G) .................................... 3-31
3.2.13 Apply Sync Case (SyncCaseTSTD) ....................................................... 3-32
Chapter 4 Cell Parameters......................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Basic Parameters 1 ............................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 BTS ID (BtsId).......................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Cell type (CellType) .................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.3 MCC (MCC)............................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.4 MNC (MNC)............................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.5 LAC (LAC) ............................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.6 CI (CI) ..................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.7 NCC (NCC).............................................................................................. 4-6
4.1.8 BCC (BCC) .............................................................................................. 4-7
4.1.9 Frequency band (FreqBand) ..................................................................... 4-7
4.1.10 Subcell used (SubCellUsed).................................................................... 4-8
4.1.11 Frequency band of subCell (SubFreqBand) .............................................. 4-9
4.1.12 ARFCN list (CaArfcnList) ........................................................................ 4-9
4.1.13 GPRS service support (PsSupport)........................................................ 4-10
4.1.14 Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable).....................................................4-11
4.1.15 Use cell dynamic HR parameter (UseCellDynHRPara).............................4-11
4.1.16 CBC support (SmsCbUsed) .................................................................. 4-12
4.1.17 Threshold for FR to HR (HRThs, %)....................................................... 4-13
4.1.18 PS busy threshold (Info_1_16) .............................................................. 4-13
IX
4.1.19 Use cell AMR parameter (UseCellAMRParam) ....................................... 4-14
4.1.20 Common control channel configuration (CcchConf) ................................ 4-14
4.1.21 Template file......................................................................................... 4-16
4.2 Basic Parameters 2 .......................................................................................... 4-16
4.2.1 TA maximum (TaMax)............................................................................. 4-17
4.2.2 TA minimum (TaMin)............................................................................... 4-18
4.2.3 TA allowed (TaAllowed)........................................................................... 4-18
4.2.4 CCCH load indication period (CcchLoadIndPrd, s).................................... 4-19
4.2.5 Periodical location updating timer (T3212, 360s) ...................................... 4-19
4.2.6 Protection period for access attempt (T3122, s)........................................ 4-20
4.2.7 Multi-band report indication (MulbandReport) ........................................... 4-21
4.2.8 Minimal level threshold of MS uplink RACH access (RachAccessMin,
-db) ...................................................................................................... 4-23
4.2.9 CCCH load indication (RACH) (CcchLoadINDThs_0)................................ 4-23
4.2.10 CCCH load indication (PAGCH) (CcchLoadINDThs_1) ........................... 4-24
4.2.11 8PSK modulating power attenuation level (Tn7Lowerlevel, 0.2db)............ 4-24
4.2.12 Repeated ACCH support (RepeatACCH) ............................................... 4-25
4.2.13 Start PA power off (StartPAPowerOff) .................................................... 4-25
4.2.14 Switch flag of cell TRX power off (StartTRXPowerOff)............................. 4-26
4.2.15 Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR HR Bug
(BsRadioLkTmOutAMRFR) ................................................................... 4-27
(BsRadioLkTmOutAMRHR) ................................................................... 4-27
4.2.17 AMR codec adjust mode (AmrAdjMode)................................................. 4-28
4.2.18 AMR codec adjust interval (AmrAdjInterval, 480ms)................................ 4-28
4.2.19 HR channel fragment finishing support (HRDfragSupport)....................... 4-29
4.2.20 Idle FR threshold For HR defrag (Info_0_8, %) ....................................... 4-30
4.2.21 Busy threshold for HR defrag (Info_1_24, %) ......................................... 4-30
4.2.22 Percentage of HR Ts (HRTsPercentage) ................................................ 4-31
4.2.23 AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold (AmrHRThs) ........................... 4-32
4.2.24 FR-HR handover based on cell load (FRThrHoSupport).......................... 4-32
4.2.25 Start PA output voltage tuning (Info_0_0) ............................................... 4-33
4.2.26 NCC permitted (NccPermitted) .............................................................. 4-33
4.3 Basic Parameters 3 .......................................................................................... 4-34
4.3.1 Average bursts count surveyed by RACH (AvgSlots) ................................ 4-34
4.3.2 RACH receiving signal level threshold for busy burst (RachBusyThs) ........ 4-35
4.3.3 Overload sending period (OverloadPrd, s) ............................................... 4-36
4.3.4 BA show (BcchBaInd)............................................................................. 4-36
X
4.3.5 MIN received signal level to access (RxLevAccessMin) ............................ 4-37
4.3.6 MAX number of re-transmitting events times (MRetrans)........................... 4-39
4.3.7 Number of slots to spread transmission (TxInteger) .................................. 4-40
4.3.8 Control channel MAX power level (MsTxPwrMaxCch)............................... 4-41
4.3.9 Number of multi-frames of the PCH (BsPaMframs) ................................... 4-42
4.3.10 Interval of SDCCH re-sending PHY info message (T3105d, 10ms) .......... 4-43
4.3.11 Interval of TCH re-sending PHY info message (T3105f, 10ms) ................ 4-44
4.3.12 MAX resending times for physical information (NY1)............................... 4-44
4.3.13 Number of blocks reserved for AGCH (BsAgBlkRes) .............................. 4-45
4.3.14 Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch channel (T200_0, 5ms) ...................... 4-46
4.3.15 Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/full rate channel (T200_1, 5ms) ........... 4-46
4.3.16 Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/half rate channel (T200_2, 5ms).......... 4-47
4.3.17 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi0 channel (T200_3,
10ms)................................................................................................... 4-48
4.3.18 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with sdcch channel (T200_4,
10ms)................................................................................................... 4-48
4.3.19 Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch sapi3 channel (T200_5, 5ms) ............. 4-49
4.3.20 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi3 channel (T200_6,
10ms)................................................................................................... 4-49
4.4 Optional Parameters......................................................................................... 4-50
4.4.1 Early category classmark sending control (ECSC) .................................... 4-50
4.4.2 IMSI attach/detach allowed (ImsIadAllowed) ............................................ 4-51
4.4.3 Cell bar access (CellBarAccess).............................................................. 4-52
4.4.4 Call re-establishment allowed (CallReestablish) ....................................... 4-53
4.4.5 Downlink discontinuous transmission allowed (DtxDwlink) ........................ 4-53
4.4.6 Uplink discontinuous transmission (DtxUplinkBcch) .................................. 4-54
4.4.7 Emergency call allowed (EmergencyCall) ................................................ 4-55
4.4.8 Cell bar qualify (CellBarQualify)............................................................... 4-56
4.4.9 Access Control (AccessControl) .............................................................. 4-57
4.4.10 HBTS proofread support (HBTSScanSupport)........................................ 4-58
4.4.11 RSSI threshold (RSSlThrd) ................................................................... 4-58
4.4.12 Proofread freqband type (GSM1900Support) ......................................... 4-59
4.4.13 Range of HBTS BARANG ..................................................................... 4-60
4.5 Cell Selection Parameters................................................................................. 4-60
4.5.1 Additional reselection parameter indication (AdditionReselPI) ................... 4-61
4.5.2 Cell reselection parameter indication (CellReselPI)................................... 4-62
4.5.3 Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset, 2db) ................................................. 4-63
4.5.4 Temporary offset (TemporaryOffset, 10dB) ............................................... 4-64
XI
4.5.5 Penalty time (PenaltyTime, 20s) .............................................................. 4-65
4.5.6 Cell reselecting hysteresis level (ReselHysteresis, 2dB)............................ 4-66
4.5.7 New setup cause indication (NECI) ......................................................... 4-68
4.5.8 Power offset indication (PowerOffsetInd).................................................. 4-68
4.5.9 Power offset (PowerOffset, 2db).............................................................. 4-69
4.6 Service Process Additional Parameters ............................................................. 4-70
4.6.1 Directed retry indication (DrInd_0) ........................................................... 4-70
4.6.2 Inter directed retry indication (DrInd_1) .................................................... 4-71
4.6.3 Queue allowed when assign (QueueInd_0) .............................................. 4-72
4.6.4 Queue allowed when handover (QueueInd_1).......................................... 4-72
4.6.5 Preemption allowed when assign (PreemptionInd_0) ................................ 4-73
4.6.6 Preemption allowed when handover (PreemptionInd_1)............................ 4-73
4.6.7 When assigned forced handover (ForcedHoInd_0) ................................... 4-74
4.6.8 When handover forced handover (ForcedHoInd_1) .................................. 4-75
4.6.9 Number of candidate cells for handover (CandidateNum).......................... 4-75
4.6.10 Fast average indication (FastAvg) ......................................................... 4-76
4.6.11 BCCH switch allowed (CanBcchExch).................................................... 4-77
4.6.12 SDCCH dynamic configuration allowed (CanSdcchDyn) ......................... 4-77
4.6.13 Minimal resource threshold (ResourceThs, %) ....................................... 4-78
4.6.14 Base-band hopping TRX exchange support (Info_0_3) ........................... 4-78
4.6.15 Allowed FACCH call setup after emergency call (FacchCallInd_0) ........... 4-79
4.6.16 Allowed FACCH call setup when page respond (FacchCallInd_1) ............ 4-79
4.6.17 Allowed call setup on FACCH (FacchCallInd_2) ..................................... 4-80
4.6.18 Allowed call reestablished on FACCH (FacchCallInd_3).......................... 4-81
4.7 System Parameters .......................................................................................... 4-81
4.7.1 Interference averaging period (InterfAvgPrd) ............................................ 4-82
4.7.2 Interference Band Boundary (InterfBoundary_0 ~ InterfBoundary_5) ......... 4-83
4.7.3 Radio link timeout on MS side (MsRadioLKTmOut) .................................. 4-84
4.7.4 Radio link failure criterion (ConFailCriterion) ............................................ 4-85
4.7.5 Radio link timeout on BSS side (BsRadioLKTmOut) ................................. 4-85
4.7.6 Receiving level threshold (RxLevThs) ...................................................... 4-86
4.7.7 Receiving quality threshold (RxQualThs) ................................................. 4-87
4.7.8 Radio link failure checking period (RxLevQualprd).................................... 4-88
4.8 Other Parameters............................................................................................. 4-89
4.8.1 Preprocessing indication (Preprocess)..................................................... 4-89
4.8.2 Reserved rate of EMLPP (EmlppThs) ...................................................... 4-90
4.8.3 Use cell EMLPP Threshold (UseCellEmlppThs) ....................................... 4-91
XII
4.8.4 Frequency offset Correct support (Info_0_1) ............................................ 4-91
4.8.5 Max power on handover Command support (Info_0_2) ............................. 4-92
4.8.6 MR Report Time Bmp (MrRptTimeBmp)................................................... 4-92
4.8.7 Cell Support Encryption Mode (CipherMode)............................................ 4-93
4.8.8 Channel Select Strategy ......................................................................... 4-94
4.9 GPRS Basic Parameters .................................................................................. 4-94
4.9.1 SGSN ID (SGSNID) ............................................................................... 4-95
4.9.2 NSEI (NSEI) .......................................................................................... 4-96
4.9.3 BVCI (BVCI) .......................................................................................... 4-97
4.9.4 RAC (RAC) ............................................................................................ 4-97
4.9.5 UPU unit (UpuUnit)................................................................................. 4-98
4.9.6 DSP No. (DSP) ...................................................................................... 4-99
4.10 GPRS Other Parameters 1.............................................................................. 4-99
4.10.1 Additional reselect parameter indictor (AddResPI2) ...............................4-100
4.10.2 SI13 sending position (Si13Locate).......................................................4-101
4.10.3 Route area color code (RaColor) ..........................................................4-102
4.10.4 Min number of idle CS channel (CsChansThs) ......................................4-102
4.10.5 Packet access priority threshold (PriAcThr) ...........................................4-103
4.10.6 Packet System Information Send Speed (SendSpeed)...........................4-104
4.10.7 Overload report period on PRACH (OvLoadPer, s) ................................4-104
4.10.8 Link error counter (RLTimeout) .............................................................4-105
4.10.9 PRACH receive signal level threshold (PrachBusyT)..............................4-106
4.10.10 Average measuring bursts number on PRACH (MeaAvgSlot) ...............4-106
4.10.11 Buffer threshold of paging message (PccchIndTh_0, %).......................4-107
4.10.12 Queue length threshold in 64 multiframe paging period (PccchIndTh_1,
%).......................................................................................................4-108
4.10.13 PRACH overload threshold ratio (PccchIndTh_2, %)............................4-109
4.11 GPRS Other Parameters 2 .............................................................................4-109
4.11.1 DTM support (DTMSupport) ................................................................. 4-110
4.11.2 Max number of GTTP Lapdm frame (GttpLapdmNum) ........................... 4-111
4.11.3 CCN mode support (CCNActive)........................................................... 4-111
4.11.4 Cell support system message status flow (SIStatusInd).......................... 4-112
4.11.5 Allow SOLSA MS to access (Exc_Acc) ................................................. 4-112
4.11.6 CCCH SPLITPGCYCLE support (SpgcSuport) ...................................... 4-113
4.11.7 Extended paging support (EpageMode) ................................................ 4-114
4.11.8 PSI status support (PsiStatInd) ............................................................. 4-114
4.11.9 Cell support extendable uplink TBF (Ext_UTBF) .................................... 4-115
4.11.10 Uplink delay time (UIDelayTime, ms)................................................... 4-116
XIII
4.11.11 Downlink delay time (DIDelaytime, ms)................................................ 4-116
4.11.12 Extend uplink TBF time (ExtUITBFTime, ms) ....................................... 4-117
4.11.13 Interval number of GPRS TBF downlink's RRBP
(GPRSDIRrbpInterVal) ......................................................................... 4-118
4.11.14 Interval number of EGPRS TBF downlink’s RRBP
(EGPRSDIRrbpInterVal) ....................................................................... 4-118
4.11.15 Interval number of GPRS TBF uplink’s ACK (GPRSUIAckInterVal)........ 4-119
4.11.16 Interval number of EGPRS TBF uplink’s ACK
(EGPRSUIAckInterVal)......................................................................... 4-119
4.11.17 Single Block Assign Offset (SBAssOffset)............................................4-120
4.11.18 Polling retry times (PollingRetryTime)..................................................4-120
4.11.19 Uplink measure report period (Ulmeasureperiod, ms) ...........................4-121
4.11.20 Calculating period of load on PPCH (LoadPer, s) .................................4-122
4.11.21 PSI1 send period (Psi1RepPer) ..........................................................4-122
4.11.22 Selective granularity (USFGranularity).................................................4-123
4.11.23 Extended uplink dynamic allocation support (ExUpDynSupport)............4-124
4.11.24 ABIS time slots reserved for packet service (Info_1_0) .........................4-124
4.11.25 The maximum of ABIS for GPRS user (Info_1_8).................................4-125
4.11.26 GPRS initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1 (Info1_1_4) ...........4-125
4.12 GPRS Other Parameters 3.............................................................................4-126
4.12.1 C/I (Sc) ...............................................................................................4-127
4.12.2 ARP (Sa) ............................................................................................4-128
4.12.3 THP (St) .............................................................................................4-129
4.12.4 PS queuing support (PsQueueInd) .......................................................4-129
4.12.5 Max PS queue count (PsMaxQueueInstNum)........................................4-130
4.12.6 PS preemption support (PsPreemptionInd) ...........................................4-131
4.12.7 3G NACC support (Support3GCCN) .....................................................4-131
4.12.8 PS prompt CS support (PSPrmpCSSupport) .........................................4-132
4.12.9 Max resource for POC service (POCSrcThs,%).....................................4-133
4.12.10 Transform from uplink delay to extend (Info1_1_16).............................4-133
4.12.11 Max Num of resend packet assignment (Info1_1_8) .............................4-134
4.12.12 Resource adjust for CS preempt (Info1_1_17) .....................................4-135
4.12.13 Subcell selection of PS channel allocation (PSALLOCSC_0) ................4-136
4.12.14 Level for PS channel allocate in subcell 1 (PSALLOCSC_1).................4-136
4.12.15 Level for PS channel allocate in subcell 2 (PSALLOCSC_2).................4-137
4.13 GPRS Cell Options Parameters......................................................................4-138
4.13.1 T3168.................................................................................................4-139
4.13.2 T3192.................................................................................................4-140
XIV
4.13.3 T3142(s) .............................................................................................4-141
4.13.4 T3172(s) .............................................................................................4-141
4.13.5 DRX mode holding time (DrxTimeMax, s)..............................................4-142
4.13.6 MAX blocks transmission in each TS (BsCvMax)...................................4-143
4.13.7 Packet control acknowledgment type (CtraCKType)...............................4-143
4.13.8 Access burst type (AccessType) ...........................................................4-144
4.13.9 N3102 decrease step (PanDec)............................................................4-145
4.13.10 N3102 increase step (PanInc) ............................................................4-146
4.13.11 N3102 MAX (PanMax) .......................................................................4-146
4.13.12 GPRS Phone Init Coding....................................................................4-147
4.13.13 GPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_0) .................4-148
4.14 GPRS NC Survey Parameters........................................................................4-148
4.14.1 Packet Idle mode (NcRepPerI, s)..........................................................4-149
4.14.2 Packet transmission mode (NcRerPerT, s) ............................................4-150
4.14.3 Extended measurement report order (MeaOrder) ..................................4-150
4.14.4 Network control order (CtrlOrder)..........................................................4-151
4.14.5 NC hold time in non-drx mode (NcNoDrxPer, s).....................................4-152
4.14.6 Extended measurement report order (ExMeaOrder) ..............................4-152
4.14.7 Type of extended measurement report (ExtRepType) ............................4-153
4.14.8 Report period of extended measurement (ExtRepPer, s)........................4-154
4.14.9 The size of test report's slip window (Wnd)............................................4-155
4.14.10 Allowed report number of the same cell in slip window
(AllowedRepNum)................................................................................4-155
4.15 GPRS Power Control Parameters...................................................................4-156
4.15.1 Filter period in the packet idle mode (T_AVG_W, s) ...............................4-156
4.15.2 Filter period in packet transmission mode (T_AVG_T, s).........................4-157
4.15.3 PSI4 sending mark (Psi4Send).............................................................4-158
4.15.4 Power control measurement channel (PcMeasChan).............................4-158
4.15.5 Power control parameter (Alpha) ..........................................................4-159
4.15.6 Filter constant of power control (N_AVG_I)............................................4-160
4.16 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters................................................................4-160
4.16.1 Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset_0, 2db) ...........................................4-161
4.16.2 Cell reselection offset2 (ReselOffset_1, 2db) .........................................4-162
4.16.3 Temporary offset of cell reselection (TempOffset_0, db) .........................4-163
4.16.4 Temporary offset of cell reselection2 (TempOffset_1, db)........................4-164
4.16.5 Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime_0, 10s) ...............................4-164
4.16.6 Penalty time of cell reselection2 (PenalTime_1, 10s)..............................4-165
4.16.7 Interval of reselecting the same cell (T_Resel_0, s) ...............................4-166
XV
4.16.8 Interval of reselecting the same cell2 (T_Resel_1, s) .............................4-167
4.16.9 Threshold of HCS signal level (HCS_Thr_0)..........................................4-167
4.16.10 Threshold of HCS signal level2 (HCS_Thr_1) ......................................4-168
4.16.11 HCS priority (PrioClass_0)..................................................................4-169
4.16.12 HCS priority2 (PrioClass_1) ...............................................................4-169
4.16.13 C31 hysteresis (C31_Hyst_0) .............................................................4-170
4.16.14 C31 hysteresis2 (C31_Hyst_1) ...........................................................4-171
4.16.15 GPRS cell reselection hysteresis (ReselHys_0, db) .............................4-171
4.16.16 GPRS cell reselection hysteresis2 (ReselHys_1, db)............................4-173
4.16.17 Routing reselection hysteresis (RaReselHys_0, db) .............................4-174
4.16.18 Routing reselection hysteresis2 (RaReselHys_1, db) ...........................4-174
4.16.19 Random access attempt permitted (RadAcRetry_0).............................4-175
4.16.20 Random access attempt permitted2 (RadAcRetry_1) ...........................4-176
4.16.21 Usage of cell reselection offset (C32_Qual_0) .....................................4-177
4.16.22 Usage of cell reselection offset2 (C32_Qual_1) ...................................4-177
4.16.23 GPRS access minimum signal level1 (RxLevAsMin_0) ........................4-178
4.16.24 GPRS access minimum signal level2 (RxLevAsMin_1) ........................4-179
4.16.25 Priority threshold (Prio_Thr, db) ..........................................................4-180
4.16.26 HCS exist (HCS_Exist_0)...................................................................4-180
4.16.27 HCS exist2 (HCS_Exist_1).................................................................4-181
4.16.28 GPRS MAX initial access signal level1 (MsTxMaxCch_0).....................4-182
4.16.29 GPRS MAX initial access signal level2 (MsTxMaxCch_1).....................4-183
4.16.30 LSA ID (LSA_Id)................................................................................4-184
4.16.31 LSA offset (LSA_Offset) .....................................................................4-184
4.17 GPRS Channel Parameters ...........................................................................4-185
4.17.1 PAGCH reserved blocks (PagBlkRes)...................................................4-185
4.17.2 PBCCH reserved blocks (PbcchBlks)....................................................4-186
4.17.3 PRACH reserved blocks (PrachBlks) ....................................................4-187
4.17.4 Interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt)......................................4-188
4.17.5 Interval period of packet access attempt (S) ..........................................4-188
4.17.6 MAX Times of Attempt (MaxRetrans) ....................................................4-189
4.17.7 Access Control Level (AccCtrlClass).....................................................4-190
4.17.8 Access Persist Level (PersistLev).........................................................4-191
4.17.9 Subscriber occupying other preference channel support
(HybridOccuSupp) ...............................................................................4-192
4.17.10 PS subscriber moving out of other preference channel support
(AllowPsMove).....................................................................................4-192
4.17.11 CS subscriber moving support (AllowCsMove).....................................4-193
XVI
4.17.12 Congeneric service threshold for PS-moving (SfPreferBusyThs) ...........4-193
4.17.13 Un-congeneric service threshold for PS-moving (OpPreferBusyThs) ......4-194
4.17.14 PS channel expand (Info1_1_18)........................................................4-195
4.17.15 Idle TCH threshold for PS channel expand (Info1_1_24, %) .................4-195
4.18 EDGE Parameters.........................................................................................4-196
4.18.1 EGPRS packet channel request access program support
(EgprsPacketChreq).............................................................................4-197
4.18.2 Uplink LA+IR quality control support (IrSupportUp) ................................4-198
4.18.3 Take Preemptive transmit bit function (PreemptiveTrans) .......................4-198
4.18.4 Average filter period for uplink BEP (BEPperiodUp) ...............................4-199
4.18.5 Average filter period for downlink BEP (BEPperiodDown).......................4-200
4.18.6 EGPRS phone quality measure mode (LinkQuameaMode) ....................4-200
4.18.7 EDGE initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1 (Info1_1_0).............4-201
4.18.8 EGPRS Phone Init Coding (EGPRSInitAttSelt) ......................................4-202
4.18.9 EGPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_1).................4-202
Chapter 5 Cell Object Parameters............................................................. 5-1

5.1 TRX Parameters ................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 TRX Information Parameters..................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Channel Information Parameters ............................................................. 5-10
5.1.3 IP Parameters........................................................................................ 5-18
5.1.4 Panel Parameters .................................................................................. 5-21
5.2 Power Control Parameters ................................................................................ 5-25
5.2.1 Power Control Parameters ...................................................................... 5-25
5.2.2 Power Survey Parameters ...................................................................... 5-27
5.2.3 Power Adjustment Threshold Parameters ................................................ 5-35
5.2.4 Other Parameters................................................................................... 5-41
5.2.5 GPRS Power Control Parameters ........................................................... 5-48
5.3 Handover Control Parameters ........................................................................... 5-52
5.3.1 Handover Pretreatment Parameters ........................................................ 5-52
5.3.2 Handover Threshold Parameters............................................................. 5-62
5.3.3 Handover Condition Parameters.............................................................. 5-73
5.3.4 Handover Control Parameters ................................................................. 5-85
5.3.5 Other Parameters................................................................................... 5-96
5.3.6 Handover Algorithm Parameters.............................................................5-104
5.3.7 Subcell Parameters ............................................................................... 5-116
5.4 UTRAN Handover Control Parameters .............................................................5-121
5.4.1 Basic Properties 1 .................................................................................5-121
XVII
5.4.2 Basic Properties 2 .................................................................................5-127
5.5 UTRAN Cell Control Parameters ......................................................................5-135
5.5.1 Basic Properties 1 Parameters ...............................................................5-135
5.5.2 Basic Properties 2 Parameters ...............................................................5-145
5.5.3 GPRS Parameters 1..............................................................................5-158
5.5.4 GPRS Parameters 2..............................................................................5-170
5.6 Adjacent Cell Parameters ................................................................................5-180
5.6.1 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters....................................................5-181
5.6.2 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters ..............................5-182
5.6.3 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters .......................................................5-199
5.6.4 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters ....................................................5-212
5.6.5 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters..................5-215
5.6.6 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters...........................................5-221
5.6.7 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters........................................5-226
5.7 Frequency Hopping System Parameters ...........................................................5-229
5.7.1 Frequency hopping No. (FhsId)..............................................................5-230
5.7.2 Hopping sequence No. (HSN)................................................................5-230
5.7.3 Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode) ..............................................5-231
5.7.4 Hopping group ID (BhGroupId)...............................................................5-232
5.7.5 MA Frequency List Number (MaFreqNum) ..............................................5-233
Chapter 6 System Control Parameters..................................................... 6-1

6.1 Operation Control Parameters............................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 Assign query enable (AssQueEnable)........................................................ 6-2
6.1.2 Internal redirection enable (InDrEnable)..................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Outer redirection enable (OutDrEnable) ..................................................... 6-3
6.1.4 Assign preemption enable (AssPreEmpt) ................................................... 6-3
6.1.5 BSC intracell handover enable (HoIntraEnable).......................................... 6-4
6.1.6 BSC intercell handover enable (HoInterEnable).......................................... 6-4
6.1.7 BSC outer handover enable (HoOutEnable)............................................... 6-5
6.1.8 SDCCH handover enable (ShoEnable) ...................................................... 6-5
6.1.9 TCH/F handover enable (TfHoEnable)....................................................... 6-6
6.1.10 TCH/H handover enable (ThHoEnable).................................................... 6-6
6.1.11 Handover queue enable (HoQueEnable) .................................................. 6-7
6.1.12 Handover preemption enable (HoPreEmpt) .............................................. 6-7
6.1.13 Handover check arithmetic choose (HoA)................................................. 6-8
6.1.14 Handover request response (HoAck) ....................................................... 6-9
6.1.15 Force FACCH (FacchOnly) ..................................................................... 6-9
XVIII
6.1.16 Continuum handover trigger (HoTrigger) ................................................ 6-10
6.1.17 Handover reason tip (HoCauseInd)........................................................ 6-10
6.1.18 Local cell position number (LAC) ............................................................6-11
6.1.19 Local cell identification (CI) ....................................................................6-11
6.1.20 Outer cell target number (OutCellNum) .................................................. 6-12
6.1.21 Outer cell position number 1 (OutLAC1)................................................. 6-13
6.1.24 Outer cell number 1 (OutCI1) ................................................................ 6-14
6.1.27 Outer RNC 1 (OutRNC1) ...................................................................... 6-16
6.1.28 Outer RNC 2 (OutRNC2) ...................................................................... 6-16
6.1.29 Outer RNC 3 (OutRNC3) ...................................................................... 6-17
6.1.30 Old BSS to new BSS information (OldToneWctrl).................................... 6-17
6.1.31 Access Control (AccessCtrl).................................................................. 6-18
6.1.32 Resume set option (ResumeSetOpt)...................................................... 6-18
6.1.33 Handout queue sign (HandOutQueInd) .................................................. 6-19
6.1.34 Send cell prefer indication (SendCellPreferInd)....................................... 6-20
6.1.35 IPA AMR start mode (IpaAMRStartMode)............................................... 6-20
6.1.36 TDD cell handover enable (TdHoEnable) ............................................... 6-21
6.1.37 Sending HO detect message to MSC during intra-BSC HO with IPA
(InBscHoSendHoDet)............................................................................ 6-21
6.1.38 ICM optimize when intra BSC handover (AmrHoOpt_0) .......................... 6-22
6.1.39 ICM optimize when inter BSC handover (AmrHoOpt_1) .......................... 6-23
6.2 FUC Parameters .............................................................................................. 6-23
6.2.1 Use system message method when MSC overload or link block
(MSCSysInfoFlc)................................................................................... 6-24
6.2.2 Start system message method (CPUSysInfoFlc) ...................................... 6-25
6.2.3 Start system message method, start limit(%) (CPUSysInfoCTLCPU) ......... 6-25
6.2.4 Start FUC flow control (CPUFucFlc) ........................................................ 6-26
6.2.5 Start limit of FUC flow control (CPUFucCtlCPU, %) .................................. 6-26
6.2.6 The maximum control level for MSC overload or link block
(MSCFlcMaxLevel) ............................................................................... 6-27
6.3 Handover Parameters of BCCH ........................................................................ 6-28
6.3.1 Handover BCCH (CanBCCHEx).............................................................. 6-28
6.3.2 Scan BCCH (ScanBCCH) ....................................................................... 6-29
6.3.3 BCCH starting delay (BCCHDelay).......................................................... 6-30
XIX
6.3.4 BCCH finishing delay (ReBCCHEx) ......................................................... 6-30
6.3.5 Delay of TRX forcible release (TrxRel) ..................................................... 6-31
6.3.6 The MAX cells' amount of simultaneously handover (MaxChangeProc) ..... 6-32
6.4 Handover Parameters of SD ............................................................................. 6-32
6.4.1 Dynamic configuration SDCCH (CanSDCCHDyn) .................................... 6-33
6.4.2 Scan SDCCH (ScanSDCCH) .................................................................. 6-34
6.4.3 Delay of TS forcible release (TsRel)......................................................... 6-34
6.4.4 Delay protection (MaxDelay) ................................................................... 6-35
6.4.5 TCH->SDCCH limit (MinSDCCH) ............................................................ 6-36
6.4.6 SDCCH->TCH delay (TimeToTch) ........................................................... 6-36
6.5 Other Parameters............................................................................................. 6-37
6.5.1 B2 support AMR (V2TruSupportAMR) ..................................................... 6-38
6.5.2 CHR Enable (ChrEnable)........................................................................ 6-39
6.5.3 NC2 support (NC2support) ..................................................................... 6-39
6.5.4 MR server IP (MRSvrIP) ......................................................................... 6-40
6.5.5 MR server port (MRSvrPort).................................................................... 6-40
6.5.6 BER weight (VoiceQualWeight_0) ........................................................... 6-41
6.5.7 FER weight (VoiceQualWeight_1)............................................................ 6-41
6.5.8 Handover frequency weight (VoiceQualWeight_2) .................................... 6-42
6.5.9 DTX weight (VoiceQualWeight_3)............................................................ 6-43
6.5.10 Coding decode weight (VoiceQualWeight_4) .......................................... 6-43
6.5.11 ABIS transmission error code weight (VoiceQualWeight_5) ..................... 6-44
6.5.12 Delay weight (VoiceQualWeight_6)........................................................ 6-44
6.5.13 A port resource block threshold (Reslimit_0) .......................................... 6-45
6.5.14 NSVC resource block threshold (Reslimit_1) .......................................... 6-45
6.5.15 Channel resource block threshold (Reslimit_2) ....................................... 6-46
6.5.16 Subcell busy threshold (Reslimit_3) ....................................................... 6-46
6.5.17 ABIS alarm delay time (AbisAlmDelayTime) ........................................... 6-47
6.5.18 DTX factor (Info_0_8) ........................................................................... 6-48
6.6 IBS Parameters................................................................................................ 6-48
6.6.1 The method of intelligent TRX power off (Info_0_0) .................................. 6-49
6.7 Performance Management Parameters.............................................................. 6-50
6.7.1 PingPong handover duration (PingPongDura, s)....................................... 6-50
6.7.2 Number of measurement reports for dropped connections
(LatestMeasureRptNum) ....................................................................... 6-51
6.7.3 Uplink quality threshold (DropBadQualULThs, RQ) ................................... 6-51
6.7.4 Downlink quality threshold (DropBadQualDLThs, RQ)............................... 6-52
6.7.5 Uplink signal strength threshold (DropLowSigStrULThs) ........................... 6-53
XX
6.7.6 Downlink signal strength threshold (DropLowSigStrDLThs) ....................... 6-53
6.7.7 Excessive TA threshold (DropExcessiveTAThs)........................................ 6-54
6.8 Baseband Frequency Hopping TRX Exchange Parameters................................. 6-54
6.8.1 Baseband frequency hopping TRX exchange support (Info_0_1)............... 6-55
6.8.2 Baseband Frequency hopping TRX Exchange scan timer (Info_1_0) ......... 6-56
6.8.3 Baseband frequency hopping TRX configuration timer (Info_1_16) ............ 6-56
6.8.4 Baseband frequency hopping TRX exchange check delay timer
(Info_2_0)............................................................................................. 6-57
6.9 GPRS Operation Control Parameters ................................................................ 6-57
6.9.1 Two phase access (TwoPhaseAccess) .................................................... 6-58
6.9.2 Send radio status to SGSN (GBMsgSndInd_0)......................................... 6-59
6.9.3 Send LLC discard to SGSN (GBMsgSndInd_1) ........................................ 6-59
6.9.4 Threshold of quality in radio status (RadStaQuaThs) ................................ 6-60
6.9.5 Send packet TBF release to MS when BSS abnormal (PacketTBFRel) ...... 6-61
Appendix A Flow Control Policy Values.................................................. A-1

Appendix B Power Values ........................................................................ B-1
Appendix C Cell Layer Number Values ................................................... C-1
Appendix D Corresponding Relationship between Parameter
Interface and Database Values ............................................................ D-1
D.1 BSC Function Parameters Interface ....................................................................D-1
D.1.1 Basic Property Parameters.......................................................................D-1
D.1.2 Radio Basic Property Parameters .............................................................D-4
D.1.3 Other Parameters ....................................................................................D-4
D.1.4 AMR Half Method Parameters ..................................................................D-5
D.1.5 AMR Full Method Parameters...................................................................D-6
D.1.6 GPRS Other Parameters 1 .......................................................................D-7
D.1.7 GPRS Other Parameters 2 .......................................................................D-7
D.1.8 EDGE Parameters ...................................................................................D-8
D.2 GERAN External Cell Parameters.......................................................................D-8
D.3 UTRAN External Cell Parameters .......................................................................D-8
D.4 Cell Parameters.................................................................................................D-9
D.4.1 Basic Parameters 1 .................................................................................D-9
D.4.2 Basic Parameters 2 ............................................................................... D-10
D.4.3 Other Parameters .................................................................................. D-10
D.4.4 System Parameters ............................................................................... D-11
D.4.5 GPRS Other Params1 Parameters ......................................................... D-11
D.4.6 GPRS Cell Options Parameters .............................................................. D-11
XXI
D.4.7 GPRS NC Survey Parameters ................................................................ D-14
D.4.8 GPRS Power Control Parameters ........................................................... D-15
D.4.9 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters ........................................................ D-16
D.4.10 GPRS Channel Parameters.................................................................. D-17
D.4.11 EDGE Parameters ............................................................................... D-19
D.5 Cell Object Parameters .................................................................................... D-19
D.5.1 TRX Information Parameters .................................................................. D-19
D.5.2 Channel Information Parameters ............................................................ D-20
D.5.3 Power Control Parameters ..................................................................... D-21
D.5.4 Handover Control Parameters ................................................................ D-22
D.5.5 UTRAN Cell Control Parameters............................................................. D-24
D.5.6 UTRAN Handover Control Parameters .................................................... D-25
D.5.7 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters............................... D-25
D.5.8 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters ....................................................... D-25
D.5.9 Frequency Hopping System Parameters ................................................. D-26
Figures............................................................................................................. I
Glossary .........................................................................................................V
XXII
About This Manual
Purpose
This manual introduces the ZXG10 BSS radio parameters for radio configuration and
commissioning.
Intended Audience
l System Engineer
l Commissioning Engineer
l Maintenance Engineer
What Is in This Manual

This manual has the following chapters.
Section Summary
Chapter 1, Overview Introduces the scope, description methods, and adjustment cautions
for radio parameters.
Chapter 2, BSC Function Introduces the BSC function parameters.

Parameters
Chapter 3, External Cell Introduces the GERAN external cell parameters and UTRAN external
Parameters cell parameters.
Chapter 4, Cell Parameters Introduces the cell parameters in the BSS system.
Chapter 5, Cell Object Introduces the cell object parameters in the BSS system.
Parameters
Chapter 6, System Control Introduces the system control parameters in the BSS system.
Parameters
I
II
Chapter 1
Overview
This chapter explains the definition and classification of radio parameters in GSM network,
modification methods of radio parameters, explanation format of radio parameters, and
precautions in radio parameters adjustment.
Table of Contents
Introduction to BSS Radio Parameters .......................................................................1-1
Method of Modifying Radio Parameters......................................................................1-2
Method of Modifying Parameters in Batch ..................................................................1-6
The Format to Explain Parameters ...........................................................................1-11
Precautions on Parameter Adjustment .....................................................................1-12
1.1 Introduction to BSS Radio Parameters

900/1800 MHz TDMA digital celluar mobile communication system (GSM) is an integrated
system covering fields of network technology, digital stored program control technology,
all transmission technologies and radio technologies.
GSM consists of Network Sub System (NSS), Base Station Sub-system (BSS) and Mobile
Station (MS).
GSM system signaling structure covers MAP interface, A-interface (between MSC and
BSC), Abis interface (between BSC and BTS), Ater interface (between BSC and external
TC) and Um interface (between BTS and MS, also called air interface).
All these objects and interfaces contain large quantity of configuration parameters and
performance parameters, some of which are determined during the development and
production of the equipment, and most of which depend on actual need and operation by
network providers. Settings and adjustment of latter parameters have a great impact on
the operation of entire GSM network.
Radio parameters in GSM network refer to parameters related to radio devices and radio
resources. These parameters have an important impact on coverage of cells, distribution of
signaling flow and service property of network, etc. Therefore, adjusting radio parameters
reasonably plays a very important part in GSM network optimization.
GSM radio parameters are classified into project parameters and resource (cell)
parameters.
1. Project parameters
Project parameters refer to parameters related to design, installation, and
commissioning of the project, like antenna height, antenna direction, antenna
gain, antenna download obliquity and cable loss, etc. These parameters must be
1-1
SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

ZXG10 iBSC Radio Parameter Reference
determined during network design and are seldom changed during the operation of
the network.
2. Resource (cell) parameters
Resource (cell) parameters refer to parameters related to configuration and utilization
of radio resources, which usually transmit on radio interface (Um) to keep the base
station and mobile station consistent. Radio parameters covered in this manual are
mainly resource parameters. Radio resource parameters in BSS contain:
l GERAN subnetwork parameters, BSC management NE parameters,
configuration set parameters;
l Global resource parameters for BSC, site parameters, GERAN external cell
parameters, UTRAN external cell parameters;
l Cell Parameters;
l TRX parameters, power control parameters, handover control parameters,
UTRAN handover control parameters, adjacent interference cell parameters,
adjacent handover cell parameters, adjacent reselection cell parameters,
adjacent handover and reselection cell parameters, UTRAN adjacent cell
handover and reselection parameters, UTRAN adjacent handover cell
parameters, UTRAN adjacent reselection cell parameters, frequency hopping
system parameters.
1.2 Method of Modifying Radio Parameters

After successfully login NetNumen M31, user can perform the following steps:
1. In the left topology tree of NetNumen M31 main interface, right-click the shortcut menu
corresponding to the created GSM NE agent, select Start.
2. Right-click the started GSM NE and select Start, as shown in Figure 1-1.
1-2

Chapter 1 Overview
Figure 1-1 Starting NE Agent
3. Click Start, the system automatically starts this NE.

4. After starting, in the left topology tree of NetNumen M31 main interface, right-click
shortcut menu corresponding to created GSM NE agent, select NE Agent Manage-
ment > Configuration Management, as shown in Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 Selecting NE Management > Configuration Management
1-3

5. Click Configuration Management, the system enters into configuration management

interface, as shown in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 Configuration Management Interface
The tree in the left pane shows the objects to be created and maintained. User
can double-click the node whose parameters shall be modified, the corresponding
parameter interface occurs in right window.
6. Under initial case, the shortcut button Modify in configuration management toolbar
is inactivated, and parameters can not be modified. User must perform the operation
of "Apply Mutex Right" to enable the toolbutton.
Note:
"Apply Mutex Right" function is to avoid multiple clients do actions for the data, which may cause
data confused and errors.
Take the data modification of primary configuration set as an example, operation steps
are listed as follows:
a. Right-click on BSC Managed Element, and select Apply Mutex Right in the
pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 1-4.
1-4

Chapter 1 Overview
Figure 1-4 Selecting Apply Mutex Right
b. Click Apply Mutex Right, and the Information dialog box appears, as shown in
Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-5 Information Dialog Box
c. Click Yes, and the mutex right is successfully acquired, and the icon appears
on the configuration resource tree, as shown in Figure 1-6. Then, the toolbutton
is enabled, and user can modify the configuration data of this managed element.
Figure 1-6 Successfully Applying Mutex Right
d. After the data modification is completed, user should right-click on BSC Managed
Element and select Release Mutex Right in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure
1-7. After the mutex right is released, other users can perform operations on the
configuration data of this managed element.
1-5

Figure 1-7 Selecting Release Mutex Right
1.3 Method of Modifying Parameters in Batch

After successfully logging in to NetNumen M31, perform the following steps to modify
parameters in batch.
1. In the configure resource tree window, right-click OMC > GERAN subnet user ID
> BSC Management Element ID > Config Set ID > BSC Function ID > Export
Configuration Data > Export Network Plan Data, as shown in Figure 1-8.
Figure 1-8 Selecting Export Network Plan Data
2. Click Export Network Plan Data, and the Choose MOC to be Exported dialog box
appears. Select the parameter list to be exported, and click Next, as shown in Figure
1-9.
1-6

Chapter 1 Overview
Figure 1-9 Selecting MOC to Be Exported
3. In the Choose Attributes of Each MOC to be Exported (RDN Excluded) dialog box,
select attribute of the parameter list to be exported, and click OK. Here, suppose the
MOC selected is IBSCFUNCTION_TABLE, as shown in Figure 1-10.
Figure 1-10 Selecting Attributes to Be Exported for MOC
1-7

4. Select the file type to be exported, and click OK. Here, suppose the data is exported
to be an Excel file, as shown in Figure 1-11.
Figure 1-11 Selecting File Type to Be Exported
5. Set the saving path and file name for the exported data, and click Save, as shown in
Figure 1-12.
Figure 1-12 Setting Saving Path and File Name for Data
The data export progress bar is displayed, and then the system prompts that the data
is exported successfully.
6. Open the exported data file, as shown in Figure 1-13.
Figure 1-13 Parameter Data
7. Modify the data file according to actual requirement, and save it.
The operation indications are described as follows.
a. D indicates deleting the MO. A indicates adding the MO. M indicates modifying
the MO (this command is issued only when the parameter value is changed). Any
1-8

Chapter 1 Overview
value beyond D, A and M (including the lower case form) will be ignored by the
system, and the corresponding data in that row will not be processed.
b. For the same management object MO (such as cell, cell power control and cell
handover control), if the operation type (D, A or M) appears in multiple exported
tables, then the operation types of all columns must be the same; otherwise, the
system will give error prompt.
c. No matter how many records in the Excel table should be deleted, created or
modified, the system performs deletion first, then performs creation, and finally
performs modification.
Note:
The order of operations has nothing to do with the order of records being displayed in the
Excel file.
d. If multiple objects among which reference relationship exists should be deleted,

the system first deletes the active reference object (such as sub-object), and then
deletes the passive reference object (such as parent-object). If multiple objects
among which reference relationship exists should be created, the system first
creates the passive reference object (such as parent-object), and then creates
the active reference object (such as sub-object). If multiple objects among which
reference relationship exists should be modified, the system first modifies the
passive reference object (such as parent-object), and then modifies the active
reference object (such as sub-object).
The following lists the restriction conditions.
a. The exported Excel file is the import template.
b. In the Excel template, the work sheet name cannot be modified.

c. In the Excel template, the title row in the work sheet cannot be modified, the
frozen column cannot be modified, and the cell type cannot be modified. However,
common data columns and data rows can be deleted.
d. The parameter that cannot be modified on the interface cannot be modified in the
batch modification.
e. In the Excel template, the attributes USERLABEL, MCC, MNC, LAC and CI appear
in multiple work sheets, but only the modification in the network parameter list is
valid.
f. The parameter MAIO of channels supporting baseband frequency hopping cannot
be modified.
8. In the configuration resource tree window, right-click OMC > GERAN Subnetwork ID
> BSC Managed Element ID > Config Set ID > BSC Function ID > Batch Apply
Network Plan Data, as shown in Figure 1-14.
1-9

Figure 1-14 Selecting Batch Apply Network Plan Data
9. Select the file type to be imported, and click OK, as shown in Figure 1-15.
Figure 1-15 Selecting File Type to Be Imported
10. In the Open dialog box, select the data file to be imported, and click Open.
11. In the Batch Network Plan Data Apply dialog box, select the object to which the data
is applied, and click OK, as shown in Figure 1-16.
1-10

Chapter 1 Overview
Figure 1-16 Applying Network Planning Data in Batch
The progress bar is displayed, and then the system prompts that the instruction is
executed successfully.
Note:
If the number of successfully executed instructions is 0, it indicates that no data needs to be modi-
fied. If the number is not 0, it indicates that the data in the file is inconsistent with that at the server.
1.4 The Format to Explain Parameters

Each radio parameter in this manual is individually clarified by using tables, for details see
Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Format to Explain Radio Parameters
Full name Chinese parameter name on the interface
Abbreviation Abbreviation for English parameters
3GPP Name Parameter name in 3GPP protocol
3GPP reference 3GPP protocol version number for parameter reference
Description Descriptive text for this parameter.
Management Object Involved object by the parameter
Value range of this parameter. If the parameter is in mapping form, actual

Value Range parameter value that corresponds to all indices will be enumerated
Unit Parameter unit
Default value Default value and its description on parameter interface
1-11

Online = After a parameter’s value is modified, it is immediately synchronized

and takes effect.
Offline = After one or several parameters' values are modified, the
Change mode modification takes effect after data synchronization.
Relevant functions and features of the network that corresponds to this

Relevant Features parameter
Parameters which have data restriction relationship with the parameter.

For example, this parameter takes effect only after one or multiple relevant
parameters are enabled; this parameter's value has a restriction relationship
with one or multiple relevant parameters, such as larger than or smaller than
Relevant parameters the relevant parameter.
Relationship Dependency among relevant parameters
Related interfaces Interfaces related to this parameter
Whether service will be affected when the parameter modification takes

Impact on service effect, and impact details (especially when service is interrupted)
Caution!
1. Radio parameters in this system is modified through offline modification mode, that is, the
modification on interface only can be effective after the synchronization action to foreground is
conducted.
2. Some parameter values in the interface are not fully same as those in database, with certain
corresponding relationship between them. For specific corresponding relationship see appendix.
1.5 Precautions on Parameter Adjustment

Radio parameters adjustment, according to the type of the problem to be solved, falls into
two kinds.
l First is to solve static problem, that is, to correct traffic model in system design
by measuring actual average traffic and signaling flow in every district and to solve
common problems existing for long.
l Second is to solve problems at a particular time like traffic overload in some district,
channel congestion due to sudden events or random events.
For the first type, service providers must perform measurement and summarization on
actual operation regularly, and then perform appropriate adjustment on global or partial
parameters and configurations. For the second type, network operators adjust some radio
parameters at real time according to instant data from measurement results.
Most radio parameters in GSM system are based on one cell or one location area. It is
necessary to consider whether parameter adjustment in this cell will influence other cells,
especially the adjacent one, for parameters between cells are related to each other greatly.
Otherwise, it may cause negative influence. Determine whether the problem results from
1-12

Chapter 1 Overview
equipment fault (including connections) first when it occurs in some part of the network.
Adjust radio parameters only when determined that the problem does result from service.
1-13

This page intentionally left blank.
1-14

Chapter 2
BSC Function Parameters
Below introduces BSC function for radio parameters.
Table of Contents
Radio Basic Property..................................................................................................2-1
Other Parameters.....................................................................................................2-11
Channel Allocation Control Parameters ....................................................................2-25
Timer 1.....................................................................................................................2-35
Timer 2.....................................................................................................................2-49
GPRS Maximum Retrying Times ..............................................................................2-67
GPRS Timer.............................................................................................................2-76
AMR Half Method Parameters..................................................................................2-91
AMR Full Method Parameters ..................................................................................2-97
GPRS Other Parameters 1 .....................................................................................2-102
BVC Flow Control Parameters................................................................................2-120
FUC Flow Control Map Parameters ........................................................................2-128
EDGE Parameters..................................................................................................2-134
eMLPP Set.............................................................................................................2-143
Ater Timer Parameters ...........................................................................................2-160
2.1 Radio Basic Property

The interface of basic radio property parameters is as shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Radio Basic Property Parameters
2-1

2.1.1 DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt)

Full name DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported
Abbreviation FuncExt
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to select the supported frequency band. It cannot

Description be changed after being created.
Management Object BSC
Value Range DCS1800, PCS1900
Unit None
Default value DCS1800
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features None
Frequency band (FreqBand)

Frequency band (FreqBand)
Relevant parameters Frequency band of subCell (SubFreqBand)
Relationship None
Related interfaces None
Impact on service None
2.1.2 Load indication allowed (LoadInd)

Full name Load Indication
Abbreviation LoadInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The load indication process informs the adjacent BSC of the cell load at border
to provide more reference information in normal handover and the internal traffic
handover of BSC.
This parameter determines if load indication is available, an also determines

the validity of parameter ‘Load valid time’ and ‘Load indication period’. If this
parameter is ‘No’ (load indication process is disabled), the latter two parameters
Description are invalid. Otherwise they are valid.
Value Range Yes/No
2-2

Chapter 2 BSC Function Parameters
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.1.3 Send confusion message allowed (ConfusionMsg)

Full name Send confusion message allowed
Abbreviation ConfusionMsg
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Confusion message is bidirectional. If the received message could not be pro-

cessed properly for some reason, and there is no other proper fault message to
Description send, the system will send confusion message.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.1.4 Inter-Cell handover allowed (InHoEnable)

Full name Inter-Cell handover allowed
Abbreviation InHoEnable
2-3

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, intra-BSC inter-cell handover is implemented

by the following methods: BSC-controlled inter-cell handover without MSC in-
volvement; MSC-controlled intra-BSC inter-cell handover whose handover flow
is similar to that of inter-BSC handover. This parameter decides the choice
of method for intra-BSC inter-cell handover. 'Yes' indicates that it is BSC-con-
trolled inter-cell handover flow; 'No' indicates that it is MSC-controlled inter-cell
Description handover flow. Do not select 'No' for this parameter if it is not necessary.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.1.5 Send assignment failure allowed (ExDRSendAssFail)

Full name Send assignment failure allowed
Abbreviation ExDRSendAssFail
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines whether external redirection allows assignment fail-

ure. "Yes" means that external direction allows sending assignment failure mes-
sage to MSC. "No" means that external redirection does not allow sending as-
Description signment failure message to MSC.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
2-4

Relevant Features ZGB-03-01-002 Directed Retry
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.1.6 Load indication valid time (LoadValidTime)

Full name Load Valid Time
Abbreviation LoadValidTime
3GPP Name Time indication IE
3GPP reference 48.008 Mobile Switching Centre - Base Station System (MSC-BSS) interface
In load indication process, BSC sends BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to

MSC periodically, notifying about the load status. The message includes time
indication information which indicates the valid time length of the service load
information. MSC relays the BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to neighbor-
ing BSCs. This parameter represents the valid time length of the load message.
Description 255 means valid permanently.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit 10 s
Default value 18
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
Related interfaces A Interface
2.1.7 Load indication period (LoadIndPrd)

Full name Load Indication Period
Abbreviation LoadIndPrd
2-5

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In load indication process, BSC sends BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to

MSC periodically, notifying about the load status. The message includes time
indication information which indicates the valid time length of the service load
information. MSC relays the BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to neighbor-
ing BSCs. When the load indication message is sent periodically, this parameter
Description decides the period for BSC to send the load indication message.
Value Range 10 ~ 65530
Unit 100 ms
Default value 1500
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.1.8 Automatic resource indication threshold (ResourceIndThs)

Full name Automatic resource indication threshold
Abbreviation ResourceIndThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines that BSC automatically indicates to MSC about the
ratio of presently available channels to the total channels. When available cell
resource is lower than this parameter, resource indication shall be sent to MSC
about this cell condition, which shall be configured by O&M.
The four modes of resource indication from BSC are as follows:
l Automatic Mode: BSC instantly returns the BSSAP RESOURCE INDICA-
TION message as an acknowledgment without any resource information
after receiving the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message. BSC auto-
matically sends BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION message to MSC. BSC
uses the periodicity IE in BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST to determine the
Description indication messages interval (unless the ‘Periodicity IE’ is 0 and BSC ig-
2-6

nores 0) once O&M of BSC satisfies the Auto condition (service threshold
or the interval between any two messages).
l One time mode: BSC instantly returns a BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION
message with resource information after receiving BSSAP RESOURCE
REQUEST message. BSC stops sending and waits for next BSSAP RE-
SOURCE REQUEST if the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message does
not contain Extended Resource Indication IE. If there is Extended Resource
Indication IE, BSC shall follow the regulations of Subsequent Mode element
in the message, same as mode 4. If the previous one is mode 1 or 3, then
you can use mode 1 or 3, otherwise you can use mode 4.
l Period mode: After BSC receives the “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST”
message, it will immediately return a “BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION”
message that contains the resource information. After that, BSC periodi-
cally sends the “BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION” message. If “Periodic-
ity IE” in the “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST” message is not 0, then the
period to send the message is the value of “Periodicity IE” multiplied by 100
ms. If Periodicity IE is 0, then the message is wrong and the whole “BSSAP
RESOURCE REQUEST” message is considered as incorrect.
l Stop mode: After the “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST” message is re-
ceived, BSC immediately returns a “BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION”
message without any resource information as an acknowledgement. And
then, it will no longer send the cell resource information to MSC.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.1.9 Resource adjust threshold (ResourceAdjustThs)

Full name Resource adjust threshold
Abbreviation ResourceAdjustThs
3GPP Name None
2-7

3GPP reference None
When bytes transmitted for packet servie data have crossed the threshold,
timeslot allocation is adjusted from single timeslot to multiple timeslots (or the
threshold from single timeslot to multiple timeslots for packet service timeslot
Description allocation).
Unit Byte
Default value 2000
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.1.10 BSC MAX reset number (BSCMaxResetNum)

Full name BSC Max Reset Num
Abbreviation BscMaxResetNum
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The maximum allowable resets to BSC. After BSC sends the BSSAP RESET
message to MSC, if BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message fails to reach
BSC from MSC within GSM-specified T4 time interval, the resetting will be
repeated.
BSSAP RESET message repeats up to N times. MSC ends the reset process
and notifies OMS incase of no reply from BSC after N times. N depends on
Description this parameter.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
2-8

Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.1.11 MR report enable (MrRptEnable)

Full name MR report enable
Abbreviation MrRptEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if data report function is supported for measurement

report, in combination with MrRptTimap. If this function is enabled and placed
at this time point, measurement data can be reported to OMM. This function is
used for OMM to store the measurement reports that iBSC submits based on
user. The system can analyze MS user actions through analyzing the report
Description data.
Yes/No
l Yes: enable;
Value Range l No: disable
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.1.12 HBTS scan site number (HBTSScanSiteNum)

Full name HBTS scan site number
Abbreviation HBTSScanSiteNum
2-9

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the number of HBTS scanning sites at each time. 0 indicates

Description
the periodical scanning scanning function is disabled.
Management Object S8001
Value Range 0~10
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
HBTS scan cycle (HBTSScanCyc, 3600s) and HBTS scan begin time
Relevant parameters
(HBTSScanBT)
If this parameter is set to 0, these two relevant parameters can be

Relationship
configured but be invalid.
Related interfaces Abis interface
2.1.13 Range of BARANG

Full name Range of BARANG
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Value includes single frequency or frequency range, sent to MS in

CHANNEL RELEASE. Certain frequency can be firstly inspected while
MS selects cell.
Input the minimum and maximum value of broadcast range in the left and
right blank and click Add to save this range. Range of BARANG can be
same within different global resource.
Description Note: input frequency ranges cannot be overlapped.
PGSM(1 ~ 124)
EGSM(0 ~ 124, 975 ~ 1023)
DCS1800(512 ~ 885)
GSM1900(512 ~ 810)
Value Range GSM850(128 ~ 251)
Unit None
2-10

Default value 0&&0
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters None
Relationship None
2.2 Other Parameters

The interface of other parameters is shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Other Parameters
2.2.1 Length of super vision (LcsSuperVision)

Full name Length of super vision
Abbreviation LcsSuperVision
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Supervise the timer length in whole locating process.

After BSC sends locating request to SMLC, this timer is configured and shall
receives locating response prior to timeout, otherwise locating process is
Description terminated.
2-11

Unit None
Default value 250
Change mode Offline
ZGO-01-03-002 LCS with CGI+TA

Relevant Features ZGO-01-03-003 LCS with AGPS
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.2.2 Length of radio (LcsRadio)

Full name Length of radio
Abbreviation LcsRadio
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Supervise the timer length to transmit radio information.

This timer supervises the process to deliver MS the message related with
locating. Start while sending message to MS, and stop while receiving
Description response from MS.
Unit None
Default value 50
Change mode Offline

Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2-12

2.2.3 LCS wait intra BSS handover timer (LcsWaitInTraHO)

Full name LCS wait intra BSS handover timer
Abbreviation LcsWaitInTraHO
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Length of timer waiting intra BSS handover completed.

Continue locating process after handover is finished, with a length threshold
Description for waiting. Stop while this timer length is exceeded.
Unit None
Default value 60
Change mode Offline

Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.2.4 Monitor physical context request (RmsT9108, 100ms)

Full name Monitor physical context request
Abbreviation RmsT9108
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T9108. Currently, the process to monitor physical con-
Description text request is not used, reserved for later use.
Value Range 20
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
2-13

Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
Related interfaces Um interface
2.2.5 Timer for MSG waiting (TWaitMsg, 100ms)

Full name Timer for MSG waiting
Abbreviation TWaitMsg
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Timer for MSG Waiting on RanAWorker process. RanAWorker process is the

working process of RANA module. Start if RANA instance is created, stop if
Description message is received, and instance is released if timeout.
Value Range 5 ~ 20
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.2.6 Timer for RANCSEST Waiting (TWaitRancsEst, 100ms)

Full name Timer for RANCSEST Waiting
Abbreviation TWaitRancsEst
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-14

Time to wait for RANCS process applying for resource protection.

RANCS process is to process CS service. This timer is started if RANA
receives external handover request and applying for channel from RANCS;
stop if receiving RANCS response, and fail to send handover to interface A if
Description timeout.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.2.7 Timer for RANCSCLECOM Waiting (TWaitRancsCleCom,

100ms)
Full name Timer for RANCSCLECOM Waiting
Abbreviation TWaitRancsCleCom
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Interval for RanAWorker process waiting for RANCS process responding

ClearCom. RanAWorker process is the working process of RANA module.
Start if sending clear command to RANCS, stop if receiving RANCS response,
Description and continue release process if timeout.
Value Range 10 ~ 30
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
2-15

Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.2.8 Timer for CCM waiting (CcmWaitTimer)

Full name Timer for CCM waiting
Abbreviation CcmWaitTimer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Timer that is waiting for disconnecting and disabling BTS during dynamic
channel conversion.
Start if CCM starts channel conversion, stop if receiving successive module
Description and BTS response, and send message to BTS again if timeout.
Value Range 45 ~ 55
Unit 100 ms
Default value 45
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.2.9 Get static param timer (GetStaticParamTimer, 100ms)

Full name Get static param timer
Abbreviation GetStaticParamTimer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-16

The counting parameter, used by RancRrm, is used to timely poll UPU unit
below CMP.
This timer is configured periodically, and query resource occupation data for
Description UPU if timeout.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 120
Change mode Offline
Relevant parame-
ters None
Relationship None
2.2.10 Starting time for oriented retry (RmsT10, 100ms)

Full name Starting time for oriented retry
Abbreviation RmsT10
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T10. The timer is enabled when oriented retry is
Description performed. It is disabled after oriented retry fails or finishes.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-17

2.2.11 TFO Enable (TFOControl_0)

Full name TFO Enable
Abbreviation TFOControl_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is one of TFO control parameters, to describe whether TFO

is enabled. 0 represents disable; 1 represents enable.
l 0: disable;
l 1: enable.
When TFO is not enabled, or value of TFOControl_0 is 0, other switch is
disabled and values of TFOControl_1, TFOControl_2 and TFOControl_3
are 0 too.
TFO is an inband protocol. After a call is set up, TCs of both parties use
this protocol to negotiate the codec to be used. The decoder at sender side
and the coder at receiver side are bypassed. The speech frames used at
air interface are directly transmitted to the receiver. In this way, speech
quality is improved.
When the speech version supported by the cell is not AMR, TFO can be
established as long as two cells support the same the speech version. If
the speech version is AMR, to establish TFO, the speech codecs also need
Description to have the same type. Otherwise, TFO cannot be established.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-02-006 TFO
Relationship None
2.2.12 Codec type optimization enable (TFOControl_1)

Full name Codec type optimization enable
3GPP Name None
2-18

3GPP reference None
This parameter is one of TFO control parameters, to describe whether

coding/decoding type can be optimized. 0 represents disable, 1 represents
enable.
l 0: disable;
Description l 1: enable.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.13 Codec mismatch resolution enable (TFOControl_2)

Full name Codec mismatch resolution enable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is one of TFO control parameters, to describe whether

unmatched coding/decoding type can not be solved. 0 represents disable,
1 represents enable.
l 0: disable;
Description l 1: enable.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
2-19

Relationship None
2.2.14 AMR Optimization Mode (TFOControl_3)

Full name AMR Optimization Mode
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is one of TFO control parameters, to describe if it is AMR

optimization mode.
l 0: don't support ACS variations;
Description l 1: support ACS variations.
Value Range Support or don't support ACS variations
Unit None
Default value Don't support ACS variations.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.15 External cell load notify (Info_0_0)

Full name External cell load notify
Abbreviation Info_0_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-20

It describes if the load information in this cell is filled in the unit of

"New BSS to old BSS information" for handover request while the
Description
cell service under current BSC is switched to the cell under other
BSCs.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.16 Neighbor cell load valid duration (Info_0_1,10s)

Full name Neighbor cell load valid duration
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It describes the valid time of the load information.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit 10 s
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-21

2.2.17 LMU build request deal or not (Info_1_0)

Full name LMU build request deal or not
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines whether to handle Location

Measurement Units (LMU) establishment request.
Description
l No: not handle;
l Yes: handle
Management object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features None
Relationship None
2.2.18 MBMS request deal or not (Info_1_1)

Full name MBMS request deal or not (INFO)
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if to handle MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast

Description
Service) request.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
2-22

Relationship None
2.2.19 Channel request reserved field deal or not (Info_1_2)

Full name Channel request reserved field deal or not (INFO)
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It describes if to handle Channel Request reserved field.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.20 MS power hold in handover option (Info_0_9)

Full name MS power hold in handover option
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if MS power hold in handover option is supported.
Management
Object None
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
2-23

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
2.2.21 Level threshold of target cell (Info_0_10)

Full name Level threshold of target cell
3GPP Name None
3GPP
reference None
Description Level threshold of target cell
Management
Object None
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
Value Range l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
l ......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
l 63: > -48 dBm
Unit None
Default value 27
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
2-24

Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
2.3 Channel Allocation Control Parameters

The interface of channel allocation control parameters is shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Channel Allocation Control Parameters
2.3.1 Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable)

Full name Dynamic HR Enable
Abbreviation DynaHREnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The dynamic HR channel allocation function allows allocating FR or HR

channel to MS according to the cell's traffic. When the cell's channels become
Description
congested, HR channel is allocated to MS, which greatly shortens the cell's
congestion time during peak traffic hours.
Management Object Cell
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
2-25

Change mode Offline
ZGO-03-02-003 Full dynamic channel allocation on Um interface

Relevant Features
ZGO-03-02-005 Dynamic Half Rate Allocation
Relevant parameters Use cell dynamic HR parameter (UseCellDynHRPara)
Relationship If this parameter is set to Yes, 'Use cell dynamic HR parameter' is configurable.
2.3.2 Threshold for TRX switched from FR to HR (HRThs)

Full name Threshold for TRX switched from FR to HR
Abbreviation HRThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When the dynamic HR channel function is enabled for cell, the system directly
Description applies for HR if the channel occupation ratio exceeds this threshold. In this
way, user capacity can be increased.
Value Range 1 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 60
Change mode Offline

Relevant Features
Relationship None
2.3.3 AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold (AmrHRThs)

Full name AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold
Abbreviation AmrHRThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-26

When busy timeslot/general timeslot >= AmrHRThs/100, and carrier and cell
support AMR, subsequent service prefers AMR voice rate.
This threshold value can be configured on BSC and BTS, when "User cell
Description
dynamic HR parameter" (UseCellDynHRPara) is yes, AmrHRThs value
configured by cell will be used, otherwise AmrHRThs configured by BSC
is used.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-006 Dynamic AMR HR/FR conversion independent threshold
Relationship None
2.3.4 HR channel fragment finishing support (HRDfragSupport)

Full name HR channel fragment finishing support
Abbreviation HRDfragSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It is a switch to support HR channel frag finishing functions, which can be con-

figured both on BSC and BTS. Only when both BSC and BTS are enabled and
Description (number of unfinished HR defragment instances / number of idle HR channels
in the cell) is no more than HRDefragThs, the HR channel defragmentation
function is enabled, otherwise, it is disabled.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-004 HR Concentration
Relationship None
2-27

2.3.5 HR channel percentage threshold (HRTsPercentage)

Full name HR channel percentage threshold
Abbreviation HRTsPercentage
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When HR timeslot in the cell / general timeslot in the cell <

HRTsPercentage/100, the cell can generate new HR channel.
Description This parameter can be configured on BSC and BTS. If the proportion of HR
timeslot in the cell is lower than HRTsPercentage/100 of BSC and BTS, the
cell can generate new HR channel.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.6 User priority for EMLPP (PriThreshold)

Full name User Priority
Abbreviation PriThreshold
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-28

This parameter (PriThreshold) uses the service of preferred access for

high-priority subscriber, that is eMLPP service, the system may set some
reserved channels (currently, only full rate TCH channels are supported to
be the reserved channels).
When CS instance calls database to apply for channels, the subscriber's
Description
PriorityLevel information reaches to database, and is compared with
PriThreshold in the database and BSC table. When PriorityLevel≤PriThreshold
(the less the subscriber's priority level value, the higher the priority level,
that is the subscriber's priority level is not lower than PriThreshold priority),
the reserved channel can be used.
Value Range 1 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-002 Enhancement on Channel Allocation
Relationship None
2.3.7 Preferred speech version (PreferSpeechVer H)

Full name Preferred speech version (half)
Abbreviation PreferSpeechVer H
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When implementing the CS channel allocation policy, describe the preferred

Description half-rate speech version. Half-rate version 1 refers to HR, and version 3 for
AMR.
Value Range Not specify the preferred version, Half-rate version 1, Half-rate version 3
Unit None
Default value Not specify the preferred version
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-01-01-001 Half Rate
2-29

Relationship None
2.3.8 Preferred speech version (PreferSpeedchVer F)

Full name Preferred speech version (full)
Abbreviation PreferSpeechVer F
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When implementing the CS channel allocation policy, it describe the preferred

Description full-rate voice version. Full-rate version 1 refers to FR, version 2 for EFR, and
version 3 for AMR.
Not specify the preferred version, Full-rate version 1, full-rate version 2, full-rate
Value Range
version 3
Unit None
Default value Not specify the preferred version
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-01-01-002 Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) Speech Codec
Relationship None
2.3.9 Reserved channel first (RsvChanFirst)

Full name Reserved channel first
Abbreviation RsvChanFirst
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-30

This parameter indicates the sequence for selecting reserved channel and
non-reserved channel. If this function switch is enabled, reserved channel
Description
is selected first.
Yes: reserved channel first; no: non-reserved channel first
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-01-03-001 eMLPP
Relationship None
2.3.10 EMLPP channel reserved time (EMLPPThs, %)

Full name EMLPP channel reserved time
Abbreviation EMLPPThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When using high priority user to access service, that is, EMLPP service, the
Description system may configure reserved channels of certain proportion for access of
high priority users.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-31

2.3.11 TRX PS busy threshold (TrxPSBusyThs)

Full name TRX PS busy threshold
Abbreviation TrxPSBusyThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to collect PS service on the idle carrier while applying
for PS, against infinite expansion. Application sequence: the idle carrier
Description above this threshold → idle carrier → idle carrier below this threshold.
Calculate it according to remained available quota on each available PS
timeslot * number of accessed Abis * 100 / number of users.
Unit None
Default value 1280
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.12 Resource pool for PS rate (PsAbisThs, %)

Full name Resource pool for PS rate
Abbreviation PsAbisThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Full dynamic Abis resource pool provides use proportion of PS channel. if

default value for this parameter is configured as 80%, which refers to upper
Description limit for PS. The aim is to idle Abis resource while CS channel is activated. If
this threshold is exceeded, Abis resource cannot be allocated to PS service
again.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
2-32

Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-03-001 Full Dynamic Abis Allocation
Relationship None
2.3.13 Maximum PS uplink user per TS (MaxPsUserPerTs_0)

Full name Maximum PS uplink user per TS
Abbreviation MaxPsUserPerTs_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter describes maximum PS uplink user per ts.
Value Range 1~7
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.14 Maximum PS downlink user per TS (MaxPsUserPerTs_1)

Full name Maximum PS downlink user per TS
Abbreviation MaxPsUserPerTs_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes the maximum number of PS downlink users per wire-
Description
less timeslot.
2-33

Value Range 1 ~ 16
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.15 Extended uplink dynamic allocation support

(ExUpDynSupport)
Full name Extended uplink dynamic allocation support
Abbreviation ExUpDynSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if cell supports extended uplink dynamic allocation.

While using this function, the MS only need listen USF allocation with the least
Description
timeslot, so you can determine to send uplink block on all allocated uplink
timeslot.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-007 Extended Dynamic Allocation
Relationship None
Related interfaces Um Interface
2-34

2.4 Timer 1
The interface of timer 1 parameters is shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Timer 1 Parameters
2.4.1 Blocking/unblocking period (T1, 100ms)

Full name Blocking/Unblocking period
Abbreviation T1
3GPP Name T1
3GPP reference 3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0
This parameter is T1 timer. BSS blocks/unblocks a terrestrial circuit and

sends BLOCK/UNBLOCK message to MSC due to various reasons (such as
O&M; equipment failure/recovery; radio resources unavailable/available). T1
timer sets the time interval between BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE
message sent from MSC to BSC and BLOCK/UNBLOCK message. T1 is
used to identify it during this period.
l Start condition: The system sends a single circuit block/unblock message
Description
to MSC.
l Stop condition: The system receives the single circuit block/unblock mes-
sage from MSC.
l Timeout action: The system compares the number of no responses from
MSC. If the number does not reach the maximum, the system resends
single circuit block/unblock message to MSC. If the number reaches the
maximum, the system terminates the instance.
Unit 100 ms
2-35

Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.2 Global resetting period (T4, 100ms)

Full name Global resetting period
Abbreviation T4
3GPP Name T4
This parameter is T4 timer, monitoring the BSSAP RESET message sent

from BSC to MSC.
l Timer start condition: T4 starts when a global resetting occurs in BSC.
Description
l Timer stop condition: The “BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGE” message
from MSC is received.
l Timeout action: If T4 expires, BSC will repeat the whole process.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.3 Protection period for global resetting (T13, 100ms)

Full name Protective period for global resetting
Abbreviation T13
2-36

3GPP Name T13
This parameter is T13 timer, which is a protection time period for a local
call clearing process.
l Timer Start: T13 timer starts when BSC receives BSSAP HANDOVER
COMMAND message.
Description
l Timer Stop: T13 timer suspends when SCCP receives a SSP/SPI mes-
sage.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSS will send BSSAP RESET
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT message to MSC.
Value Range 30 ~ 60
Unit 100 ms
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.4 Circuit resetting period on BSS side (T19, 100ms)

Full name Circuit resetting period on BSS side
Abbreviation T19
3GPP Name T19
This parameter is T19 timer, meaning a period of circuit reset at BSS.

l Start condition: If BSC SCCP connection is abnormal while the circuits
must be released to idle status, BSS will send the “BSSAP CIRCUIT RE-
SET” message to MSC and start the timer.
l Stop condition: After MSC receives this message, it will release the corre-
Description
sponding services and the circuits to the idle status and send the “BSSAP
CIRCUIT RESET ACKNOWLEDGE” message to BSC. The timer stops
when BSC receives the "RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE" message.
l Timeout action: If the the number of timeout times is smaller than the maxi-
mum number of resending times, BSC re-sends the circuit reset message
2-37

to MSC. If the number of timeout times reaches the maximum number,

BSC reports to O&M, terminates the handling, and clears the instance.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.5 Circuit group blocking/unblocking period (T20, 100ms)

Full name Circuit group blocking/unblocking period
Abbreviation T20
3GPP Name T20
For some reasons (O&M; intervention; equipment fault/recovery; radio

resources unavailable/available), BSS will block a group of terrestrial circuits,
then send the “BSSAP CIRCIUIT GROUP BLOCK/UNBLOCK” message to
MSC. After receiving this message, MSC will send the “BSSAP CIRCIUIT
GROUP BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACKNOWKEDGE” message to BSS for
notification.
l Start condition: The system sends a circuit group block/unblock message
Description
to MSC.
l Stop condition: The system receives the circuit group block/unblock mes-
sage from MSC.
l Timeout action: BSC analyzes the number of no responses from MSC. If
the number does not reach the maximum value, BSC resends circuit group
maintenance message to MSC. If the number reaches the maximum, BSC
terminates the instance.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
2-38

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.6 RLSD message receive protection timer (T9101, 100ms)

Full name RLSD message receive protection timer
Abbreviation T9101
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T9101, supervising the reception of RLSD.

l Timer start condition: T9101 starts when BSC sends the “BSSAP CLEAR
COMPLETE” message to MSC.
Description l Timer stop condition: T9101 stops when the RLSD message from MSC is
received.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send RLSD message
to release SCCP connection.
Value Range 20 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.7 Channel activation protection timer (RmsT9103, 100ms)

Full name Channel activation protection timer
2-39

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T9103, monitoring channel activation process.

l Timer Start: T9103 timer starts when BSC sends CHANNEL ACTIVATION
message to BTS.
Description l Timer Stop: T9103 timer suspends when BSC receives CHANNEL ACTI-
VATION ACK or CHANNEL ACTIVATION NACK message.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send RF CHANNEL
RELEASE message to BTS
Value Range 20
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
Related interfaces Abis Interface
2.4.8 MSC clear command protection timer (T9104, 100ms)

Full name MSC clear command protection timer
Abbreviation T9104
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is T9104 timer. It supervises CLEAR COMMAND from MSC.

l Timer Start: T9104 timer starts when BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST
message to MSC.
Description l Timer Stop: T9104 timer suspends when BSC receives CLEAR COM-
MAND message from MSC.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, CLEAR REQUEST message will
be resent (four times at the most).
Value Range 20 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
2-40

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.9 SCCP connection protection timer (T9105, 100ms)

Full name SCCP connection protection timer
Abbreviation T9105
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is T9105 timer, monitoring SCCP connection process.

l Timer Start: T9105 timer starts when BSC sends BSSAP SCCP_CON-
NECTION_REQ message to MSC.
Description l Timer Stop: T9105 suspends when BSC receives SCCP_CONNEC-
TION_CONFIRM”/”SCCP_CONNECTION_REFUSED message.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send CHANNEL RE-
LEASE message to MS.
Value Range 20 ~ 60
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.10 Protective time waiting for access (RmsT1, 100ms)

Full name Protective time waiting for access
Abbreviation RmsT1
2-41

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer rmsT1. It indicates protection waiting time for MS

access during assignment or handover, after channel activation process.
l Timer start condition: The destination channel receives the “CHL ACITI-
VATION ACK” message and sends the “RADIO AVAILABLE” message to
Description
the source channel.
l Timer stop condition: In MS access, the destination channel receives the
“ASSIGNMENT COM” or “HANDOVER COM” message.
l Timeout action: BSC releases the instance of target channel service.
Value Range 0 ~ 300
Unit 100 ms
Default value 70
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.11 Protective time for applying to channel (RmsT2, 100ms)

Full name Protection time for applying to channel
Abbreviation RmsT2
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T2.

l Timer start condition: The old channel sends the “RADIO APPLY” mes-
sage.
l Timer stop condition: Channel request succeeds and the old channel re-
ceives the “RADIO AVAILABLE” message; or the channel request fails
Description
and the “RADIO UNAVAILABLE” message is received; or the “RAIO PRO-
CEEDING” message is received in queuing.
l Timeout action:
If the reason of channel application is assignment, in case of IPA, BSC
returns assignment failure to MSC if the number of assignment requests
2-42

is greater than one. If the number is not greater than one, BSC returns
assignment failure to MSC and clears target channel instances.
If the reason of channel application is directed retry, BSC returns
assignment failure to MSC and clears target channel instances.
If the reason of channel application is handover, BSC clears target
channel instances and the service returns to the original channel.
Value Range 20 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.12 Protective time for link establishment response (RmsT3,

100ms)
Full name Protection time for link establishment response
Abbreviation RmsT3
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is T3 timer.

l Timer start condition: RANCS instance sends "ESTABLISH IND" to RANA
instance.
Description l Timer stop condition: RANCS instance receives the "CONNECT CONF"
sent by RANA instance, or the "CONNECT FAIL" when RANA fails to es-
tablish the link.
l Timeout action: BSC releases this service.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
2-43

Relationship None
2.4.13 Protective time for P0 confirms the message HO/ASS COM

(RmsT4, 100ms)
Full name Protective time for P0 confirms the message HO/ASS COM
Abbreviation RmsT4
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is T4 timer.

l Timer start condition: After RANCS receives the "HO COM" or "ASS COM"
message of MS and forwards it to RANA.
Description
l Timer stop condition: RANCS receives acknowledgement of "HO COM"
or "ASS COM" message by RANA.
Value Range 10 ~ 80
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.14 Encryption mode modification time (RmsT5, 100ms)

Full name Encryption mode modification time
Abbreviation RmsT5
3GPP Name None
2-44

3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T5, used to supervise modification process of

encryption mode, that is, the timer that waits for MS response after configuring
radio encryption mode.
l Timer Start: T5 timer starts when BSC receives CIPHER MODE COM-
Description MAND message from MSC.
l Timer Stop: T5 timer suspends when BSC receives CIPHER MODE COM-
PLETE message from MS.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send BSSAP CIPHER
MODE REJECT message to MSC.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.15 SAPI3 link establishment time (RmsT6, 100ms)

Full name SAPI3 link establishment time
Abbreviation RmsT6
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Timer T6 supervises link establishment of SAPI3.

l Timer start: timer T6 starts when BSC receives the DTAP (SAPI = 3) mes-
sage from MSC and there is no SAPI3 link.
Description l Timer stop: timer T6 stops when BSC receives the ESTABLISH CONFIRM
message from BTS.
l Overtime action: When timer T6 expires, the BSSMAP SAPI"n" REJECT
message will be sent to MSC.
Unit 100 ms
2-45

Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.16 External handover protective time (RmsT8, 100ms)

Full name External handover protective time
Abbreviation RmsT8
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer rmsT8, monitoring external handover process.

l Timer start condition: rmsT8 starts after handover command is sent in
Serve state while RANCS instance shall be handovered externally.
Description
l Timer stop condition: rmsT8 timer stops if RANCS instance receives HO
COMCLEAR CMD (handover success) or UM HO FAIL (handover failed).
l Timeout action: BSC releases the service.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.17 Protective time for No.7 signal instantaneous disconnection

(T3, 100ms)
Full name Protective time for No.7 signal instantaneous disconnection
2-46

Abbreviation T3
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This timer is configured to prevent from signal instantaneous disconnection

and wrong actions.
If disconnection duration of no.7 link exceeds timer protective time, global
resetting is issued. If no signaling point reachable event is received during
delay time, no.7 link is considered as disconnection and global resetting
process begins; if reachable signaling point is received during delay time,
Description no.7 link is considered as instantaneous disconnection.
l Start condition: BSC periodically detects whether MSC office direction
states are all disconnected or receives MSC/SLMC/iTC reset message.
l Stop condition: BSC receives MSC reachable message.
l Timeout action: In case the opposite office is unreachable, BSC clears
the blocked bit and unequipped status bits of opposite office and sends
the "MSC Reset" message to global resetting process.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.18 Protective time that PO responses external handover

completion message (RmsT7, 100ms)
Full name Protective time that PO responses external handover completion message
Abbreviation RmsT7
3GPP Name T7
2-47

This parameter is timer rmsT7, indicating the protective time for waiting for
PO response to external handover completion message.
l Timer start condition: It starts when RANCS sends the HANDOVER RE-
QUIRED message to MSC.
l Timer stop condition: It stops when RANCS instance receives HAN-
Description
DOVER COMMAND response from MSC.
l Timeout action: BSC clears the channel application reason, records the
number of outgoing handover attempts and outgoing handover request
failures, punishes target cell, and waits for new handover decision to orig-
inate handover.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 150
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.19 HBTS scan begin time (HBTSScanBT)

Full name HBTS scan begin time
Abbreviation HBTSScanBT
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the begin time of HBTS scanning.
Value Range 0 ~ 23
Unit None
Default value 3 (indicates 3 o'clock)
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters HBTS scan site number
2-48

If HBTS scan site number (HBTSScanSiteNum) is set to 0, this parameter

Relationship
can be configured but invalid.
2.4.20 HBTS scan cycle (HBTSScanCyc, 3600s)

Full name HBTS scan cycle
Abbreviation HBTSScanCyc
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the HBTS scanning cycle.

l Start conation: Periodic frequency calibration is started when the
Description system receives new periodic frequency calibration message.
l Stop condition: The old periodic frequency calibration message is
killed.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit 3600 s
Default value 24
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters HBTS scan site number

Relationship
2.5 Timer 2
The interface of timer 2 parameters is shown in Figure 2-5.
2-49

Figure 2-5 Timer 2 Parameters
2.5.1 Protective time for RF channel release (RmsT9, 100ms)

Full name Protective time for RF channel release
Abbreviation RmsT9
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T9.

l Timer start condition: T9 starts when the "RF CHANNEL RELEASE" mes-
sage is sent to BTS when RANCS instance is released.
Description
l Timer stop condition: T9 stops when RANCS instance receives the "RF
CHANNEL RELEASE ACKNOWLEDGE" response from BTS.
l Timeout action: BSC releases the service instance.
Value Range 10 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-50

2.5.2 Queue period of assignment (RmsT11, 100ms)

Full name Queue period of assignment
Abbreviation RmsT11
3GPP Name T11
This parameter is T11 timer. This parameter indicates the maximum allowable
queuing time for assignment attempts.
l Start condition: The assignment queue function is enabled. If the assign-
Description ment request for channel application fails, the timer starts when the re-
quest is put in the queue.
l Stop condition: Effective channel resource is obtained.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-01-003 Queuing
Relationship None
2.5.3 Acknowledgment interval for periodic status (RmsT12, 100ms)

Full name Acknowledgment interval for periodic status
Abbreviation RmsT12
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-51

This parameter is timer T12, indicating the interval of periodic status

acknowledgement.
l Timer start condition: T12 timer starts initially when RANCS receives the
"CONNECT CONF" message from RANA. Timer decides to perform ac-
tivity check at peer end. After that the timer starts periodically.
Description
l Timer stop time: T12 timer stops when RANCS instance receives RE-
LEASE TYPE message.
l Timeout action: BSC restarts the timer if the number of timeout times does
not reach the maximum value, and releases the service instance if the
number of timeout times reaches the maximum value.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.4 Mode modification process time (RmsT13, 100ms)

Full name Mode modification process time
Abbreviation RmsT13
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is T13 timer. It supervises BTS and MS modes modification

process. Mode modification refers to modify channel mode. When there
is not SDCCH and FACCH is allocated, new channel is not allocated after
assignment, but modify the modes.
l Timer start condition: When BSC sends the “MODE MODIFY” message
Description to BTS and sends the “CHANNEL MODE MODIFY” message to MS.
l Timer stop condition: When BSC receives the “MODE MODIFY
ACK/NACK” message from BTS and the “CHANNEL MODE MODIFY”
message from MS.
l Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, the BSC will send BSSAP AS-
SIGNMENT FAILURE message to MSC.
2-52

Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.5 Protective time of UM assignment completion (RmsT14,

100ms)
Full name Protective time of UM assignment completion
Abbreviation RmsT14
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T14, indicating the protective time of UM assignment

completion.
l Start condition: BSC sends Ass/Ho Com message from target instance to
Description source instance.
l Stop condition: The target instance receives the "Ass/Ho Com Ack" mes-
sage from source instance.
Value Range 10 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-53

2.5.6 Waiting time for oriented retry (RmsT16, 100ms)

Full name Waiting time for oriented retry
Abbreviation RmsT16
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When attempting oriented retry, if target cell has not been gained through
inspection, you shall configure rmsT16 to wait for receiving measurement
report, and then check if oriented retry is conducted at target cell after rmsT16
is timeout. This process can be repeated for several times.
l Start condition: The source instance starts directed retry attempts after
Description being notified that radio channel resource application fails.
l Stop condition: None.
l Timeout action: If the number of timeout times exceeds the maximum
value, BSC sends assignment failure message to MSC and waits for mes-
sage clearance. If the number does not reach the maximum value, BSC
restarts directed retry.
Value Range 20 ~ 60
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.7 Queue timer for handover (RmsTqho, 100ms)

Full name Queue timer for handover
Abbreviation RmsTqho
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-54

This parameter indicates the maximum allowable queuing time for handover
attempts.
l Start time: The handover queue function is enabled. The handover re-
Description quest for channel application fails. The time is calculated when handover
is queued for resource allocation.
l Stop condition: Effective channel resource is obtained.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.8 First overload period of flow traffic control (mT11, 100ms)

Full name First overload period of flow traffic control
Abbreviation mT11
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Overload contains overloads of CPU, MSC signaling point, MSC service,

and CCCH.
In cell overload conditions, BSC adopts a timer mT11 for traffic flow control.
Description
This clock is used together with mT12 to modify the parameter “ACCESS
CONTROL” configured for the cell and notify MS via the system information
for flow control. The value of timer must be less than that of timer mT12.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-04-001 BSC Load Control
2-55

Relationship None
2.5.9 Second overload period of flow traffic control (mT12, 100ms)

Full name Second overload period of flow traffic control
Abbreviation mT12
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Overload contains overloads of CPU, MSC signaling point, MSC service,

and CCCH.
In cell overload conditions, BSC adopts a timer mT12 for traffic flow
control. The mT12 timer in combination with mT11 timer modifies ACCESS
CONTROL parameter in the cell. BSC notifies the MS to achieve flow control
through system information.
The value of timer must be more than that of mT11 timer. The two clocks
Description control the cell flow as follows: When the network receives the overload
message for the first time, the system decreases the flow by one level, and
starts mT11 and mT12. The OVERLOAD message during mT11 period will be
ignored. If the OVERLOAD message is received between mT11 and mT12,
the flow will be decreased by another level and both mT11 and mT12 will be
restarted. If BSC does not receive OVERLOAD message after mT12 timer
stops, the flow increases to one more level, and the mT12 timer restarts.
Lower grade and higher grade represent different proportion to reject service.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 150
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-56

2.5.10 Time of micro-micro handover delay (Tmicro, 100ms)

Full name Time of micro-micro handover delay
Abbreviation Tmicro
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In micro-micro handover control, a delay time value is required (the timer

value). Timer Start: relevant timer starts instantly when a call enters a micro
cell. Timer Stop: relevant timer stops when it reaches the set value. Existing
Description
call can use neighboring micro cell in the same layer only when the timer
stops. In this way, it could prevent fast moving mobiles staying in the micro
cell layer.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-05-02-008 Multi-layer Cell Structure
Relationship None
2.5.11 BSIC decoding period (Tbsic, 100ms)

Full name BSIC decoding period
Abbreviation Tbsic
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-57

The parameter Tbsic defines a period, which is calculated from call

establishment or handover completion (inter-cell or intra-cell). TC/I evaluation
is considered as unreliable during this period, thus, handover to a special
TRX is not allowed. During this period, MS can decode BSIC that interferes
with neighboring cells before handover procedure starts.
Description
This parameter is only valid in concentric circle case.
l Start condition: It starts when the system initializes handover or estab-
lishes a call.
l Timeout action: BSC sets BSIC start and end status as invalid.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
ZGO-05-02-009 Concentric Circle Technology

Relevant Features
ZGO-04-02-005 Co-BCCH
Relationship None
2.5.12 Handover protecting timer to WCDMA/FDD (RmsT3121,

100ms)
Full name Handover protecting timer to WCDMA/FDD
3GPP Name T3121
Timer T3121, protection time after sending inter-system to utran handover

command (UM) to UE.
l Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends "inter-system to utran han-
dover command" message to MS.
Description
l Timer stop: the timer stops when BSC receives "CLEAR COMMAND"
message from MSC or "HANDOVER FAILURE" message from MS.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send CLEAR RE-
QUEST message to MSC.
2-58

Value Range 1 ~ 650
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.13 Immediate assignment period (RmsT3101, 100ms)

Full name Immediate assignment period
3GPP Name T3101
This timer indicates the time period for the instant assigning process.
l Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends IMMEDIATE ASSIGN-
MENT COMMAND message.
Description l Timer Stop: The timer stops when BSC receives ESTABLISH INDICA-
TION message.
l Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, the BSC will send CHANNEL
RELEASE message to BTS.
Value Range 10 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
Related interfaces Um interface, Abis interface
2-59

2.5.14 Handover period of source cell (RmsT3103, 100ms)

Full name Handover period of source cell
3GPP Name T3103
This timer indicates the time period for internal handover process of BSC.
l Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends HANDOVER COMMAND
message to MS.
l Timer Stop: The timer suspends when BSC receives HANDOVER COM-
Description
PLETE message on a new channel or HANDOVER FAILURE message
on an old channel from MS.
l Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, the BSC will send a CLEAR
REQUEST message to MSC, and the new channel is released.
Value Range 0 ~ 300
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.15 Assignment period (RmsT3107, 100ms)

Full name Assignment period
3GPP Name T3107
2-60

This timer indicates the time period for assignment period and internal
handover of a cell..
l Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT
COMMAND message to MS.
Description l Timer Stop: The timer stops when BSC receives RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT
COMPLETE message or RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message.
l Overtime Action: If this time is overtime, in the case of assignment, the
former and new channel will be released; in the case of cell internal han-
dover, the BSC will send a CLEAR REQUEST message to the MSC.
Value Range 0 ~ 300
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.16 Channel release period (RmsT3109, 100ms)

Full name Channel release period
3GPP Name T3109
This timer supervises the channel release process.

l Timer start condition: The timer starts when BSC sends RIL3_RR CHAN-
NEL RELEASE message to MS.
Description l Timer stop condition: The timer stops when BSC receives RELEASE IN-
DICATION message from BTS (when BTS receives DISC frame from MS).
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send CHANNEL RE-
LEASE message to MS.
Value Range 0 ~ 400
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
2-61

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.17 Channel deactivation delay (RmsT3111, 100ms)

Full name Channel deactivation delay
3GPP Name T3111
After releasing the UM interface radio link layer, in order to make sure the
radio link is disconnected, BSC sets a period of protection time rmsT3111.
Releases the wireless channel and deactivates it after rmsT3111 timer stops.
Description l Timer start: rmsT3111 timer starts when BSC receives RELEASE INDI-
CATION message.
l Overtime Action: If rmsT3111 timer is overtime, the BSC will send RF
CHANNEL RELEASE message to BTS.
Value Range 1~5
Unit 100 ms
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.18 Continue timer for mode modify (TModeModifyConn, 100ms)

Full name Continue timer for mode modify
Abbreviation TModeModifyConn
2-62

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is connection delay timer. This timer is used to wait for
connection finished after sending connection request, including Abis
connection and TC connection.
Description l Start condition: BTS sends a connection request.
l Stop condition: BSC waits for the message about the completion of all
connections.
Value Range 50 ~ 70
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.19 Handover protecting time to UTRAN (mT7, 100ms)

Full name Handover protecting time to UTRAN
Abbreviation mT7
3GPP Name T7
This timer is used to send HANDOVER REQUIRED to MSC, where target

cell is UTRAN cell, waiting for response from MSC.
l Timer start: this timer starts if BSC sends HANDOVER REQUIRED to
MSC, where target cell is UTRAN cell.
Description
l Timer stop: it stops when BSC receives HANDOVER COMMAND from
MSC.
l Timeout action: configure penalty for UTRAN target cell carried in HAN-
DOVER REQUIRED.
Unit 100 ms
2-63

Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.20 Time of destination instance waiting for available resources

when forced disconnection (RmsT15, 100ms)
Time of destination instance waiting for available resources when forced dis-
Full name
connection
Abbreviation RmsT15
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T15, indicating the time available for target instance
to wait for resource in forced release.
l Timer start condition: When the target instance decides forced release, it
will send the "PREEMPT APPLY" message to the released object.
l Timer stop condition: The target instance receives the “RESOURCE
Description
AVAILABLE” message from the released object, indicating that the
resources are available.
l Timeout action: BSC acquires the forced release instance. If the instance
exists, BSC initiates forced release attempts and starts the timer of re-
source waiting after forced release.
Value Range 10 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-64

2.5.21 Protecting time of FUC response to system message

broadcast (BcProtect, 100ms)
Full name Protecting time of FUC response to system message broadcast
Abbreviation BcProtect
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is the protection timer for waiting for FUC response to system
message broadcast. FUC response is used to ensure BTS correctly receives
system message.
l Start condition: BSC sends system message to BTS.
Description l Stop condition: BSC receives the response of system message from BTS.
l Timeout action: If the number of timeout times does not reach the maxi-
mum value, BSC re-sends system message to BTS and restarts the timer.
If the number reaches the maximum value, BSC does not send system
message to BTS and clears the cell instance information of BTS.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.22 HO performed ack timer (TwaitHoPFMAck, 100ms)

Full name HO performed ack timer
Abbreviation TwaitHoPFMAck
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-65

When using IP carrier at user plane of interface A, because TC is placed at

MGW, CN shall be informed to replace codec during intra-BSC handover. CN
replacement codec is triggered by HANDOVER PERFORMED message.
To ensure MSC has received this message and successfully command
MGS to replace codec against obstacles at speech aspect, HANDOVER
PERFORMED ACK message is added. This timer is used to wait for
Description HANDOVER PERFORMED ACK message from MSC.
l Timer start: it starts when BSC sends HANDOVER PERFORMED mes-
sage to MSC.
l Timer stop: it stops when BSC receives HANDOVER PERFORMED ACK
message from MSC.
l Timeout action: release call while sending CLEAR REQUEST message
to MSC.
Value Range 50 ~ 70
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.23 Round trip delay (RtdDefault, 20ms)

Full name Round trip delay
Abbreviation RtdDefault
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When handover is performed in AMR, BSC sends the pre-handover notification

message to BTS to make BTS not implement voice rate adjustment.
l Timer start: When BSC sends the pre-handover notification message to
BTS, the timer is started.
Description
l Timer stop: When BSC receives the response for pre-handover notification
message from BTS, the timer is stopped.
l Overtime action: BSC sends the handover command to MS.
This parameter is supported from version 6.20.21.
2-66

Management
Object BSC
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit 20 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces Abis Interface
Impact on
service None
2.6 GPRS Maximum Retrying Times

The interface of GPRS maximum retrying times is shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 GPRS Max Retrying Times Parameters
2.6.1 MAX times of BVC block retry (BVCBlkMax)

Full name MAX times of BVC block retry
Abbreviation BVCBlkMax
2-67

3GPP Name BVC-BLOCK-RETRIES
3GPP reference 3GPP TS48.018 V5.13.0
If the PTP BVC must be blocked due to OAM intervention or equipment

faults (disable blocking/unblocking the signaling BVC), BSS will first set the
BVC status as “Blocked” and discard the uplink service data.
To notify SGSN to stop sending downlink data, BSS initiates BVC blocking
procedure. BSC repeats BVC blocking procedure after sending BVC BLOCK
message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive BVC BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE
message from SGSN in BSSGPT1, then BVC blocking repeats for a
maximum of N times.
BSC stops BVC blocking and notifies OMS for N times if there is no answer.
Description N depends on maximum retries of BVC BLOCK.
Value Range 3 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
Related interfaces Gb interface
2.6.2 MAX times of BVC unblock retry (BVCUnblkMax)

Full name MAX times of BVC unblock retry
Abbreviation BVCUblkMax
3GPP Name BVC-UNBLOCK-RETRIES
2-68

If the PTP BVC must be unblocked due to the OAM intervention or recovery
of the equipment fault (disable blocking/unblocking the signaling BVC), BSS
will first set the BVC status as “Unblocked”.
To notify SGSN to start sending the downlink data, BSS will initiate the BVC
unblocking procedure. BSC repeats the BVC unblocking procedure after
sending the BVC UNBLOCK message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive the
BVC UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN in BSSGPT1 then
BVC unblocking repeats for a maximum of N times.
BSC stops BVC unblocking and notifies OMS for N times if there is no
Description answer. N depends on maximum retries of BVC UNBLOCK.
Value Range 3 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.3 MAX times of BVC reset retry (BVCRestMax)

Full name MAX times of BVC reset retry
Abbreviation BVCRestMax
3GPP Name BVC-RESET-RETRIES
To keep the initial status consistent between the two BVC sides, the “Reset
BVC” process must be initiated in the following cases: 1) system faults that
affect the BVC function in BSS or SGSN (such as restart upon power-on);
2) lower layer network service entity failure (such as frame relay fault); 3)
lower layer network service entity capability update (for example, frame
relay capability changed from 0kbps to greater than 0kbps); 4) change of the
corresponding relationship between BVC and the cell.
For faults that affect NSE, BSC initiates Signaling BVC RESET procedure.
For faults that affect a single BVC, BSC initiates the PTP BVC RESET
procedure. BSC initiates all PTP BVC RESET procedure for corresponding
Description NSE after a signaling BVC reset procedure.
2-69

After the BVC RESET message is sent to SGSN, if the BVC RESET
ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN cannot be received within
BSSGPT2, the BVC RESET process is repeated.
The BVC RESET process could be repeated for N times at most. If there is
no answer after the N times, BSC stops BVC RESET and notifies OMS. N
depends on the maximum number of retries of BVC RESET.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.4 MAX times of NS block retry (NSBlkMax)

Full name MAX times of NS block retry
Abbreviation NSBlkMax
3GPP Name NS-BLOCK-RETRIES
BSC repeats the blocking process when sending the NS BLOCK message
to SGSN. If NS BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN fails to
reach BSC within specified NS_T1 time then BSC repeats the NS BLOCK
message for a maximum of N times.
BSC stops BLOCK procedure and notify OMS for N times if there is no
Description answer. N depends on maximum retries of NS BLOCK.
Value Range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
2-70

Relationship None
2.6.5 MAX times of NS unblock retry (NSUnblkMax)

Full name MAX times of NS unblock retry
Abbreviation NSUnblkMax
3GPP Name NS-UNBLOCK-RETRIES
BSC repeats UNBLOCK procedure after sending NS UNBLOCK message to

SGSN. If BSC fails to receive the NS BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message
from SGSN within NS_T1 timer, then BSC repeats the NS UNBLOCK
message for a maximum of N times.
BSC stops UNBLOCK procedure and notify OMS for N times if there is no
Description answer. N depends on maximum retries of NS UNBLOCK.
Value Range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.6 MAX times of NS alive retry (NSAliveMax)

Full name MAX times of NS alive retry
Abbreviation NSAliveMax
3GPP Name NS-ALIVE-RETRIES
2-71

BSC repeats alive procedure after sending NS Alive message to SGSN.

If BSC fails to receive NS Alive ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN
within NS_T4 timer then BSC repeats NS Alive message for a maximum of N
times. NS Alive process is specified by the procotol, used to test connection
condition of NSVC terminal side.
BSC stops BSC Alive procedure and notify OMS for N times if there is no
Description answer. N depends on maximum retries of NS Alive.
Value Range 0 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.7 MAX times of suspend retry (SuspendMax)

Full name MAX times of suspend retry
Abbreviation SuspendMax
3GPP Name SUSPEND-RETRIES
MS first sends a SUSPEND message to BSS over SDCCH when a Class

B GPRS MS is about to initiate a voice service. BSS initiates suspending
procedure to SGSN to notify SGSN to stop sending PS paging and downlink
packet data after BSS receives the message.
BSC repeats suspending procedure after sending SUSPEND message to
SGSN. If BSC fails to receive SUSPEND ACK/NACK message from SGSN
in BSSGPT3 then BSC repeats the suspending procedure for a maximum
of N times.
BSC stops suspending and notify OMS for N times if there is no answer. N
Description depends on maximum suspending retries.
Value Range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
2-72

Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.8 MAX times of resume retry (ResumeMax)

Full name MAX times of resume retry
Abbreviation ResumeMax
3GPP Name RESUME-RETRIES
BSSGP layer parameters. when GPRS-attached MS leaves a special mode,

BSS adopts one of the following strategies:
1. Notify MS of carrying out "route area upgrade".
2. Notify SGSN of recovering the GPRS service.
In case of Routing Area Update, MS and SGSN directly negotiate GMM
status. With the “Resume” method (usually for the MS in the packet
transmission status), BSS will initiate the “RESUME” process to SGSN for the
purpose of notifying SGSN to start the normal packet downlink transmission
action. If BSC fails to receive the RESUME ACK/NACK message from SGSN
in BSSGPT4, then repeats Resume procedure for a maximum of N times.
BSC stops the Resume procedure and notify OMS N times if there is no
Description answer. N depends on the maximum times of resuming retry.
Value Range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-73

2.6.9 MAX times of radio access capabilities update retry

(UpdateMax)
Full name MAX times of radio access capabilities update retry
Abbreviation UpdateMax
3GPP Name RA-CAPABILITY-UPDATE-RETRIES
BSSGP layer parameters. When MS is establishing uplink/downlink TBF,

BSS requires information about the radio access capability of MS. BSS
obtains such information from SGSN through Radio Access Capabilities
Update procedure.
BSC repeats this procedure after sending the RADIO ACCESS
CAPABILITIES UPDATE message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive the
RADIO ACCESS CAPABILITIES UPDATE ACK/NACK message from
SGSN in BSSGPT5 then the Radio Access Capabilities Update procedure
repeats for a maximum of N times. After N times if there is no answer, then
BSC stops Radio Access Capabilities Update procedure and notify OMS.
Description N depends on the maximum update retry times.
Value Range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.10 Max times of PFC create retry (DownLoadBssPFCMax)

Full name Max times of PFC create retry
Abbreviation DownLoadBssPFCMax
3GPP Name DOWNLOAD-BSS-PFC-RETRIES
2-74

Max retry times to create PFC. If "Creat BSS PFC" is not received before timer
BSSGPT6 is timeout, BSS sends "Download BSS PFC" message according
to max times of retrying to create PFC. If "Creat BSS PFC" is not received still
after trying DownLoadBSSPRCMax+1, the process is completed and inform
Description O&M.
Value Range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
ZGO-01-02-004 Streaming Service Policies

ZGO-01-02-003 Service based QoS
Relevant Features ZGB-01-02-001 Quality of Service (QoS)
Relationship None
2.6.11 Max times of PFC modify retry (ModifyBssPFCMax)

Full name Max times of PFC modify retry
Abbreviation ModifyBssPFCMax
3GPP Name MODIFY-BSS-PFC-RETRIES
Max retry times to modify PFC. If "Modify BSS PFC Ack" is not received before
timer BSSGPT8 is timeout, BSS sends "Modify BSS PFC" message accord-
ing to max times of retrying to modify PFC. If "Modify BSS PFC Ack" is not
received still after trying ModifyBssPFCMax +1, the process is completed and
Description inform O&M.
Value Range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline

2-75

Relationship None
2.7 GPRS Timer

The interface of GPRS timer parameters is shown in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 GPRS Timer Parameters
2.7.1 BVC block/unblock retry time (BssgpT1, 100ms)

Full name BVC block/unblock retry time
Abbreviation BssgpT1
3GPP Name T1
2-76

It monitors BSSGP blocking/unblocking process.

Global process in BSC central module MP uses the timer value. BSS initiates
BVC blocking/unblocking procedure for a point-to-point BVC in case of OAM
intervention or device faults. BSC repeats this procedure, if SGSN does
not return BVC BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACK/NACK messages. The number of
sending times increments. The interval between the messages is the BVC
blocking/unblocking retry time. The system tries retransmission if T1 times
out but does not exceed the maximum sending times. If T1 exceeds the
maximum sending times, the system ignores it.
The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
l Start condition: BSC originates "BVC BLOCK/UNBLOCK" procedure.
l Stop condition: BSC receives the "BVC BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACK/NACK"
message.
Description l Timeout action: BSC retransfers the procedure for N times (configurable).
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.2 BVC reset retry time (BssgpT2, 100ms)

Full name BVC reset retry time
3GPP Name T2
2-77

It monitors BSSGP reset procedure.

BSS initiates "BVC reset" process when BVC (including PTP BVC and
signaling BVC) is required to be reset (disconnection to connection at Gb
interface, and cell is changed from GPRS support to GPRS/EDGE support)
due to certain reason. BSC repeats the procedure if SGSN does not
return BVC RESET ACK/NACK message. The number of sending times
increments. The interval between the messages is the BVC reset retry time.
The system tries retransmission if T2 times out but does not exceed the
maximum sending times. If T2 times out and exceeds the maximum sending
times, the corresponding BVC database status is set to BLOCK.
The conditions of timer start, stop, and time actions are as follows:
l
à Start condition: The timer starts when BSC initiates BVC RESET
procedure.
à Stop condition: The timer stops when BSC receives the "BVC RE-
SET ACK/BACK" message from SGSN.
Description à Timeout action: BSC retransfers for N times (configurable).
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.3 Suspend retry time (BssgpT3, 100ms)

Full name Suspend retry time
3GPP Name T3
2-78

Class B MS notifies the network to suspend packet service when MS is ready

to perform a voice service. BSS initiates to suspend SGSN procedure after
receiving SUSPEND message from MS BSS repeats the procedure if SGSN
does not return SUSPEND ACK/NACK message. In addition, the number
of sending times increments. The interval between the messages is the
suspend retry time. The system tries retransmission if T3 times out but does
not exceed the maximum sending times. If T3 times out and exceeds the
maximum sending times, the system stops the SUSPEND procedure.
l Timer start: It starts while BSC initiates SUSPEND SGSN procedure.
l Stop: It stops when BSC receives the "SUSPEND ACK/NACK" message.
Value Range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.4 Resume retry time (BssgpT4, 100ms)

Full name Resume retry time
3GPP Name T4
This parameter monitors BSSGP resuming procedure.

Service process in BSC peripheral module MP uses the timer value. BSS
initiates resuming procedure to SGSN when GPRS-attached MS is not in
dedicated mode and BSS uses Notify SGSN to resume GPRS service policy.
BSS repeats the procedure if SGSN does not return RESUME ACK/NACK
message. In addition, the number of sending times increments. The
interval between the messages is the resuming retry time. The system tries
retransmission if T4 times out but does not exceed the maximum sending
Description times. If T4 times out and exceeds the maximum sending times, the system
2-79

stops the resuming procedure and notifies MS to originate routing area

update procedure.
l Timer start: It starts while BSC initiates Resume procedure.
l Stop: It stops when BSC receives the "RESUME ACK/NACK" message.
l Timeout action: BSC retransfers the procedure for N times (configurable).
Value Range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.5 Access capability update retry time (BssgpT5, 100ms)

Full name Access capability update retry time
3GPP Name T5
This parameter monitors BSSGP radio access capability update procedure.

Service process in BSC peripheral module MP uses the timer value. BSC
repeats the "Radio Access Capability Update" procedure after BSS initiates
the "RA_CAPABILITY" procedure to SGSN and if SGSN does not return the
"RA_CAPABILITY UPDATE ACK/NACK" message. In addition, the number
of sending times increments. The interval between the messages is the retry
time for radio access capability update. The system tries retransmission if
T5 times out but does not exceed the maximum sending times. If T5 times
out and exceeds the maximum sending times, the system stops the Radio
Access Capability Update procedure.
l Start: BSC initiates the Radio Access Capability Update procedure.
l Stop: BSC receives the "RA_CAPABILITY UPDATE ACK/NACK" mes-
sage returned from SGSN.
2-80

Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.6 PFC creating retry time (BssgpT6, 100ms)

Full name PFC creating retry time
3GPP Name T6
This parameter indicates the PFC creating retry time.

After BSS sends "Create PFC" procedure to SGSN, BSS repeats the process
if SGSN does not return "CREATE PFC ACK/NACK" message. The interval
between the messages is the PFC creating retry time.
l Timer start: It starts while BSC initiates the Download PFC procedure.
l Timer stop: It stops while receiving the SGSN Create PFC message.
Value Range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-81

2.7.7 PFC modifying retry time (BssgpT8, 100ms)

Full name PFC modifying retry time
3GPP Name T8
After BSS sends "Modify PFC" procedure to SGSN, BSS repeats the process
if SGSN does not return the "MODIFY PFC ACK/NACK" message. The
interval between the messages is the PFC creating retry time.
l Timer start: It starts while BSC initiates Modify BSS PFC procedure.
l Timer stop: It stops while receiving the "SGSN Modify BSS PFC Ack"
message.
Value Range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
2.7.8 BVC flow control period (CellFcPer, 10ms)

Full name BVC flow control period
Abbreviation CellFcPer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-82

This parameter is the BVC leakage ratio measurement period in the ‘BVC
Flow Control’ process, that is, BVC long measurement period. To provide
reference to the BVC flow control at SGSN side, the BSSGP process
at BSS side periodically measures the current BVC leakage ratio. BSC
initiates the "BVC flow control" procedure unconditionally when the long
measurement timer overflows. SGSN confirms to BSC if the difference
of leakage ratios between the two times exceeds CellFcThs. BSC also
initiates "BVC flow control" procedure with SGSN confirmation if the short
measurement timer overflows, and the difference of the leakage ratio
between the two timers exceed CellFcThs.
l Start: The timer starts during cell creation.
l Stop: The timer stops if the cell is blocked or removed.
Description l Timeout: BSC originates the "BVC flow control" process unconditionally.
Unit 10 ms
Default value 3000
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-05-016 BVC Flow Control (in DL)
Relationship None
2.7.9 MS flow control period (MsFcPer, 10ms)

Full name MS flow control period
Abbreviation MsFcPer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-83

This parameter is the MS leakage ratio measurement period in the "MS

Flow Control" process.
For reference of flow control at the SGSN side, the BSSGP process at
the BSS side periodically measures the current leakage ratio of each
MS. When the statistic timer overflows, the "MS Flow Control" process
is initiated unconditionally.
The conditions of timer start, stop, and time actions are as follows:
l Start condition: BSSGP in idle state receives downlink LLC frame.
l Stop condition: Downlink LLC frames are completely transmitted.
Description l Timeout: BSC originates the "MS flow control" process unconditionally.
Unit 10 ms
Default value 3000
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-05-017 MS Flow Control (in DL)
Relationship None
2.7.10 Timer that monitors block/unblock procedure (NS_T1,

100ms)
Full name Timer that monitors block/unblock procedure
Abbreviation NS_T1
3GPP Name Tns-block
This parameter is the timer that monitors the blocking/unblocking procedure

of NSVC at NS layer. The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions
are as follows:
l Start condition: BSC initiates the NS blocking/unblocking procedure.
l Stop condition: BSC receives the response to SGSN blocking/unblocking
from SGSN.
l Timout action: BSC repeats the NSVC blocking/unblocking procedure
for N times (corresponding to the contents of NS-BLOCK-RETRIES in
Description 3GPP). The timer restarts.
2-84

Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.11 Timer that monitors reset procedure (NS_T2, 100 ms)

Full name Timer that monitors reset procedure
Abbreviation NS_T2
3GPP Name Tns-reset
This parameter is timer that monitors NSVC reset procedure at NS layer.

l Timer start: BSC initiates NSVC RESET procedure.
l Stop condition: BSC receives reset response from SGSN.
l Timeout action: BSC repeats NSVC reset procedure. When the maxi-
Description mum reset attempt period (NS_T5) is reached, the timer restarts.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-85

2.7.12 NC-cycle of NS-VC test process (NS_T3, 100 ms)

Full name NC-cycle of NS-VC test process
Abbreviation NS_T3
3GPP Name Tns-test
This parameter is the timer for monitoring NSVC link test process at NS layer.
The conditions of timer start, restart, and timeout actions are as follows:
l Start condition: The NSVC Reset process is complete (for FR) or the
Configuration process is complete (for IPGb).
l Restart condition: It restarts after receiving the "Alive Ack" from SGSN.
Description l Timeout action: BSC sends the "NS Alive" message on timeout.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 300
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.13 Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC (NS_T4, 100 ms)
Full name Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC
Abbreviation NS_T4
3GPP Name Tns-alive
This parameter is the timer that monitors alive process of NSVC at NS layer.
l Start condition: BSC receives the "NS Alive" message from test process.
l Stop condition: BSC receives Alive response from SGSN.
l Timeout action: BSC repeats the Alive process N times (corresponding
Description to the contents of NS-ALIVE-RETRIES in 3GPP).
Value Range 30
2-86

Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.14 Max attempt period of reset (NS_T5, 100 ms)

Full name Max attempt period of reset
Abbreviation NS_T5
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the maximum attempt period of reset. The

conditions of period start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
l Start condition: NSVC reset process starts.
l Stop condition: BSC receives SGSN reset response.
Description l Timeout action: BSC ends the NSVC reset process.
Value Range 1800
Unit 100 ms
Default value 1800
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.15 TFI and USF release timer (T3169, 10ms)

Full name TFI and USF release timer
Abbreviation T3169
2-87

3GPP Name T3169
This parameter is timer T3169. During the packet uplink transmission, if

N3101 or N3103 counter stops, BSS starts the T3169 timer. Network utilizes
TFI and USF resources on release when T3169 stops.
l Timer Start: T3169 timer starts when the counter N3101 = N3101_MAX
or the counter N3103 = N3103_MAX.
l Timer stop condition: None.
l Timeout action: BSC releases the USF and TFI resources.
If timer N3101=N3101_MAX or N3103=N3103_MAX, it indicates that MS
does not give response to BSC. In this case, take back TFI and USF
Description resource for reuse by BSC.
Unit 10 ms
Default value 500
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.16 TBF release timer (T3191, 10ms)

Full name TBF release timer
Abbreviation T3191
3GPP Name T3191
2-88

This parameter is timer T3169. The conditions of timer start, stop, and
timeout actions are as follows:
l Start/restart condition: During the packet downlink transmission, if RLC
data block is the final downlink data block to be transmitted, BSC sends
the RLC data block with the Final Block Identifier (FBI) domain as 1. It
contains an effective RRBP field to initialize the release of the downlink
TBF. Then the network starts or restarts T3191.
l Stop condition:
à For RLC acknowledged mode, MS finds all downlink blocks are col-
lected, MS should send the "PACKET DOWNLINK ACK" message
whose FAI domain is 1 on the uplink block specified by the RRBP do-
main. BSC stops T3191 if receiving the "PACKET DOWNLINK ACK"
message before T3191 times out.
à For RLC unacknowledged mode, MS sends the "PACKET CON-

TROL ACKNOWLEDGE" message in the uplink block specified by
RRBP domain. BSC stops T3191 if receiving the "PACKET DCON-
TROL ACKNOWLEDGE" message before T3191 times out.
Description l Timeout action: BSC releases this TBF.
Unit 10 ms
Default value 500
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.17 TBF release time of downlink transmission (T3193, 10ms)

Full name TBF release time of downlink transmission
Abbreviation T3193
3GPP Name T3193
2-89

This parameter is timer T3193 which is used for protection on TBF release
during downlink packet transmission. For details, see the description of
T3191. The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
l Start/restart: BSC stops T3191 and starts T3193 when receiving PACKET
CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message (RLC mode is unacknowledge-
ment mode) or PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message (RLC mode
is acknowledgement mode) with FAI field as 1.
l Stop: It stops when a new uplink TBF established on the network uses
the same TFI.
l Timeout: Release the TFI resource.
The value of this parameter must be greater than T3192 so that MS can
Description release the TFI prior to BSC.
Unit 10 ms
Default value 51
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.18 TBF protect time when radio link failure (T3195, 10ms)
Full name TBF protect time when radio link failure
Abbreviation T3195
3GPP Name T3195
This parameter is the protection time of downlink TBF when the radio link
fails or when the cell change leads to MS failure to respond.
l Start condition: T3195 starts when N3105=N3105_MAX.
Description l Timeout action: BSC can use this TFI again.
Unit 10 ms
2-90

Default value 500
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.19 PS channel delay release timer (PSRelDelay, 100ms)

Full name PS channel delay release timer
Abbreviation PSRelDelay
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is the timer for releasing the delay of dynamic conversion
from PDCH to TCH channel. The conditions of timer start, stop, and time
actions are as follows:
l Start condition: All uplink and downlink services at PDCH are released.
l Stop condition: PDCH is occupied by service TBF again.
Description l Timeout action: BSC releases PDTCH and converts it to TCH.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 300
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.8 AMR Half Method Parameters

The interface of AMR half method parameters is shown in Figure 2-8.
2-91

Figure 2-8 AMR Half Method Parameters
2.8.1 AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHalfAcs)

Full name AMR Half Active Codec Set
Abbreviation AmrHalfAcs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The code has 8 bits. Bit 6~ Bit 8: reserved; Bit 5: 7.40 kbps; Bit 4: 6.70
kbps …… Bit 2: 5.15 kbps; Bit 1: 4.75 kbps. ‘Yes’ represents ‘1’ and ‘No’
represents ‘0’. Four coding modes could be set at the most. Default code
Description is 00011110 (that is 30).
From 4.75 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, 5.90 kbit/s, 6.70 kbit/s to 7.40 kbit/s, value
Value Range range is Yes/No.
Unit None
Default value Default is [No, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes] in order.
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-01-01-003 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR)
Relevant parameters Start mode (AmrStartMode)
2-92

Relationship
l When only a value is configured as "No" within 5 elements in

AmrStartMode interface, value range is 1~4;
l When two values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in
l When three values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in
l When four values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in
AmrStartMode interface, value range is 1;
l When all five values are configured as "No" in AmrStartMode
interface, value range is null;
2.8.2 Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds)

Full name Thresholds of AMR
Abbreviation AmrThresholds
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The threshold of changing AMR mode includes five factors:

AmrThresholds1, AmrThresholds2, AmrThresholds3, AmrThresholds4,
and AmrThresholds5. Also, the following restricted conditions should be
met:
AmrThresholds1≤AmrThresholds2≤AmrThresholds3≤AmrThresh-
olds4≤AmrThresholds5
AmrThresholds1+AmrHysteresis1≤AmrThresholds2+AmrHystere-
sis2≤AmrThresholds3+AmrHysteresis3≤AmrThresholds4+AmrHystere-
Description sis4≤AmrThresholds5+AmrHysteresis5
2-93

Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Value range is 0~63.

l 0: 0.0 dB
l 1: 0.5 dB
l 2: 1.0 dB
...
Value Range l 63: 31.5 dB
Unit None
Default value [22, 25, 29, 34, 40]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.8.3 Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)

Full name Hysteresis of AMR
Abbreviation AmrHysteresis
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The hysteresis of changing AMR mode includes five factors:

AmrHysteresis1, AmrHysteresis2, AmrHysteresis3, AmrHysteresis4, and
AmrHysteresis5. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met:
AmrThresholds1 AmrHysteresis1≤AmrThresholds2 AmrHys-
teresis2≤AmrThresholds3 AmrHysteresis3≤AmrThresholds4
Description AmrHysteresis4≤AmrThresholds5AmrHysteresis5
Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Value range is 0~15.

l 0: 0.0 dB
l 1: 0.5 dB
l 2: 1.0 dB
......
Unit None
Default value [4, 5, 5, 6, 6]
Change mode Offline
2-94

Relationship None
2.8.4 Initial codec mode (IsAmrICM)

Full name Initial codec mode
Abbreviation IsAmrlCM
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Use the coding mode specified by Startmode
Value Range Start-mode codec, Initial codec mode
Unit None
Default value Startmode codec
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.8.5 Start mode (AmrStartMode)

Full name Start mode
Abbreviation AmrStartMode
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Startmode codec mode
2-95

The values are as follows:
l 1: Select the coding mode with lowest bit rate as the initial coding
mode.
l 2: Select the coding mode with the second lowest bit rate, if there is
more than one coding mode.
l 3: Select the coding mode with the third lowest bit rate, if there is more
than two coding modes.
l 4: Select the coding mode with the fourth lowest bit rate, if there are
Value Range more than three coding modes.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)
l When only a value is configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR

Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1~4;
l When two values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR
l When three values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR
Relationship
l When four values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR
Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1;
l When all values are configured as "No" for 5 elements in "AMR Half
Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is null;
2.8.6 Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb)

Full name Enable noise control
Abbreviation IsAmrNscb
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines whether AMR noise suppression is disabled, that

is, to suppress background noise and keep original voice quality.
l No: Enable noise suppression;
Description l Yes: Disable noise suppression;
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
2-96

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.9 AMR Full Method Parameters

The interface of AMR full method parameters is shown in Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 AMR Full Method Parameters
2.9.1 AMR Full Active Codec Set (ArmFullAcs)

Full name AMR full Active Codec Set
Abbreviation AmrFullAcs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The code has 8 bits. The code has 8 bits. Bit 8: 12.2 kbps; Bit 7: 10.2 kbps;
Bit 6: 7.95 kbps; Bit 5: 6.70 kbps … Bit 2: 5.15 kbps; Bit 1: 4.75 kbps. ‘Yes’
represents ‘1’ and ‘No’ represents ‘0’. Default code is 10101010 (that is
Description 170).
2-97

From 4.75 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, 5.90 kbit/s, 6.70 kbit/s, 7.40 kbit/s, 7.95 kbit/s,
Value Range 10.2 kbit/s to 12.2 kbit/s, value range is Yes/No.
Unit None
Default value Default is [No, Yes, No, Yes, No, Yes, No, Yes] in order.
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters Start mode (AmrStartMode)
l When four values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in

l When five values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in
l When six values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in
Relationship
l When seven values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in
AmrStartMode interface, value range is 1;
l When all eight values are configured as "No" in AmrStartMode
interface, value range is null;
2.9.2 Threshold of AMR (AmrThresholds)

Full name Thresholds of AMR
Abbreviation AmrThresholds
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The threshold of changing AMR mode includes seven factors:

AmrThresholds1, AmrThresholds2, AmrThresholds3, AmrThresholds4,
AmrThresholds5, AmrThresholds6, AmrThresholds7. Also, the following
restricted conditions shall be met:
AmrThresholds1≤AmrThresholds2≤AmrThresholds3≤AmrThresh-
olds4≤AmrThresholds5≤AmrThresholds6≤AmrThresholds7, AmrThresh-
olds1AmrHysteresis1≤AmrThresholds2AmrHysteresis2≤AmrThresholds3
AmrHysteresis3≤AmrThresholds4 AmrHysteresis4≤AmrThresholds5
Description AmrHysteresis7
2-98

Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. Value range is 0 ~ 63.

l 0: 0.0 dB;
l 1: 0.5 dB
l 2: 1.0 dB
......
Unit None
Default value [6, 9, 13, 18, 24, 31, 39]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.9.3 Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)

Full name Hysteresis of AMR
Abbreviation AmrHysteresis
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The hysteresis of changing AMR mode includes seven factors:

AmrHysteresis1, AmrHysteresis2, AmrHysteresis3, AmrHysteresis4,
AmrHysteresis5, AmrHysteresis6, AmrHysteresis7. Also, the following
restricted conditions shall be met:
AmrThresholds1 AmrHysteresis1≤AmrThresholds2 AmrHys-
teresis2≤AmrThresholds3 AmrHysteresis3≤AmrThresholds4
Description AmrHysteresis6≤AmrThresholds7AmrHysteresis7
Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. Value range is 0 ~ 15.

l 0: 0.0 dB
l 1: 0.5 dB
l 2: 1.0 dB
......
Unit None
Default value [3, 4, 3, 5, 5, 5, 6]
2-99

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.9.4 Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM)

Full name Initial codec mode
Abbreviation IsAmrICM
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Use the coding mode specified by Startmode
Value Range Start-mode codec, Initial codec mode
Unit None
Default value Startmode codec
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.9.5 Start mode (AmrStartMode)

Full name Start mode
Abbreviation AmrStartMode
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Startmode codec mode
2-100

l When four values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full
Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1~4;
l When five values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full
l When six values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full
l When seven values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR
full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1;
l When all values are configured as "No" for 8 elements in "AMR full Active
Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is null.
l 1: Select the coding mode with lowest bit rate as the initial coding mode.
l 2: Select the coding mode with the second lowest bit rate, if there is
more than one coding mode.
l 3: Select the coding mode with the third lowest bit rate, if there is more
than two coding modes.
l 4: Select the coding mode with the fourth lowest bit rate, if there are
Value Range more than three coding modes.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.9.6 Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb)

Full name Enable noise control
Abbreviation IsAmrNscb
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines whether AMR noise suppression is disabled, that

is, to suppress background noise and keep original voice quality.
l No: Enable noise suppression;
Description l Yes: Disable noise suppression;
2-101

Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10 GPRS Other Parameters 1

The interface of GPRS other parameters 1 is shown in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 GPRS Other Parameters 1
2.10.1 Cn
Full name Cn
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-102

This parameter is used to determine the increase of coding mode level.

Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel, the GPRS data block
may employ the CS-1 to CS-4 coding modes, with data rates 9.05 kbps,
13.4 kbps, 15.6 kbps, and 21.4 kbps, respectively. The low level coding
mode has higher error correction capability and lower data throughput.
User can choose different coding modes for each timeslot or even each
TBF.
During data transmission of GRPR, to reach the maximum radio
throughput, the network shall select the coding mode dynamically
according to the data rate requirement and radio transmission quality.
Good radio transmission quality means that the probability of the
retransmission of the error radio blocks is small. In this time the coding
mode that carries large data volume (that is, high level coding mode) can
be used.
For TBF (uplink and downlink) in the channel coding mode CSn (1≤n≤3), if
the number of data blocks transmitted consecutively and correctly exceeds
the predefined parameter Cn[n-1], the coding mode will be increased by
one level.
Subscript 1, 2, and 3 in the interface are coding conversion parameters
Description among CS1~CS2, CS2~CS3, and CS3~CS4.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 85
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10.2 Nn
Full name Nn
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-103

This parameter is used to determine the decrease of coding mode level. It

is used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP.
Different coding modes can be chosen for each timeslot or even each TBF.
The network selects the coding mode dynamically according to the data
rate requirement and radio transmission quality at the transmission of the
GPRS data, to reach maximum radio throughput.
When the radio transmission quality is poor, the coding mode with stronger
anti-interference capability (that is, low level coding mode) shall be
used. The coding level decreases to one level if Nnn-2 data blocks are
transmitted, the number of consecutive data blocks losses in the coding
mode CSn (2≤n≤4) for the TBF (downlink and uplink) is Xn[n–2]%.
Description among CS1~CS2, CS2~CS3, and CS3~CS4.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10.3 Xn
Full name Xn
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-104

This parameter is the threshold for determining the decrease in the level of
the coding mode. It is used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP.
Different coding modes can be chosen for each timeslot or even each TBF.
The network selects the coding mode dynamically according to the data
rate requirement and radio transmission quality at the transmission of the
GPRS data, to reach maximum radio throughput.
When the radio transmission quality is poor, the coding mode with stronger
anti-interference capability (that is, low level coding mode) shall be
used. The coding level decreases to one level if Nnn-2 data blocks are
transmitted, the number of consecutive data blocks losses in the coding
mode CSn (2≤n≤4) for the TBF (downlink and uplink) is Xn[n-2]%.
Description among CS1~CS2, CS2~CS3, and CS3CS4.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10.4 Max allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data

blocks (N3101)
Full name Max allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data blocks
Abbreviation N3101
3GPP Name N3101
2-105

This parameter is counter N3101, which is used at RLC/MAC layer of BRP.

During packet uplink transmission, BSS specifies USF (corresponding to
one uplink TBF) for each uplink block. For a USF, if the network receives
correct data from a specified uplink block, N3101 clears for that TBF. If the
number of losses in specified uplink block exceeds N3101, then T3169
Description timer starts. Network uses the TFI and USF resources when T3169 stops.
Value Range 9 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10.5 Times of packet uplink ACK/NACK retries (N3103)

Full name Times of packet uplink ACK/NACK retries
Abbreviation N3103
3GPP Name N3103

During the packet uplink transmission, if the network detects that at the
end of uplink TBF (CV = 0, and V(Q) = V(R)), all RLC data blocks have
been received, the network shall send a “PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK”
message and set the Final Acknowledgement Identifier (FAI) as 1. The
header of the RLC/MAC control block contains a valid RRBP domain.
And the counter N3103 is cleared.
MS sends PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message in the block
specified in RRBP and release TBF if MS receives PACKET UPLINK
ACK/NACK message with FAI1 from network side.
Network re-transmits PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message with N3103
counter incrementing, if the network fails to receive PACKET CONTROL
ACKNOWLEDGE message in the radio block specified in the RRBP field.
The network starts T3169 timer if the value of N3103 exceeds the limiting
Description N3103max. Network uses the TFI and USF resources when T3169 stops.
2-106

Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10.6 Max allowed number of continuous losses of uplink

RLC/MAC control message (N3105)
Max allowed number of continuous losses of uplink RLC/MAC control mes-
Full name sage
Abbreviation N3105
3GPP Name N3105

During packet uplink transmission, BSS specifies USF (corresponding to
one uplink TBF) for each uplink block. For a USF, if the network receives
correct data from a specified uplink block, N3101 clears for that TBF. If the
number of losses in specified uplink block exceeds N3101, then T3169
Description timer starts. Network uses the TFI and USF resources when T3169 stops.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-107


2.11.1 NACC support (NACCSupport)

Full name NACC support
Abbreviation NACCSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
LLC framework conversion refers to the process: on NACC, if target cell is

the cell in BSC, downlink LLC frame data that has not been sent to this
MS from BSC is transferred to target cell, and then it is sent to this MS
after MS uplink TBF link is established.
Network-Assisted Cell Change (NACC) means that BSC sends the
system message about new external cell to MS in original cell before MS
does cell reselection. In this way, MS can immediately initiates packet
access after reselecting the new cell without waiting for complete system
message of the new cell. This saves the time for listening to complete
system message after reselecting the new cell, thus speeding up the rate
for MS to access the new cell. In addition, because the MS acquires the
packet system message of the target cell allocated by BSC in advance,
Description the reselection rate is improved.
2-108

Not Support NACC; Support NACC, not LLC Frame Transfer; Support
Value Range NACC and LLC Frame Transfer.
Unit None
Default value Not support NACC
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-02-02-010 Network-assisted Cell Change
Relationship None
2.11.2 LLC Transfer support (LLCTranSupport)

Full name LLC Transfer support
Abbreviation LLCTranSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates whether BSC supports LLC frame transferring.
Management
Object BSC
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
2-109

2.11.3 BSC's net operation mode (NMO)

Full name Net operation mode
Abbreviation NMO
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
There are three network operation modes:

l Mode 1: The network sends to the "GPRS-attached" MS the CS pag-
ing message on the same channel of GPRS paging channel (packet
or CCCH paging channel), or on the GPRS traffic channel (when it is
assigned with a packet data channel). Mode 1 indicates that MS only
need to monitor one paging channel.
Network operation mode 1 is required while configuring PBCCH; Gs
interfce is required while configuring network operation mode 1.
l Mode 2: The network sends to the “GPRS-attached” MS the CS paging
message on the CCCH paging channel, which is also for GPRS pag-
ing. Mode 2 indicates that the MS only need to monitor CCCH paging
channel, but when BSC allocates a packet data channel, the CS pag-
ing message uses the CCCH paging channel.
l Mode 3: The network sends to the "GPRS-attached" MS the CS paging
message on the CCCH paging channel, and sends the GPRS paging
message either on the packet paging channel (if any in the cell) or on
the CCCH paging channel. Mode 3 indicates that the MS must monitor
two paging channels (if packet paging channel is available in the cell)
Description in order to receive CS or GPRS paging message.
Value Range Net operation mode 1, Net operation mode 2, Net operation mode 3
Unit None
Default value Network Operation Mode 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.4 Page coordination support (PagCoordination)

Full name Page coordination support
2-110

Abbreviation PagCoordination
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if intra-BSC cell supports CS based paging.

This parameter is broadcasted in GPRS CELL OPTIONS through SI13,
PSI1, and PSI13 messages. For more information, refer to the protocol
04.60 12.24. It is invalid when NMO is 1.
Page coordination means that the network can send CS paging to
Description subscribers through PS channel.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.5 Satellite transmission at GB interface indication

(IsSatelliteGB)
Full name Satellite transmission at GB interface indication
Abbreviation IsStatelliteGB
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It describes if BSC system supports "satellite transmission at Gb interface".

Description This function is mainly to implement the modification of delay.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-05-01-003 Gb Interface over Satellite
2-111

Relationship None
2.11.6 Extended RLC send window allowed (IsWindowExpend)

Full name Extended RLC send window allowed
Abbreviation IsWindowExpend
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It describes whether extended RLC send window is allowed.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.7 TBF establish support (TBF_EST)

Full name TBF establish support
Abbreviation TBF_EST
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if BSC supports TBF establishment process. TBF

flow establishment refers to while releasing uplink TBF, to determine if new
uplink TBF shall be established immediately for CTRL_ACK field in Packet
Description Control Acknowledgement message.
2-112

Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.8 Signal extended uplink TBF support (Signal_EUTBF)

Full name Signal extended uplink TBF support
Abbreviation Signal_EUTBF
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if signaling uplink TBF can use extended uplink
TBF functions. This parameter has the functions when the cell supports for
extended uplink TBF. Signaling TBF at this place refers to TBF established
Description to transmit GMM signaling.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-05-014 Delayed TBF Release in UL
Relationship None
2.11.9 Highest coding scheme of signal TBF (SigTBFMaxCode)

Full name Highest coding scheme of signal TBF
2-113

Abbreviation SigTBFMaxCode
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
While transferring upper signaling, such as PDP activation, routing area

Description update, this parameter can restrict the highest coding mode of this kind of
signaling data.
Value Range MCS1, MCS2, MCS3, MCS4, MCS5, MCS6, MCS7, MCS8, MCS9
Unit None
Default value MCS6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.10 Optimized POC service support (PocSupport)

Full name Optimized POC service support
Abbreviation PocSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if PoC subscriber applies for dedicated POC channel. PoC

indicates Push to talk over Cellular. Consider the MS with proper function
Description
as walkie-talkie. This kind of MS has a talkie key. After pressing this key,
you can talk with other subscribers or in a group.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-114

2.11.11 Highest coding scheme of POC service in GPRS

(PocAttSelt_0)
Full name Highest coding scheme of POC service in GPRS
Abbreviation PocAttSelt_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It describes the highest coding mode that can be used while GPRS MS
Description
does POC service.
Value Range CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4
Unit None
Default value CS3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.12 Highest coding scheme of POC service in EGPRS

(PocAttSelt_1)
Full name Highest coding scheme of POC service in EGPRS
Abbreviation PocAttSelt_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It describes the highest coding mode that can be used while EGPRS MS
Description
does POC service.
Value Range MCS1 ~ MCS9
2-115

Unit None
Default value MCS6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

(PSCapaThs_UL)
Full name Maximal users of POC service on shared PS channel0
Abbreviation PSCapaThs_UL
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the upper limit of PoC service subscribers in shared uplink

channel.
If dedicated PoC channel is configured, it indicates the upper limit of PoC
Description
subscribers on the uplink of each dedicated PoC channel. If it exceeds
this number, PoC subscriber access is not allowed on the uplink of this
dedicated PoC channel.
Value Range 2~6
Unit Times
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-116


(PSCapaThs_DL)
Full name Maximal users of POC service on shared PS channel1
Abbreviation PSCapaThs_DL
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the upper limit of PoC service subscribers in shared downlink

channel.
If dedicated PoC channel is configured, it indicates the upper limit of PoC
Description
subscribers on the downlink of each dedicated PoC channel. If it exceeds
this number, PoC subscriber access is not allowed on the downlink of
this dedicated PoC channel.
Value Range 2~6
Unit Times
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.15 SAPI0 ~ SAPI15 (LLCTranSupport_0 ~ LLCTranSupport_15)

Full name SAPI0 ~ SAPI15
Abbreviation LLCTranSupport_0 ~ LLCTranSupport_15
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-117

SAPI0 ~ SAPI15 indicate whether 16 types of service support LLC frame

transferring. There are 16 BITs, and the following lists the meaning of each BIT:
l BIT1: Indicates SAPI=1, LLGMM;
l BIT3, 5, 9, 11: Indicates SAPI=3, 5, 9, 11 respectively;
l BIT2: Indicates TOM2;
l BIT8: Indicates TOM8;
l BIT7: Indicates LLSMS;
l BIT0: Indicates whether it supports PCCO triggering LLC frame transferring
Description
(0 means not supporting, 1 means supporting);
l BIT12 ~ BIT13: Indicates the interval of downlink buffer status
reestablishment (0: 100ms, 1: 200ms, 2: 300ms, 4: 400ms);
l BIT14 ~ BIT15: Indicates whether downlink restablishment is supported
and the number of reestablishments (0: not reestablish, 1: reestablish
once, 2: reestablish twice, 3: reestablish threetimes);
l Other positions: Indicates being reserved.
Management
Object BSC
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
2.11.16 LLC Pre-Transfer on NACC (Info_1_10)

Full name LLC Pre-Transfer on NACC
3GPP Name N
3GPP reference N
2-118

This parameter indicates whether use PCCO under NACC to trigger LLC frame
transferring ahead of time. The LLC frame transferring can be triggered by
detecting the index conflict through control plane. To make the implementation
Description
simpler, for cell reselection under different MP modules, the LLC frame
transferring is triggered by NACC and PCCO together.
Management
Object BSC
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
2.11.17 PDU buffer time (Info_1_16, 10ms)

Full name PDU buffer time
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the longest duration of BSSGP instance being kept
after being released at radio interface. During cell reselection, the old BSSGP
instance is kept. If MS has not been accessed to the new cell within a certain
time longer than this parameter's value, then the old BSSGP instance will be
released.
Description
The parameter's value is 0: Indicates no buffer; The parameter's value is
60000: Indicates using the buffer time PduLifeTime of SGSN's life cycle. The
parameter's value is other value: Indicates using the minimum of the following
two values: configuration data and PduLifeTime of SGSN.
Management
Object BSC
2-119

Unit 10 ms
Default value 500
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
2.12 BVC Flow Control Parameters

The interface of BVC flow control parameters is as shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 BVC Flow Control Parameters
2.12.1 BVC flow control support (BVCFlowCtrl)

Full name BVC flow control support
Abbreviation BVCFlowCtrl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-120

BVC flow control occurs at Gb interface between SGSN and BSS, and
only in downlinks. BSS provides control parameters and SGSN executes,
in order to avoid one BVC on BSS to abandoning some LLC data because
of the overtime caused by grouping channel is too busy (too many LLC
frame caches) and to avoid abandoning new downlink LLC data because
of limit of memory resource (overflow of LLC frame caches).
BSSGP process at BSS side counts current leaking rate of BVC
periodically (including short statistics and long statistics). This parameter
originates unconditionally if long statistics timer overflows and SGSN
acknowledgement is necessary if discrepant range of adjacent leaking
rates is over CellFcThs. ‘BVC flow control supported’ originates and
SGSN confirmation is necessary if short statistics timer overflows and
Description discrepant range of adjacent leaking rates is over CellFcThs.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.2 MS flow control support (MSFlowCtrl)

Full name MS flow control support
Abbreviation MSFlowCtrl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-121

MS flow control occurs at Gb interface between SGSN and BSS, and only
in downlinks. BSS provides control parameters and SGSN executes, to
avoid one MS on BSS to abandoning some LLC data because of the
overtime caused by grouping channel is too busy (too many LLC frame
caches) and to avoid abandoning new downlink LLC data because of limit
of memory resource (overflow of LLC frame caches).
The BSSGP process at the BSS side periodically measures the current
leakage ratio of MS. When the statistic timer overflows, the ‘MS Flow
Description Control’ process is initiated unconditionally.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.3 Flow control mode (FlowCtrlMode)

Full name Flow control mode
Abbreviation FlowCtrlMode
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BSC has different flow control modes to report flow control parameters to
SGSN. The modes are as follows:
l 1: Mode 1: Report flow control parameters according to actual traffic
on radio interface counted at BSC;
l 2: Mode 2: Report flow control parameters according to max traffic
that the cell can provide;
l 3: Mode 3: Reserved
"Flow control mode 1 parameter" is enabled if selecting "mode 1"; "Flow
Description control mode 2 parameter" is enabled if selecting "mode 2".
Value Range 1~3
Unit None
2-122

Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.4 Parameter of flow control mode 1 (FlowCtrlMode1Para)

Full name Parameter of Flow control mode 1
Abbreviation FlowCtrlMode1Para
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BSC reports flow control parameters according to actual traffic at radio in-
terface when adopting mode 1. Actual counted value is smaller due to
radio interface re-transmission and TBF failure. So BSC multiplies the ac-
tual traffic with a multiple determined by this parameter when reporting flow
Description control parameters.
Value Range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 bps
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.5 Parameter of flow control mode 2 (FlowCtrlMode2Para)

Full name Parameter of Flow control mode 2
Abbreviation FlowCtrlMode2Para
3GPP Name None
2-123

3GPP reference None
BSC reports flow control parameters according to max traffic that the cell
can provide when adopting mode 2. Maximum value depends on config-
ured channels. Counting formula: channels * max traffic that every channel
can provide. This parameter is max traffic that every channel can provide,
Description with the unit of 100 bps.
Unit 100 bps
Default value 214
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.6 BVC flow control R MIN value (BVCFlowCtrlRMin, 100 bps)

Full name BVC flow control R MIN value
Abbreviation BVCFlowCtrlRMin
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This is the minimum value of leaking rate R in reported BVC flow control
parameters under all kinds of flow control mode, that is, the reported pa-
Description rameter R must be equal or over the set value, in the unit of 100 bps.
Unit 100 bps
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-124

2.12.7 MS flow control R MIN value (MSFlowCtrlRMin, 100 bps)

Full name MS flow control R MIN value
Abbreviation MSFlowCtrlRMin
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This is the minimum value of leaking rate R in reported MS flow control

parameters under all kinds of flow control mode, that is, the reported pa-
Description rameter R must be equal or over the set value, in the unit of 100 bps.
Unit 100 bps
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.8 PFC flow control procedures support (PFCFlowCtrl)

Full name PFC flow control procedures support
Abbreviation PFCFlowCtrl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-125

PFC flow control occurs at Gb interface between SGSN and BSS, and only
in downlink. BSS provides control parameters and SGSN executes. It helps
avoid a PFC in BSS discarding some LLC data due to timeout caused by
grouping channels being too busy (too many LLC frame buffers) and avoid
discarding new downlink LLC data due to limited memory resource (overflow
Description
of LLC frame buffer).
The BSSGP process at the BSS side periodically measures the current leakage
ratio of MS. When the statistic timer overflows, the 'PFC Flow Control' process
is initiated unconditionally.
Management
Object BSC
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
2.12.9 Coefficient of BVC bucket size (Info_2_0)

Full name Coefficient of BVC bucket size
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to calculate the size of BVC bucket. User can modify
Description this parameter's value to change the size of BVC bucket.
Management
Object BSC
Unit None
2-126

Default value 3000
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
2.12.10 Coefficient of MS bucket (Info_2_16)

Full name Coefficient of MS bucket
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to calculate the size of MS bucket. User can modify this
Description parameter's value to change the size of MS bucket.
Management
Object BSC
Unit None
Default value 300
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
2.12.11 CBL in BVC/MS flow control (Info_1_9)

Full name CBL in BVC/MS flow control
2-127

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether Current Bucket Level (CBL) should be

Description reported in the BVC/MS flow control message.
Management
Object BSC
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
2.13 FUC Flow Control Map Parameters

Interface of FUC Flow Control Map parameter shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 FUC Flow Control Map Parameters
2-128

2.13.1 Flow Control Reason

Full name Flow control reason
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes FUC flow control level.

Description The parameter value corresponding to level 0 can't be modified.
Value Range Level 0~10
Unit None
Default value [Level 0~10]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.13.2 Emergency Call

Full name Emergency call
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes hurry call percentage corresponding to certain

FUC flow control level.
Value Range Level 0~10, value range is: 0~100
Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0]
Change mode Offline
ZGB-03-04-001 BSC Load Control

Relevant Features ZGB-01-03-001 Emergency Call Handling
2-129

Relationship None
2.13.3 Call Rebuilt

Full name Call Rebuilt
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes call rebuilt percentage corresponding to certain

Unit %
Default value [0, 50, 75, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.13.4 Call Response

Full name Call Response
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes call response percentage corresponding to

certain FUC flow control level.
2-130

Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 25, 50, 50, 75, 75, 75]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.13.5 Calling
Full name Calling
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes calling percentage corresponding to certain

Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0, 25, 25, 40, 78, 100, 100, 100]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.13.6 Location Update

Full name Location Update
Abbreviation None
2-131

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes site refresh percentage corresponding to certain

Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 25, 25, 50, 75]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.13.7 GPRS Access

Full name GPRS access
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 20, 46, 73, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-132

2.13.8 Restore
Full name Restore
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.13.9 Flow control map slim adjust (bit)

Full name Flow control map slim adjust (bit)
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
FUC establishes a channel request refuse map. After flow control is

started, you can be based on this bitmap to determine if certain access
can be refused.
Each bit in this map represents if to allow channel access due to this
Description reason: 1 represents refusal, 0 represents allowance.
Value Range None
Unit Bit
Default value None
Change mode Offline
2-133

Relationship None
2.14 EDGE Parameters

The interface of EDGE property parameters is shown in Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 EDGE Parameters
2.14.1 PFC support (PFCSupport)

Full name PFC support
Abbreviation PFCSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference Section 44.060 12.24, 23.060, 48.018
2-134

This parameter is broadcasted through SI13, PSI1, and PSI13 messages.

In EGPRS system with broadband features, the QoS concept of UMTS
has been imported, which enables transferring the negotiable QoS
configuration to BSS through Gb interface. BSS can maintain QoS
subscribing information through function PFC (packet flow context) flow,
which include acquiring QoS, modifying QoS, and deleting QoS signaling
flow.
Network notifies MS if the network supports PFC flow through the system
message parameter PFC_FEATURE_MODE. If yes, the MS will add PFI
when establishing uplink TBF (PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST). BSS
Description can decide QoS as MS requires according to PFI.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
2.14.2 R99 Ind (R99Ind)

Full name R99 Ind
Abbreviation R99Ind
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates R99 protocol version ID. BSS considers this parameter as a ba-
sis to determine if to encode/decode message field added after R99 version
Description for the protocol.
Value Range Version of R98 or it's before, Version of R99
Unit None
Default value R99 version
2-135

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14.3 Enhanced radio status procedures support (EnRadioStu)

Full name Enhanced radio status procedures support
Abbreviation EnRadioStu
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
On the basis of Radio Status, enhanced Radio Status reports three more cause
values:
l x02: Indicates the enhanced Radio Status process is used when the cell
reselection occurs. Usually, it helps satisfy the service requirement to the
maximum extent.
l x03: Indicates the enhanced Radio Status process is used when the MS
is required to perform cell reselection and LLC frame transferring is not
supported.
l x04: Indicates that SGSN is notified when BSC detects cell reselection
failure.
Description SGSN has the following responses:
l When Radio Status with the cause value x02 is received, the downlink LLC
frame sending is resumed after cell reselection is completed.
l When Radio Status with the cause value x03 is received, either the
downlink data sending is resumed after cell reselection is completed, or
Radio Status with other cause values are received.
l When Radio Status with the cause value x04 is received, if there are data
to be sent to MS, then the downlink LLC frame sending is resumed.
With Radio Status that supports multiple cause values, SGSN can better
understand the status of MS, which avoids sending data to the old cell blindly.
Management
Object BSC
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
2-136

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
2.14.4 RS
Full name RS
Abbreviation RS
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates uplink throughput weight at Gb interface. It is

dynamic Abis adjustment parameter. When Abis resources are dynami-
cally allocated, BSC allocates them according to the quota. The quota is
calculated based on the sum of weighted statistic items, including uplink
throughput at Gb interface, downlink throughput at Gb interface, EGPRS
MS request times, high-bandwidth request times, the highest bandwidth
usage, GPRS carrier proportion, and EDGE carrier proportion. Each
statistic item is assigned with a weight based on the importance. The
weights are RS, RR, RA, RM, RB, RG, and RE respectively and meet
Description RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE=100.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 12
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-137

2.14.5 RR
Full name RR
Abbreviation RR
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates downlink throughput weight at Gb interface.

It is dynamic Abis adjustment parameter. When Abis resources are
dynamically allocated, BSC allocates them according to the quota. The
quota is calculated based on the sum of weighted statistic items, including
uplink throughput at Gb interface, downlink throughput at Gb interface,
EGPRS MS request times, high-bandwidth request times, the highest
bandwidth usage, GPRS carrier proportion, and EDGE carrier proportion.
Each statistic item is assigned with a weight based on the importance.
The weights are RS, RR, RA, RM, RB, RG, and RE respectively and meet
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 12
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14.6 RA
Full name RA
Abbreviation RA
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-138

This parameter indicates the weight of EGPRS MS access request times.

It is a dynamic Abis adjustment parameter. When Abis resources are
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14.7 RM
Full name RM
Abbreviation RM
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the weight of high-bandwidth request times.

It is a dynamic Abis adjustment parameter. When Abis resources are
2-139

Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 14
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14.8 RB
Full name RB
Abbreviation RB
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the weight of the highest bandwidth usage.

It is a dynamic Abis adjustment parameter. When ABIS resources are
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-140

2.14.9 RG
Full name RG
Abbreviation RG
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is the weight of GPRS carrier ratio. It is a dynamic Abis ad-
justment parameter. When ABIS resources are dynamically allocated, BSC
allocates them according to the quota. The quota is calculated based on the
sum of weighted statistic items, including uplink throughput at Gb interface,
downlink throughput at Gb interface, EGPRS MS request times, high-band-
width request times, the highest bandwidth usage, GPRS carrier proportion,
and EDGE carrier proportion. Each statistic item is assigned with a weight
based on the importance. The weights are RS, RR, RA, RM, RB, RG, and
Description RE respectively and meet RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE=100.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14.10 RE
Full name RE
Abbreviation RE
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-141

This parameter is the weight of EDGE carrier ratio. It is a dynamic Abis ad-
justment parameter. When Abis resources are dynamically allocated, BSC
allocates them according to the quota. The quota is calculated based on the
sum of weighted statistic items, including uplink throughput at Gb interface,
downlink throughput at Gb interface, EGPRS MS request times, high-band-
width request times, the highest bandwidth usage, GPRS carrier proportion,
and EDGE carrier proportion. Each statistic item is assigned with a weight
based on the importance. The weights are RS, RR, RA, RM, RB, RG, and
Description RE respectively and meet RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE=100.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14.11 ABIS resource dynamic manage (Info_1_8)

Full name ABIS resource dynamic manage
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether Abis resource dynamic management is

allowed.
When dynamic Abis resource management is allowed, Abis resources are
allocate dynamically. That is, when packet Abis resource is applied, BSC
allocates the resource according to the quota. Each cell in the resource
sharing pool is allocated with a quota. The total of the quotas of all cells in
Description the pool is equal to 100. The quotas are calculated based on statistic items.
Each statistic item is assigned with a weight based on the importance. The
weights include RS, RR, RA, RM, RB, RG, and RE. The statistic items include
cell carrier statistics, packet access times, packet transmission traffic at
uplink and downlink, and EGPRS MS request times. The calculation quota is
re-calculated periodically with a certain interval. The database allocates Abis
timeslot to PS services of each cell according to the quota.
2-142

Management Object Site/BSC
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relevant None
parameters
Relationship None
2.15 eMLPP Set

Figure 2-15 shows the interface of eMLPP set.
Figure 2-15 eMLPP Set
2.15.1 Strategy for preemption when assign (AssPreemptstrategy)

Full name Strategy for preemption when assign
Abbreviation AssPreemptstrategy
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-143

This parameter decides the preemption policy if there is no available channel

Description
on assginment.
Priority 1 ~ 15. Value range is: Only forced handover; First forced handover,
Value Range
if fail, forced release; First forced release.
Unit None
Default value Only forced handover
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.2 Strategy for preemption when handover (HoPreemptstrategy)

Full name Strategy for preemption when handover
Abbreviation HoPreemptstrategy
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides the preemption policy if there is no available channel

Description
on handover.
Priority 1 ~ 15. Value range is: Only forced handover; First forced handover,
Value Range
if fail, forced release; Directly forced release.
Unit None
Default value Only forced handover
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-144

2.15.3 Maximum forced handover times when assign

(AssForcedHoTry)
Full name Maximum forced handover times when assign
Abbreviation AssForcedHoTry
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the max number of retry for forced handover if there is no

Description
available channel during assignment.
Value Range Priority 1 ~ 15, value range: 1 ~ 5
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.4 Maximum forced handover times when handover

(HoForcedHoTry)
Full name Maximum forced handover times when handover
Abbreviation HoForcedHoTry
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the max number of retry for forced handover if there is no

Description
available channel during handover.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
2-145

Relationship None
2.15.5 Maximum forced release times when assign

(AssForcedRelTry)
Full name Maximum forced release times when assign
Abbreviation AssForcedRelTry
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the max number of retry for forced release if there is no

Description
available channel during assignment.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.6 Maximum forced release times when handover

(HoForcedRelTry)
Full name Maximum forced release times when handover
Abbreviation HoForcedRelTry
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the max number of retry for forced release if there is no

Description
available channel during handover.
2-146

Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.7 Preemption duration when assign (AssPreempTimer, 100ms)

Full name Preemption duration when assign
Abbreviation AssPreempTimer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the period of forced handover or forced release if there is no

Description available channel during assignment. If the period elapses, only queue is
allowed, and new forced handover or forced release not required.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-147

2.15.8 Preemption duration when handover (HoPreempTimer,

100ms)
Full name Preemption duration when handover
Abbreviation HoPreempTimer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the period of forced handover or forced release if there is no

Description available channel during handover. If the period elapses, only queue is
allowed, and new forced handover or forced release not required.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.9 Timer for start forced release when assign

(AssForceRelTimer)
Full name Timer for start forced release when assign
Abbreviation AssForceRelTimer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if to do forced handover if both forced handover and forced

release are allowed when there is no available channel in the cell during
Description
assignment, or to do forced release and do not forced handover after no
any channel is gotten.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
2-148

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.10 Timer for start forced release when handover

(HoForceRelTimer)
Full name Timer for start forced release when handover
Abbreviation HoForceRelTimer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if to do forced handover if both forced handover and forced

release are allowed when there is no available channel in the cell during
Description
handover, or to do forced release and do not forced handover after no any
channel is gotten.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.11 Interval for search forced handover target when assign

(AssForceHoInterval, 100ms)
Full name Interval for search forced handover target when assign
Abbreviation AssForceHoInterval
2-149

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the waiting time for searching forced handover tar-
Description get again if forced handover target can not be found when there is no available
channel in the cell during assignment.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.12 Interval for search forced handover target when handover

(HoForceHoInterval, 100ms)
Full name Interval for search forced handover target when handover
Abbreviation HoForceHoInterval
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the waiting time for searching forced handover tar-
Description get again if forced handover target can not be found when there is no available
channel in the cell on handover.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-150

2.15.13 Interval for search forced release target when assign

(AssForceRelInterval, 100ms)
Full name Interval for search forced release target when assign
Abbreviation AssForceRelInterval
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the waiting time for searching forced release target
Description again if forced release target can not be found when there is no available
channel in the cell during assignment.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.14 Interval for search forced release target when handover

(HoForceRelInterval, 100ms)
Full name Interval for search forced release target when handover
Abbreviation HoForceRelInterval
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the waiting time for searching forced release target
Description again if forced release target can not be found when there is no available
channel in the cell on handover.
2-151

Unit 100 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.15 Queue timer for assign (RmsT11, 100ms)

Full name Queue timer for assign
Abbreviation RmsT11
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the max time of waiting for queue if there is no available

Description channel in the cell during assignment. The assignment fails if no any
resource is gotten.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.16 Queue timer for handover (RmsTqho, 100ms)

Full name Queue timer for handover
Abbreviation RmsTqho
3GPP Name None
2-152

3GPP reference None
It determines the max time of waiting for queue if there is no available channel
Description
in the cell on handover. The handover fails if no any resource is gotten.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.17 Queue indicate when assign (QueueIndAss)

Full name Queue indicate when assign
Abbreviation QueueIndAss
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if queue is allowed or set it per cell if there are no available

Description
channels in the cell during assignment.
Queue forbidden when assign, Queue allowed when assign, According to the
Value Range
cell
Unit None
Default value Queue forbidden when assign
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-153

2.15.18 Queue allowed when handover (QueueIndHo)

Full name Queue allowed when handover
Abbreviation QueueIndHo
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if queue is allowed or set it per cell if there are no available

Description
channels in the cell during handover.
Queue forbidden when handover, Queue allowed when handover, According

Value Range
to the cell
Unit None
Default value Queue forbidden when handover
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.19 Forced release indicate when assign (PreemptionIndAss)

Full name Forced release indicate when assign
Abbreviation PreemptionIndAss
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if forced release is allowed or set it per cell if there are no

Description
available channels in the cell during assignment.
Forced release forbidden when assign, Forced release allowed when assign,
Value Range
According to the cell
Unit None
Default value Forced release forbidden when assign
Change mode Offline
2-154

Relationship None
2.15.20 Forced release allowed when handover (PreemptionIndHo)

Full name Forced release allowed when handover
Abbreviation PreemptionIndHo
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if forced release is allowed or set it per cell if there are no

Description
available channels in the cell during handover.
Forced release forbidden when handover, Forced release allowed when han-
Value Range
dover, According to the cell
Unit None
Default value Forced release forbidden when handover
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.21 Forced handover indication for assign (ForcedHolndAss)

Full name Forced handover indication for assign
Abbreviation ForcedHolndAss
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if forced handover is allowed or set it per cell if there are no

Description
available channels in the cell during assignment.
2-155

Forced handover forbidden when assign, Forced handover allowed when as-
Value Range
sign, According to the cell
Unit None
Default value forced handover forbidden when assigned
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.22 Forced handover indication for handover (ForcedHolndHo)

Full name Forced handover indication for handover
Abbreviation ForcedHolndHo
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if forced handover is allowed or set it per cell if there are no

Description
available channels in the cell during handover.
Forced handover forbidden when handover, Forced handover allowed when

Value Range
handover, According to the cell
Unit None
Default value Forced handover forbidden when handover
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-156

2.15.23 Wait resource timer after forced handover (ForceHoWait,

100ms)
Full name Wait resource timer after forced handover
Abbreviation ForceHoWait
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the time of waiting for resource after forced handover. If getting
the resource within this period, do not initiate forced handover or forced
release and quit from the queue. If can not get it, initiate forced handover,
Description
forced release, or queue.
This parameter is configured according to the time required to finish
handover.
Value Range 10 ~ 40
Unit 100 ms
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.24 Wait resource timer after forced release (ForceRelWait,

100ms)
Full name Wait resource timer after forced release
Abbreviation ForceRelWait
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the time of waiting for resource after forced release. If getting
the resource within this period, do not initiate forced release and quit from
Description
the queue. If can not get it, initiate forced release or queue.
This parameter is configured according to the time requird to finish handover.
2-157

Value Range 10 ~ 40
Unit 100 ms
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.25 Enough low priority for preemption (LowestPriority)

Full name Enough low priority for preemption
Abbreviation LowestPriority
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
To reduce the search times when searching for the target of forced handover
and forced release, if target priority is not higher than this priority, it is
Description
considered that the priority of this target is low enough, and do not search for
the lowest priority. 1: highest priority
Value Range 1 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 14
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.26 Enough call duration for preemption

Full name Enough call duration for preemption
2-158

Abbreviation LongCallDuration
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
To reduce search times while searching for the target of forced handover
and forced release, if the duration of target call is longer than this parameter
Description
value, it is considered that the duration of target call is sufficient and do not
search the target with the longest call duration.
Unit 480 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.27 Forced handover target penalty time (ForceHoPenalty)

Full name Forced handover target penalty time
Abbreviation ForceHoPenalty
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines this instance can not be used as forced handover target within
Description
this period after forced handover fails.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit 480 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-159

2.15.28 Priority of emergency service (EmergServicelPrio)

Full name Priority of emergency service
Abbreviation EmergServicelPrio
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if the call with higher or equivalent priority is emergency call.

Description
1: highest priority
Value Range 1 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.16 Ater Timer Parameters

In basic property interface, if you select "Outer TC" in "TC type supported (TCType)", a
parameter interface named Ater Timer will be added.
For Ater Timer parameter interface see Figure 2-16.
2-160

Figure 2-16 Ater Timer Parameters
2.16.1 Ater wait SCCP connection timer (TAterWaitConn, 100ms)

Full name Ater wait SCCP connection timer
Abbreviation TAterWaitConn
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is Ater wait SCCP connection timer, used to wait for the
"SCCP CONNECT CONFIRM" message from iTC.
l Start condition: BSC sends the connection request message to iTC.
l Stop condition:
1. When handling iTC resource request from the service, BSC deter-
mines that the SCCP connection ID corresponding to the service is
invalid.
2. BSC receives link acknowledgement message from iTC.
l Timeout action: BSC send the "Disconnect Request" message to SCCP
Description and ends the service at Ater interface.
Value Range 5 ~ 20
Unit 100 ms
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
2-161

Relationship None
Related interfaces Ater Interface
2.16.2 Ater wait resource timer (TWaitAterRes, 100ms)

Full name Ater wait resource timer
Abbreviation TWaitAterRes
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to wait for the "RESOURCE REQUEST

ACKNOWLEDGE" message from iTC at Ater interface.
l Start condition: BSC applies for resources to iTC at Ater interface.
l Stop condition: iTC at Ater interface returns resource available message
to service.
Description l Timeout action: BSC releases this service..
Value Range 10 ~ 30
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.16.3 Ater wait resource release timer (TAterWaitRel, 100ms)

Full name Ater wait resource release timer
Abbreviation TAterWaitRel
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-162

This parameter is used to wait for the "RESOURCE RELEASE

ACKNOWLEDGE" message from iTC at Ater interface.
l Start condition: BSC sends the "RESOURCE RELEASE" message to
iTC at Abis interface.
l Stop condition: BSC receives the "RESOURCE RELEASE ACKNOWL-
EDGE" message from iTC.
Description l Timeout action: BSC releases SCCP link.
Value Range 20 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.16.4 Ater handover monitor timer (TAterMoniterHO, 100ms)

Full name Ater handover monitor timer
Abbreviation TAterMoniterHO
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
THis parameter is used to monitor handover process when outer iTC is

used.
l Start condition: Handover service applies for circuit resource at Ater
interface again.
l Stop condition:
1. BSC receives the Ater handover implementation message sent by
old CS service instance.
2. BSC receives the Ater resource release request message sent by
new CS service instance.
l Timeout action: The Ater interface issues service release command to
Description CS service, and sends iTC resource release message to iTC.
Unit 100 ms
2-163

Default value 120
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.16.5 Ater wait resource acknowledge timer (TWaitAterResAck,

100ms)
Full name Ater wait resource acknowledge timer
Abbreviation TWaitAterResAck
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes the response to apply for resource from iTC, to
configure this timer wait for iTC during iBSC handover.
l Start condition: CS service instance sends an iTC resource application
message.
l Stop condition:
1. BSC receives the iTC resource application acknowledgement mes-
sage.
2. BSC receives the iTC resource application failure acknowledgement
message.
l Timeout action: BSC clears the new handover RANCS process number
corresponding to the service process, and set the new handover CS
Description instance corresponding to the service process as nonexistent.
Value Range 5 ~ 25
Unit 100 ms
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-164

2.16.6 Ater block circuit timer (TAterCicBlk, 100ms)

Full name Ater block circuit timer
Abbreviation TAterCicBlk
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to wait for the "BLOCKING ACKNOWLEDGE" or

"UNBLOCKING ACKNOWLEDGE" message from iTC.
l Start condition: BSC sends a single circuit unblocking message to MSC.
l Stop condition: BSC receives the "BLOCKING ACKNOWLEDGE" mes-
sage from iTC.
l Timeout action: If the number of timeout times does not reach the max-
imum value, BSC sends another "A CIRCUIT BlOCKING" message to
iTC and restarts the timer. If the number reaches the maximum value,
Description BSC ends the instance.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.16.7 Ater block circuit group timer (TAterBlkCicGrp, 100ms)

Full name Ater block circuit group timer
Abbreviation TAterBlkCicGrp
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
2-165

This parameter is used to wait for the "BLOCKING CIRCUIT GROUP

ACKNOWLEDGE" or "UNBLOCKING CIRCUIT GROUP ACKNOWLEDGE"
message from iTC.
l Start condition: BSC sends circuit group unblocking message to MSC.
l Stop condition: BSC receives the "UNBLOCKING CIRCUIT GROUP
ACKNOWLEDGE" message from iTC.
imum value, BSC sends another "UNBLOCKING CIRCUIT GROUP"
message to iTC and restarts the timer. If the number reaches the maxi-
Description mum value, BSC ends the instance.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.16.8 Ater reset circuit timer (TAterRstCic, 100ms)

Full name Ater reset circuit timer
Abbreviation TAterRstCic
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to wait for the "RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE"

message from iTC at Ater interface.
l Start condition: BSC sends the "RESET CIRCUIT" message to iTC.
l Stop condition: BSC receives the "REST CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE"
message from iTC.
imum value, BSC sends another "RESET CIRCUIT" message to iTC
and restarts the timer. If the number reaches the maximum value, BSC
Description ends the instance.
2-166

Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.16.9 Ater reset timer (TAterRst, 100ms)

Full name Ater reset timer
Abbreviation TAterRst
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to wait for the "RESET ACKNOWLEDGE" message

from iTC at Ater interface.
l Start condition: BSC sends the "RESET" message to iTC.
l Stop condition: BSC receives response from iTC.
imum value, BSC sends another "RESET" message to iTC. If the num-
ber reaches the maximum value, BSC sets the number of no response
Description times to 0 and waits for the completion of self reset.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-167

2.16.10 Ater reset guard timer (TITCRst, 100ms)

Full name Ater reset guard timer
Abbreviation TITCRst
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to give delay for global reset to release resources.
l Start condition: BSC receives the "Ater RESET" message from Ater
interface.
Description l Timeout action: BSC returns the "Ater RESET ACK" message to iTC.
Value Range 30 ~ 60
Unit 100 ms
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.16.11 Ater block a interface circuit timer (TBIkACic, 100ms)

Full name Ater block a interface circuit timer
Abbreviation TBlkACic
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to wait for the "BLOCKING A CIRCUIT

ACKNOWLEDGE" or "UNBLOCKING A CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE"
message from iTC.
l Start condition: BSC receives the message requesting circuit mainte-
nance.
l Stop condition: BSC receives the response to a circuit blocking or the
message indicating that the circuit is unequipped.
l Timeout action: If the number of timeout times reach the maximum
Description value, BSC ends the circuit instances at Ater interface. If the number
2-168

does not reach the maximum value, BSC sends a message of circuit
maintenance request to iTC and restarts the timer.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.16.12 Ater block a interface circuit group timer (TBIkACicGrp,

100ms)
Full name Ater block a interface circuit group timer
Abbreviation TBlkACicGrp
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to wait for the "BLOCKING A CIRCUIT

GROUP ACKNOWLEDGE" or "UNBLOCKING A CIRCUIT GROUP
ACKNOWLEDGE" message from iTC.
l Start condition: BSC receives the message requesting circuit group
maintenance.
l Stop condition: BSC receives the response to a circuit group blocking
or the message indicating that the circuit is unequipped.
l Timeout action: If the number of timeout times reach the maximum
value, BSC ends the circuit instances at Ater interface. If the number
does not reach the maximum value, BSC sends a message of circuit
Description maintenance request to iTC and restarts the timer.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
2-169

Relationship None
2-170

Chapter 3
External Cell Parameters
External cell parameters include GERAN external cell parameters and UTRAN external
cell parameters.
Table of Contents
GERAN External Cell Parameters ..............................................................................3-1
UTRAN External Cell Parameters.............................................................................3-23
3.1 GERAN External Cell Parameters

The interface of GERAN external cell parameters is as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 Basic Property Parameters for GERAN External Cell
3.1.1 External cell ID

Full name External cell ID
3-1

Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description External cell number
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.2 Cell type (CellType)

Full name Cell type
Abbreviation CellType
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description GERAN External Cell type
Value Range Umbrella cell, Macro Cell, Micro Cell, Micro-micro Cell, Extended Cell
Unit None
Default value Macro Cell
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-2

Chapter 3 External Cell Parameters
3.1.3 MCC (MCC)

Full name MCC (MCC)
Abbreviation MCC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
MCC consists of three digits of decimal number. It is used to uniquely identify

Description the home country of the mobile user (or system).
Value Range 0 ~ 999
Unit None
Default value 460
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-05-02-011 Multi PLMN
Relationship None
3.1.4 MNC (MNC)

Full name MNC (MNC)
Abbreviation MNC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
MNC consists of three digits of decimal number. It uniquely identifies a spe-

Description cific PLMN network in a country (determined by MCC).
l When MNC3Digits is selected as 2 digits, MNC value will be 0~99;

Value Range l When MNC3Digits is selected as 3 digits, MNC value will be 0~999;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-05-02-011 Multi PLMN
3-3

Relationship None
3.1.5 Frequency band (FreqBand)

Full name Frequency band
Abbreviation FreqBand
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description The frequency band of the system
l When the value of DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt) is

DCS1800, it value range is GSM900, EXT900, DCS1800, GSM850;
Value Range PCS1900, it value range is GSM900, EXT900, PCS1900, GSM850;
Unit None
Default value GSM900
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters BCCH frequency (BcchArfcn)
Relationship None
3.1.6 BCCH frequency (BcchArfcn)

Full name BCCH frequency
Abbreviation BcchArfcn
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description ARFCN of the cell BCCH carrier
3-4

l When Frequency Band is GSM900, its value range is 1~124;

l When Frequency Band is EXT900, its value range is 0~124, 975~1023;
l When Frequency Band is PCS1900, its value range is 512~810;
l When Frequency Band is DCS1800, its value range is 512~885;
Value Range l When Frequency Band is GSM850, its value range is 128~251;
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.7 LAC (LAC)
Full name LAC (LAC)
Abbreviation LAC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Each GSM PLMN is divided into many location areas (LAs) in order to deter-
mine the MS location, the location area code identifies the different location
areas. LAC comes under LAI (LAI = MCC + MNC + LAC). One location
area contains multiple cells. This parameter is consistent with the data at
Description CN side.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-5

3.1.8 CI
Full name CI
Abbreviation CI
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In order to distinguish each cell in GSM PLMN uniquely, the network opera-
Description tors allocate a unique code for each cell in a location area.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.9 NCC
Full name NCC
Abbreviation NCC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
NCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC
= NCC + BCC). which is used to enable the MS to distinguish adjacent and
different GSM PLMN cells. Normally, adjacent operators shall have differ-
ent NCCs. The parameter related to NCC is “NccPermitted” of the cell. By
prohibiting MS to report related NCC in the cell, MS is prohibited to measure
the cell information of the related operators. Actually, NCC occupies three
Description bits. NCC is one of the network identification parameters.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
3-6

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.10 BCC
Full name BCC
Abbreviation BCC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC
= NCC + BCC). Normally, BCC is used to enable MS to distinguish adjacent
cells with the same BCCH carrier frequency and belonging to the same GSM
PLMN. In addition, the GSM specifications stipulate that the TSC (Training
Sequence Code) of the broadcast control channel of a cell shall be equal
to the cell BCC. BCC occupies three bits BCC and is one of the network
Description identification parameters.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.11 GPRS service support (PsSupport)

Full name GPRS service support
Abbreviation PsSupport
3-7

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if the cell supports GPRS.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters TsChannelComb
If "GPRS Supported (PsSupport)" is No, that is, GPRS is not supported,

Relationship the system automatically change all timeslot channels whose type is PS in
the cell to TCH.
If GPRS service support is set as "Yes", a GPRS Property tab will appear, as shown in
Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 GPRS Property Parameters for GERAN External Cell
3-8

3.1.12 Cell reselection offset (ReselOff_0, 2db)

Full name Reselection offset
Abbreviation ReselOff_0
3GPP Name GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET
This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system

message by BTS. In the GPRS system, C32 is used as the standard for
cell reselection. C32 standard calculation, similar to C2 standard in GSM,
contains a cell reselection offset parameter. This parameteris not necessary
to append in packet system message when the offset value is 0 dB.
This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle
Description status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit 2 dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.13 Cell reselection offset (ReselOff_1, 2db)

This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. In the GPRS

system, C32 is used as the standard for cell reselection. C32 standard
calculation, similar to C2 standard in GSM, contains a cell reselection offset
parameter. This parameter is not necessary to appear in packet system
message when the offset value is 0 dB.
This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in
Description transmission state.
3-9

Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit 2 dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.14 Temporary offset of cell reselection (TempOffset_0, db)

Full name Reselection temporary offset
Abbreviation TempOffset_0
3GPP Name GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET

cell reselection. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative
offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on Penalty
Time of cell reselection.
Value Range 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinite
Unit dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-10

3.1.15 Cell reselection temporary offset (TempOffset_1, db)


system, C32 is used as the standard for cell reselection. There is a
temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM
system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time of cell reselection.
Value Range 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinite
Unit dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.16 Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime_0, 10s)

Full name Penalty time of cell reselection
Abbreviation PenalTime_0
3GPP Name GPRS_PENALTY_TIME

Time of cell reselection.
3-11

Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit 10 s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None


temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM
system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time of cell reselection.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit 10 s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-12

3.1.18 HCS exist (HCS_EXIST_0)

Full name HCS exist
Abbreviation HCS_EXIST_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to Hierarchical

Cell Structure (HCS) and broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.
PSI message indicates if the HCS exist (HCS priority and Threshold of
HCS signal level) exist in the cell. MS ignores HSC exist parameters of
other cells if serving cell does not use HSC exist parameters (all the cells
use Threshold of HSC signal level of infinity).
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.19 HCS exist (HCS_EXIST_1)

Full name HCS exist
Abbreviation HCS_EXIST_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
3-13


Cell Structure (HCS) and be informed to MS on PACCH. PSI message
indicates if the HCS exist (HCS priority and Threshold of HCS signal level)
exist in the cell. MS ignores HSC exist parameters of other cells if serving
cell does not use HSC exist parameters (all the cells use Threshold of
HSC signal level of infinity).
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.20 Threshold of HCS signal level (HCS_THR_0)

Full name Threshold of HSC signal level
Abbreviation HCS_THR_0
3GPP Name HCS_THR
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which is

broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS. Threshold of HCS signal
level identifies the HCS signal strength threshold of the cell.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
3-14

Relationship None
3.1.21 Threshold of HCS signal level (HCS_THR_1)

Abbreviation HCS_THR_1
3GPP Name HCS_THR

informed to MS on PACCH. Threshold of HCS signal level identifies the
HCS signal strength threshold of the cell.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.22 HCS priority (PrioClass_0)

Full name HCS Priority
Abbreviation PrioClass_0
3GPP Name PRIORITY_CLASS
3-15

This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which

is broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS, indicating cell HCS
priority.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None


informed to MS on PACCH, indicating cell HCS priority.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-16

3.1.24 Allow SOLSA MS to access (EXC_ACC)

Full name Allow SOLSA MS to access
Abbreviation EXC_ACC
3GPP Name EXC_ACC
System broadcasts this parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, and SI7 messages.

In addition, the parameter information is available in PSI3 and Psi3bis mes-
sages of local and neighboring cells. The network uses Allow SOLSA MS to
Description access to prevent MS from residing in the cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.25 Cell reselection status (CellBarAc2)

Full name Cell reselection status
Abbreviation CellBarAc2
3GPP Name CELL_BAR ACCESS_2
Cell reselection status belongs to HCS, and the system broadcasts to MS in

Description PSI3 message. It indicates the cell reselection status.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
3-17

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.26 LSA ID (LSA_Id)

Full name LSA Mark
Abbreviation LSA_Id
3GPP Name LSA ID
System broadcasts the parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, SI7, and PSI3 mes-
sages of serving cell. In addition, system broadcasts the parameter informa-
tion in PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of the neighboring cells. LSA ID specifies
Description LSA identifier of the cell.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.27 RAC (RAC)

Full name RAC (RAC)
Abbreviation RAC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
3-18

RAC is a composition part of Routing Area Identity (RAI). RAI defines the
GPRS serving cell identification. GPRS system divides the location area
(LAs) to several routing areas (RAs) using RAI (MCC+MNC+LAC+RAC).
Routing Area (RA) distribution, similar to GSM system, uses the location
area to manage a group of cells. MS initiates ‘Routing area update’
procedure in cell reselection mode if new RAI differs from old RAI during
cell reselection.
SGSN knows the routing area information of the MS in the standby status.
Then, when the network has packet data or circuit data to transmit, it will
page the MS in that routing area. RAI cannot span more than one SGSN.
Description This parameter is consistent with the data at CN side.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.28 Access minimal signal level (RxLevAsMin_0)

Full name GPRS access minimum signal level
Abbreviation RxLevAsMin_0
3GPP Name GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

message by BTS. This parameter indicates the minimum receiving level
while allowing MS access to this system (GPRS).
To prevent the MS from accessing the system at a low receiving signal
level (usually, the poor communication quality cannot guarantee normal
communication process after access) and from unreasonably wasting
radio resources of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system that
the receiving level be greater than a threshold level for MS to access the
network, that is, “MS Minimal Level to Access”.
In addition, the parameter serves as reference for MS during cell selection
Description and reselection (a parameter to calculate C31 and C32).
3-19


status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH.
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Value Range l 63: > -48 dBm)
Unit None
Default value 12 (-99 dBm ~ -98 dBm)
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.29 Access minimal signal level (RxLevAsMin_1)

Full name GPRS access minimum signal level
This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter is informed to MS

on PACCH. This parameter indicates the minimum receiving level while
allowing MS access to this system (GPRS).
communication process after access) and from unreasonably wasting
radio resources of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system that
the receiving level be greater than a threshold level for MS to access the
network, that is, “MS Minimal Level to Access”.
and reselection (a parameter to calculate C31 and C32).
3-20

0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Value Range l 63: > -48 dBm
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.30 Maximum initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCCH_0)

Full name GPRS MAX initial access signal level
Abbreviation MsTxMaxCCH_0
3GPP Name GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH

message by BTS. Network controls the MS transmit power during
communication with BTS. The network controls MS power using power
command. MS outputs transmit power closest to the specified power value
if unavailable. The power before MS receives the network power control
information (the power used in random access), depends on this parameter
when MS is receiving PBCCH.
This parameter is also a parameter for cell selection and reselection by
MS, involved in calculation of C1 and C2 values.
Refer to Appendix C, for the maximum power before MS receives the
power control information.
The principle of setting this parameter is as follows: Under the precondition
that the MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed with a certain access
success rate, the MS access level should be reduced as much as possible.
Generally, it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS)
Description and 2 (for GSM1800MS).
3-21

In actual application, after the parameter is set, make a dial test at the cell
boundary, and test MS access success rate and access time with different
parameter settings to determine whether to increase or decrease the value
of the parameter.
status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.31 Maximum initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCCH_1)

Abbreviation MsTxMaxCCH_1
This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter is informed to MS on

PACCH. Network controls the MS transmit power during communication
with BTS. The network controls MS power using power command. MS
outputs transmit power closest to the specified power value if unavailable.
The power before MS receives the network power control information (the
power used in random access), depends on this parameter when MS is
receiving PBCCH.
This parameter is also a parameter for cell selection and reselection by
MS, involved in calculation of C1 and C2 values.
Refer to Appendix C, for the maximum power before MS receives the
The principle of setting this parameter is as follows: Under the precondition
that the MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed with a certain access
success rate, the MS access level should be reduced as much as possible.
Generally, it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS)
Description and 2 (for GSM1800MS).
3-22

of the parameter.
transmission state.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2 UTRAN External Cell Parameters

The interface of UTRAN external cell parameters is shown in Figure 3-3.
3-23

Figure 3-3 UTRAN External Cell Parameters
3.2.1 External UTRAN ID (Ec3GID)

Full name External UTRAN ID (Ec3GID)
Abbreviation Ec3GID
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Serial number of UTRAN external cell
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-24

3.2.2 UTRAN cell type (CellType3G)

Full name UTRAN cell type
Abbreviation CellType3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description The type of this UTRAN cell
Value Range FDD, TDD
Unit None
Default value FDD
Change mode Offline
UTRAN cell Frequency (Arfcn3G)

Scrambling code or Cell Parameter (ScCodeCellPara)
UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)
Relevant parameters Apply Sync Case (SyncCaseTSTD)
This parameter value has influence on the value range of ScCodeCellPara,

and the value range and default value of Arfcn3G.
Relationship
When selecting TDD, two configurable parameters appear in the interface,
which are BandWidth3G and SyncCaseTSTD.
3.2.3 MCC (MCC)

Full name MCC (MCC)
Abbreviation MCC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
MCC consists of three digits of decimal number. It is used to uniquely identify

Description the home country of the mobile user (or system).
3-25

Value Range 0 ~ 999
Unit None
Default value 460
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.4 MNC (MNC)

Full name MNC (MNC)
Abbreviation MNC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
MNC consists of three digits of decimal number. It uniquely identifies a spe-

Description cific PLMN network in a country (determined by MCC).
l When MNC3Digits is selected as 2 digits, MNC value will be 0~99;

Value Range l When MNC3Digits is selected as 3 digits, MNC value will be 0~999;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.5 UTRAN cell frequency (Arfcn3G)

Full name UTRAN cell Frequency (Arfcn3G)
3-26

Abbreviation ArfcnUT3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description UTRAN adjacent cell's frequency range
l When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellType3G)" is FDD, value range is 412 ~

10838;
l When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellType3G)" is TDD and "UTRAN adjacent
cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)" is 0 (3.84 Mcps), value range is 2112 ~
13088;
cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)" is 1 (1.28 Mcps), value range is 9254 ~
Value Range 13096.
Unit None
l When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellType3G)" is FDD, default value is 412;

cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)" is 0 (3.84 Mcps), default value is 2112;
Default value cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)" is 1 (1.28 Mcps), default value is 9254;
Change mode Offline
UTRAN cell type (CellType3G)

Relevant parameters UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)
The value of CellType3G and BandWidth3G has influence on the value

Relationship
range and default value of this parameter.
3.2.6 LAC (LAC)
Full name LAC (LAC)
Abbreviation LAC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
3-27

Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.7 RNC ID (RNC_ID)

Full name RNC ID (RNC_ID)
Abbreviation RNC_ID
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Each RNC has a unique number in the UTRAN network of PLMN to route
Description corresponding UTRAN interface message correctly.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-28

3.2.8 C ID (C_ID)
Full name C ID (C_ID)
Abbreviation C_ID
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It identifies the UTRAN adjacent cell.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.9 Scrambling code or cell parameter (ScCodeCellPara)

Full name Scrambling code or Cell Parameter (ScCodeCellPara)
Abbreviation ScCodeCellPara
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
l FDD: It is described in detail in protocol 3GPP TS25.213. The scram-

bling code is used to distinguish the carriers in UTRAN/FDD network.
MS measure the main scrambling code of the downlink CPICH channel
in cell for handover or cell reselection. The scrambling codes are di-
vided into 0~511. There are one main scrambling code and 15 auxiliary
scrambling codes in each group. 511 main scrambling codes could be
divided into 64 scrambling code sets, and there are 8 scrabbling codes
in each set;
Description l TDD: The parameters describing adjacent cell
3-29

l When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is FDD, this parameter

represents FDD interference code, value range is 0 ~ 511, 65535.
l When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is TDD, this parameter
Value Range represents TDD cell parameter, value range is 0 ~ 127, 65535.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters UTRAN cell type (CellType3G)
The value of UTRAN Cell Type has influence on the value range of this
Relationship
parameter.
3.2.10 TX diversity indication (DiverSity)

Full name TX diversity indication
Abbreviation DiverSity
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if UTRAN adjacent cell uses diversity transmission.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.11 RAC (RAC)

Full name RAC (RAC)
3-30

Abbreviation RAC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
cell reselection.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.12 UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)

Full name UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth
Abbreviation BandWidth3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When "UTRAN cell type" is TDD, this parameter appears and can be con-
Description figured, indicating the bandwidth of UTRAN adjacent cell.
Value Range 1 (1.28Mcps), 0 (3.84Mcps)
Unit None
3-31

Default value 1 (1.28Mcps)
Change mode Offline

UTRAN cell frequency (Arfcn3G)
Relevant parameters Apply Sync Case (SyncCaseTSTD)
When CellTypeUTRAN is TDD, this parameter appears and can be

configured.
Relationship
According to different parameter values, the value range and default value
of Arfcn3G varies and names of SyncCaseTSTD are different.
3.2.13 Apply Sync Case (SyncCaseTSTD)

Full name Apply Sync Case / Apply TSTD
Abbreviation SyncCaseTSTD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if to apply SyncCase or TSTD
l When CellType3G is TDD and BandWidth3G is 1 (1.28 Mcps), the pa-

rameter indicates whether TSTD is applied, the parameter name is "Ap-
ply TSTD", the value range is Yes/No.
l When CellType3G is TDD and BandWidth3G is 0 (3.84 Mcps), the pa-
rameter indicates whether SyncCase is applied, the parameter name is
Value Range "Apply Sync Case", the value range is Yes/No.
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Relevant parameters UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)
When CellTypeUTRAN is TDD, this parameter appears and can be

Relationship configured. Based on different parameter value of BandWidth3G, this
parameter name may be different.
3-32

3-33

3-34

Chapter 4
Cell Parameters
This chapter explains the cell parameters, including basic parameters, optional
parameters, and GPRS/EDGE parameters.
Table of Contents
Basic Parameters 1 ....................................................................................................4-1
Basic Parameters 2 ..................................................................................................4-16
Basic Parameters 3 ..................................................................................................4-34
Optional Parameters ................................................................................................4-50
Cell Selection Parameters ........................................................................................4-60
Service Process Additional Parameters....................................................................4-70
System Parameters..................................................................................................4-81
GPRS Basic Parameters ..........................................................................................4-94
GPRS Other Parameters 1 .......................................................................................4-99
GPRS Cell Options Parameters .............................................................................4-138
GPRS NC Survey Parameters................................................................................4-148
GPRS Power Control Parameters ..........................................................................4-156
GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters .......................................................................4-160
GPRS Channel Parameters....................................................................................4-185
EDGE Parameters..................................................................................................4-196
4.1 Basic Parameters 1

The interface of cell basic parameters 1 is shown in Figure 4-1.
4-1

Figure 4-1 Basic Parameters 1
4.1.1 BTS ID (BtsId)

Full name Cell ID
Abbreviation BtsId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Serial number of this cell. Consistent with the sector ID of SDR base station.
1 ~ 24
The following lists the maximum number of BtsIds of each site type.
l OB06: 3
l BS20: 3
l BS21: 3
l BS21V20: 3
l BS30: 3
l BS30V12: 3
l B8112: 6
l M8202: 6
l M8206: 6
l B8018: 6
l S8001: 1
Value Range l SDR: 24
Unit None
Default value Sorted according to actual condition
Change mode Offline
4-2

Chapter 4 Cell Parameters
Relationship None
Service will be affected. If the parameter is modified, all current services of

Impact on service corresponding cell will be interrupted immediately.
4.1.2 Cell type (CellType)

Full name Cell type
Abbreviation CellType
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The type of this cell.

If you need configure S8001 cell, “micro-micro cell” shall be selected for
Description “cell type”.
Value Range Umbrella cell, Macro Cell, Micro Cell, Micro-micro Cell, Extended Cell
Unit None
Default value Macro Cell
Change mode Offline
TA MAX (TaMax)
TA allowed (TaAllowed)
Relevant parameters TA MIN (TaMin)
This parameter value has influence on the value range and default value
Relationship of TA MAX (TaMax) and TA allowed (TaAllowed), and the value of TA MIN
(TaMin).
4.1.3 MCC (MCC)

Full name MCC
Abbreviation MCC
4-3

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Mobile Country Code (MCC) is used to uniquely identify the home country
Description of the mobile users (or system), assigned internationally, China is 460.
Value Range Based on "Mobile country code" in BSC function parameters.
Unit None
Default value Based on "Mobile country code" in BSC function parameters.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.1.4 MNC (MNC)

Full name MNC
Abbreviation MNC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Mobile Network Code (MNC) uniquely identifies a specific PLMN network in

a country (decided by MCC). For instance, 07 is PLMN network of China
Description Mobile.
Value Range Based on "Mobile network code (MNC)" in BSC global resource parameters.
Unit None
Default value Based on "Mobile network code (MNC)" in BSC global resource parameters.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
Service will be affected. If the parameter is modified, the current PS service

Impact on service of corresponding cell will be interrupted immediately.
4-4

4.1.5 LAC (LAC)
Full name LAC (LAC)
Abbreviation LAC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

4.1.6 CI (CI)
Full name CI
Abbreviation CI
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In order to distinguish each cell in GSM PLMN uniquely, the network opera-
Description tors allocate a unique code for each cell in a location area.
4-5

Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
Service will be affected. If this parameter is inconsistent with the data at CN

Impact on service side, new service cannot be established in corresponding cell.
4.1.7 NCC (NCC)

Full name NCC
Abbreviation NCC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
NCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC
= NCC + BCC). which is used to enable the MS to distinguish adjacent and
different GSM PLMN cells. Normally, adjacent operators shall have differ-
ent NCCs. The parameter related to NCC is “NccPermitted” of the cell. By
prohibiting MS to report related NCC in the cell, MS is prohibited to measure
the cell information of the related operators. Actually, NCC occupies three
Description bits. NCC is one of the network identification parameters.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-6

4.1.8 BCC (BCC)

Full name BCC
Abbreviation BCC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC
= NCC + BCC). Normally, BCC is used to enable MS to distinguish adjacent
cells with the same BCCH carrier frequency and belonging to the same GSM
PLMN. In addition, the GSM specifications stipulate that the TSC (Training
Sequence Code) of the broadcast control channel of a cell shall be equal
to the cell BCC. BCC occupies three bits BCC and is one of the network
Description identification parameters.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

4.1.9 Frequency band (FreqBand)

Full name Frequency band
Abbreviation FreqBand
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description The frequency band types for GSM operation.

4-7

Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-05-02-002 EGSM Frequency Band Support
DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt)

Relevant parameters Frequency
The value of DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt) has influence on

Relationship the value range of this parameter.
This parameter value has influence on the value range of CaArfcnList.

4.1.10 Subcell used (SubCellUsed)

Full name Subcell used
Abbreviation SubCellUsed
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Defined according to user requirement.

If user selects subcell used, the system may automatically add "power
control 2" node under cell node, used to control cell power. If the user
selects don't use subcell, "power control 2" node may be automatically
Description deleted.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Relevant Features ZGO-04-02-005 Co-BCCH
Frequency band of subCell (SubFreqBand)

Relevant parameters SubCell ID (SubCellId)
When this parameter is Yes, you can configure SubFreqBand.

Relationship
This parameter value has influence on the value range of SubCellId.
4-8

4.1.11 Frequency band of subCell (SubFreqBand)

Full name Frequency band of subCell
Abbreviation SubFreqBand
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Set the frequency band of subCell.

Unit None
Change mode Offline

Subcell used (SubCellUsed)

Relevant parameters DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt)
If 'Subcell used' is 'Yes', this parameter is configurable.

Relationship The value of DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt) has influence on
the value range of this parameter.

4.1.12 ARFCN list (CaArfcnList)

Full name ARFCN list
Abbreviation CaArfcnList
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description The radio frequency set.
4-9

ARFCN set, the value range of each ARFCN is the same as BCCH. Based
on frequency setting at subsequent BTS, the system automatically fills it in
Value Range this box.
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-03-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping
Relationship None

Impact on service corresponding frequency point will be interrupted immediately.
4.1.13 GPRS service support (PsSupport)

Full name GPRS service support
Abbreviation PsSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if this cell supports GPRS (EDGE) service. If selecting "Support

Description GPRS" or "Support EDGE", relevant sub-page may occur in the interface.
Value Range No, Support GPRS, Support EDGE
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-05-007 EGPRS Activation per Cell
Relationship None
If the parameter setting is changed between "Support GPRS" and "Support

EDGE", service will not be affected. If the parameter setting is changed
between "Support GPRS"/"Support EDGE" and "No", the current PS service
4-10

4.1.14 Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable)

Full name Dynamic HR Enable
Abbreviation DynaHREnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The dynamic HR channel allocation function allows allocating FR or HR

channel to MS according to the cell's traffic. When the cell's channels become
Description
congested, HR channel is allocated to MS, which greatly shortens the cell's
congestion time during peak traffic hours.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Relevant Features
Relevant parameters Use cell dynamic HR parameter (UseCellDynHRPara)
Relationship If this parameter is set to Yes, 'Use cell dynamic HR parameter' is configurable.
4.1.15 Use cell dynamic HR parameter (UseCellDynHRPara)

Full name Use cell dynamic HR parameter
Abbreviation UseCellDynHRPara
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates whether to use cell dynamic HR parameter.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-005 Dynamic Half Rate Allocation
4-11

Relevant parameters Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable)
Relationship If DynaHREnable is 'Yes', this parameter is configurable.
4.1.16 CBC support (SmsCbUsed)

Full name CBC support
Abbreviation SmsCbUsed
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
CBC service is an important service provided by mobile communication

system, mainly used to distribute information to the mobile subscribers
within certain geographical location area. The difference from P2P sms
service contains: receiver for P2P sms is specific mobile subscriber, but
receiver for CBC is all mobile subscribers within certain area, including
external subscribers roaming in this area.
This parameter identifies if this cell supports the function of cell
Description broadcasting short message.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-01-03-004 Cell Broadcast SMS
l If "CBC support (SmsCbUsed)" is No, that is, CBC is not supported,

the system automatically searches all timeslot channel combinations in
the cell. If CBC channel exists, it is changed to SDCCH.
Relationship l If "CBC support (SmsCbUsed)" is Yes, that is, CBC is supported, the
system automatically searches all timeslot channel combinations in
the cell. If a non-BCCH channel is found for a carrier, it is changed
to SDCCH+CBCH.
4-12

4.1.17 Threshold for FR to HR (HRThs, %)

Full name Threshold for FR to HR
Abbreviation HRThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When BSC and cell enables dynamic HR functions, and percentage of

TCH/F channel used in the cell (TCH/F channels occupied in the cell / all
available TCH channels in the cell (including IDLE and BUSY)) exceeds
Description this threshold, convert TCH/F -> TCH/H.
Value Range 1 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 60
Change mode Offline

Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-005 Dynamic Half Rate Allocation
Relationship None
4.1.18 PS busy threshold (Info_1_16)

Full name PS busy threshold
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Do the half-rate expansion if the cell busy degree reaches or exceeds this
Description
threshold, to restrict the PS expansion.
Management
Object Cell
Value Range 1 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
4-13

Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
4.1.19 Use cell AMR parameter (UseCellAMRParam)

Full name Use cell AMR parameter
Abbreviation UseCellAMRParam
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if AMR parameter in the cell is enabled.

l If the cell doesn't enable its own AMR parameters, AMR parameter
value configured by BSC is configured as the predominent;
l If the cell is enabled, AMR parameter value configured by the cell is
Description configured as the predominent;
Value Range Use, not use
Unit None
Default value Not use
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.1.20 Common control channel configuration (CcchConf)

Full name Common control channel configuration
Abbreviation CcchConf
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-14

Common control channel configuration is one of the system control

parameters. In GSM system, CCCH includes Access Grant Channel
(AGCH) and Paging Channel (PCH). It is used to send access granting
(that is instant assignment) message and paging message.
In each cell, all service channels share CCCH. According to the
configuration of the service channel in the cell and the traffic mode of the
cell, CCCH could be one or more than one physical channel, and CCCH
could share the same physical channel with SDCCH.
The combination mode of the common control channel in cell depends
on CCCH configuration parameter and it should be consistent with the
actual configuration of cell CCH. It could be observed from this parameter:
BS_CC_CHANS (Number of CCCH); BS_CCCH_SDCCH_COMB (If
combined with SDCCH).
This parameter is broadcasted to all MSs in the cell by message RIL3_RR
Description SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3.
CCCH uses one physical channel, not combined with SDCCH; CCCH uses
one physical channel, combined with SDCCH; CCCH uses two physical
channels, not combined with SDCCH; CCCH uses three physical channels,
not combined with SDCCH; CCCH uses four physical channels, not com-
Value Range bined with SDCCH.
Unit None
Default value CCCH uses one physical channel, not combined with SDCCH
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-02-001 Support of SDCCH/4 and SDCCH/8
l When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "a basic physical

channel used by CCCH, along with SDCCH". In channel information
parameters, timeslot 0 channel combination shall be one of these two
combined channels: BCCH+SDCCH/4 and BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH.
l When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "a basic physical
channel used by CCCH, regarless of SDCCH". In channel information
parameters, timeslot 0 channel combination shall be one of these two
Relationship combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH and BCCH+CCCH.
l When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "two basic physical
channels used by CCCH, regarless of SDCCH". In channel information
parameters, timeslot 0 and 2 channel combination shall be these two
combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH and BCCH+CCCH.
l When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "three basic
physical channels used by CCCH, regarless of SDCCH". In channel
information parameters, timeslot 0, 2, and 4 channel combination
4-15

shall be these two combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH

and BCCH+CCCH.
l When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "four basic
physical channels used by CCCH, regarless of SDCCH". In channel
information parameters, timeslot 0, 2, and 4 channel combination
shall be these two combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH
and BCCH+CCCH.
4.1.21 Template file

Full name Template file
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Click Select button, a window pops up, select the template file in local path;
Description click Clear button to clear selected template files.
Value Range Local files
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

4-16

4.2.1 TA maximum (TaMax)

Full name TA maximum
Abbreviation TaMax
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It represents the maximum TA supported by extended cell.
l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is non-extended cell, value range is 0 ~ 63;

Value Range l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, value range is 0 ~ 219;
Unit None
l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is non-extended cell, default value is 63;

Default value l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, default value is 219;
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-01-001 Extended Cell Coverage
Relevant parameters Cell type (CellType)
The value of the parameter CellType has influence on the value range
Relationship
and default value of this parameter.
4-17

4.2.2 TA minimum (TaMin)

Full name TA minimum
Abbreviation TaMin
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the minimum TA granted to be accessed into the cell.

Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship The value of CellType has influence on the value range of this parameter.
4.2.3 TA allowed (TaAllowed)

Full name TA allowed
Abbreviation TaAllowed
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It represents the maximum TA granted to be accessed into the cell.

Unit None
l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is non-extended cell, default value is 63;

Default value l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, default value is 219;
Change mode Offline
4-18

The value of the parameter CellType has influence on the value range
Relationship
and default value of this parameter.
4.2.4 CCCH load indication period (CcchLoadIndPrd, s)

Full name CCCH load indication period
Abbreviation CcchLoadIndPrd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, during the period of PCH overload mea-

surement, when the load of PCH channel at BTS exceeds the PCH over-
load threshold set by O&M, BTS sends the CCCH LOAD INDICATION mes-
sage periodically to BSC until the load of PCH channel does not exceed this
Description threshold value.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.5 Periodical location updating timer (T3212, 360s)

Full name Periodical location updating timer
Abbreviation T3212
3GPP Name T3212
4-19

Location update results from two major causes in GSM system. One is
when MS changes from old LAC to new LAC and the second is when the
network notifies MS for periodic location update.
Network controls the location time interval and depends upon T3212
timer. Network broadcasts to all MSs in the cell by RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3 message. T3212 timer is one of the system control
parameters.
The setting of this parameter will affect the overall service performance and
utilization rate of radio resources of the network. For the area with higher
traffic, the period could be bigger (for example 16 or 20 hours, even 25
hours); for the area with ordinary traffic, the value of T3212 could be smaller
(for example 3 or 6 hours); for the area with extreme overload traffic, it is
Description recommended to set T3212 as 0.
0 ~ 255
l 0: positive infinite, location update is not required;
l 1: 6 minutes;
l 2: 12 minutes;
......
Value Range l 255: 1530 minutes
Unit 360 s
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.6 Protection period for access attempt (T3122, s)

Full name Protection period for access attempt
Abbreviation T3122
3GPP Name T3122
4-20

The network sends IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message to MS

when it receives a channel request message from MS and will not allocate
a suitable channel to MS. IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message
contains T3122 timer parameter to prevent possible wireless channel
blocking caused by repeated channel requests sent by the MS, which is
waiting for indication information unit.
MS cannot restart a new call until the time indicated by T3122 is elapsed
if it receives the ‘IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message. This
parameter is also one of the system control parameters, and is sent to MS
in the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message.
Following are the suggested values: 10 s ~ 15 s for normal traffic area;
Description 15 s ~ 25 s for dense traffic area.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.7 Multi-band report indication (MulbandReport)

Full name Multi-band report indication
Abbreviation MulbandReport
3GPP Name MULTIBAND_REPORTING
MS in single-frequency GSM system needs only to report contents of

six adjacent cells with the strongest signals in a frequency band, when
reporting the survey result of adjacent cells to the network.
In multi-band networking, MS can enter with priority into a specific
frequency band during handover. The MS reports the survey result
according to the signal intensity and the frequency band of the signals,
according to the actual situation.
Multiband report indication is used to notify MS to report contents of
adjacent cells in multiple frequency bands. It is one of the system control
Description parameters.
4-21

The setting of this parameter is subject to traffic in each frequency band.

General principles to set the parameters are as follows: 0: If the traffic of
each frequency band is almost equivalent, and the operator has no choice
over the frequency band. 3: If the traffic of each frequency band is quite
different, and the operator hopes that MS enters a specific frequency band
with priority.
l 0: According to adjacent cell's signal strength, MS reports the measure-
ment result of six adjacent cells with the strongest known and permitted
NCC. This report is applicable for adjacent cells of all frequency bands.
l 1: MS reports the measurement result of an adjacent cell with the
strongest signal at frequency bands in the adjacent cell list (excluding
frequency band of the local cell). In the remaining space, MS reports
adjacent cells which are at the local cell's frequency band. If there
is still remaining space, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, no
matter what frequency bands they are at.
l 2: MS reports the measurement result of two adjacent cells with the
adjacent cells which are at the local cell's frequency band. If there is still
remaining space, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, no matter
what frequency bands they are at.
l 3: MS reports the measurement result of three adjacent cells with the
adjacent cell in local cell frequency band. If still more space is avail-
able, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, no matter what frequency
bands they are at.
Value Range 0~3
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-22

4.2.8 Minimal level threshold of MS uplink RACH access

(RachAccessMin, -db)
Full name Minimal level threshold of MS uplink RACH access
Abbreviation RachAccessMin
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Minimal level threshold of MS uplink RACH access
Unit -dB
Default value 125
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.9 CCCH load indication (RACH) (CcchLoadINDThs_0)

Full name CCCH load indication (RACH)
Abbreviation CcchLoadINDThs_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When load degree in RACH channel for BTS exceeds this threshold, BTS
sends CCCH LOAD INDICATION message periodically to iBSC until load
Description degree in RACH channel doesn't exceed this threshold value.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
4-23

Relationship None
4.2.10 CCCH load indication (PAGCH) (CcchLoadINDThs_1)

Full name CCCH load indication (PAGCH)
Abbreviation CcchLoadINDThs_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When load degree in PCH channel for BTS exceeds this threshold, BTS
sends CCCH LOAD INDICATION message periodically to iBSC until load
Description degree in PCH channel doesn't exceed this threshold value.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.11 8PSK modulating power attenuation level (Tn7Lowerlevel,

0.2db)
Full name 8PSK modulating power attenuation level
Abbreviation Tn7Lowerlevel
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates 8PSK modulating power attenuation level.
Value Range 0 ~ 50
4-24

Unit 0.2 dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.12 Repeated ACCH support (RepeatACCH)

Full name Repeated ACCH support
Abbreviation RepeatACCH
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if to use FACCH/SACCH retransmission func-

Description tion.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-02-009 Repeated FACCH/SACCH
Relationship None
4.2.13 Start PA power off (StartPAPowerOff)

Full name Start PA power off
Abbreviation StartPAPowerOff
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-25

To save energy and reduce consumption, BTS system shall turn off PA offset
voltage while close power for idle timeslots.l If configuring on BTS, FPGA can
Description determine if PA offset voltage shall be turned off.
Yes, No
l Yes: enable
Value Range l No: disable
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-04-003 Intelligent Timeslot Shutdown
Relationship None
4.2.14 Switch flag of cell TRX power off (StartTRXPowerOff)

Full name Switch flag of cell TRX power off
Abbreviation StartTRXPowerOff
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It marks if "Switch Flag of Ceil TRX Power Off" is enabled.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-04-002 Intelligent TRX Shutdown
Relationship None
4-26

(BsRadioLkTmOutAMRFR)
Full name BSS radio link timer's max value for AMR HR
Abbreviation BsRadioLkTmOutAMRFR
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Fault detection period in AMR-FR channel. Within this period, pick average
value through s times of measurement, and judge link fault threshold, to dert-
Description ermine if the channel is failed.
Value Range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
Unit None
Default value 64
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
(BsRadioLkTmOutAMRHR)
Full name BSS radio link timer's max value for AMR HR
Abbreviation BsRadioLkTmOutAMRHR
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Fault detection period in AMR-HR channel. Within this period, pick average
value through s times of measurement, and judge link fault threshold, to dert-
Description ermine if the channel is failed.
Value Range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
Unit None
Default value 64
4-27

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.17 AMR codec adjust mode (AmrAdjMode)

Full name AMR codec adjust mode
Abbreviation AmrAdjMode
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
etting of AMR rate adjustment mode:

l AMR rapid speed mode: master adjustment time by BTS itself;
l Interval to adjust configuration: adjustment time shall be defined at
Description background
Value Range AMR rapid speed mode; Interval to adjust configuration
Unit None
Default value AMR rapid speed mode
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-02-008 AMR Power Control
Relationship None
4.2.18 AMR codec adjust interval (AmrAdjInterval, 480ms)

Full name AMR codec adjust interval
Abbreviation AmrAdjInterval
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-28

It indicates AMR adjustment interval. This parameter is only meaningful

Description when AmrAdjMode is "interval to adjust configuration".
Value Range 1 ~ 50
Unit 480 ms
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.19 HR channel fragment finishing support (HRDfragSupport)

Full name HR channel fragment finishing support
Abbreviation HRDfragSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is a switch of frag collection in HR channel, which can be

configured on BSC and BTS. Only when both BSC and BTS are enabled
and (number of unfinished HR defragment instances / number of idle HR
channels in the cell) is no more than HRDefragThs, the HR channel defrag-
Description mentation function is enabled, otherwise, it is disabled.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-004 HR Concentration
Relationship None
4-29

4.2.20 Idle FR threshold For HR defrag (Info_0_8, %)

Full name Idle FR threshold For HR defrag
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When the proportion between the number of idle TCH/F channels in cell and the
the number of all available service channels in cell is smaller than this threshold
Description
value, the defragment is started.
Management Cell
Object
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relevant ZGO-03-02-004 HR Concentration

Features
Relevant None
parameters
Relationship None
Related None
interfaces
Impact on None
service
4.2.21 Busy threshold for HR defrag (Info_1_24, %)

Full name Busy threshold for HR defrag
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When the cell's busyness degree is smaller than this threshold value, the
Description defragment is started.
Management Cell
Object
4-30

Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relevant None
Features
Relevant None
parameters
Relationship None
Related None
interfaces
Impact on None
service
4.2.22 Percentage of HR Ts (HRTsPercentage)

Full name Percentage of HR Ts
Abbreviation HRTsPercentage
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When HR timeslot in the cell / general timeslot in the cell <

HRTsPercentage/100, the cell can generate new HR channel.
This parameter can be configured on BSC and BTS. If the proportion of HR
timeslot in the cell is lower than HRTsPercentage/100 of BSC and BTS, the
Description cell can generate new HR channel.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-31

4.2.23 AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold (AmrHRThs)

Full name AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold
Abbreviation AmrHRThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When busy timeslot/general timeslot >= AmrHRThs/100, and carrier and cell
support AMR, subsequent service prefers AMR voice rate.
This threshold value can be configured on BSC and BTS, when "User cell
Description
dynamic HR parameter" (UseCellDynHRPara) is yes, AmrHRThs value
configured by cell will be used, otherwise AmrHRThs configured by BSC
is used.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-006 Dynamic AMR HR/FR conversion independent threshold
Relationship None
4.2.24 FR-HR handover based on cell load (FRThrHoSupport)

Full name FR-HR handover based on cell load
Abbreviation FRThrHoSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description FR-HR handover based on cell load
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
4-32

Relationship None
4.2.25 Start PA output voltage tuning (Info_0_0)

Full name Start PA output voltage tuning
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if the TRX starts the function of adjusting PA voltage based

Description
on BTS output power.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.26 NCC permitted (NccPermitted)

Full name NCC permitted
Abbreviation NccPermitted
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Add or Delete NCC within the value range.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
4-33

Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

4.3.1 Average bursts count surveyed by RACH (AvgSlots)

Full name Average bursts count surveyed by RACH
Abbreviation AvgSlots
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-34

Average bursts count surveyed by RACH specifies the number of bursts

measured on RACH. RACH channel overloads if receiving signal levels of
this parameter BP are less than RACH Receiving signal level threshold for
Description busy burst. BTS uses this parameter.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.2 RACH receiving signal level threshold for busy burst

(RachBusyThs)
Full name RACH receiving signal level threshold for busy burst
Abbreviation RachBusyThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
RACH Receiving signal level threshold for busy burst is the threshold for
receiving signal level in RACH bursts. If the value is exceeded (that is less
than RACH Receiving signal level threshold for busy burst dBm), system
Description considers that as a busy RACH.
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 63
Change mode Offline
4-35

Relationship None
4.3.3 Overload sending period (OverloadPrd, s)

Full name Overload sending period
Abbreviation OverloadPrd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, when the Access Burst level exceeds the
predefined access level busy threshold (RACHBusyThs), the Access Burst
is considered as busy burst. During the period of RACH overload measure-
ment, if the ratio of the number of Busy Bursts to all Access Bursts exceeds
the RACH overload threshold set by O&M, then the CCCH LOAD INDICA-
Description TION message is reported.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.4 BA show (BcchBaInd)

Full name BA show
Abbreviation BcchBaInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-36

BA indication of BCCH. Adjacent cell list can be broadcasted on BCCH and

transferred on SACCH. The adjacent cell list transferred on BCCH can be
different from that on SACCH. When MS reports the measurement data
of adjacent cell, either BCCH adjacent cell list or SACCH adjacent cell
list will be referred. Therefore, to know which adjacent cell list is referred
by MS, a BA indication is added when transferring adjacent cell list on
BCCH and SACCH. When reporting the measurement result, MS notifies
the network side about the corresponding BA indication of the referred
adjacent cell list. As a result, the network side recognizes which adjacent
cell list this MS uses.
This parameter describes the BS indication value when the adjacent cell
list being transferred on BCCH. In the case of transferring adjacent cell list
on SACCH, the BA indication value used is the reverse of the parameter.
l 0: BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on BCCH (System message 2, 2bis,
2ter) is 0; BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on SACCH (System message 5,
5bis, 5ter) is 1.
l 1: BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on BCCH (System message 2, 2bis,
2ter) is 1; BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on SACCH (System message 5,
Description 5bis, 5ter) is 0.
Value Range 0, 1
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.5 MIN received signal level to access (RxLevAccessMin)

Full name MIN received signal level to access
Abbreviation RxLevAccessMin
3GPP Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
4-37


communications after access), and from unreasonably wasting the radio
sources of network, it is prescribed in the GSM system that the receiving
level be greater than a threshold for MS to access the network, that is, MS
Min RxLev to Access (the minimum receiving level for the MS to access
the network).
In addition, the criterion assists MS to select and reselect the cell. The
parameter will be broadcast to all MSs in a cell through the “RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. MIN received
signal level to access is one of the cell selection parameters.
Recommended value is usually approximated according to MS receiving
sensitivity. When network observes uneven traffic distribution in certain
cells, MIN received signal level to access increases the resulting C1 and C2
to decrease the cell effective coverage range. However, the value of this
parameter cannot be too large. Otherwise, large value change can bring
‘void area’ across cell boundaries to result in sudden call drop problem.
With this measure for traffic balance, it is suggested that the level value
should not exceed -90dBm. At the preliminary running stage of the network,
this parameter can be usually set as 10 (that is, -101 dBm ~ -100 dBm)
or lower, which is higher than the MS receiving sensitivity –102 dBm.
However, when the network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage in a
Description cell is not a problem, this parameter of the cell can be increased by 2 (dB).
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-02-02-007 Support of C1 Criteria
Relationship None
4-38

4.3.6 MAX number of re-transmitting events times (MRetrans)

Full name MAX number of re-transmitting events times
Abbreviation MRetrans
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
MS sends the channel request message on RACH channel to the network

to start immediate assignment process.
RACH is an ALOHA channel, the network enables MS to send multiple
channel request messages before the MS receives the IMMEDIATE
ASSIGNMENT message to increase the access success rate of MS.
Maximum number of allowable resend time depends on MAX number of
re-transmitting events times.
Network broadcasts this parameter information to MS in the cell through
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4’ messages.
MAX number of re-transmitting events times is one of the control
parameters of GSM system.
l For the cell radius over 3km and the area with small traffic, it can be set
as 3 (that is, the maximum number of resending times is 7) to improve
the access success rate of MS.
l For the cell radius less than 3km and the area with common traffic, it
can be set as 2 (that is, the maximum number of resending times is 4);
l Define value as 1 (maximum number of resending times is 2) for the
micro cell.
l Define value as 0 (maximum number of resending times is 1) for the
Description micro cell with heavy traffic and the cell with congestion.
0~3
l 0: once
l 1: 2 times
l 2: 4 times
Value Range l 3: 7 times
Unit None
Default value 2 (4 times)
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-39

4.3.7 Number of slots to spread transmission (TxInteger)

Full name Number of slots to spread transmission
Abbreviation TxInteger
3GPP Name Tx_integer
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to the PRACH control

and RACH control parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1
message. Whenever establishing a new connection, MS sends a channel
request message to the network through PRACH/RACH channel.
As PRACH/RACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve MS access success
rate, the network allows MS to send multiple channel request messages
before receiving packet assignment message. If MS does not receive any
response for the previous channel request message, MS resends the
channel request message after waiting for a random period. Network uses
this parameter to determine the random waiting time.
The timeslot interval between two channel request messages should be a
value randomly selected from the set {S, S+1..., S+T-1}.
The relationship between S and T is as follows.
l When T is 3, 8, 14, or 50, S: 55 (CCCH); 41 (CCH/SDCCH)
l When T is 4, 9, or 16, S: 76 (CCCH); 52 (CCH/SDCCH)
Description l When T is 7, 12, or 32, S: 217 (CCCH); 115 (CCH/SDCCH)
0 ~ 15
l 0: T is 3;
l 1: T is 4;
l 2: T is 5;
l 3: T is 6;
l 4: T is 7;
l 5: T is 8;
l 6: T is 9;
l 7: T is 10;
l 8: T is 11;
l 9: T is 12;
l 10: T is 14;
l 11: T is 16;
l 12: T is 20;
l 13: T is 25;
l 14: T is 32;
Value Range l 15: T is 50.
4-40

Unit None
Default value 14
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.8 Control channel MAX power level (MsTxPwrMaxCch)

Full name Control channel MAX power level
Abbreviation MsTxPwrMaxCch
3GPP Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
During the communication between MS and BTS, the transmission power

is controlled by the network. The network sets the power for MS through
the power command and the command is transmitted on SACCH (SACCH
has 2 header bytes, one is the power control byte and the other is the
timing advance byte).
MS must extract the power control header from downward SACCH and
takes the specified transmission power as output power. If the power level
of MS cannot output the power value, it will output the closest transmission
power that can be output.
For SACCH is Channel Associated Signaling and it has to be used together
with SCCCH and TCH, so the power control of MS starts after MS receives
SACCH.
The power of MS before receiving SACCH (that is the power when sending
channel request on RACH) is determined by Control channel MAX power
level.
Control channel MAX power level is one of the cell selection and reselection
parameters of MS, involving calculation of C1 and C2 values.
This parameter is broadcasted to all MS in the cell via RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4.
Refer to appendix C, for the maximum power before MS receives the
If this parameter is set too large, the MS near BTS will interfere the adjacent
channels. If it is too small, the MS at the cell boundaries will have low
Description
access success rate.
4-41

Setting principle: in the premise of certain MS access success rate at the

cell edge, decrease the access level of MS as much as possible. Generally,
it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS) and 0 (for
GSM1800MS).
In practice, after setting this parameter, perform dialing test at the cell edge,
increase or decrease the value of this parameter according to the MS
access success rate and access time tested with different parameter setup.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.9 Number of multi-frames of the PCH (BsPaMframs)

Full name Number of multi-frames of the PCH
Abbreviation BsPaMframs
3GPP Name BS-PA-MFRMS
Number of multiframes of the PCH specifies the repeat cycle of PCH group
subchannel using multiple 51-MultiFrame structures. It is one of the system
control parameters.
According to GSM Specifications, a unique IMSI identifies MS and paging
group. IMSI determines the PCH sub-channel for MS in a paging group.
In the actual network, MS tunes only to the paging sub-channel during
IDLE mode in the serving cell and ignores other paging sub-channels. In
other IDLE time, MS shuts off the hardware equipment power supply to
save power. Number of multiframes of the PCH determines the number of
paging sub-channels of the paging channel in a cell.
MS use this parameter to find out its home paging group, so as to
monitor corresponding paging sub-channel. Network broadcasts the
Description parameter information to all MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM
4-42

INFORMATION TYPE3 message. Number of multiframes of the PCH is

one of the system control parameters.
Value Range 2~9
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-02-01-001 paging
Relationship None
4.3.10 Interval of SDCCH re-sending PHY info message (T3105d,

10ms)
Full name Interval of SDCCH re-sending PHY info message
Abbreviation T3105d
3GPP Name T3105
It is the interval for resending the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOMATION

message during an asynchronous handover of SDCCH channel. This timer
is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
l Timer Start: It starts when network sends the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL IN-
FORMATION message.
l Timer Stop: It stops when the network receives a layer-2 frame that can
be correctly decoded or receives the HANDOVER FAILURE message
from the former channel.
l Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOR-
Description MATION message will be redelivered.
Value Range 1 ~ 67
Unit 10 ms
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
4-43

Relationship None
4.3.11 Interval of TCH re-sending PHY info message (T3105f, 10ms)

Full name Interval of TCH re-sending PHY info message
Abbreviation T3105f
3GPP Name T3105
It is the interval for resending the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOMATION

message during an asynchronous handover of TCH channel. This timer
is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
l Timer Start: It starts when network sends the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL IN-
FORMATION message.
l Timer Stop: It stops when the network receives a layer-2 frame that can
be correctly decoded or receives the HANDOVER FAILURE message
from the former channel.
l Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOR-
Description MATION message will be redelivered.
Value Range 1 ~ 32
Unit 10 ms
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.12 MAX resending times for physical information (NY1)

Full name MAX resending times for physical information
Abbreviation NY1
4-44

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BTS sends RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message to notify MS the

advanced time value that is used during asynchronous handover process
to be in accordance with GSM specifications. BTS starts the T3105 timer
after the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message is sent once. BTS
resends message ‘RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION’ and restart the
T3105 timer if the timer stops and fails to decode the frames in second
layer correctly (format A or format B) or TCH frames.
MAX resending times for physical information decides maximum number of
resending times for RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message. This
Description parameter is one of the BTS configuration parameters.
Value Range 5 ~ 35
Unit None
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.13 Number of blocks reserved for AGCH (BsAgBlkRes)

Full name Number of blocks reserved for AGCH
Abbreviation BsAgBlkRes
3GPP Name BS_AG_BLKS_RES
The number of blocks used for AGCH in 51-MultiFrame. It is recommended

Description that this value of the cells in the same local area is identical.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
4-45

Relationship None
4.3.14 Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch channel (T200_0, 5ms)

Full name LAPDM timer used for controlling the SDCCH channel.
Abbreviation T200_0
3GPP Name T200
3GPP reference None
T200 is the timer used on various control channels in LAPDm protocol of

Description BTS. There are 7 kinds of T200.
Value Range 1~7
Unit 5 ms
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.15 Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/full rate channel (T200_1,

5ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/full rate channel
Abbreviation T200_1
3GPP Name T200
3GPP reference None

4-46

Value Range 1~7
Unit 5 ms
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.16 Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/half rate channel (T200_2,

5ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/half rate channel
Abbreviation T200_2
3GPP Name T200
3GPP reference None

Value Range 1~7
Unit 5 ms
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-47

4.3.17 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi0 channel
(T200_3, 10ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi0 channel
Abbreviation T200_3
3GPP Name T200
3GPP reference None

Value Range 1~7
Unit 10 ms
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.18 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with sdcch channel

(T200_4, 10ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with sdcch channel
Abbreviation T200_4
3GPP Name T200
3GPP reference None

Value Range 1~7
Unit 10 ms
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
4-48

Relationship None
4.3.19 Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch sapi3 channel (T200_5,

5ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch sapi3 channel
Abbreviation T200_5
3GPP Name T200
3GPP reference None

Value Range 1~7
Unit 5 ms
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.20 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi3 channel
(T200_6, 10ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi3 channel
Abbreviation T200_6
3GPP Name T200
3GPP reference None

4-49

Value Range 1~7
Unit 10 ms
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4 Optional Parameters

The interface of optional parameters is shown in Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4 Optional Parameters
4.4.1 Early category classmark sending control (ECSC)

Full name Early category classmark sending control
Abbreviation ECSC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-50

According to GSM specification, MS transmits appended class mark

information (Classmark 3) to the network through the CLASSMARK
CHANGE message as soon as possible.
Early category classmark sending control determines whether the network
supports ECSC function. Network broadcasts the parameter information
to MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3
message.
If there is a cell in another frequency band in the adjacent cell for handover
or the current cell itself is extended GSM cell and the function of early
category classmark sending control is enabled, set ECSC as ‘Yes’,
Description otherwise set as ‘No’.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4.2 IMSI attach/detach allowed (ImsIadAllowed)

Full name IMSI attach/detach allowed
Abbreviation ImsIadAllowed
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
IMSI attach/detach allowed determines whether cell allows IMSI

Attach/Detach procedure. IMSI detach occur when MS reports switch-off
or when the SIM card is taken out from the MS.
The network (normally VLR) marks ‘Detach’ flag in subscriber information
table. Such procedure assists the network to prevent unnecessary paging
broadcast message to MS. Likewise, the IMSI Attach occur when the MS
reports switch-on or reinserting of the SIM card. After successful IMSI
attach, MS requests for Location Update (LU) for inconsistent LAI in SIM
card with that of serving cell.
The network (normally VLR) marks ‘Attach’ flag in subscriber information
Description
table.
4-51

This parameter is included in ‘Control channel information’ and is used for

RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message.
This parameter of each cell in the same location area shall be identical.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4.3 Cell bar access (CellBarAccess)

Full name Cell bar access
Abbreviation CellBarAccess
3GPP Name CELL_BAR_ACCESS
PLMN carriers can determine if to allow MS to access a specific cell (for

example the cell in test or the cell for absorbing traffic only).
Network broadcasts Cell bar access information to MS in the cell through
Description RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4 messages.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-52

4.4.4 Call re-establishment allowed (CallReestablish)

Full name Call re-establishment allowed
Abbreviation CallReestablish
3GPP Name RE
For the call drop caused by radio link failure resulted from burst interference
or high building, MS could originate call re-establishment process to restore
the call. However, the network determines if to allow reestablishment by
enabling Call re-establishment allowed.
Network broadcasts the parameter information to MS in the cell through
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4, message.
Description Call re-establishment allowed is one of the network function parameters.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4.5 Downlink discontinuous transmission allowed (DtxDwlink)

Full name Downlink discontinuous transmission allowed
Abbreviation DtxDwlink
3GPP Name DTX
3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0

3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0
3GPP reference 3GPP TS 48.058 V5
4-53

DTX mode is an optional downlink feature of GSM System.

The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode means that the system
does not transmit signals during the speech intermission of the subscriber
conversation. This parameter participates in determining to use DTX mode
in downlink direction.
Actually, whether DTX is used in downlink direction (in CHANNEL
ACTIVATION message and MODE MODIFY message sent to BTS)
is determined together by this parameter and the DTX indication in
downlink direction in ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message and HANDOVER
REQUEST message of MSC.
l Yes: used
Description l No: not used
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-02-003 Discontinuous Transmission Downlink
Relationship None
4.4.6 Uplink discontinuous transmission (DtxUplinkBcch)

Full name Uplink discontinuous transmission
Abbreviation DtxUplinkBcch
3GPP Name DTX
The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode means that the system

does not transmit signals during the speech intermission of the subscriber
conversation.
This parameter controls how MS uses the DTX mode. System broadcasts
‘RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3’ message to all MSs in the
cell. In addition, it may be necessary to notify MSs of older versions
(of the first stage) through the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION
TYPE6 message on SACCH. For MSs of newer versions, the RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6 message contains Uplink discontinuous
Description transmission. This parameter is one of the network function parameters.
4-54


l MS could use DTX;
l MS should use DTX;
l MS should not use DTX.
If both the BTS equipment and TRAU support the DTX mode, set the
parameter as 1 (employ DTX). Otherwise set it as 2 (not employ DTX).
Value Range 0~2
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-02-004 Discontinuous Transmission Uplink
Relationship None
4.4.7 Emergency call allowed (EmergencyCall)

Full name Emergency call allowed
Abbreviation EmergencyCall
3GPP Name EC
Generally, a valid SIM card is required for any MS in GSM Network to get
various network services. But the operators could decide if to allow MS
emergency call service for the MS without SIM card or with SIM card whose
access level is disabled by current cell, for example the police station.
Select ‘Yes’ for Emergency call allowed to enable this function.
Network broadcasts this parameter to MS in the cell through RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3, and 4 message. It is one of
the network function parameters.
l No: Emergency call for MSs whose access level is 0 ~ 9 is not allowed.
For MSs whose access level is 11 ~ 15, if its corresponding access
control bit is T, the emergency call is also not allowed.
l Yes: Allow emergency call for all MSs.
GSM specifications define emergency call phone number as 112, which
is different from Chinese emergency call, but 112 is generally connected
Description to the automatic voice service to inform the users about the number of
4-55

various special services. Hence, EC shall be set as ‘No’, that is to allow

the emergency call.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4.8 Cell bar qualify (CellBarQualify)

Full name Cell bar qualify
Abbreviation CellBarQualify
3GPP Name CBQ CELL_BAR_QUALIFY
3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0

This parameter preferably selects certain cells in the cell selection process
according to capacity, traffic and functional difference in overlapping areas.
This function can be implemented by configuring CellBarQualify.
CellBarQualify is used to limit cell priority in special case. Network
broadcasts the parameter information to all MSs in the cell through
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. It is
one of the cell selection parameters. The validity of this parameter depends
upon cell reselection parameter indication.
Select 'No' for Cell Bar Access and 'No' for Cell bar qualify, that is, the
cell priority is defined as 'Normal'. MS preferably enter some types of
cells. Set the priority of this cell type as 'Normal', while the priorities of
other cells to 'Low'. In some cases, such as micro cellular application, and
Description dual-frequency networking, this setting will not affect the cell reselection.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
4-56

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4.9 Access Control (AccessControl)

Full name Access Control
Abbreviation AccessControl
3GPP Name AC CN, Access Control Class N
All MSs in GSM system have an access class (15 classes in total). The
MSs that are in the class ranging between 0 and 9 are common ones. The
MSs that are in the class ranging between 11 and 15 are special MSs (no
access class 10). Therefore, the system can disable the MSs with certain
access classes to access the cell (for example during the installation and
commissioning or the congestion control). This information can reach MS
inside the cell in RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and
4 messages through Access control. It is also one of the system control
parameters.
The degree of congestion for any CCCH or processor overload during
congestion control can be reduced by temporarily prohibiting one type or
multiple types of subscribers from accessing the system (for subscribers of
access levels 0 ~ 9). In general, the system shows the following overload
conditions:
l RACH overload should be detected in the CCCH LOAD INDICATION
message and processed by BSS according to the GSM08.58.
l AGCH overload should be detected in the DELETE INDICATION mes-
sage. At that moment, the number of IMMEDIATE REJECT messages
or IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT messages that BSS fails to send reaches
a certain number.
l PCH overload should be detected in the CCCH LOAD INDICATION
message, and BSS only notifies MSC and does not do any handling.
l Other overload, such as MTP overload, can be detected in the OVER-
LOAD message.
Description Input the control level, and user can perform Add or Delete operation.
4-57

Value Range 0 ~ 9, 11 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-01-001 MS Access Control
Relationship None
4.4.10 HBTS proofread support (HBTSScanSupport)

Full name HBTS proofread support
Abbreviation HBTSScanSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the switch of searching frequency.
Management
Object S8001
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters HBTS scan site number

Relationship
4.4.11 RSSI threshold (RSSlThrd)

Full name RSSI threshold
4-58

Abbreviation RSSlThrd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description RSSI threshold
Management
Object S8001
Unit None
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relevant

Relationship
4.4.12 Proofread freqband type (GSM1900Support)

Full name Proofread freqband type (GSM1900Support)
Abbreviation GSM1900Support
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if GSM900 frequency band is supported.
Management
Object S8001
GSM900/DCS1800/GSM850
Value Range
0 indicates unsupported; 1 indicates supported.
Unit None
Default value GSM900/DCS1800/GSM850
Change mode Offline
Relevant
4-59


Relationship can be configured but invalid.
This parameter value has influence on the value of range of HBTS BARANG.
4.4.13 Range of HBTS BARANG

Full name Range of HBTS BARANG
Abbreviation HBTSRange
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
HBTSRangeLow and HBTSRangeHigh are configured in pair. You can set

multiple ranges.
Description HBTSRangeLow: the lower absolute RF channel id; HBTSRangeHigh: the
upper absolute RF channel id.
Input the range value and you can do the add or delete operation.
Management
Object S8001
Value Range 0 ~ 124, 128 ~ 251, 512 ~ 885, 975 ~ 1023
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relevant HBTS scan site number (HBTSScanSiteNum) and Preofread freqband type
parameters (GSM1900Support)

Relationship If "Proofread freqband type" = 0, Range of HBTS BARANG is [0,124],
[128,251], [512,885], or [975,1023]. If "Proofread freqband type" = 1, Range of
HBTS BARANG is [0,124], [128,251], [512,810], or [975,1023].
4.5 Cell Selection Parameters

The interface of cell selection parameters is shown in Figure 4-5.
4-60

Figure 4-5 Cell Selection Parameters
4.5.1 Additional reselection parameter indication (AdditionReselPI)

Full name Additional reselection parameter indicator
Abbreviation AdditionReselPI
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The cell selection and reselection of MS depends on the C1 and C2

parameters, according to the definition in the GSM specification. Network
carriers decide whether to use C2 as the cell reselection parameter.
Additional reselection parameter indication is to notify MS whether C2
criterion is adoptable during the cell reselection.
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages.
Additional reselection parameter indication is one of the cell selection
parameters.
l No: If SI4 Rest Octets of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE4 exist, then
MS takes off cell reselection parameter PI and the parameters related
to C2 calculation from SI4 Rest Octets.
l Yes: MS should obtain the PI parameter related to the cell reselection
and parameters related to C2 calculation from SI7/8 Rest Octets of SYS-
Description
TEM INFORMATION TYPE4.
4-61

Generally, the system messages 7 and 8 are seldom used. Normally this
parameter is ‘No’. It shall be ‘Yes’ when the system adopts the system
messages 7 and 8, and the cell reselection uses C2.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.2 Cell reselection parameter indication (CellReselPI)

Full name Cell reselection parameter indication
Abbreviation CellReselPI
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Cell reselection parameter indication notifies the MS if to use C2 as the cell

reselection parameter and if there is the related parameter for calculating
C2.
It indicates whether the related parameter for calculating cell reselection
standard C2 is contained in SYSTEM INFORMATION message and
whether C2 standard is adopted in the cell reselection. The successive Cell
reselection offset, Temporary offset and Penalty time are invalid, and MS
takes C1 as the cell reselection standard when this value is ‘No’.
This parameter is broadcasted to all MS in the cell in RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. Cell reselection parameter
indication is one of the cell selection parameters.
l No: MS should take C1 as the standard for cell reselection. Parameters
CellBarQualify, ReselOffset, TemporaryOffset, and PenaltyTime are in-
valid.
l Yes: MS should calculate C2 according to parameters extracted from
cell-broadcasting system messages, and take C2 as the standard for
Description
cell reselection.
4-62

Enable this parameter, if related cell adopts C2 as the cell reselection

standard. Otherwise, disable it.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.3 Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset, 2db)

Abbreviation ReselOffset
3GPP Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
The cell reselection due to radio channel quality takes C2 as the standard.
C2 is formed according to C1 parameter, and some special offset
parameters, to add the special influence as to enable MS to enter some
cells in priority. Usually, such measures allow balancing the traffic on the
network.
Besides C1, there are three factors affecting C2: Cell reselection offset,
Temporary offset, and Penalty time.
Cell reselection offset is a magnitude value, which indicates the human
modified value of C2. Calculate a modified value of C2 to encourage or
prevent MS accessing a certain cell, so as to implement balance network.
Network broadcasts the parameter information to all MSs in the cell through
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. It
is one of the cell selection parameters. Whether this parameter is valid
depends on CellReselPI.
The setting of ReselOffset, TemporaryOffset, and PenaltyTime has the
following three cases:
l In case of large traffic or poor communication quality inside a cell due to
certain causes, MS is expected not to work in that cell (that is, MS has
Description certain repulsion to that cell).
4-63

Penalty time can be set as 31 in such cases. Temporary offset is

invalid, and the numerical value of C2 equals C1 minus this parameter
Cell reselection offset. Therefore, the C2 value corresponding to the
cell is decreased, and reduces the possibility that MS reselecting the
cell. Besides, the proper value of this parameter Cell reselection offset
can be set according to the repulsive nature of cell. The more is the
repulsive nature, the larger is the Cell reselection offset. Vice versa in
case of a smaller Cell reselection offset.
l For cells with small traffic and low equipment utilization, normally MS is
encouraged to work in that cell (that is, certain propensity to that cell).
Cell reselection offset must be set between 0 ~ 10 (corresponding to
0 ~ 20 dB) in this case, according to tendency of the cell. The more
is the tendency, the larger is the Cell reselection offset. Vice versa in
case of a smaller Cell reselection offset. It is usually better to set the
Temporary offset same as Cell reselection offset, or a little higher than
Cell reselection offset. The main function of Penalty time is to avoid
frequent cell reselection of MS. The common recommended setting
is 1 (20 seconds) or 2 (40 seconds) (the 1800 cell of dual-frequency
network is such a case).
l For cells with ordinary traffic, usually “ReselOffset” should be set as 0
and “PenaltyTime” as 31. Thus, C2 is equal to C1, that is, without human
factors on the cell.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit 2 dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.4 Temporary offset (TemporaryOffset, 10dB)

Full name Temporary offset
Abbreviation TemporaryOffset
3GPP Name TEMPORARY_OFFSET
4-64

network.
Temporary offset, and Penalty time. Temporary offset indicates the
temporary modification value for C2. Temporary means that it only acts on
C2 for a period and the period depends on parameter Penalty time.
Description upon Cell reselection parameter indication.
Value Range 0~7
Unit 10 dB
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.5 Penalty time (PenaltyTime, 20s)

Full name Penalty time
Abbreviation PenaltyTime
3GPP Name PENALTY_TIME
4-65

network.
Temporary offset, and Penalty time. Temporary offset indicates the
temporary modification value for C2. Temporary means that it only acts on
C2 for a period and the period depends on parameter Penalty time.
Description upon Cell reselection parameter indication.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit 20 s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.6 Cell reselecting hysteresis level (ReselHysteresis, 2dB)

Full name Cell reselecting hysteresis level
Abbreviation ReselHysteresis
3GPP Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
4-66

Whenever MS moves across the two cell boundary-regions with different

location area codes, it initiates Location Update (LU) procedure in IDLE
mode.
C2 values obtained at the boundary for two adjacent cells are different
because of fading characteristic of radio channel. It causes MS to select
cell frequently. In this case, LU interval is more than cell reselection
interval. This affects call success rate, due to unreachable paging response
to calling party.
This increases the signaling flow on the network and causes radio
resources to be fully utilized. In addition, it decreases call completion rate
of the system, as MS cannot respond to paging during location update.
GSM specification sets a specific parameter, Cell Reselecting Hysteresis
(CRH), to solve this problem. MS will activate the cell reselection according
to this parameter only when the signal level of adjacent cell (whose location
zone is different from that of local cell) is greater than that of local cell,
and meanwhile the value difference must be greater than that required
by the parameter.
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. Cell
reselecting hysteresis level is one of the cell selection parameters.
Define Cell reselecting hysteresis level to 4 or 5 and make certain
adjustments in following cases:
l Increase cell reselection parameters of adjacent cells with different LAC.
Signaling traffic overload often occurs due to large demand of services.
l When the adjacent cells in different location areas have large over-
lapped coverage, it is suggested to increase the CRH parameter.
l If the adjacent cells with different LACs are poor in overlapped coverage,
that is, there is coverage gap, or the adjacent place is an area with few
slow moving objects such as the expressway, the CRH parameter shall
Description be set as 1 ~ 3 (that is, 2dB ~ 6dB for the CRH level).
Value Range 0~7
Unit 2 dB
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-67

4.5.7 New setup cause indication (NECI)

Full name New setup cause indication
Abbreviation NECI
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The serving channels in the GSM system can be classified into channels
with full rate and channels with half rate according to GSM specifications.
Common GSM system supports channels with full rate. The network
operators decide if the network support half rate service.
The new setup reason denotes the NECI to notify MS if the area supports
the half rate service. The parameter notifies MS through the RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. NECI is one
of network’s functional parameters.
l No: half rate service access is not supported by this cell.
Description l Yes: half rate service access is supported by this cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.8 Power offset indication (PowerOffsetInd)

Full name Power offset indication
Abbreviation PowerOffsetInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-68

This parameter decides if to add offset value for Control channel MAX
power level parameter while sending access request message on RACH
for Class 3 MS of GSM1800. The necessity of offset value depends on
Power offset indication, that is, this parameter decides if Power offset
indication is valid. This parameter also affects MS calculating cell selection
and cell reselection standards C1 and C2.
Network broadcasts the parameter information to MSs in the cell through
Description RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3, 4, 7 and 8 messages.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.9 Power offset (PowerOffset, 2db)

Full name Power offset
Abbreviation PowerOffset
3GPP Name POWER OFFSET
According to the GSM specification, for Class 3 MS of GSM 1800, the

transmission power for sending access request message on RACH is to
the value of Control channel MAX power level plus a modified value. Power
offset specifies the modified value. It determines if this parameter is valid.
This parameter also affects the calculation of cell selection standard C1
and cell reselection standard C2. Network broadcasts the parameter
information to MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION
Description TYPE3, 4, 7 and 8 messages.
Value Range 0~3
Unit 2 dB
Default value 0
4-69

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6 Service Process Additional Parameters

The interface of service process additional parameters is shown in Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 Service Process Additional Parameters
4.6.1 Directed retry indication (DrInd_0)

Full name Directed Retry
Abbreviation DrInd_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-70

This parameter indicates whether to use directed retry feature. Network

assigns corresponding service channel for MS in an adjacent cell, if there is
no service channel available in serving cell.
Directed retry indication defines a special handover process that can reduce
the call drop ratio. Directed retry falls into intra-BSC directed retry and
inter-BSC directed retry. The former one does not need the participation
Description of MSC, while the latter one does.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters Inter directed retry indication (DrInd_1)
When this parameter is Yes, you can configure Inter Directed retry
Relationship
indication (DrInd_1).
4.6.2 Inter directed retry indication (DrInd_1)

Full name Inter directed retry indication
Abbreviation DrInd_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if to use inter directed retry, that is, inter-BSC directed retry.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters Directed retry indication (DrInd_0)
Relationship When DrInd_0 is Yes, you can configure this parameter.
4-71

4.6.3 Queue allowed when assign (QueueInd_0)

Full name Queue allowed when assign
Abbreviation QueueInd_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides if to allow queuing in assignment process. Cell im-

Description proves the call drop rate with the use of such techniques.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.4 Queue allowed when handover (QueueInd_1)

Full name Queue allowed when handover
Abbreviation QueueInd_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides if queuing can be performed during a handover

Description process and when there are no available channels in the cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
4-72

Relationship None
4.6.5 Preemption allowed when assign (PreemptionInd_0)

Full name Preemption allowed when assign
Abbreviation PreemptionInd_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It decides if forced disconnection is allowed during the assignment. The pri-

ority in the assignment request or handover is valid and the preemption is
valid. Those connections with low priority can be forcefully disconnected
(handover) to allocate their resources to other assignments or handover re-
Description quest with higher priority. Assignment request indicate the call status.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.6 Preemption allowed when handover (PreemptionInd_1)

Full name Preemption allowed when handover
Abbreviation PreemptionInd_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-73

It decides if forced disconnection is allowed during the handover. The pri-

ority in the assignment request or handover is valid and the preemption is
valid. Those connections with low priority can be forcefully disconnected
(handover) to allocate their resources to other assignments or handover re-
Description quest with higher priority. A Handover request indicates the call status.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.7 When assigned forced handover (ForcedHoInd_0)

Full name When assigned forced handover
Abbreviation ForcedHoInd_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if the low priority subscribers can be forcefully han-
dover to other cell, so that high priority subscribers can obtain channels. This
Description parameter represents if forced handover is allowed during assignment.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-74

4.6.8 When handover forced handover (ForcedHoInd_1)

Full name When handover forced handover
Abbreviation ForcedHoInd_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if the low priority subscribers can be forcefully han-
dover to other cell, so that high priority subscribers can obtain channels. This
Description parameter represents if forced handover is allowed during handover.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.9 Number of candidate cells for handover (CandidateNum)

Full name Number of candidate cells for handover
Abbreviation CandidateNum
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides maximum number of candidate cells for handover

that can be contained in BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED message from
Description BSC to MSC.
Value Range 1 ~ 16
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
4-75

Relationship None
4.6.10 Fast average indication (FastAvg)

Full name Fast average indication
Abbreviation FastAvg
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Network may not perform handover or power control if less measurement

data is available during call process. The average calculating process
for these processes is enabled only when the measured data reaches a
certain window size.
Common average process does not take place, for the five measured
values BSC receives. BSC directly calculates the average of the 5
measured values if the fast average process is adopted.
There are three cases resulting in insufficient data for calculating the
average value, that is, call establishment period, after handover and after
power control. After performing power control once, former measured
values are discarded in situations where they could result in an error
control (measured values without the influence on handover control are
still existing).
In addition, old measured values are discarded after the handover has
occurred, preventing them from causing error control (the forward and
Description backward cells are in the same BSC).
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-76

4.6.11 BCCH switch allowed (CanBcchExch)

Full name BCCH switch allowed
Abbreviation CanBcchExch
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter decides if the cell allows BCCH switch.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-04-001 Automatic BCCH Recovery
Relationship None
4.6.12 SDCCH dynamic configuration allowed (CanSdcchDyn)

Full name SDCCH dynamic configuration allowed
Abbreviation CanSdcchDyn
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter decides if the cell allows SDCCH dynamic configuration.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-02-003 Dynamic Configuration of SDCCH
Relationship None
4-77

4.6.13 Minimal resource threshold (ResourceThs, %)

Full name Minimal resource threshold
Abbreviation ResourceThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Minimum resource threshold allowed by the cell, which is used to calculate

Description dynamic cell priority.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-02-02-002 Dynamic Handover Priority Algorithm
Relationship None
4.6.14 Base-band hopping TRX exchange support (Info_0_3)

Full name Base-band hopping TRX exchange support
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if to support automatic baseband hopping.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
4-78

Relationship None
4.6.15 Allowed FACCH call setup after emergency call

(FacchCallInd_0)
Full name Allowed FACCH call setup after emergency call
Abbreviation FacchCallInd_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BSC can allocate the suitable TCH channel when an MS attempts to ac-
cess the network, and there is no SDCCH available in the cell. That is the
Description so-called FACCH call establishment.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
ZGB-03-01-004 Immediate TCH Assignment

Relationship None
4.6.16 Allowed FACCH call setup when page respond

(FacchCallInd_1)
Full name Allowed FACCH call setup when page respond
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-79

Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-01-004 Immediate TCH Assignment
Relationship None
4.6.17 Allowed call setup on FACCH (FacchCallInd_2)

Full name Allowed call setup on FACCH
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-80

4.6.18 Allowed call reestablished on FACCH (FacchCallInd_3)

Full name Allowed call reestablished on FACCH
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.7 System Parameters

The interface of system parameters is shown in Figure 4-7.
4-81

Figure 4-7 System Parameters
4.7.1 Interference averaging period (InterfAvgPrd)

Full name Interference averaging period (InterfAvgPrd)
Abbreviation InterfAvgPrd
3GPP Name INTAVE
BTS needs to measure interference on the unallocated traffic channels.

BTS calculates the average of recent interference values on periodic basis
and converts it into corresponding interference band information. BTS then,
transfers to BSC in the RF RESOURCE INDICATION message to consider
it as a factor in channel allocation strategy. This parameter is one of the
Description BTS configuration parameters.
Value Range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
4-82

Default value 31
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-001 Idle Channel Measurement
Relationship None
4.7.2 Interference Band Boundary (InterfBoundary_0 ~

InterfBoundary_5)
Full name Interference Band Boundary
Abbreviation InterfBoundary_0 ~ InterfBoundary_5
3GPP Name LIMITn
BTS needs to measure interference on the unallocated traffic channels.

BTS calculates the average of recent interference values on periodic basis
and converts it into corresponding interference band information. BTS then,
transfers to BSC in the RF RESOURCE INDICATION message to consider
it as a factor in channel allocation strategy.
The interface boundaries are used to help the conversion of the interference
level (average) value into corresponding interference band information.
Altogether six boundaries determine five interference bands. In fact, it is
unnecessary to set interference boundary 0 and interference boundary 5.
One of them represents infinity and the other represents negative infinity.
This parameter, describing the remaining four boundaries, is one of the
BTS configuration parameters.
Description Generally, -85 dBm ~ -115 dBm is used for interference boundaries 1 ~ 4.
Assuming the value of interference boundary is L, then,

l L=0: -110 dBm
l L=1: -109 dBm
......
l L=63: -47 dBm
l L=other value: reserved
Interference band boundary0, value range: 0
Interference band boundary1 ~ Interference band boundary4, value range:
0 ~ 63
Value Range Interference band boundary5, value range: 63
4-83

Unit None
Interference band boundary0 ~ Interference band boundary5: [0, 10, 15, 20,
Default value 25, 63]
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-001 Idle Channel Measurement
Relationship None
4.7.3 Radio link timeout on MS side (MsRadioLKTmOut)

Full name Radio link timeout on MS side
Abbreviation MsRadioLKTmOut
3GPP Name RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT
This parameter is the maximum value of radio link counter S at Ms side,

transmitted on BCCH or SACCH by BSS.
Radio link counter S is used to evaluate radio link failure. When MS cannot
decode SACCH message (BFI=1), S decrements. When MS successfully
receives SACCH message (BFI=0), S increases by 2. If S is decreased to
Description 0, it indicates radio link fault, call shall be reestablished or released.
Value Range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
Unit None
Default value 64
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-84

4.7.4 Radio link failure criterion (ConFailCriterion)

Full name Radio link failure criterion
Abbreviation ConFailCriterion
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The network side (BTS) may judge whether the radio link fails according
to two criteria: One is based on the uplink SACCH error rate and the
other is based on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL. Radio link failure
criterion determines the method that the BTS uses as the standard to judge
connection failure.
If SACCH error rate is used as the standard to judge connection failure,
BTS uses the same value of Radio link timeout and the same process as
MS does. Thus, BTS avoids inconsistent judgment standards in the uplink
and downlink directions. Meanwhile, the Receiving level threshold and
Receiving quality threshold parameters are invalid.
If the measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard to
judge connection failure, BTS will use the two parameters: Receiving level
threshold (RxLevThs) and Receiving quality threshold (RxQualThs).
The value range is as follows:
l 1: Uplink SACCH Error Rate Based (in order to ensure the same judg-
ment standard in the uplink and downlink directions)
Description l 2: RXLEV/RXQUAL Measurement Based
Value Range 1~2
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.7.5 Radio link timeout on BSS side (BsRadioLKTmOut)

Full name Radio link timeout on BSS side
Abbreviation BsRadioLKTmOut
4-85

3GPP Name RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT
This parameter is the maximum value of radio link counter S at BSS side,
transmitted on PBCCH by BSS under the leading of packet system message
Description 2.
Value Range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
Unit None
Default value 64
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.7.6 Receiving level threshold (RxLevThs)

Full name Receiving level threshold
Abbreviation RxLevThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The network side (BTS) may judge if the radio link fails according to two
criteria: One is based on the uplink SACCH error rate and the other is
based on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL.
The radio link is considered as failed if BTS detects one of the following
conditions: The uplink receiving level is smaller than a certain threshold;
The uplink receiving quality is greater than a certain threshold. This only
applies, if the measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard
to judge a connection failure. Receiving level threshold specifies the
threshold of receiving level.
This parameter is invalid if uplink SACCH error rate is used as the standard
to judge connection failure (Radio link failure criterion is 1). Receiving level
Description threshold is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
4-86

0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.7.7 Receiving quality threshold (RxQualThs)

Full name Receiving quality threshold
Abbreviation RxQualThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference GSM 12.21
The network side (BTS) may judge if the radio link fails according to two
criteria. One is based on uplink SACCH error rate, and the other is based
on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL.
The radio link is considered as failed if BTS detects one of the following
conditions: The uplink receiving level is smaller than a certain threshold;
The uplink receiving quality is greater than a certain threshold. This only
applies, if the measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as a standard
to judge a connection failure. Receiving quality threshold specifies the
receiving threshold quality.
If the uplink SACCH error rate is used as the standard to judge a connection
failure, this parameter is invalid. This parameter is one of the configuration
Description parameters of BTS.
4-87

0~7
l 0: corresponding BER range < 0.2%
l 1: 0.2% ~ 0.4%
l 2: 0.4% ~ 0.8%
......
l 6: 6.4% ~ 12.8%
Value Range l 7: > 12.8%
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.7.8 Radio link failure checking period (RxLevQualprd)

Full name Radio link failure checking period
Abbreviation RxLevQualprd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference GSM 12.21
Period to detect radio linkd failure at network side (in the unit of SACCH
multiframe), including the detection of channel strength (dBm) and signal
Description quality received in each channel.
Value Range 1 ~ 63
Unit SACCH multiframe
Default value 63
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-88


The interface of the other parameters is shown in Figure 4-8.
4.8.1 Preprocessing indication (Preprocess)

Full name Preprocessing
Abbreviation Preprocess
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The survey report contains the large amount (message amount) of Abis
interface information. Preprocess of the survey report can be transferred
to BTS to reduce the burden of Abis interface link. After preprocess, BTS
averages the survey data of MS by its own, and reports to BSC in a lower
frequency.
Average reporting period can be two, three or four SACCH multi-frames
(480 ms). That is, the frequency decreases from the original twice per
second to once per two seconds, so the message amount of Abis interface
decreases. However, the decrease of message amount still depends on if
the message length before preprocess is same as that after preprocess.
One disadvantage of preprocess is that the handover control and power
control are not in time, which increases the possibility of disconnection
rate. This parameter determines whether to use preprocessing and the
preprocessing period.
l 0: Do not use preprocessing
l 2: Use preprocessing, the average reporting period is 2 SACCH multi-
Description
frames
4-89


frames
frames
l Other values: reserved
Value Range 0~4
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.8.2 Reserved rate of EMLPP (EmlppThs)

Full name Reserved rate of EMLPP
Abbreviation EmlppThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines eMLPP channel reserved time, that is, the proportion
Description of eMLPP channel in all available channels in the cell.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
ZGO-01-03-001 eMLPP
Relationship None
4-90

4.8.3 Use cell EMLPP Threshold (UseCellEmlppThs)

Full name Use cell EMLPP Threshold
Abbreviation UseCellEmlppThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines if eMLPPThs is used. If yes, you shall select cell
Description property, otherwise to select BSC property.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
ZGO-01-03-001 eMLPP
Relationship None
4.8.4 Frequency offset Correct support (Info_0_1)

Full name Frequency offset Correct support
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates whether frequency offset correction is supported.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-91

4.8.5 Max power on handover Command support (Info_0_2)

Full name Max power on handover Command support
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates whether maximum power on handover command is supported.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.8.6 MR Report Time Bmp (MrRptTimeBmp)

Full name MR Report Time Bmp
Abbreviation MrRptTimeBmp
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter provides a check function about 0 ~ 23 time points. You

can enable measurement data report at different points. Each time point
indicates a hour, within 0~23 hours.
Only after checking corresponding time and enabling the report function
Description about measurement report data, MR data can be reported.
4-92

checked, unchecked
l Checked: it indicates that measurement report shall be enabled within
this time duration.
l Unchecked: it indicates that measurement report shall be disabled
Value Range within this time duration.
Unit None
Default value Unchecked
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.8.7 Cell Support Encryption Mode (CipherMode)

Full name Cell Support Encryption Mode
Abbreviation CipherMode_0~CipherMode_7
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Cell Support Encryption Mode is the encryption mode supported by BTS.

The required encryption algorithm is contained in BSSAP CIPHER MODE
COMMAND or BSSAP ASSIGNMENT REQUEST or BSSAP HANDOVER
COMMAND message sent by the MSC side. By checking this parameter,
BSC can learn if the cell supports this required encryption algorithm to give
Description a proper response.
8 kinds, non cipher mode, A5/1~A5/7 cipher mode.

Value Range Value range: Yes/No
Unit None
Default value [Yes, No, No, No, No, No, No, No]
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-06-02-001 Support of A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm
Relationship None
4-93

4.8.8 Channel Select Strategy

Full name Channel Select Strategy
Abbreviation ChanSelectStrategy
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It is based on IMSI resource allocation.
Level 1 ~ 15, value range is:

According to channel select order of MSC, when prefer TCHF and cell
congest change to prefer TCHH
Prefer TCHF, when cell congest change to prefer TCHH
Prefer TCHH
Only TCHF
Value Range Only TCHH
According to channel select order of MSC, not consider if cell congest
According to channel select order of MSC, when prefer TCHF and cell
congest, change to prefer TCHH if AMR-HR supported
Prefer TCHF, not consider if cell congest
Prefer TCHF, when cell congest, change to prefer TCHH if AMR-HR
supported
Unit None
Level 1 ~ 15, default value is: According to channel select order of MSC,
Default value
when prefer TCHF and cell congest change to prefer TCHH
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.9 GPRS Basic Parameters

In the Basic Params 1 tab, if user select 'GPRS Support' for 'GPRS Support (PsSupport)',
the GPRS parameter tabs will appear.
4-94

The interface of GPRS basic property parameters is as shown in Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9 GPRS Basic Parameters
4.9.1 SGSN ID (SGSNID)

Full name SGSN ID
Abbreviation SGSNID
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
SGSN serial number assigned by internal BSC, which is assigned while user
creates SGSN. This serial number cannot be modified and can be deleted
Description after creation.
Value Range 1 ~ 16
4-95

Unit None
Default value Depends on the actual configuration.
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-05-02-007 Flex Gb Interface
Relationship None

4.9.2 NSEI (NSEI)

Full name NSEI
Abbreviation NSEI
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In GPRS protocol stack, every unique BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC)

that is NSEI+BVCI for each GPRS cell belongs to Network Service Entity
(NSE). NSEI uniquely identifies every NSE. ZXG10 iBSC supports several
NSEs for future expandability option.
Only after user configures NSE in relevant configuration at Gb interface will
this parameter's value be displayed.
Unit None
Default value Depends on the NSE configuration at Gb interface
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

4-96

4.9.3 BVCI (BVCI)

Full name BVCI
Abbreviation BVCI
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC) provides an approach for communication

between different BSSGP entities. The peer-to-peer Point-to-Point (PTP) or
Point-to-Multipoint (PTM) or inter-signaling entity transmission of BSSGP
PDUs lies on BVC.
Each virtual connection has one identifier, that is, BVCI. It enables the
network service layer at the bottom layer to route BSSGP PDUs to the peer
Description entity very effectively. One NSE carries only one signaling BVC (BVCI=0).
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

4.9.4 RAC (RAC)

Full name RAC (RAC)
Abbreviation RAC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-97

cell reselection.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
Service will be affected. If this parameter is inconsistent with the data at CN

Impact on service side, new service cannot be established in corresponding cell.
4.9.5 UPU unit (UpuUnit)

Full name UPU Unit
Abbreviation UpuUnit
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It is corresponding with the board position in physical configuration
Value Range Depends on the actual configuration.
Unit None
Default value Depends on the actual selection.
Change mode Offline
4-98

Relationship None

4.9.6 DSP No. (DSP)

Full name DSP ID
Abbreviation DSP
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter depends on physical configured DSP, if all DSPs are config-
ured, DSP number is within range of 9~22, otherwise it is configured DSP
Description number.
Determined by user configured DSP quantity.

If all DSPs on UPPB are configured, DSP number shall be within 9~22,
otherwise it shall be configured DSP number.
If all DSPs on UPPB/2 board are configured, DSP number shall be within
Value Range 9~13, 17~21, 25~29, otherwise it shall be configured DSP number.
Unit None
Default value Minimum DSP number configured by user
Change mode Offline
Relationship None


4-99

4.10.1 Additional reselect parameter indictor (AddResPI2)

Full name Additional reselection parameter indicator
Abbreviation AddResPI2
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The cell selection and reselection of MS depends on the C1 and C2

parameters, according to the definition in the GSM specification. Network
carriers decide if to use C2 as the cell reselection parameter.
Additional reselection parameter indication is to notify MS if C2 criterion is
adoptable during the cell reselection.
System broadcasts through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3
and TYPE4 messages to MS in the cell. It is one of the cell selection
parameters.
l No: If SI4 Rest Octets of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE4 exist, then
MS takes off cell reselection parameter PI and the parameters related
to C2 calculation from SI4 Rest Octets.
l Yes: MS should obtain the PI parameter related to the cell reselection
and parameters related to C2 calculation from SI7/8 Rest Octets of SYS-
Description
TEM INFORMATION TYPE4.
4-100

Generally, system information TYPE 7 and TYPE 8 are rarely used, this
parameter must be set as ‘No’, otherwise some MS (for example NEC)
are not able to access the network.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.2 SI13 sending position (Si13Locate)

Full name SI13 sending position
Abbreviation Si13Locate
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used at MS side. SI13 sending position indicates the

scheduling position of SI13 on BCCH.
SI13 is related to the GPRS services. SI13 can be sent on either of the
following two positions: BCCH Norm position (in this case, it occupies the
BCCH block with TC = 4; TC = ((FN DIV 51) mod (8))), BCCH Ext position
(in this case, it occupies the AGCH block with TC = 0).
When SI13 is transmitted on BCCH Ext position, it occupies one fixed
AGCH block with TC = 0. SI13 is sent with low success rate on the BCCH
Ext position, because SI13 has to compete with other messages, such as
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message, for delivery opportunity. For this
case, the parameter value of Access Allowed Reserved Blocks must be set
Description greater than 0. Otherwise, SI13 will not be sent.
Value Range BCCH Norm, BCCH Ext
Unit None
Default value BCCH Norm
Change mode Offline
4-101

Relationship None
4.10.3 Route area color code (RaColor)

Full name Route area color code
Abbreviation RaColor
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcast to the MS in SI3, SI4, SI7

and SI8. RACOLOR is similar to the BCC function in the GSM system. In
some cases, such as inter-BSC cell reselection, the GPRS network assigns
different RACOLOR values to adjacent cells with the same route area code
to ensure that MS can initiate the ‘Routing Area Updating’ process.
In this way, when MS receives different RaColor values in the cells with the
same routing area code, it initiates the ‘Routing Area Updating’ process
Description similar as when it spans two different routing areas.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.4 Min number of idle CS channel (CsChansThs)

Full name Min number of idle CS channel
Abbreviation CsChansThs
4-102

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
DBS uses this parameter on BSC MP. It indicates minimum threshold of the
number of IDLE channels under the CS status, when the network converts
the switchable channel to the PS channel.
System may fail to convert a dynamic switchable channel to a PS channel,
if the number of idle CS channels is lower than the threshold. When a PS +
CS channel in the CS status is released, it can be converted and used by PS
Description if the total number of idle channels in the cell is greater than this threshold.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.5 Packet access priority threshold (PriAcThr)

Full name Packet access priority threshold
Abbreviation PriAcThr
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Parameter used at the MS side. It is broadcast to the MS in the PSI13 and

SI13 messages, indicating the priority level of MS packet access allowed by
Description the cell. as similar to the function of ACCESS CLASS.
No package access, Allow priority 1, Allow priority 1-2, Allow priority 1-3,
Value Range Allow priority 1-4, Allow priority
Unit None
Default value Allow packet access with the priority level 1-4
Change mode Offline
4-103

Relationship None
4.10.6 Packet System Information Send Speed (SendSpeed)

Full name Packet System Information Send Speed
SendSpeed (PSI2, PSI3, PSI3BIS, PSI4, PSI5, PSI13, PSI3ter, PSI8,

Abbreviation PSI3quater)
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used for global process on BRP. Packet System

Information Send Speed indicates whether various types of PSI messages
are sent at high rate. As there are limited packet system messages (16)
sent at high rate, and the number of sent messages often varies due to
different content lengths of different types of packet system messages,
the user can only roughly specify the sending rate of each type of system
message.
Before sending the message, the global process dynamically specifies the
sending rate of each packet system message type according to the user
Description requirement and the system limitation.
Value Range 9 types, Yes/No
Unit None
Default value [Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.7 Overload report period on PRACH (OvLoadPer, s)

Full name Overload report period on PRACH
4-104

Abbreviation OvLoadPer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Parameters used by FUC at BTS side. The interval of PRACH overload

Description period reported by BTS and informed by BSC.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.8 Link error counter (RLTimeout)

Full name Link error counter
Abbreviation RLTimeout
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used by BTS. BSC informs this parameter to BTS through
O&M message, explaining measurement counter while BTS can't correctly
Description decode GPRS data.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-105

4.10.9 PRACH receive signal level threshold (PrachBusyT)

Full name PRACH receiving signal level threshold
Abbreviation PrachBusyT
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BTS uses this parameter information. PRACH channel overload is one of

the reasons for overload control. The busy ratio of random access burst
decides the PRACH overload.
If a burst’s level exceeds the value specified by PRACH receive signal level
Description threshold, the burst is considered as a busy burst.
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 63
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.10 Average measuring bursts number on PRACH (MeaAvgSlot)

Full name Average measuring bursts number on PRACH
Abbreviation MeaAvgSlot
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-106

BTS uses this parameter. It indicates the bursts number on PRACH. PRACH
channel overloads if receiving signal levels of AvgSlots BPs are lower than
PrachBusyT. It is a parameter used by BTS. The BTS needs to be synchro-
Description nized when modifying the parameter.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.11 Buffer threshold of paging message (PccchIndTh_0, %)

Full name Buffer threshold of paging message
Abbreviation PccchIndTh_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Paging message buffer is overloaded threshold for packet paging channel

PPCH. The judgment scheme is as follows: i.Calculate the paging message
buffer corresponding to a paging channel. ii.Divide the message number
stored in the buffer by the maximum storage amount. iii.Multiply the obtained
percentage by 100. Compare the result with the threshold. If the result ex-
Description ceeds the threshold, then the overload can be decided.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-107

4.10.12 Queue length threshold in 64 multiframe paging period

(PccchIndTh_1, %)
Full name Queue length threshold in 64 multiframe paging period
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
FUC on BTS uses this parameter information. It indicates overload

threshold in PCCCH (PRACH, PPCH) threshold. This parameter is an array
with 3 elements, in the unit of %.
l PccchIndTh[0]: paging message buffer is overloaded for packet paging
channel PPCH. Its decision mechanism is to first calculate paging mes-
sage body buffer corresponding to one paging channel, then message
total quantity saved in this buffer divided by maximum storage to gain
a percentage, multiplied by 100, then compared with this threshold, if it
exceeds it will be considered as overload;
l PccchIndTh[1]: paging group overload threshold of packet paging chan-
nel. Its decision mechanism is to first accumulate the message ready
to issue in buffer queue for each paging group pair, then divided by ac-
cumulation of maximum storage in buffer queue corresponding to each
paging group, multiplied by 100, compared with this threshold, if it ex-
ceeds the threshold, it will be considered as overload;
l PccchIndTh[2]: PRACH overload threshold. Its decision mechanism is
to first divide total blocks quantity of this PRACH by busy blocks on a
PRACH, multiplied by 100, compared with this threshold, if it exceeds
Description the threshold, it will be considered as overload.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-108

4.10.13 PRACH overload threshold ratio (PccchIndTh_2, %)

Full name PRACH overload threshold ratio
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Total block quantity on this PRACH divided by busy blocks on a PRACH, mul-
tiplied by 100, then compared with this threshold, if it exceeds this threshold,
Description it will be considered as overload.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

4-109

4.11.1 DTM support (DTMSupport)

Full name DTM support
Abbreviation DTMSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Network broadcasts this parameter to MS in GRPS CELL OPTIONS of SI13,

PSI1 and PSI13. It indicates if the cell supports Dual Transfer Mode (DTM)
Description which allows A class MS to initialize packet request flow in dedicated mode.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Relevant Features ZGB-03-05-006 Class A, B, C mobile stations
Relationship None
4-110

4.11.2 Max number of GTTP Lapdm frame (GttpLapdmNum)

Full name Max number of GTTP Lapdm frame
Abbreviation GttpLapdmNum
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter indicates the maximum of GTTP Lapdm frames.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.3 CCN mode support (CCNActive)

Full name CCN Support
Abbreviation CCNActive
3GPP Name CCN_ACTIVE
This parameter indicates if the cell supports CCN mode. CNN mode refers
to cell alternating notificaiton. When BSS supports CCN mode, if MS does
cell reselection in NC0 and NC1 modes, PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFI-
CATION message notification shall be delivered to network in normal case.
After network receives this message, it can send specific system message
Description about standby cell to MS.
Value Range Yes/No
4-111

Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.4 Cell support system message status flow (SIStatusInd)

Full name Cell support system message status flow
Abbreviation SIStatusInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if the cell supports system message status flow,
broadcasted to MS in SI13 and PSI13. It describes if the network supports
PSI (SI) Status process. MS informs its network side which PSI (SI) sub-
sets are required for received PSI (SI) message by sending Packet PSI (SI)
Status message on PACCH. This parameter is used in CCN mode, to assist
Description finishing NACC fast cell reselection
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.5 Allow SOLSA MS to access (Exc_Acc)

Full name Allow SOLSA MS to access
4-112

Abbreviation Exc_Acc
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
System broadcasts this parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, and SI7 messages.

In addition, the parameter information is available in PSI3 and Psi3bis mes-
sages of local and neighboring cells. The network uses Allow SOLSA MS to
Description access to prevent MS from residing in the cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.6 CCCH SPLITPGCYCLE support (SpgcSuport)

Full name CCCH SPLITPGCYCLE support
Abbreviation SpgcSuport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
A parameter used at the MS side and the FUN side. System broadcasts
to MS through PSI3 and SI13 messages. CCCH SplitPgCycle support indi-
cates if to support the ‘SplitPg¬Cycle’ function on CCCH. ‘Split_Pg_Cycle’
means sending the PACKET IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT, PACKET PAGING
and PACKET IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT messages on multiple
Description blocks.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
4-113

Relationship None
4.11.7 Extended paging support (EpageMode)

Full name Extended paging support
Abbreviation EpageMode
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if to support extended paging. Extended paging

means that MS still can receive and analyze the message within 3 intervals
Description after the blockes indicated by its paging group.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.8 PSI status support (PsiStatInd)

Full name PSI status support
Abbreviation PsiStatInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-114

This parameter is used at the MS side and on the BRP. System broadcasts
to MS through PSI1 message, and indicates whether the network supports
PACKET PSI STATUS message.
This function is optional. When PsiStatInd = 1, MS can send the PACKET
PSI STATUS message to the network and indicate the current value of the
PSI message stored on it. Later, the network sets PSI message for this MS
on the PACCH to speed up the subsequent flow of MS. Otherwise MS has to
Description listen to the PSI message only at the time points scheduled by the network.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.9 Cell support extendable uplink TBF (Ext_UTBF)

Full name Cell support extendable uplink TBF
Abbreviation Ext_UTBF
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if the cell supports extended uplink TBF. After
BSS receives CV=0 uplink block, if the cell supports extended uplink TBF,
it enters into extended uplink TBF status. At this time, it continues assign
uplink block resource to MS. If new uplink data is required to send during
extended uplink, re-establishment of uplink TBF is not required.
This function requires extended uplink function shall be supported at MS
Description side.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
4-115

Relationship None
4.11.10 Uplink delay time (UIDelayTime, ms)

Full name Uplink delay time
Abbreviation UlDelayTime
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates uplink delay time, to describe uplink TBF delay time. When uplink
TBF is released, if extended uplink TBF function is not supported, this timer
starts, access to uplink delay state, to wait for downlink LLC arrival. Release
Description uplink TBF after timer is timeout.
Unit ms
Default value 1000
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.11 Downlink delay time (DIDelaytime, ms)

Full name Downlink delay time
Abbreviation DlDelaytime
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-116

It indicates downlink TBF delay time. When downlink TBF is released, this
timer starts, access to delay state, to wait for new downlink LLC frame. Re-
Description lease downlink TBF after timer is timeout.
Unit ms
Default value 2000
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-05-013 Delayed TBF Release in DL
Relationship None
4.11.12 Extend uplink TBF time (ExtUITBFTime, ms)

Full name Extend uplink TBF time
Abbreviation ExtUITBFTime
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates extended uplink TBF delay time. When uplink TBF is released,
if extended uplink TBF function is supported, this timer starts, access to ex-
tended uplink TBF state, to wait for new uplink LLC frame. Release uplink
Description TBF after timer is timeout.
Unit ms
Default value 1500
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-117

4.11.13 Interval number of GPRS TBF downlink's RRBP

(GPRSDIRrbpInterVal)
Full name Interval number of GPRS TBF downlink’s RRBP
Abbreviation GPRSDIRrbpInterVal
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Interval that downlink Gprs TBF requires MS to send Packet Downlink

Description Ack/Nack.
Value Range 3 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.14 Interval number of EGPRS TBF downlink’s RRBP

(EGPRSDIRrbpInterVal)
Full name Interval number of EGPRS TBF downlink's RRBP
Abbreviation EGPRSDIRrbpInterVal
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Interval that downlink EGPRS TBF requires MS to send EGPRS Packet Don-
Description wlink Ack/Nack.
Value Range 6 ~ 60
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
4-118

Relationship None
4.11.15 Interval number of GPRS TBF uplink’s ACK

(GPRSUIAckInterVal)
Full name Interval number of GPRS TBF uplink's ACK
Abbreviation GPRSUlAckInterVal
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Interval that uplink Gprs TBF network sends Packet Downlink Ack/Nack to
Description MS.
Value Range 3 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.16 Interval number of EGPRS TBF uplink’s ACK

(EGPRSUIAckInterVal)
Full name Interval number of EGPRS TBF uplink's ACK
Abbreviation EGPRSUlAckInterVal
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Interval that uplink Egprs TBF network sends Packet Downlink Ack/Nack to
Description MS.
4-119

Value Range 3 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.17 Single Block Assign Offset (SBAssOffset)

Full name Single block assign offset
Abbreviation SBAssOffset
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Uplink two-phase access. The MS initiates channel request, and network

Description allocates single resource block to the MS. This parameter indicates the
searching range of this resource block.
Value Range 6 ~ 12
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.18 Polling retry times (PollingRetryTime)

Full name Polling retry time
4-120

Abbreviation PollingRetryTime
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Send polling request to MS from network side. If no any reponse is received

Description from the MS. The system can send the max number of polling. The MS
instance is released after reaching the max number.
Value Range 3 ~ 12
Unit None
Default value 7
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.19 Uplink measure report period (Ulmeasureperiod, ms)

Full name Uplink measurement report period
Abbreviation Ulmeasureperiod
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used by UPPB, describing uplink measurement report pe-

Description riod reported by BTS and handled by BSC.
Unit ms
Default value 800
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-121

4.11.20 Calculating period of load on PPCH (LoadPer, s)

Full name Calculating period of load on PPCH
Abbreviation LoadPer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This paramter is used by FUC at BTS side, describing period to calculate

Description PPCH channel load.
Value Range 0 ~ 16
Unit s
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.21 PSI1 send period (Psi1RepPer)

Full name PSI1 send period
Abbreviation Psi1RepPer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
A parameter used at the MS side and the FUN side. System broadcasts to
MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI3 messages of local and adjacent cells. PSI1
send period indicates the sending period and destination of the PSI1 mes-
sage in a cell. PSI1 contains information of cell reselection, PRACH control,
control channel description, and possible global power control parameters.
Description As long as PBCCH exists, the message is always sent at high repetition rate.
4-122

0 ~ 15
l 0: The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 1 multiframe
l 1: The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 2 multiframes
......
Value Range l 15: The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 16 multiframes
Unit s
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.22 Selective granularity (USFGranularity)

Full name Selective granularity
Abbreviation USFGranularity
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It is assigned to the MS in PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT message, indi-

cating the uplink block allocation granularity of the GPRS MS from the net-
Description work when the cell uses "dynamic allocation".
0~1
l 0: allocation granularity is 1 for uplink block
Value Range l 1: allocation granularity is 4 for uplink block
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-123

4.11.23 Extended uplink dynamic allocation support

(ExUpDynSupport)
Full name Extended uplink dynamic allocation support
Abbreviation ExUpDynSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if cell supports extended uplink dynamic allocation.

While using this function, the MS only need listen USF allocation with the
least timeslot, so you can determine to send uplink block on all allocated
Description uplink timeslot.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-007 Extended Dynamic Allocation
Relationship None
4.11.24 ABIS time slots reserved for packet service (Info_1_0)

Full name ABIS time slots reserved for packet service
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
To ensure PS can get required resource, the number of Abis timeslots

Description
alloated to PS service is 1 by default, and modification is not recommended.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
4-124

Relationship None
4.11.25 The maximum of ABIS for GPRS user (Info_1_8)

Full name The maximum of ABIS for GPRS user
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When there is sufficient Abis resource, it indicates the maximum number of Abis
Description
resource bounded for channels newly allocated for the GPRS user.
Management
Object Cell
Value Range At most one ABIS, At most two ABIS, At most four ABIS
Unit None
Default value At most four ABIS
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters ABIS time slots reserved for packet service (Info_1_0)
If the Abis timeslot resource is insufficient, Abis timeslot is allocated according to

Relationship
"ABIS time slots reserved for packet service (Info_1_0)".
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
4.11.26 GPRS initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1

(Info1_1_4)
Full name GPRS initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1
4-125

Abbreviation Info1_1_4
3GPP Name None
3GPP
reference None
It indicates whether initial channel allocation in downlink is based on multislot

Description capability 1 (i.e. uplink 1 downlink 1) or based on the actual multislot capability of
MS specified in downlink assignment.
Management
Object Cell
Yes/No
Value Range Yes: Allocate according to multislot capability 1
No: Allocate according to actual multislot capability
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None

4-126

4.12.1 C/I (Sc)

Full name C/I
Abbreviation Sc
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BSC uses MEAN_BEP as C/I to indicate radio transmission quality, and

adjusts block allocation according to radio transmission quality. Divide
MEAN_BEP into 7 grades, and each grade corresponds to a weight. The
weight is dynamically added to the weight calculated from UMTS QoS
parameters, as the evidence of allocating shared block.
Allocation weight that corresponds to MEAN_BEP grade is as follows:
MEAN_BEP grade MEAN_BEP value Allocation weight
0 0 ~ 4 -3*Sc
1 5 ~ 9 -2*Sc
2 10 ~ 13 -Sc
3 14 ~ 17 0
4 18 ~ 21 Sc
5 22 ~ 26 2*Sc
Description 6 27 ~ 31 3*Sc
4-127

Value Range 0~8
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-01-02-002 C/I based Packet Scheduling
Relationship None
4.12.2 ARP (Sa)

Full name ARP
Abbreviation Sa
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It adjusts allocation weight for shared radio block by ARP parameters

(priority level).
Allocation weight that corresponds to ARP is as follows:
ARP Allocation weight
1 2*Sa
2 Sa
Description 30
Value Range 0~8
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-01-02-001 Support ARP in Packet Scheduling
Relationship None
4-128

4.12.3 THP (St)

Full name THP
Abbreviation St
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It adjusts allocation weight for shared radio block by THP parameters

included in interactive service.
Allocation weight that corresponds to THP is as follows:
THP Allocation weight
00
1 St
2 2*St
Description 3 3*St
Value Range 0~8
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.12.4 PS queuing support (PsQueueInd)

Full name PS queuing support
Abbreviation PsQueueInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-129

If PFC is suppoted, iBSC allocates radio resource according to signature

QoS parameters from user side. When QoS guarantee rate for user
signature is unsatisfied (including through grabbing), and the QoS
parameter allows queuing, and if this parameter is enabled, iBSC allocates
radio resource to user according to Best Effort, and insert the user into the
queue, to wait for allocation of radio resource. Queuing time can be gotten
through PFC process; otherwise if this parameter is disabled, access to this
service is directly refused.
Description When this parameter is Yes, you can configure PsMaxQueueInstNum.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Relevant parameters Max PS queue count (PsMaxQueueInstNum)
When this parameter is Yes, you can configure Max PS Queue Count
Relationship
(PsMaxQueueInstNum).
4.12.5 Max PS queue count (PsMaxQueueInstNum)

Full name Max PS Queue Count (PsMaxQueueInstNum)
Abbreviation PsMaxQueueInstNum
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This paramter indicates the number of allowed queues in the cell. When the
user number in queue reaches this value, the service that shall be queued
Description shall be refused to access.
Value Range 1 ~ 16
Unit None
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
4-130


Relevant parameters PS queuing support (PsQueueInd)
Relationship When PsQueueInd is Yes, you can configure this parameter.
4.12.6 PS preemption support (PsPreemptionInd)

Full name PS preemption support
Abbreviation PsPreemptionInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When PFC is supported, iBSC allocates radio resource according to signa-

ture QoS parameters from user side. When signed QoS guarantee rate can't
be satisfied and user own QoS parameter allows preemption. When this pa-
Description rameter is enabled, this user can preempt radio resource with low priority.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
4.12.7 3G NACC support (Support3GCCN)

Full name 3G NACC support
Abbreviation Support3GCCN
4-131

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter indicates if NACC to 3G cell is supported.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-02-02-011 Inter-BSC NACC
Relationship None
4.12.8 PS prompt CS support (PSPrmpCSSupport)

Full name PS prompt CS support
Abbreviation PSPrmpCSSupport
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates when dynamic channel with preferred PDCH is oc-
Description cupied, to determine if the channel can be preempted by PS service.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-132

4.12.9 Max resource for POC service (POCSrcThs,%)

Full name Max resource for POC service
Abbreviation POCSrcThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the percent of current PS resource occupied by POC service.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.12.10 Transform from uplink delay to extend (Info1_1_16)

Full name Transform from uplink delay to extend
3GPP Name None
3GPP
reference None
This parameter indicates whether the instance can be transformed from the delay
status to the extended uplink status.
Description The transformation details are: If MS supports extended uplink status, then stop the
delay timer and start uplink block allocation to enter the extended uplink status.
This parameter is supported from version 6.20.200f.
Management
Object Cell
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
4-133

Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
4.12.11 Max Num of resend packet assignment (Info1_1_8)

Full name Max Num of resend packet assignment
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When the number of times of resending assignment messages exceeds the

maximum number of times of resending packet assignment messages specified at
background, the TBF Release message is resent to notify MS to release TBF.
During the service process, if CTRL_ACK is lost, then judge the assignment type
that MAC is waiting for. If the assignment type is consistent with that MAC is
waiting for, then the number of resending assignment messages increments and
Description the uplink/downlink assignment message is resent. If it exceeds the maximum
number of resending assignment messages but the assignment acknowledgement
message from MS is still not received, then the TBF Release message is issued
from network and TBF is released. If the assignment type is inconsistent with
that MAC is waiting for, then the assignment timer is cleared and the assignment
message will not be resent.
Management
Object Cell
Value Range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
4-134

Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
4.12.12 Resource adjust for CS preempt (Info1_1_17)

Full name Resource adjust for CS preempt
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When events, such as CS preemption, that require releasing PS channel occur,

the control plane judges whether the timeslot to be released is important timeslot
or unique timeslot after receiving the dynamic channel conversion message. If
the timeslot is not important or unique, then the control plane initiates resource
Description
adjustment and sends the resource assignment message to the user plane. The
user plane then sends packet uplink/downlink assignment message or timeslot
reallocation message to MS.
Management
Object Cell
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
4-135

4.12.13 Subcell selection of PS channel allocation (PSALLOCSC_0)

Full name Subcell selection of PS channel allocation
Abbreviation PSALLOCSC_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
After subcell is configured, user can control the subcell selection strategy by this
parameter. The strategy includes preferring the first subcell, preferring the second
Description
subcell, and only selecting the first subcell.
Management
Object Cell
Prefer subcell 1, Prefer subcell 2, Only subcell 1

l 0: Prefer subcell 1
Value Range
l 1: Prefer subcell 2
l 2: Only subcell 1
Unit None
Default value Prefer subcell 1
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
4.12.14 Level for PS channel allocate in subcell 1 (PSALLOCSC_1)

Full name Level for PS channel allocate in subcell 1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-136

After subcell is configured, this parameter is used to control the level threshold
for selecting the first subcell. When PS channel is in the second subcell, if the
Description level is smaller than PSALLOCSC_1 and TA is larger than PagBlkRes, then it is
necessary to move to the first subcell.
Management
Object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
l 63: > -48 dBm
Unit None
Default value 63
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
4.12.15 Level for PS channel allocate in subcell 2 (PSALLOCSC_2)

Full name Level for PS channel allocate in subcell 2
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
After subcell is configured, this parameter is used to control the level threshold
for selecting the second subcell. When PS channel is in the first subcell, if the
Description level is larger than PSALLOCSC_2 and TA is smaller than PagBlkRes, then it is
necessary to move to the second subcell.
4-137

Management
Object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
l 63: > -48 dBm
Unit None
Default value 63
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
4.13 GPRS Cell Options Parameters

The interface of GPRS cell optional parameters is shown in Figure 4-13.
4-138

Figure 4-13 GPRS Cell Options Parameters
4.13.1 T3168
Full name T3168
Abbreviation T3168
3GPP Name T3168
Parameter used at the MS side.It belongs to the GPRS cell option

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13
messages.
T3168 indicates the maximum time to wait for PACKET UPLINK
ASSIGNMENT message after MS sends PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST
message (or PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message with Channel
Description Request Description IE).
Value Range 0.5 ~ 4.0 (Step length is 0.5)
Unit s
Default value 4.0
Change mode Offline
4-139

Relationship None
4.13.2 T3192
Full name T3192
Abbreviation T3192
3GPP Name T3192
Parameter used at the MS side.

During the packet downlink transmission, if RLC data block is the final
downlink data block to be transmitted, the network sends the RLC data
block with the Final Block Identifier (FBI) domain as 1. It contains an
effective RRBP field to initialize the release of the downlink TBF.
For each RLC data block that receives FBI with value 1 and contains
effective RRBP domain:
l In acknowledged mode, the MS sends PACKET DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK message whose FAI domain is 1 on the uplink block
specified by the RRBP domain.
l In unacknowledged mode, MS sends the PACKET CONTROL AC-
KNOWLEDGE message in the uplink block specified as per RRBP
field. Then MS starts the T3192 timer.
T3192 releases the resources, stop discreet listening to the PDCCH
channel when it expires, and turns to the paging channel for discreet
listening. Within the protection period of T3192, if the MS receives
the “PACKET DOWNLINK ASSIGNMENT” or “PACKET TIMESLOT
RECONFIGURE” message from the network, T3192 will stop and turn
Description to the packet transmission status.
Value Range 500, 1000, 1500, 0, 80, 120, 160, 200
Unit ms
Default value 500
Change mode Offline
4-140

Relationship None
4.13.3 T3142(s)
Full name T3142(s)
Abbreviation T3142
3GPP Name T3142

This timer starts if the MS receives immeidate assignment refusal or DTM
Description refusal during packet access. This timer does not function if the MS in
original cell does not allow to initiate access request but the MS does cell
reselection prior to the timer timeout.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.4 T3172(s)
Full name T3172(s)
Abbreviation T3172
3GPP Name T3172
4-141


This timer starts if the MS receives PACKET ACCESS REJECT message
during packet access. The MS disables packet access if this timer is
Description timeout. The MS changes to idle status if this timer is timeout prior to
receiving assignment message. After this timer timeout, the MS does not
disable packet access in this cell, but shall not take channel request as
paging response except the MS receives paging request message.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.5 DRX mode holding time (DrxTimeMax, s)

Full name DRX mode holding time
Abbreviation DrxTimeMax
3GPP Name DRX_TIMER_MAX
This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI1,

PSI13 and SI13 messages, and indicates the value of DRX_TIMER_MAX.
When changing from the packet transmission mode to the packet idle
mode, the MS should first enter the non-DRX mode. Minimum values of
this parameter and DRX_TIMER_MAX parameters determine the time
Description length for MS to stay in the Non-DRx mode.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64
Unit s
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-05-010 GPRS non-DRX Mode
4-142

Relationship None
4.13.6 MAX blocks transmission in each TS (BsCvMax)

Full name Max blocks transmission in each TS
Abbreviation BsCvMax
3GPP Name BS_CV_MAX
This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through

PSI1, PSI13, and SI13 messages.
This parameter decides the time of T3198 used by the MS as the sending
party (= time represented by BS_CV_MAX), the time of T3200 used by the
MS in the non-DRX mode (= 4 x the time represented by BS_CV_MAX),
and the value of “N3104max” (=3 x (BS_CV_MAX+3) x Number of timeslots
assigned in the uplink).
All uplink data blocks sent by MS contain the COUNT DOWN VALUE (CV)
field. The network can use this field to calculate the data blocks to be sent
Description on current uplink TBF.
Value Range 0 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.7 Packet control acknowledgment type (CtraCKType)

Full name Packet control acknowledgment type
Abbreviation CtraCKType
4-143

3GPP Name CONTROL_ACK_TYPE
This parameter is used on RLC/MAC layer of BRP and at MS side. System

broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13, and SI13 messages. Packet control
acknowledgment type indicates the default format for MS to send PACKET
Description CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT message.
Value Range 4 access bursts, RLC/MAC control block
Unit None
Default value RLC/MAC control block
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.8 Access burst type (AccessType)

Full name Access burst type
Abbreviation AccessType
3GPP Name ACCESS_BURST_TYPE

PSI1, PSI13, and SI13 messages. Access burst type indicates whether
to use the 8-bit or 11-bit access burst in PRACH and PTCCH/U, and the
PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT message.
The main difference between the two types is that the 11-bit access burst
Description can take more content than the 8-bit access burst.
Value Range 8 bits, 11 bits
Unit None
Default value 8 bits
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-05-005 8/11 bit Access Burst
4-144

Relationship None
4.13.9 N3102 decrease step (PanDec)

Full name N3102 decrease step
Abbreviation PanDec
3GPP Name PAN_DEC
This parameter is used at MS side. They belong to the GPRS cell option
parameters, and they are broadcast to the MS in the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13
messages, indicating the values of parameters of “PAN_DEC”, “PAN_INC”
and “PAN_MAX”. After each cell reselection, the MS will set the initial value
of N3102 as the “PanMax” value.
1. When the MS receives the “PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK” message to
move V(S) forward, it adds PanInc to N3102 (but the maximum value
shall not exceed PanMax).
2. When the MS detects the stall condition (V(S) = V(A) + W(S)), T3182
will start. When it receives the “PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK” message
that enables V(S) < V(A) + W(S), T3182 stops. If T3182 expires, the MS
will subtract PanDec from N3102. When the condition satisfies N3102
< 0, the MS will take cell reselection as abnormal release. When one of
Description PanDec, PanInc, and PanMax is zero, N3102 is invalid.
Value Range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-145

4.13.10 N3102 increase step (PanInc)

Full name N3102 increase step
Abbreviation PanInc
3GPP Name PAN_INC
Value Range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
Unit None
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.11 N3102 MAX (PanMax)

Full name N3102 Max
Abbreviation PanMax
3GPP Name PAN_MAX
4-146

Value Range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
Unit None
Default value 32
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.12 GPRS Phone Init Coding

Full name GPRS Phone Init Coding
Abbreviation GPRSInitattselt_0 ~ GPRSInitattselt_3
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the default-coding mode for GPRS MS initial ac-
cess, under different Abis interface link bandwidths. This is a four-dimen-
sional array, indicating GPRS uplink init coding scheme, GPRS downlink init
coding scheme, GPRS uplink max coding scheme, and GPRS downlink max
Description coding scheme.
4-147

l GPRS uplink init coding scheme: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4;

l GPRS downlink init coding scheme: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4;
l GPRS uplink max coding scheme: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4;
Value Range l GPRS downlink max coding scheme: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4.
Unit None
Default value [CS2, CS2, CS4, CS4]
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-03-05-002 Initial Coding Scheme per Cell Settable
Relationship None
4.13.13 GPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_0)

Full name GPRS phones init code can be changed
Abbreviation InitAttachExch_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if GPRS phones default code can be changed dy-
Description namically.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14 GPRS NC Survey Parameters

The interface of GPRS NC survey parameters is shown in Figure 4-14.
4-148

Figure 4-14 GPRS NC Survey Parameters
4.14.1 Packet Idle mode (NcRepPerI, s)

Full name Packet Idle mode
Abbreviation NcRepPerI
3GPP Name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_I
This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts the parameter

information to MS through SI2Quater and PSI5 messages. This parameter
indicates the period of MS reporting cell reselection survey in packet IDLE
mode. When NetworkCtrlOrder is NC0, the parameter information is not
necessary to broadcast through PSI5 message.
Description This parameter also can be sent to MS through PMO message.
Value Range 0.48, 0.96, 1.92, 3.84, 7.68, 15.36, 30.72, 61.44
Unit s
Default value 61.44
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-02-02-012 Network Controlled Cell Reselection
Relationship None
4-149

4.14.2 Packet transmission mode (NcRerPerT, s)

Full name Packet transmission mode
Abbreviation NcRerPerT
3GPP Name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to NC measurement

parameter, which is broadcasted to MS in system message SI2Quater and
PSI5 message. This parameter indicates the period of MS reporting cell
reselection survey in packet transmission mode. When NetworkCtrlOrder
is NC0, the parameter information is not necessary to broadcast through
PSI5 message.
Value Range 0.48, 0.96, 1.92, 3.84, 7.68, 15.36, 30.72, 61.44
Unit s
Default value 3.84
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.3 Extended measurement report order (MeaOrder)

Full name Extended measurement report order
Abbreviation MeaOrder
3GPP Name MEASUREMENT_ORDER
This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts the parameter

information to MS through PSI1 message. Extended measurement report
order is to indicate the survey report command of MS in a cell.
Description This parameter indicates if PSI5 is sent.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
4-150

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.4 Network control order (CtrlOrder)

Full name Network control order
Abbreviation CtrlOrder
3GPP Name NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to the network control survey

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI5, PSI13, SI3, and
SI2quater messages, indicating the network control command used in the
cell. If the parameter equals to NC0, then NC survey parameters (NC hold
time in non-drx mode, and Cell Reselection Survey Report Period) can be
ignored; if the parameter is NC1 or NC2 and NC measurement parameters
are ignored, use the default value.
l NC0: MS controls cell reselection, and there is no survey report.
l NC1: MS controls cell reselection and sends the survey report.
l NC2: The network controls cell reselection and MS sends the survey
Description report.
Value Range NC0, NC1, NC2
Unit None
Default value NC0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-151

4.14.5 NC hold time in non-drx mode (NcNoDrxPer, s)

Full name NC hold time in non-drx mode
Abbreviation NcNoDrxPer
3GPP Name NC_ NON_DRX_PERIOD
This parameter is used at MS side. This parameter belongs to network

control survey and is used at MS side. System broadcasts the parameter
information to MS through SI2Quater and PSI5 message. This parameter
indicates the minimal time for an MS to stay in the non-DRX mode
after sending an NC survey report. When NetworkCtrlOrder is NC0,
the parameter information is not necessary to broadcast through PSI5
message.
Value Range No non-DRX mode, 0.24, 0.48, 0.72, 0.96, 1.20, 1.44, 1.92
Unit s
Default value 0.48
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.6 Extended measurement report order (ExMeaOrder)

Full name Extended measurement report order
Abbreviation ExMeaOrder
3GPP Name EXT_MEASUREMENT_ORDER
4-152

This parameter is used at MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI5

message. This parameter indicates whether the MS performs extended
survey. In addition, it indicates how to interpret the other extended survey
parameters (Type of extended measurement report and Report period of
extended measurement).
l EM0: MS performs no extended survey
Description l EM1: MS must send the extended survey report to the network
Value Range EM0, EM1
Unit None
Default value EM0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.7 Type of extended measurement report (ExtRepType)

Full name Type of extended measurement report
Abbreviation ExtRepType
3GPP Name EXT_REPORTING_TYPE
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to the extended survey

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI5 message, indicating
the type of the extended survey report of MS. System sends the parameter
information through the PSI5 message when Extended measurement
report order is EM1.
l Type1: This type of report must be extended if the frequency points for
the extended survey are among the six strongest carrier frequencies,
even if the BSIC decoding is successful. The report should cover the
receiving signal level and the successfully decoded BSIC (if any).
l Type2: This type of report must be extended if all the frequency points
for the extended survey are located in the six strongest carrier frequen-
Description cies, the BSIC decoding is successful and the NCC part is allowed for
4-153

survey. The report should cover the receiving signal level and the suc-
cessfully decoded BSIC.
l Type3: Use this type of report to report all the frequency points for the
extended survey. No BSIC decoding is necessary. The report should
contain the receiving signal level. Besides, the interference of each car-
rier frequency shall be reported.
Value Range Type1, Type2, Type3
Unit None
Default value Type 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.8 Report period of extended measurement (ExtRepPer, s)

Full name Report period of extended measurement
Abbreviation ExtRepPer
3GPP Name EXT_REPORTING_PERIOD
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the extended survey parame-

ters and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI5 message, indicating the interval
of extended survey report. System sends the parameter information through
Description the PSI5 message when Extended measurement report order is EM1.
Value Range 60, 120, 240, 480, 960, 1920, 3840, 7680
Unit s
Default value 1920
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-154

4.14.9 The size of test report's slip window (Wnd)

Full name The size of test report's slip window
Abbreviation Wnd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When NC2 network controls the cell reselection, this parameter is used.
When the number of measurement reports reaches this parameter setting
Description value, average processing is done for measurement report.
Value Range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.10 Allowed report number of the same cell in slip window

(AllowedRepNum)
Full name Allowed report number of the same cell in slip window
Abbreviation AllowedRepNum
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When NC2 network controls the cell reselection, this parameter is used.
When adjacent cell receives average level, and the number of valid mea-
surement report received in slip window is lower than setting value, this cal-
Description culation shall be punished.
Value Range 1~6
4-155

Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.15 GPRS Power Control Parameters

The interface of GPRS power control parameters is shown in Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-15 GPRS Power Control Parameters
4.15.1 Filter period in the packet idle mode (T_AVG_W, s)

Full name Filter period in the packet idle mode
Abbreviation T_AVG_W
3GPP Name T_AVG_W
4-156

Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the global power control and
GPRS power control parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1,
PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter indicates the filter period of the
Description signal intensity for power control in the packet idle mode.
0 ~ 31
l 0: filter period is 2(0/2)/6 multiframes
......
Value Range l 26 ~ 31: filter period is 2(25/2)/6 multiframes
Unit s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.15.2 Filter period in packet transmission mode (T_AVG_T, s)

Full name Filter period in packet transmission mode
Abbreviation T_AVG_T
3GPP Name T_AVG_T
PSI13 and SI3 messages. This parameter indicates the filter period of the
Description signal intensity for power control in the packet transmission mode.
0 ~ 31
......
Value Range l 26 ~ 31: reserved
Unit s
4-157

Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.15.3 PSI4 sending mark (Psi4Send)

Full name PSI4 sending mark
Abbreviation Psi4Send
3GPP Name INT_MEAS_CHANNEL_LIST_AVAIL
This parameter belongs to global power control and is used at MS side. It

belongs to the global power control parameters, and it is broadcast to the
MS in the PSI1 message. This parameter indicates whether to broadcast
the optional PSI4 message. This message contains a list of channels that
Description interferes with the survey.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.15.4 Power control measurement channel (PcMeasChan)

Full name Power control measurement channel
Abbreviation PcMeasChan
3GPP Name PC_MEAS_CHAN
4-158

PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter indicates the position where the
Description downlink power strength is surveyed for uplink power control.
Value Range BCCH, PDCH
Unit None
Default value BCCH
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.15.5 Power control parameter (Alpha)

Full name Power control parameter
Abbreviation Alpha
3GPP Name ALPHA
PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter determines the MS transmission
Description power control Alpha (α).
0 ~ 10
Parameters controlled by MS transmitting power is Alpha(α), then,
l 0: α = 0.0
l 1: α = 0.1
......
l 10: α = 1.0
Value Range l 11 ~ 15: α = 1.0
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
4-159

Relationship None
4.15.6 Filter constant of power control (N_AVG_I)

Full name Filter constant of power control
Abbreviation N_AVG_I
3GPP Name N_AVG_I
PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter is a filter constant used to opti-
Description mize the interference signal intensity in power control.
Value Range 0 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters

The interface of GPRS cell reselection parameters is shown in Figure 4-16.
4-160

Figure 4-16 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters
4.16.1 Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset_0, 2db)


message by BTS. In the GPRS system, C32 is used as the standard for cell
reselection. Similar to the C2 standard in GSM, there is a cell reselection
offset parameter (ReselOff) for calculation of the C32 standard. This
parameteris not necessary to append in packet system message when the
offset value is 0 dB.
4-161

0 ~ 31
l 0: -52 dB
l 1: -48 dB
......
l 22: +12 dB
......
l 31: +48 dB
For -52 dB ~ -12 dB and 12 dB ~ 48 dB, the step is 4 dB; for -12 dB ~ 12
Value Range dB, the step is 2 dB.
Unit 2 dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-02-02-009 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria
Relationship None
4.16.2 Cell reselection offset2 (ReselOffset_1, 2db)

Full name Reselection offset 2

system, C32 is used as the standard for cell reselection. Similar to the C2
standard in GSM, there is a cell reselection offset parameter (ReselOff) for
calculation of the C32 standard. This parameteris not necessary to append
in packet system message when the offset value is 0 dB.
4-162

0 ~ 31
l 0: -52 dB
l 1: -48 dB
......
l 22: +12 dB
......
Value Range l 31: +48 dB
Unit 2 dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.3 Temporary offset of cell reselection (TempOffset_0, db)


Time parameter.
Value Range 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, Infinite
Unit dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-163

4.16.4 Temporary offset of cell reselection2 (TempOffset_1, db)

Full name Reselection temporary offset 2

temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in
GSM system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time parameter.
Unit dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

4-164


offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on
PenalTime of cell reselection.
0 ~ 31
l 0: 10 s
l 1: 20 s
......
Value Range l 31: 320 s
Unit 10 s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.6 Penalty time of cell reselection2 (PenalTime_1, 10s)

Full name Penalty time of cell reselection 2

temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in
GSM system. The effective time depends on PenalTime of cell reselection.
4-165

0 ~ 31
l 0: 10 s
l 1: 20 s
......
Value Range l 31: 320 s
Unit 10 s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.7 Interval of reselecting the same cell (T_Resel_0, s)

Full name Interval of reselecting the same cell
Abbreviation T_Resel_0
3GPP Name T_RESEL

message by BTS. When MS performs a cell reselection that causes
abnormal release of this cell, it is not allowed to reselect this cell again
within the T_RESEL period, unless there is no other cells for selection. It is
not necessary to broadcast this parameter to MS through PSI3 message
when the time represented by this parameter is 5 s (default value).
Value Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, 120, 300
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-166

4.16.8 Interval of reselecting the same cell2 (T_Resel_1, s)

Full name Interval of reselecting the same cell 2
Abbreviation T_Resel_1
3GPP Name T_RESEL
This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. When MS

performs a cell reselection that causes abnormal release of this cell, it is
not allowed to reselect this cell again within the T_RESEL period, unless
there is no other cells for selection. It is not necessary to broadcast this
parameter to MS through PSI3 message when the time represented by
this parameter is 5 s (default value).
Value Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, 120, 300
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.9 Threshold of HCS signal level (HCS_Thr_0)

Abbreviation HCS_Thr_0
3GPP Name HCS_THR
4-167


broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS. Threshold of HCS signal
level identifies the HCS signal strength threshold of the cell.
0 ~ 63
l 0: -110 dBm
l 1: -108 dBm
Value Range ......
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.10 Threshold of HCS signal level2 (HCS_Thr_1)

Full name Threshold of HSC signal level 2
Abbreviation HCS_Thr_1
3GPP Name HCS_THR
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which

is informed to MS on PACCH. Threshold of HCS signal level identifies the
HCS signal strength threshold of the cell.
0 ~ 63
l 0: -110 dBm
l 1: -108 dBm
Value Range ......
Unit None
Default value 0
4-168

Change mode Offline
Relationship None


broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS. This parameter specifies
the HCS priority of the cell.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.12 HCS priority2 (PrioClass_1)

Full name HCS Priority 2
4-169


informed to MS on PACCH. This parameter specifies the HCS priority of
the cell.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.13 C31 hysteresis (C31_Hyst_0)

Full name C31 hysteresis
Abbreviation C31_Hyst_0
3GPP Name C31_HYST
This parameter is used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS through system

message by BTS, indicating whether to use the CellReselHys parameter
on the C31 standard.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-170

4.16.14 C31 hysteresis2 (C31_Hyst_1)

Full name C31 hysteresis 2
Abbreviation C31_Hyst_1
3GPP Name C31_HYST
This parameter is used at MS side. It is informed to MS on PACCH,

indicating whether to use the CellReselHys parameter on the C31 standard.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.15 GPRS cell reselection hysteresis (ReselHys_0, db)

Full name GPRS cell reselection hysteresis
Abbreviation ReselHys_0
3GPP Name GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
4-171


message by BTS.
MS needs to go through location updating process after cell reselection
in the case of GPRS cell reselection, if the original cell and destination
cell are in different locations. C32 values obtained at the boundary for
two adjacent cells are different because of fading characteristic of radio
channel. It causes MS to select cell frequently.
The interval between the two cell reselections of MS is not less than 15 s.
However, 15 s is extremely short time in terms of location updating. This
increases the signaling flow on the network and causes radio resources to
be fully utilized. In addition, it decreases call completion rate of the system,
as MS cannot respond to paging during location update.
by the parameter.
that is, there is coverage gap, or the adjacent place is an area with
few slow moving objects such as the expressway, the CRH parameter
should be set as 1 ~ 3 (that is, 2dB ~ 6dB for the CRH level).
Value Range 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
Unit dB
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-172

4.16.16 GPRS cell reselection hysteresis2 (ReselHys_1, db)

Full name GPRS cell reselection hysteresis 2
Abbreviation ReselHys_1
3GPP Name GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
This parameter is used at MS side. Inform MS on PACCH.

MS needs to go through location updating process after cell reselection
in the case of GPRS cell reselection, if the original cell and destination
cell are in different locations. C32 values obtained at the boundary for
two adjacent cells are different because of fading characteristic of radio
channel. It causes MS to select cell frequently.
The interval between the two cell reselections of MS is not less than 15 s.
However, 15 s is extremely short time in terms of location updating. This
increases the signaling flow on the network and causes radio resources to
be fully utilized. In addition, it decreases call completion rate of the system,
as MS cannot respond to paging during location update.
by the parameter.
that is, there is coverage gap, or the adjacent place is an area with
few slow moving objects such as the expressway, the CRH parameter
should be set as 1 ~ 3 (that is, 2dB ~ 6dB for the CRH level).
Value Range 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
Unit dB
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-173

4.16.17 Routing reselection hysteresis (RaReselHys_0, db)

Full name Routing reselection hysteresis
Abbreviation RaReselHys_0
3GPP Name RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS

message by BTS. This parameter specifies extra hysteresis value used in
selecting a cell in another routing area when MS is in STANDBY or READY
mode. It is not necessary to broadcast this parameter through the PSI3
message when the value of this parameter is the same as that of GPRS
cell reselection hysteresis.
Value Range 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
Unit dB
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.18 Routing reselection hysteresis2 (RaReselHys_1, db)

Full name Routing reselection hysteresis 2
Abbreviation RaReselHys_1
3GPP Name RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
4-174

This parameter is used at MS side. It is informed to MS on PACCH. This

parameter specifies extra hysteresis value used in selecting a cell in another
routing area when MS is in STANDBY or READY mode. It is not necessary
to broadcast this parameter through the PSI3 message when the value of
this parameter is the same as that of GPRS cell reselection hysteresis.
Value Range 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
Unit dB
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.19 Random access attempt permitted (RadAcRetry_0)

Full name Random access attempt permitted
Abbreviation RadAcRetry_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

message by BTS, which indicates whether MS is allowed to attempt to
access another cell (if it exists).
If there is abnormal release in the packet transmission, the MS will discard
all running TBFs. If MS is allowed to access other cells, it should perform
abnormal cell reselection, and establish TBF after initializing new cell.
If other suitable cells exist, MS cannot reselect the original cell within
T_RESEL seconds.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
4-175

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.20 Random access attempt permitted2 (RadAcRetry_1)

Full name Random access attempt permitted 2
Abbreviation RadAcRetry_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used at MS side. It is informed to MS on PACCH,

indicating whether MS is allowed to attempt to access another cell (if it
exists).
If there is abnormal release in the packet transmission, the MS will discard
all running TBFs. If MS is allowed to access other cells, it should perform
abnormal cell reselection, and establish TBF after initializing new cell.
If other suitable cells exist, MS cannot reselect the original cell within
T_RESEL seconds.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-176

4.16.21 Usage of cell reselection offset (C32_Qual_0)

Full name Usage of cell reselection offset
Abbreviation C32_Qual_0
3GPP Name C32_QUAL

message by BTS, which indicates whether to use the exceptional rule
when adopting ReselOff.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.22 Usage of cell reselection offset2 (C32_Qual_1)

Full name Usage of cell reselection offset 2
Abbreviation C32_Qual_1
3GPP Name C32_QUAL
This parameter is used at MS side. It is informed to the MS on PACCH,

indicating whether to use the exceptional rule when adopting “ReselOff”.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
4-177

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.23 GPRS access minimum signal level1 (RxLevAsMin_0)

Full name GPRS access minimum signal level 1

message by BTS.
It indicates the minimum receiving level for the MS to access the GPRS
system. To prevent the MS from accessing the system at a low receiving
signal level (usually, the poor communication quality cannot guarantee
normal communication process after access) and from unreasonably
wasting radio resources of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system
that the receiving level be greater than a threshold level for MS to access
the network, that is, “MS Minimal Level to Access”.
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 12
Change mode Offline
4-178

Relationship None
4.16.24 GPRS access minimum signal level2 (RxLevAsMin_1)

Full name GPRS access minimum signal level 2

It indicates the minimum receiving level for the MS to access the GPRS
system. To prevent the MS from accessing the system at a low receiving
signal level (usually, the poor communication quality cannot guarantee
normal communication process after access) and from unreasonably
wasting radio resources of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system
that the receiving level be greater than a threshold level for MS to access
the network, that is, “MS Minimal Level to Access”.
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 12
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-179

4.16.25 Priority threshold (Prio_Thr, db)

Full name Priority threshold
Abbreviation Prio_Thr
3GPP Name PRIO_THR
System broadcasts the parameter information to MS through SI4, SI6 and

SI7 messages. This parameter relates to GPRS access minimal signal level
Description in calculation of C4 standard.
Unit dB
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.26 HCS exist (HCS_Exist_0)

Full name HCS exist
Abbreviation HCS_Exist_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Cell Structure (HCS) and broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS.
This parameter indicates whether the HCS parameters (PriorityClass and
HCSTHr) exist in the cell. MS ignores HSC exist parameters of other cells if
serving cell does not use HSC exist parameters (all the cells use Threshold
of HSC signal level of infinity).
4-180

Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.27 HCS exist2 (HCS_Exist_1)

Full name HCS exist 2
Abbreviation HCS_Exist_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Cell Structure (HCS) and be informed to MS on PACCH. This parameter
indicates whether the HCS parameters (PriorityClass and HCSTHr) exist
in the cell. MS ignores HSC exist parameters of other cells if serving cell
does not use HSC exist parameters (all the cells use Threshold of HSC
signal level of infinity).
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-181

4.16.28 GPRS MAX initial access signal level1 (MsTxMaxCch_0)

Abbreviation MsTxMaxCch_0

message by BTS.
Network controls the MS transmit power during communication with BTS.
The network controls MS power using power command. MS outputs
transmit power closest to the specified power value if unavailable. The
power before MS receives the network power control information (the
power used in random access), depends on this parameter when MS
is receiving PBCCH.
This parameter is also a parameter for cell selection and reselection by MS,
involved in calculation of C1 and C2 values. If this parameter is too large,
the MS close to BTS will interfere with the adjacent channel; If it is too
small, the MS access success rate at the edge of cell will be very low.
To set it, observe the following principle: Under the precondition that the
MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed with certain access success rate,
the MS access level should be reduced as much as possible. Generally,
GSM1800MS).
of the parameter.
The value is same as that in the appendix.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-182

4.16.29 GPRS MAX initial access signal level2 (MsTxMaxCch_1)

Full name GPRS MAX initial access signal level 2
Abbreviation MsTxMaxCch_1

Network controls the MS transmit power during communication with BTS.
The network controls MS power using power command. MS outputs
transmit power closest to the specified power value if unavailable. The
power before MS receives the network power control information (the
power used in random access), depends on this parameter when MS
is receiving PBCCH.
This parameter is also a parameter for cell selection and reselection by MS,
involved in calculation of C1 and C2 values. If this parameter is too large,
the MS close to BTS will interfere with the adjacent channel; If it is too
small, the MS access success rate at the edge of cell will be very low.
To set it, observe the following principle: Under the precondition that the
MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed with certain access success rate,
the MS access level should be reduced as much as possible. Generally,
GSM1800MS).
of the parameter.
The value is same as that in the appendix.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-183

4.16.30 LSA ID (LSA_Id)

Full name LSA Mark
Abbreviation LSA_Id
3GPP Name LSA ID
System broadcasts the parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, SI7, and PSI3 mes-
sages of serving cell. In addition, system broadcasts the parameter informa-
tion in PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of the neighboring cells. LSA ID specifies
Description LSA identifier of the cell.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.31 LSA offset (LSA_Offset)

Full name LSA Offset
Abbreviation LSA_Offset
3GPP Name LSA_OFFSET
System broadcasts the parameter information to MS through SI4, SI6 and

SI7 messages. This parameter defines the offset value for LSA reselection
Description between two cells with the same LSA priority.
Value Range 0, 4, 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
4-184

Relationship None
4.17 GPRS Channel Parameters

The interface of GPRS channel parameters is shown in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 GPRS Channel Parameters
4.17.1 PAGCH reserved blocks (PagBlkRes)

Full name PAGCH reserved blocks
Abbreviation PagBlkRes
3GPP Name BS_PAG_BLKS_RES
4-185


PSI1 message.
This parameter indicates the number of blocks where neither packet paging
nor PBCCH can appear in a 52-frame multiframe. On these blocks, only
PAGCH, PDTCH and PACCH can appear. Network sends the uplink
assignment message with priority on these fixed blocks to speed up the
establishment of the uplink TBF.
After sending the channel request on PRACH channel, MS waits for the
uplink assignment message on all PCCCH channels of the same timeslot
Description as the PRACH channel.
Value Range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.2 PBCCH reserved blocks (PbcchBlks)

Full name PBCCH reserved blocks
Abbreviation PbcchBlks
3GPP Name BS_PBCCH_BLKS
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to the PCCCH structure

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1 message. This
parameter indicates the number of blocks assigned as PBCCH in a
52-frame multiframe (altogether 12 blocks).
PBCCH blocks are used at the same time by the packet system messages
sent at high rate and low rate. A message that is sent at high rate has
higher priority. This parameter must be configured together with the
PSI1_REPEAT_PERIOD parameter in the PSI1 message to ensure that
the block resources are available for the packet system messages, sent
Description both at high and low rates.
4-186

PBCCH occupies 1 block in multi-frame, PBCCH occupies 2 blocks in multi-

frame, PBCCH occupies 3 blocks in multi-frame, PBCCH occupies 4 blocks
Value Range in multi-frame
Unit None
Default value PBCCH occupies four blocks in the multiframe.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.3 PRACH reserved blocks (PrachBlks)

Full name PRACH reserved blocks
Abbreviation PrachBlks
3GPP Name BS_PRACH_BLKS
This parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to the PCCCH organization

parameter indicates the number of fixed blocks reserved for the PRACH
channel in the PDCH channel that bears PCCCH.
These blocks must be identified by “USF = FREE”. MS can use this
Description parameter or USF = FREE to carry out the PRACH assignment.
Value Range 0 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-187

4.17.4 Interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt)

Full name Interval range of packet access attempt
Abbreviation TxInt
3GPP Name TX_INT

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1 message. Whenever
establishing a new connection, MS sends a channel request message to
the network through PRACH channel.
As PRACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve the success rate of MS
access, the network allows MS to send multiple channel request messages
before it receives the packet assignment message. If MS does not get
any response for the previous channel request message, it can resend a
channel request message after waiting for a random period. Interval range
of packet access attempt is used to determine the time length of random
waiting. It is the number of delay timeslot randomly connected.
The random access time is determined by Interval range of packet access
Description attempt (TxInt) and Interval period of packet access attempt (S).
Value Range 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50
Unit None
Default value 32
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.5 Interval period of packet access attempt (S)

Full name Interval period of packet access attempt
Abbreviation S
3GPP Name S
4-188


Number of slots to spread transmission belongs to PRACH control.
Network broadcasts to MS through PSI1 message. Whenever establishing
a new connection, MS sends a channel request message to the network
through PRACH channel.
As PRACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve the success rate of MS
access, the network allows the MS to send multiple channel request
messages before receiving the packet assignment message. When the
previous channel request message is not responded, MS will wait for a
random period to re-send the channel request message. Parameter S
decides the random waiting time. It is used to calculate the minimum
timeslot number between two channel requests.
The random access time is determined by Interval range of packet access
Description attempt (TxInt) and Interval period of packet access attempt (S).
Value Range 12, 15, 20, 30, 41, 55, 76, 109, 163, 217
Unit s
Default value 109
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.6 MAX Times of Attempt (MaxRetrans)

Full name MAX Times of Attempt
Abbreviation MaxRetrans
3GPP Name MAX_RETRANS

parameter indicates maximum attempts of random access allowed on
PRACH for MS with radio priorities of 1 ~ 4.
This parameter is an array with 4 elements. The first array element
corresponds to maximum number of attempts allowed for radio priority
Description 1, and so on.
4-189

Value Range 1, 2, 4, 7
Unit None
Default value [4, 4, 4, 4]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.7 Access Control Level (AccCtrlClass)

Full name Access control level
Abbreviation AccCtrlClass
3GPP Name ACC_CONTR_CLASS
It indicates MS access control level to access cell. Common MS has the

class 0 ~ 9 and special MS has the class 11 ~ 15. Class 10 does not exist.
System can prohibit MS with some access class to enter the cell according
to this parameter. System allows access of a mobile with access class, N
= 0, 1 …9, 11 …15. It allows emergency calls when the eleventh digit =
EC. To faciliate programming, C10 is constantly 0.
If the Nth bit of the access control level is 0 (‘0’ indicates access allowed,
‘1’ indicates access not allowed), then it is allowed to access a MS with
AccCtrlClass =N (N=0, 1, … 9, 11, … 15). Bit 11= EC represents that
Emergency Call is available.
This parameter consists of two bytes (16 bits).
The first byte: C15, C14, C13, C12, C11, C10, C9, C8
The second byte: C7, C6, C5, C4, C3, C2, C1, C0
l When Cn = 0, the MS of which the access level is n is not forbidden to
access the cell (n=0, 1, ..., 9, 11, ...,15)
l When Cn = 1, the MS of which the access level is n is forbidden to
access the cell (n=0, 1, ..., 9, 11, ...,15)
Description l C10 is constantly 0.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
4-190

Default value [No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.8 Access Persist Level (PersistLev)

Full name Access Persist Level
Abbreviation PersistLev
3GPP Name PERSISTENCE_LEVEL

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1 message. The
network sets a level threshold P I (I = 1, 2, 3, 4) for MS of various radio
priorities.
For each attempt of packet access, MS abstracts a random value R with
even distribution probability from the set {0, 1..., 15}. System allows MS to
initiate an attempt of packet access only when P I is lower than or equal
to R.
This parameter is an array with 4 elements. The first element corresponds
Description to the access persist level of radio priority 1, and so on.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Unit None
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-191

4.17.9 Subscriber occupying other preference channel support

(HybridOccuSupp)
Full name Subscriber occupying other preference channel support
Abbreviation HybridOccuSupp
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes whether to support subscriber occupying other

preference channel. It indicates this kind of preference channel is busy, other
channels are idle, and determines whether to occupy this preference chan-
Description nel.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-009 Flexible Priority Handling of Packet Data Channel
Relationship None
4.17.10 PS subscriber moving out of other preference channel

support (AllowPsMove)
Full name PS subscriber moving out of other preference channel support
Abbreviation AllowPsMove
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes whether to support subscriber moving out of other

preference channel. It indicates whether the user that occupies other chan-
Description nels can be moved out.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
4-192

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.11 CS subscriber moving support (AllowCsMove)

Full name CS subscriber moving support
Abbreviation AllowCsMove
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes whether support switching some CS subscriber

cell to other timeslot, to leave blank for original timeslot for getting larger PS
Description available timeslot group.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.12 Congeneric service threshold for PS-moving

(SfPreferBusyThs)
Full name Congeneric service threshold for PS-moving
Abbreviation SfPreferBusyThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-193

During this application, on the gained preferential channel on this side, it is

better that existing QoS quota / total available QoS quota is lower than allo-
cated result for this percentage, to calculate target evaluation target function
Description in combination with un-congeneric occupying threshold.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.13 Un-congeneric service threshold for PS-moving

(OpPreferBusyThs)
Full name Un-congeneric service threshold for PS-moving
Abbreviation OpPreferBusyThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
During this application, on the gained preferential channel on opposite side,

it is better that existing QoS quota / total available QoS quota is lower than
allocated result for this percentage, to calculate target evaluation target func-
Description tion in combination with un-congeneric occupying threshold.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-194

4.17.14 PS channel expand (Info1_1_18)

Full name PS channel expand
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether PS channel expansion is supported. For

example, if the number of channels that MS uses currently is 2+1 and MS can
Description use more timeslots, then the channel mode is automatically expanded to 3+1 or
4+1 after adjacent CS channel is released.
Management Cell
Object
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant ZGF05-09-009 Enhancement on Channel Allocation

Features
Relevant None
parameters
Relationship None
Related None
interfaces
Impact on None
service
4.17.15 Idle TCH threshold for PS channel expand (Info1_1_24, %)

Full name Idle TCH threshold for PS channel expand
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
4-195

When the proportion of idle TCHs of the cell is larger than this threshold, PS
Description channel expansion will be performed.
Management Cell
Object
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relevant ZGF05-09-009 Enhancement on Channel Allocation

Features
Relevant None
parameters
Relationship None
Related None
interfaces
Impact on None
service
4.18 EDGE Parameters

In the Basic Params 1 tab, if user select 'Support EDGE' for 'Support GPRS(PsSupport)',
the EDGE Params tab will appear.
The interface of EDGE property parameters is shown in Figure 4-18.
4-196

Figure 4-18 EDGE Parameters
4.18.1 EGPRS packet channel request access program support

(EgprsPacketChreq)
Full name EGPRS packet channel request access program support
Abbreviation EgprsPacketChreq
3GPP Name EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL_REQUEST
Network broadcasts this parameter to MS in GRPS CELL OPTIONS of SI13,

PSI1 and PSI13. It indicates if the cell supports EGPRS_PACKET_CHAN-
NEL_REQUEST access flow. If the cell supports EGPRS and this flow, the
EGPRS terminal is able to originate EGPRS packet access flow on RACH
Description or PRACH (if PBCCH exists).
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-05-003 EGPRS Packet Channel Request on CCCH
Relationship None
4-197

4.18.2 Uplink LA+IR quality control support (IrSupportUp)

Full name Uplink LA+IR quality control support
Abbreviation IrSupportUp
3GPP Name RESEGMENT
It indicates if the cell supports "uplink IR quality control". If it does, the net-
work could set the RESEGMENT in PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK, PACKET
UPLINK ASSIGNMENT and PACK TIMESLOT RECONFIGURE message
as FALSE to inform MS system of using IR quality control mode, and MS
Description uplink retransmission could not be segmented.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
ZGO-03-05-002 EGPRS Link Adaptation

Relevant Features ZGO-03-05-006 Incremental Redundancy in UL
Relationship None
4.18.3 Take Preemptive transmit bit function (PreemptiveTrans)

Full name Take Preemptive transmit bit function
Abbreviation PreemptiveTrans
3GPP Name PRE_EMPTIVE_TRANSMISSION
4-198

It indicates whether the cell employs the "Preemptivetrans bit" function. If

the cell supports that function, network indicates MS whether to send the
RLC data of PENDING-ACK when there is no data in NACK status and no
new RLC data block to be transmitted or the transmission window is full
by PRE_EMPTIVE_TRANSMISSION in PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK
message.
l Yes: Use preemptive transmission. MS should not send the data block
in PENDING-ACK status. But for the last piece of current TBF, even if
its status is PENDING –ACK, it should be transmitted.
l No: Do not use preemptive transmission. MS should send the oldest
data in PENDING-ACK status, then the second oldest data. If all data
Description in PENDING-ACK status have been sent, repeat from the oldest one.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.18.4 Average filter period for uplink BEP (BEPperiodUp)

Full name Bep_Period2 of uplink
Abbreviation BEPperiodUp
3GPP Name BEP_PERIOD
This parameter is internal parameter of PCU. The meaning of this parameter

is the same as BEPPeriodDown, but it is to caculate the uplink measurement
Description data inside of PCU.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
4-199

Relationship None
4.18.5 Average filter period for downlink BEP (BEPperiodDown)

Full name Bep_Period2 of downlink
Abbreviation BEPperiodDown
3GPP Name BEP_PERIOD
Network broadcasts this parameter to MS in GRPS CELL OPTIONS of

SI13, PSI1 and PSI13. In EGPRS system, EGPRS MS will determine to
report the MEAN_REP_AV (average error bit rate of the radio block) and
CV_BEP_AV (variance coefficient of radio block error bit rate) under the
whole TBF, or the measurement data per time slot MEAN_BEP_TNx (0-7).
The specification defines the calculation formula of these measurement
data (refer to 05.08 10.2.3.2.1). There is an oblivion factor e in the formula,
Description whose value is defined by the average period of BEP filter.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.18.6 EGPRS phone quality measure mode (LinkQuameaMode)

Full name EGPRS phone quality measure mode
Abbreviation LinkQuameaMode
4-200

3GPP Name LINK_QUALITY_MEASUREMENT_MODE
This parameter is sent to MS in Downlink Assignment message. It indicates

the measurement report mode of EGPRS MS in the cell. EGPRS measure-
ment could be performed based on each impulse, which is to measure by the
granularity of BURST. The feature of rapid EGPRS measurement makes the
network side be able to respond the change of radio environment quickly, so
Description as to choose the most proper coding mode and perform power control.
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.18.7 EDGE initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1

(Info1_1_0)
Full name EDGE initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether initial channel allocation in downlink for EDGE
user is according to the actual multislot capability. If it is, then one or multiple
Description timeslots are allocated according to the actual multislot capability in initial channel
allocation; otherwise, only one timeslot is allocated in initial channel allocation.
Management
Object Cell
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
4-201

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
4.18.8 EGPRS Phone Init Coding (EGPRSInitAttSelt)

Full name EGPRS Phone Init Coding
Abbreviation EGPRSInitAttSelt_0 ~ EGPRSInitAttSelt_3
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This is a four-dimensional array, representing EGPRS uplink initial coding

scheme, EGPRS downlink initial coding scheme, EGPRS uplink max coding
Description scheme, and EGPRS downlink max coding scheme.
Value Range MCS1, MCS2, MCS3, MCS4, MCS5, MCS6, MCS7, MCS8, MCS9
Unit None
Default value [MCS6, MCS6, MCS9, MCS9]
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-05-001 Modulation and Coding Scheme 1~9
Relationship None
4.18.9 EGPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_1)

Full name EGPRS phones init code can be changed
4-202

Abbreviation InitAttachExch_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if the coding method of GPRS/EGPRS MS in cell could be

Description changed dynamically.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-05-001 Modulation and Coding Scheme 1~9
Relationship None
4-203

4-204

Chapter 5
Cell Object Parameters
This chapter describes cell object parameters, including power control, handover, and
reselection parameters.
Table of Contents
TRX Parameters ........................................................................................................5-1
Power Control Parameters .......................................................................................5-25
Handover Control Parameters ..................................................................................5-52
UTRAN Handover Control Parameters ...................................................................5-121
UTRAN Cell Control Parameters ............................................................................5-135
Adjacent Cell Parameters.......................................................................................5-180
Frequency Hopping System Parameters ................................................................5-229
5.1 TRX Parameters

TRX parameters are displayed in two sub-interfaces. If the site is an IP access site, an IP
Params tab is added to the TRX information interface.
5.1.1 TRX Information Parameters

The interface of TRX parameters is as shown in Figure 5-1.
5-1

Figure 5-1 TRX Information Parameters
5.1.1.1 TRX ID (TrxId)

Full name TRX ID
Abbreviation TrxId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
TRX number in the cell. According to GSM specifications, one cell can have
64 carriers at most. This parameter is consistent with the TRX ID of SDR
Description base station.
Management Object TRX
1 ~ 60
The following lists the maximum number of TrxIds of each site type.
l OB06: 48
l BS20: 48
l BS21: 48
l BS21V20: 48
l BS30: 48
l BS30V12: 48
l B8112: 54
l M8202: 54
l M8206: 54
l B8018: 54
Value Range
l S8001: 1
5-2

Chapter 5 Cell Object Parameters
l SDR: 60
Unit None
Default value Sort in order.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

Impact on service corresponding TRX will be interrupted immediately.
5.1.1.2 Sub cell ID (SubCellId)

Full name Sub cell ID
Abbreviation SubCellId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
If it is cell with dual frequencies, this parameter describes the subCell of the
dual-frequency cell in which the TRX is; if it is not dual-frequency cell, this
Description parameter is ‘First Subcell’. It is unmodifiable after being created.
l When "Subcell Used (SubCellUsed)" is No, value range is the first sub-
cell;
l When "Subcell Used (SubCellUsed)" is Yes, value range is the first sub-
Value Range cell and the second subcell.
Unit None
Default value First subcell
Change mode Offline

Relevant parameters Subcell used (SubCellUsed)
The value of "Use Subcell or not" has influence on the value range of
Relationship
this parameter.
5-3

5.1.1.3 TRX type (TrxType)

Full name TRX type
Abbreviation TrxType
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Common TRX is suitable for common cell. After adding the function of
supporting extended cell, a third type of TRX is added -- Expand TRX,
realizing large coverage range.
l In common cell, TRX Type shall be configured as Normal TRX;
l When subcell is not supported under extended cell, TRX Type shall be
configured as Extended TRX; when subcell is supported under extended
cell, subcell 1 shall be configured as Extended TRX, and no special
Description requirements for subcell 2.
Value Range Common TRX, Extended TRX
Unit None
Default value Common TRX
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters Channel ID
Relationship This parameter value has influence on the value range of TSC.

5.1.1.4 Priority (TrxPriority)

Full name Assign Priority of the Trx
Abbreviation TrxPriority
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes priorities for allocating carriers of the same type. 1
represents the highest priority. Select channels on carriers with high priority
Description when allocating channels.
Value Range 1~5
5-4

Unit None
l When "BCCH Carrier (BcchMark)" is No, default value is 3;

Default value l When "BCCH Carrier (BcchMark)" is Yes, default value is 1;
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-03-02-002 Enhancement on Channel Allocation
Relevant parameters BCCH carrier frequency (BcchMark)
The value of BCCH carrier frequency (BcchMark) has influence on the

Relationship
default value of this parameter.
5.1.1.5 BCCH carrier frequency (BcchMark)

Full name BCCH carrier frequency
Abbreviation BcchMark
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description One and only one BCCH carrier frequency must be configured in a cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Priority (TrxPriority)
Relevant parameters Support FHS
This parameter's value influences the default value of the "TrxPriority"

Relationship parameter. It also influences the value range of the "Support FHS"
parameter.

5.1.1.6 Static power level (PwRreduction)

Full name Static power level
5-5

Abbreviation PwRreduction
3GPP Name static RF power step
This parameter represents the static power level of transceiver. Usually a

static power control is added on the basis of TRX transmission power spec-
ified by Static power level. Namely, a restriction is added based on the
maximum transmission power, thus to get the actual maximum transmission
power Pn of the TRX. The dynamic power control is implemented based on
Description the maximum transmission power Pn.
Max output power, Max output power - 2 dB, Max output power - 4 dB, Max
output power - 6 dB, Max output power - 8 dB, Max output power - 10 dB,
Max output power - 12 dB, Max output power + 1.5 dB, Max output power +
Value Range 1 dB, Max output power + 0.5 dB
Unit None
Default value Max output power
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-04-02-002 Static BTS Power Control
Relationship None
5.1.1.7 Power level (PowerClass)

Full name Power level
Abbreviation PowerClass
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter can configure the power level of carrier, which can be con-
verted to the actual power value. It is used to calculate path loss and CI
Description value in the measurement report.
Value Range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 3
5-6

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.1.1.8 Support FHS

Full name Support FHS
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name hopping
This parameter indicates if frequency-hopping is supported. When this

parameter is set as 'Base band freqhop', 'BhGroupId' is added to the
interface. When this parameter is set as 'RFID freqhop', 'Frequency'
disappears from the interface and 'FhsId' is added to the interface.
Note: S8001 only has one frequency, and does not support
Description frequency-hopping.
l If "BCCH Carrier (BcchMark)" is No, the value range is No, base band
freq-hopping, and RFID freq-hopping.
l If "BCCH Carrier (BcchMark)" is Yes, the value range is No and base
Value Range band freq-hopping.
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
ZGO-04-03-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping

Relevant Features ZGO-04-03-004 Baseband Frequency Hopping
Relevant parameters BCCH carrier frequency (BcchMark)
The value of BCCH carrier frequency (BcchMark) has influence on the

Relationship
value range of this parameter.

5-7

5.1.1.9 BhGroupId
Full name BhGroupId
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Select the BhGroupId if the frequency hopping mode is baseband

frequency hopping. After multiple TRXs configures the same frequency
Description group id, the frequencies for these TRXs will be added into the frequency
hopping system identified by BhGroupId. In the process of hopping, it
uses the same MA frequency list.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters BhGroupId in frequency hopping system
Select the BhGroupId if the frequency hopping mode is baseband

Relationship
frequency hopping.

Impact on service
corresponding TRX will be interrupted immediately.
5.1.1.10 FhsID
Full name FhsID
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Select the FhsID if the configured frequency hopping mode is RF hopping.

Description This trx uses the MA frequency list configured in frequency hopping
system.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value None
5-8

Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-03-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping
Relevant parameters FhsID in frequency hopping system
Relationship Select the FhsID if the configured frequency hopping mode is RF hopping.

Impact on service
corresponding TRX will be interrupted immediately.
5.1.1.11 Frequency
Full name Frequency
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Select the frequency point of this transceiver.
TCH frequency point can be at a different frequency band from BCCH

frequency point.
l Frequency band (FreqBand) is GSM900: Value range of BCCH trans-
ceiver's frequency point is 1 ~ 124;
l Frequency band (FreqBand) is EXT900: Value range of BCCH trans-
ceiver's frequency point is 0 ~ 124 and 975 ~ 1023;
l Frequency band (FreqBand) is DCS1800: Value range of BCCH trans-
l Frequency band (FreqBand) is PCS1900: Value range of BCCH trans-
l Frequency band (FreqBand) is GSM850: Value range of BCCH trans-
TCH frequency point has nothing to do with Frequency band (FreqBand).
l When TCH transceiver is at GSM900, the value range is 1 ~ 124;
l When TCH transceiver is at EXT900, the value range is 0 ~ 124 and
975 ~ 1023;
l When TCH transceiver is at DCS1800, the value range is 512 ~ 885;
l When TCH transceiver is at PCS1900, the value range is 512 ~ 810;
Value Range l When TCH transceiver is at GSM850, the value range is 128 ~ 251.
Unit None
Default value Based on the set frequency
Change mode Offline
5-9


ARFCN list (CaArfcnList)

Relevant parameters Frequency band (FreqBand)
Based on frequency setting at subsequent BTSs, the system automatically

fills it in the 'ARFCN list' box.
Relationship
The value of the FreqBand parameter influences the value range of this
parameter.

5.1.2 Channel Information Parameters

The channel information interface is shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Channel Information Parameters
5.1.2.1 Channel ID
Full name Channel ID
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-10

Description Number to identify timeslot.
l When "TRX Type (TrxType)" is "Normal TRX", eight timeslot numbers

are displayed on the interface, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
l When "TRX Type (TrxType)" is "Extended TRX", four timeslot numbers
Value Range are displayed on the interface, such as 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Unit None
Default value Same as value range
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters TRX type (TrxType)
The value of the 'TRX type (TrxType)' parameter influences the value range
Relationship
of this parameter.
5.1.2.2 TS Channel Combination

Full name TS Channel Combination
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines combined types of timeslot channel. The correlation

with the following parameters is as follows:
l CBC supported (SmsCbUsed).
If "CBC Supported (SmsCbUsed)" is 'No', that is, CBC is not supported,
the system automatically finds all timeslot channel combinations in the
cell. If CBC channel exists, it is changed to SDCCH.
If "CBC Supported (SmsCbUsed)" is 'Yes', that is, CBC is supported,
the system automatically finds all timeslot channel combinations in
the cell. If a non-BCCH channel is found for a carrier, it is changed
to SDCCH+CBCH.
l Support GPRS (PsSupport)
If "GPRS Supported (PsSupport)" is 'No', that is, GPRS is not
supported, the system automatically changes all timeslot channels
whose type is PS in the cell to TCH.
l Common control channel configuration (CcchConf)
If CcchConf is configured as "CCCH uses one physical channel,
Description combined with SDCCH", then in the channel parameters, channel
5-11

combination of timeslot 0 must be one of the following two

combinations: 'BCCH+SDCCH/4' and 'BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH'.
When CcchConf is configured as "CCCH uses one physical channel,
not combined with SDCCH", then in the channel parameters,
channel combination of timeslot 0 must be one of the following two
combinations: 'FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH' and 'BCCH+CCCH'.
When CcchConf is configured as "CCCH uses two physical channel,
not combined with SDCCH", then in the channel parameters, channel
combination of timeslot 0 and timeslot 2 is one of the following two
When CcchConf is configured as "CCCH uses three physical channel,
not combined with SDCCH", then in the channel parameters, channel
combination of timeslot 0, 2, and 4 is one of the following two
When CcchConf is configured as "CCCH uses four physical channel,
not combined with SDCCH", then in the channel parameters,channel
combination of timeslot 0, 2, 4, and 6 is one of the following two
l TCH/F;
l TCH/H(0,1)+FACCH/H(0,1)+SACCH/TH(0,1);
l SDCCH/8+SACCH/C8;
l FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH;
l BCCH+SDCCH/4;
l BCCH+CCCH;
l BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH;
l SDCCH+CBCH;
l PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH;
l PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH;
Value Range l PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
Unit None
Default value TCH/F
Change mode Offline
ZGO-03-02-008 EDGE on BCCH-TRX Configurable

ZGB-03-02-005 GPRS-only (without voice) Timeslots Configurable
ZGB-03-02-006 Voice-only Timeslots Configurable
Relevant Features ZGB-03-05-003 PBCCH, PPCH, PAGCH, PRACH
Relationship None
5-12


Impact on service corresponding channel will be interrupted immediately.
5.1.2.3 TSC
Full name TSC
Abbreviation TSC
3GPP Name TSC
This parameter represents Training Serial Code (TSC) of the timeslot. There
are eight types of TSC, with low mutual dependency. It is used for reference
of delay compensation for adaptive balance circuit at receiving side. For the
Description timeslot where BCCH is, this parameter must be equal to BCC of the cell.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5.1.2.4 MAIO
Full name MAIO
Abbreviation MAIO
3GPP Name Mobile Allocation Index Offset
5-13

During communication, the carrier number adopted on air interface is an

element of the MA set. Mobile Allocation Index (MAI) (0 ≤ MAI ≤ n-1) is a
variable for determining a definite element in the MA set.
According to the FH algorithm in GSM 05.02 specification, MAI is function
of the following aspects: TDMA Frame Number (FN) or Reduced TDMA
Frame Number (RFN), frequency Hopping Serial Number (HSN), and
Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO). MAIO is an initial offset of MAI and
is used for preventing several channels to contend for the same carrier
at the same moment.
Generally, several basic FH units (timeslot or TDMA frame) constitute an
FH group. They have the same MA and HSN and the only difference
among them is MAIO. Thus the same MA and HSN are put in FHS/MA
table. When the FH group corresponding to the timeslot has no frequency
Description hopping, MAIO of the timeslot is invalid.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline

ZGO-04-03-004 Baseband Frequency Hopping
Relevant Features ZGO-04-03-003 Flexible MAIO Management
Relationship None

5.1.2.5 Dynamic TS
Full name Dynamic TS
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
YES: Representing dynamic timeslot; NO: Representing fixedly configured

Description timeslot.
Management Object TS1 number
Value Range Yes/No
5-14

Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5.1.2.6 Ps Service Preference Property

Full name Ps Service Preference Property
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Indicate whether to do channel packet service preference or the type to do

Description service preference
Value Range No preference, GPRS preference, EDGE preference, EDGE exclusion
Unit None
Default value No preference
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.1.2.7 PDCH Precedence

Full name PDCH Precedence
Abbreviation PDCHPrecedence
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-15

This timeslot is used as PDTCH firstly. It is only configured for dynamic

Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5.1.2.8 TSC
Full name TSC
Abbreviation TSC
3GPP Name training sequence Code
It is training serial code (TSC). TSC value in BCCH channel shall be same
Description as BCC value.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-16

5.1.2.9 PDCH
Full name PDCH
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It is same as the property of "PDCH Priority" parameter. It is a shortcut

Description method, uniformly configuring 8 timeslots simultaneously for the carrier.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.1.2.10 PS service preference

Full name PS service preference
Abbreviation PDCHPrecedence
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if the channel prefers to be PS channel. It is only valid for dynamic

No preference, GPRS preference, EDGE preference, EDGE dedicated, EG-

Value Range PRRS2-A preference, and EGPRRS2-A dedicated.
Unit None
Default value No preference
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-17

5.1.2.11 Dynamic TS
Full name Dynamic TS
Abbreviation Changeable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if TCH can be dynamically allocated to CS or PS.
Management
Object TRX
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
5.1.3 IP Parameters
IP parameter interface is as shown in Figure 5-3.
5-18

Figure 5-3 IP Parameters
5.1.3.1 BIPB Unit

Full name BIPB Unit
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It is corresponding with the board position in physical configuration
Value Range Depends on the actual configuration of BIPB unit.
Unit None
Default value Depends on the actual configuration.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5-19

5.1.3.2 DSP Sunit

Full name DSP Sunit
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It corresponds to the DSP supporting IP in BIPB board configured by physical

Description mode.
Value Range Determined by user configured DSP quantity
Unit None
Default value Minimum DSP number configured by user
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5.1.3.3 DspMarkSeq
Full name DspMarkSeq
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Mark sequence of carrier on DSP, DSP channel number will be calculated

based on this mark by service. For VTCD board, each DSP can mark (con-
figure) 16 carriers at most; for VTCD/2 board, it can be configured with 28
Description carriers.
Management Object None
Value Range 0 ~ 15; 0 ~ 27
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-20

Relationship None

5.1.3.4 Port No.

Full name Port No.
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
IP access. Port number shall be allocated for each carrier, and the number
Description will be determined by the port actually configured.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5.1.4 Panel Parameters

The panel parameter interface is shown in Figure 5-4.
5-21

Figure 5-4 Panel Parameters
5.1.4.1 TRX mode

Full name TRX mode
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It sets the working mode of carrier to be single carrier or dual carriers, and de-
termines whether to use 4-way diversity in uplink and whether to use DPCT
Description or DDT in downlink.
Management Object BTS rack
l Dual carrier
l Single carrier with 4-ways diversity reception
l Single carrier with 4-ways diversity reception and DPCT
l Single carrier with 4-ways diversity reception and DDT
Value Range l Single carrier
Unit None
Default value Dual carrier
Change mode Offline
5-22

Support antenna hop

Relevant parameters Delay count
The 'Support antenna hop' parameter is enabled only when this parameter
is set to be 'Dual carrier'.
Relationship
The 'Delay count' parameter is enabled only when this parameter is set to
be 'Single carrier with 4-ways diversity reception and DDT'.
5.1.4.2 Delay count

Full name Delay count
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It defines the symbol used on delayed transmitting.
Value Range 1 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters TRX mode
This parameter is valid when the 'TRX mode' parameter is 'Single carrier
Relationship
with 4-ways diversity reception and DDT'.
5.1.4.3 IRC
Full name IRC
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-23

It determines whether to use IRC.

l Not checked: Do not use IRC
Description l Checked: Use IRC
Value Range Not checked, checked
Unit None
Default value Not checked
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.1.4.4 Support antenna hop

Full name Support antenna hop
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes whether antenna hop is supported.

l No: indicates antenna hop is not supported;
Description l Yes: indicates antenna hop is supported;
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters TRX mode
Relationship This parameter is valid when the 'TRX mode' parameter is 'Dual carrier'.
5-24

5.2 Power Control Parameters

There are four tab-interfaces for basic power control parameters. If the cell supports
GPRS, a GPRS Power Control tab is also displayed.
5.2.1 Power Control Parameters

The interface of power control parameters is shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Power Control Parameters
5.2.1.1 Uplink rapid power control indication (UlRapidPcInd)

Full name Uplink rapid power control indication
Abbreviation UlRapidPcInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-25

This parameter determines the availability of the rapid power control

process. Rapid power control process is an optional process of BSC. It
reduces the interference of the whole BSS radio system and satisfies the
dynamic power control requirement for rapid moving MS.
The amplitude of power control used by rapid power control process each
time is no longer a fixed value, but an integer multiple of cell parameter
power control step (increase and decrease). This parameter determines
Description the availability of the rapid power control process.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-02-002 Dynamic MS Power Control
Relationship None
5.2.1.2 Downlink rapid power control indication (DlRapidPcInd)

Full name Downlink rapid power control indication
Abbreviation DlRapidPcInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the availability of the rapid power control

process. Rapid power control process is an optional process of BSC. It
reduces the interference of the whole BSS radio system and satisfies the
dynamic power control requirement for rapid moving MS.
The amplitude of power control used by rapid power control process each
time is no longer a fixed value, but an integer multiple of cell parameter
power control step (increase and decrease). This parameter determines
Description the availability of the rapid power control process.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
5-26

Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-02-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control
Relationship None
5.2.1.3 Power Control PwrDesrLimit

Full name Power Control PwrDesrLimit
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is set for preventing MS from call drop due to fast power
control. It corresponds to different quality level. For example, PwrDecrLimit
[0] determines the maximum power decrease limit for calls with receiving
quality level 0 (Bit Error rate (BER) <0.2%). This parameter is valid for
both uplink and downlink.
This parameter is an array of eight elements, with element length of one
byte. PwrDecrLimit [n] determines the maximum power decrease limit
available for calls with quality level n. The value range of each element
Description is 0 ~ 38 dB.
Value Range 0 ~ 38
Unit None
Default value [24, 22, 20, 18, 16, 14, 12, 10]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2 Power Survey Parameters

The interface of power survey parameters is shown in Figure 5-6.
5-27

Figure 5-6 Power Survey Parameters
5.2.2.1 Report period of measurement for power control (PwrCtrlReportPrd)

Full name Report period of measurement for power control
Abbreviation PwrCtrlReportPrd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Power control is performed at BTS side and BSC implements relevant perfor-
mance statistics. BTS uses this parameter to decide the periodicity to send
the preprocessed power measurement to BSC as an input for power control
Description analysis. This parameter is in the unit of SACCH multi-frame.
Value Range 1 ~ 254
Default value 240
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2.2 Uplink level Sample count (PcUlLevWindow)

Full name Uplink power level
5-28

Abbreviation PcUlLevWindow
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In GSM system, BSC determines whether to perform power control

according to measurement data. BSC uses the average value of
measurement data to avoid adverse influences caused by abrupt changes
in measurement data due to complex radio transmission.
BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average value
of uplink signal strength, i.e. to calculate the average value of the number
Description of used samples.
Value Range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2.3 Uplink level Weight (PcUlLevWeight)

Full name Uplink level Weight
Abbreviation PcUlLevWeight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Speech data is unavailable for silent period during conversation. GSM

specifications recommend Discontinuous Transmission Mode (DTX) to
control optimal usage of network resources during such silent periods.
In the DTX mode, the measurement data reported to BSC fall into two
types. One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a
measurement period in the non-DTX mode, and the other is the average
of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement
period in the DTX mode. BSC needs to optionally select one type of
measurement data and use the data to calculate the average value.
The first type of measurement data is more accurate since it is the
Description average value of measurement results of all timeslots. The second type
5-29

of measurement data is less accurate since it is the average value of

measurement results of some timeslots. Thus BSC should use different
weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results.
This parameter determines the weight for the first type of measurement
data when averaging uplink signal strength for power control. Weight for
the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Value Range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2.4 Downlink level Sample count (PcDlLevWindow)

Full name Downlink power level
Abbreviation PcDlLevWindow
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average
value of downlink signal strength, i.e. to calculate the average value of the
Description number of used samples.
Value Range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
5-30

Relationship None
5.2.2.5 Downlink level Weight (PcDlLevWeight)

Full name Downlink level Weight
Abbreviation PcDlLevWeight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description: According to GSM Specifications, discontinuous transmission

(DTX) refers to the process in which the system does not transmit signals in
the voice intermittent period during the subscriber communication process.
average value of measurement results of all timeslots. The second type
data when averaging downlink signal strength for power control. Weight for
Description the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Value Range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-31

5.2.2.6 Uplink quality Sample count (PcUlQualWindow)

Full name Uplink quality level
Abbreviation PcUlQualWindow
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average value
of uplink signal quality, i.e. to calculate the average value of the number
Description of used samples.
Value Range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2.7 Uplink quality Weight (PcUlQualWeight)

Full name Uplink quality Weight
Abbreviation PcUlQualWeight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-32


data when averaging uplink signal quality for power control. Weight for the
Description second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Value Range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2.8 Downlink quality Sample Count (PcDlQualWindow)

Full name Downlink quality level
Abbreviation PcDlQualWindow
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-33


BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average
value of downlink signal quality, i.e. to calculate the average value of the
Description number of used samples.
Value Range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2.9 Downlink quality Weight (PcDlQualWeight)

Full name Downlink quality Weight
Abbreviation PcDlQualWeight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Description weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results.
5-34

data when averaging downlink signal quality for power control. Weight for
the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Value Range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.3 Power Adjustment Threshold Parameters

The interface of power adjustment threshold parameters is shown in Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7 Power Adjustment Threshold Parameters
5.2.3.1 Increase uplink level Threshold (PcULInclLevThsThs), Value P

(PcULInclLevThsP), and Value N (PcULInclLevThsN)
Full name Increase uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcULInclLevThsThs/PcULInclLevThsP/PcULInclLevThsN
3GPP Name None
5-35

According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon re-

ceived average value series of uplink signal strength. The decision process
is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink signal strength, if P of
the N values fall below relevant threshold value, increase MS (uplink) trans-
Description mission power to improve the uplink signal strength.
Increase uplink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Value Range Threshold: 0 ~ 63; Value P: 1 ~31; Value N: 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value [22, 3, 4]
Change mode Offline
ZGO-04-02-002 Dynamic MS Power Control

Relationship None
5.2.3.2 Increase downlink level Threshold (PcDLInclLevThsThs), Value P

(PcDLInclLevThsP), and Value N (PcDLInclLevThsN)
Full name Increase downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcDLInclLevThsThs/PcDLInclLevThsP/PcDLInclLevThsN
3GPP Name None
According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon

received average value series of uplink signal strength.
The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of
downlink signal strength, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold
value, increase BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink
Description signal quality.
Increase downlink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
5-36

Unit None
Change mode Offline
ZGO-04-02-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control

Relationship None
5.2.3.3 Decrease uplink level Threshold (PcULRedLevThsThs), Value P

(PcULRedLevThsP), and Value N (PcULRedLevThsN)
Full name Decrease uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcULRedLevThsThs/PcULRedLevThsP/PcULRedLevThsN
3GPP Name None

uplink signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold
value, reduce MS (uplink) transmission power to improve the uplink signal
Description strength.
Decrease uplink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5-37

5.2.3.4 Decrease downlink level Threshold (PcDLRedLevThsThs), Value P

(PcDLRedLevThsP), and Value N (PcDLRedLevThsN)
Full name Decrease downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcDLRedLevThsThs/PcDLRedLevThsP/PcDLRedLevThsN
3GPP Name None

downlink signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold
value, reduce BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink
Description signal strength.
Decrease downlink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.2.3.5 Increase uplink quality Threshold (PcULInclQualThsThs), Value P

(PcULInclQualThsP), and Value N (PcULInclQualThsN)
Full name Increase uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcULInclQualThsThs/PcULInclQualThsP/PcULInclQualThsN
3GPP Name None
5-38


uplink signal quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold
value, increase MS (uplink) transmission power to improve the uplink signal
Description quality.
Increase uplink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.2.3.6 Increase downlink quality Threshold (PcDLInclQualThsThs), Value P

(PcDLInclQualThsP), and Value N (PcDLInclQualThsN)
Full name Increase downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcDLInclQualThsThs/PcDLInclQualThsP/PcDLInclQualThsN
3GPP Name None

downlink signal quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold
value, increase BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink
Increase downlink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR
FR, and AMR HR.
Unit None
5-39

Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.2.3.7 Decrease uplink quality Threshold (PcULRedQualThsThs), Value P

(PcULRedQualThsP), and Value N (PcULRedQualThsN)
Full name Decrease uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcULRedQualThsThs/PcULRedQualThsP/PcULRedQualThsN
3GPP Name None

uplink signal quality, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold value,
Description reduce MS (uplink) transmission power to improve the uplink signal quality.
Decrease uplink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5-40

5.2.3.8 Decrease downlink quality Threshold (PcDLRedQualThsThs), Value P

(PcDLRedQualThsP), and Value N (PcDLRedQualThsN)
Full name Decrease downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcDLRedQualThsThs/PcDLRedQualThsP/PcDLRedQualThsN
3GPP Name None

downlink signal quality, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold
value, reduce BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink
Decrease downlink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR
FR, and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.2.4 Other Parameters

The interface of the other parameters is shown in Figure 5-8.
5-41

5.2.4.1 Power increasing step (PwrIncStep, db)

Full name Power increasing step
Abbreviation PwrIncStep_0 ~ PwrIncStep_3
3GPP Name Pow_Incr_Step
It describes increase step, the value of each power control variation. It ap-
Description plies to both uplink and downlink directions.
Power increase step can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Value Range Value range is 2, 4, and 6.
Unit dB
It can be divided into four types: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. The default
Default value value is 2.
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5-42

5.2.4.2 Power decreasing step (PwrRedStep, db)

Full name Power decreasing step
Abbreviation PwrRedStep_0 ~ PwrRedStep_3
3GPP Name Pow_Red_Step
It describes decrease step, the value of each power control variation. It ap-
Description plies to both uplink and downlink directions.
Power decrease step can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Value Range Value range is 2 and 4.
Unit dB
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.2.4.3 Uplink power control allowed (PwrControlUl)

Full name Uplink power control
Abbreviation PwrControlUl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines to enable or disable MS uplink power control in

Description the cell. This power control is only effective to TCH/F.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
5-43


Relationship None
5.2.4.4 Downlink power control allowed (PwrControlDl)

Full name Downlink power control
Abbreviation PwrControlDl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines whether to enable or disable BTS downlink power

Description control in the cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Relevant parameters Cell enable power dynamic sharing or not (PwrDynShare)
Relationship If it is SDR BTS and this parameter is set to Yes, you can set PwrDynShare.
5.2.4.5 MAX power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax)

Full name MAX power level of MS
Abbreviation MsTxPwrMax_0 ~ MsTxPwrMax_3
3GPP Name MS_TXPWR_MAX
5-44


MS sets the specified output transmission power according to the power
control header extracted from the SACCH. MS uses the nearest possible
output power even if the power command sends maximum output power.
During BSC power control, this parameter determines the maximum
transmission power available for MS in the cell. BSC also uses it to
calculate PBGT value.
Description The value is same as that in the appendix.
MAX power level of MS can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Value Range Value range is 0 ~ 31.
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.2.4.6 MIN power level of MS (MsTxPwrMin)

Full name MIN power level of MS
Abbreviation MsTxPwrMin_0 ~ MsTxPwrMin_3
3GPP Name None
5-45


During BSC power control, this parameter determines the minimum
transmission power (that is, lower limit of power control) available for MS in
the cell.
MIN power level of MS can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.2.4.7 MIN power level of BS (BxTxPwrMin)

Full name Min Power level of BS
Abbreviation BsTxPwrMin_0 ~ BsTxPwrMin_3
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter controls the transmission power during communication be-

tween MS and BTS. SACCH carries the command with 2 header bytes in-
formation (power control byte and timing advance byte) from BSC to BTS.
When BSC performs power control, this parameter determines the BTS's
Description minimum transmission power in the cell.
5-46

MIN power level of BS can be divided into four types: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Value range is 0 ~ 15
The maximum power level of BTS is Pn, then,
l 0: Pn
l 1: Pn-2 dB;
……
Value Range l 15: Pn-30 dB
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.2.4.8 MIN interval of power control (PcMinlnterval)

Full name MIN interval of power control
Abbreviation PcMinInterval_0 ~ PcMinInterval_3
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter specifies the minimum interval of power control. Usually, MS

still sends two measurement reports with the original power to BSC after en-
abling the power control. Signal level information contained in the reports is
inaccurate and can be ignored (information such as adjacent cell information
is still valid). Thus a minimum interval of power control is needed and signal
Description level information during the interval can be ignored.
MIN interval of power control can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR
FR, and AMR HR.
5-47

Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.2.5 GPRS Power Control Parameters

The interface of GPRS power control parameters is shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 GPRS Power Control Parameters
5.2.5.1 Expected signal intensity of MS (SS_BTS)

Full name Expected signal intensity of MS
Abbreviation SS_BTS
3GPP Name SSb
5-48

This parameter is used to control open loop uplink power control. During the
uplink open-link power control, MS uses the GCH parameter in calculating
transmission power, which is based on the following formula:
GCH = G0 -PBTS -SSb -48
Description This parameter decides the SSb parameter.
0 ~ 63
l 0: -110 dBm
l 1: -109 dBm
......
Value Range l 63 -47 dBm
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.5.2 Uplink power control strategy (UlPwCtrl)

Full name Uplink power control strategy
Abbreviation UlPwCtrl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines GPRS uplink power control strategy, including

the following four modes: No control, Open-loop control, Close-loop control,
Description Control based on quality.
Value Range No control, Open-loop control, Close-loop control, Control based on quality
Unit None
Default value Non-control
Change mode Offline
5-49

Relationship None
5.2.5.3 Downlink power control strategy (DlPwCtrl)

Full name Downlink Power Control policy
Abbreviation DlPwCtrl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines GPRS downlink power control strategy, including

the following four modes: No control, Open-loop control, Close-loop control,
Description Control based on quality.
Value Range No control, Open-loop control, Close-loop control, Control based on quality
Unit None
Default value Non control
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.5.4 Downlink power control mode (PwCtrlMode)

Full name Downlink Power Control Mode
Abbreviation PwCtrlMode
3GPP Name BTS_PWR_CTRL_MODE
This parameter determines the BTS downlink power control mode. BTS has
two power control modes: A and B. Mode A may be used for any allocation
Description mode, while mode B can only be used for the fixed allocation mode.
Value Range A, B
5-50

Unit None
Default value A
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.5.5 Power control level (PwCtrlLev)

Full name Power Control Level
Abbreviation PwCtrlLev
3GPP Name Power control level
This parameter determines GPRS power control precision, which describes

nominal output power and power control precision (dB) sent by MS under
Description each power control level.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.5.6 Power descending of PDCH to BCCH in A mode (P0, 2db)

Full name Power descending of PDCH to BCCH in A mode
Abbreviation P0
3GPP Name P0
5-51

This parameter is an optional downlink power control parameter contained

in assignment message. If P0 exists, power control is used. Otherwise, it is
not used. The value of Power descending of PDCH to BCCH in a mode can
not be modified in packet transmission mode unless re-assignment or new
assignment is established and such an assignment does not contain PDCH
Description of any previous assignment.
0 ~ 15
l 0: P0=0 dB
l 1: P0=2 dB;
......
Value Range l 15: P0=30 dB.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3 Handover Control Parameters

There are seven sub-interfaces for handover control parameters.
5.3.1 Handover Pretreatment Parameters

The interface of handover pretreatment parameters is shown in Figure 5-10.
5-52

Figure 5-10 Handover Pretreatment Parameters
5.3.1.1 Number of zero allowed in AV (ZeroAllowed)

Full name Number of zero allowed in AV
Abbreviation ZeroAllowed
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, MS can report to BSS the measurement

data of at most six adjacent cells with strongest signal strength. Thus the
measurement results might not be consecutive. For cells whose signal
strength is less than -110 dBm, the measurement data are not reported.
To avoid the negative impact of 0 on averaging, suppose occasional 0
is allowed and is not used in averaging, but excessive occurrences of 0
indicate that the signals of this adjacent cell are too poor.
If the number of zeroes in used for average calculation exceeds Number of
zero allowed in AV, then measurement average equals to sum of reported
values divided by Neighboring cell .
To be specific, during averaging, if the count of 0s in the sampling count
exceeds “ZeroAllowed”, these sampling values are hardly reliable, and
the measurement average will be the sum of the reported values divided
by NCellWindow. If the count of 0s in the reported values does not
Description exceed “ZeroAllowed”, these sampling values are much reliable and the
5-53

measurement average will be the sum of the reported values divided by

(NCellWindow - the count of 0s).
Value Range 0 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.2 Uplink power level Sample count (HoUlLevWindow)

Full name Uplink power level
Abbreviation HoUlLevWindow
3GPP Name N1..N8,P1..P8
In the GSM system, BSC makes handover decision according to the

measurement data. To avoid the negative impact of burst measurement
values resulting from complicated radio transmission, BSC, when making
handover decision, no longer uses the original measurement data but uses
a series of average values of the measurement data.
This parameter is the window size (number of sample values) used to
Description calculate average value of uplink signal intensity.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-54

5.3.1.3 Uplink power level Weight (HoUlLevWeight)

Full name Uplink level Weight
Abbreviation HoUlLevWeight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

data when averaging uplink signal strength for handover. Weight for the
Value Range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.4 Downlink power level Sample count (HoDlLevWindow)

Full name Downlink power level
Abbreviation HoDlLevWindow
5-55


This parameter represents the window size (i.e. the number of sample
Description values) used to calculate the average value of downlink signal intensity.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.5 Downlink power level Weight (HoDlLevWeight)

Full name Downlink level Weight
Abbreviation HoDlLevWeight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Description weights for the two types of data when averaging the measurement results.
5-56

data when averaging downlink signal strength for handover. Weight for the
second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Value Range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.6 Uplink quality Sample count (HoUlQualWindow)

Full name Uplink quality level
Abbreviation HoUlQualWindow

This parameter represents the window size (number of sample values)
Description used to calculate average value of uplink signal quality.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-57

5.3.1.7 Uplink quality Weight (HoUlQualWeight)

Full name Uplink quality Weight
Abbreviation HoUlQualWeight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

data when averaging uplink signal quality for handover. Weight for the
Value Range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-58

5.3.1.8 Downlink quality Sample count (HoDlQualWindow)

Full name Downlink quality level
Abbreviation HoDlQualWindow

This parameter represents the window size (i.e. the number of sample
Description values) used to calculate the average value of downlink signal quality.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.9 Downlink quality Weight (HoDlQualWeight)

Full name Downlink quality Weight
Abbreviation HoDlQualWeight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-59


data when averaging downlink signal quality for handover. Weight for the
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.10 Distance (DistanceWindow)

Full name Distance
Abbreviation DistanceWindow
3GPP Name None
5-60


used to calculate average value of distance (timing advance) between
Description MS and BTS.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.11 Neighboring cell (NCellWindow)

Full name Neighboring cell
Abbreviation NCellWindow
3GPP Name None

Description used to calculate average value of signal intensity for adjacent cells.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
5-61

Relationship None
5.3.2 Handover Threshold Parameters

The interface of handover threshold parameters is shown in Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Handover Threshold Parameters
5.3.2.1 Uplink receive level Threshold (HoUlLevThs), Value N (HoUlLevN), Value P

(HoUlLevP)
Full name Uplink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation HoUlLevThs / HoUlLevN / HoUlLevP
3GPP Name None
5-62

According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon

received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength.
uplink signal strength, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold
value, perform handover to improve the uplink signal strength.
Parameter "HoUlLevThs" defines the related threshold, parameter
"HoUlLevN" defines the related N value, and parameter “HoUlLevP” defines
the related P value. If this handover condition is met, an internal handover
is usually performed in the cell.
Usually the value of "HoUlLevThs" shall be less than the threshold for
uplink power control (increase). That is, perform power control first. If
Description power control does not work, perform handover.
Threshold: 0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm
l 63: > -48 dBm
Value N: 1 ~ 20
Value Range Value P: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline
ZGB-02-02-001 Basic Handover

Relevant Features ZGB-02-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria
Relationship None
5.3.2.2 Downlink receive level Threshold (HoDlLevThs), Value N (HoDlLevN), Value P

(HoDlLevP)
Full name Downlink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation HoDlLevThs / HoDlLevN / HoDlLevP
3GPP Name None
5-63


received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The decision
process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal
strength, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold value, perform
handover to improve the downlink signal strength.
Parameter “HoDlLevThs” defines the related threshold, parameter
“HoDlLevN” defines the related N value, and parameter “HoDlLevP” defines
the related P value.
Usually the value of "HoDlLevThs" shall be less than the threshold for
downlink power control (increase). That is, perform power control first. If
power control does not work, perform handover. This parameter can be set
to 15 by default (i.e. -96 dBm ~ -95 dBm), which is 3 dB larger than the
Description minimum access level value (RxLevAccessMin) of the cell.
Threshold: 0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
l 63: > -48 dBm
Value N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.2.3 Uplink receive quality Threshold (HoUlQualThs), Value N (HoUlQualN), Value P

(HoUlQualP)
Full name Uplink receive quality Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation HoUlQualThs / HoUlQualN / HoUlQualP
3GPP Name None
5-64


process is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink signal
quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, perform
handover to improve the uplink signal quality.
Parameter “HoUlQualThs” defines the related threshold, parameter
“HoUlQualN” defines the related N value, and parameter “HoUlQualP”
defines the related P value.
Usually the value of "HoUlQualThs" shall be greater than the threshold
for uplink power control (increase). That is, perform power control first. If
Description power control does not work, perform handover.
Threshold: 0 ~ 7
l 0: BER<0.2%
l 1: 0.2%<BER<0.4%
......
l 6: 6.4%<BER<12.8%
l 7: 12.8%<BER
Value N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.2.4 Downlink receive quality Threshold (HoDlQualThs), Value N (HoDlQualN),

Value P (HoDlQualP)
Full name Downlink receive quality Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation HoDlQualThs / HoDlQualN / HoDlQualP
3GPP Name None
5-65


process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal
quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, perform
handover to improve the downlink signal quality.
Parameter “HoDlQualThs” defines the related threshold, parameter
“HoDlQualN” defines the related N value, and parameter “HoDlQualP”
defines the related P value.
In general, the Downlink receive quality Threshold shall be larger than
downlink power control (increase) threshold, i.e. perform power control
Description first, then perform handover if power control fails.
Threshold: 0 ~ 7
l 0: BER<0.2%
l 1: 0.2%<BER<0.4%
......
l 6: 6.4%<BER<12.8%
l 7: 12.8%<BER
Value N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.2.5 Uplink receive level of intra-ho Value N (IntraHoUlLevN) / Value P

(IntraHoUlLevP)
Full name Uplink receive level of intra-ho Value N / Value P
Abbreviation IntraHoUlLevN / IntraHoUlLevP
3GPP Name None
5-66


received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The
decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink
signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value,
then perform handover. The handover is due to strong uplink co-frequency
interference.
Parameter "IntraHoUlLevThs" defines the related threshold, parameter
"IntraHoUlLevN" defines the related N value, and parameter
"IntraHoUlLevP" defines the related P value. If this handover condition is
met, an internal handover is usually performed in the cell.
Usually the value of "IntraHoUlLevThs" shall be more than the threshold
Description for uplink power control (decrease).
Value N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value [3, 2]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.2.6 Downlink receive level of intra-ho Value N (IntraHoDlLevN) / Value P

(IntraHoDlLevP)
Full name Downlink receive level of intra-ho Value N / Value P
Abbreviation IntraHoDlLevN / IntraHoDlLevP
3GPP Name None
5-67


downlink signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold
value, then perform handover. The handover is due to strong downlink
co-frequency interference.
Parameter "IntraHoDlLevThs" defines the related threshold, parameter
"IntraHoDlLevN" defines the related N value, and parameter
"IntraHoDlLevP" defines the related P value. If this handover condition is
met, an internal handover is usually performed in the cell.
Usually the value of "IntraHoDlLevThs" shall be less than (or equal to) the
Description threshold for downlink power control (decrease).
Value N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.2.7 Good C/I Threshold (GoodCiThs), Value N (GoodCiN), Value P (GoodCiP)

Full name Good C/I Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation GoodCiThs / GoodCiN / GoodCiP
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-68

If system adopts concentric technology, then handover decisions also

depend upon good Carrier to Interference ratio (C/I) of special layer TRX
frequency.
The decision process is as follows: If the paging is on common layer
TRX frequency and P of the latest N C/I values raise above the good C/I
threshold, then perform handover from common layer TRX frequency to
special layer TRX frequency.
Parameter "GoodCiThs" defines the related threshold, parameter
"GoodCiN" defines the related N value, and parameter “GoodCiP” defines
Description the related P value.
Threshold: 0 ~ 255
l 0: < -127 dB
l 1: > -126 dB
......
l 255: 128 dB
Value N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.2.8 Bad C/I Threshold (BadCiThs), Value N (BadCiN), Value P (BadCiP)

Full name Bad C/I Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation BadCiThs / BadCiN / BadCiP
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-69

If system adopts concentric technology, then handover decisions also

depend upon good Carrier to Interference ratio (C/I) of special layer TRX
frequency.
The decision process is as follows: If the paging is on special layer TRX
frequency and P of the latest N C/I values fall below the bad C/I threshold,
then perform handover from special layer TRX frequency to common layer
TRX frequency.
Parameter "BadCiThs" defines the related threshold, parameter "BadCiN"
defines the related N value, and parameter "BadCiP" defines the related
Description P value.
Threshold: 0 ~ 255
l 0: < -127 dB
l 1: > -126 dB
......
l 255: 128 dB
Value N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.2.9 Rapid handover Threshold (RapidHoThs) / Value N (RapidHoN)

Full name Rapid handover Threshold / Value N
Abbreviation RapidHoThs / RapidHoN
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-70

During fast fading handover, some parameters shall be used. If the

measured signal intensity of a call is less than rapid handover threshold,
then it triggers handover of existing cell to most probable candidate cell.
RapidHoN counter defines the minimum times for which the measured
signal intensity of a call is less than the threshold.
"RapidHoThs" may be set as 15 (that is, -96dBm ~ -95dBm) by default, the
same as the level threshold of ordinary handover. Parameter "RapidHoN"
should be set to ensure that rapid handover is faster than the ordinary
Description signal level handover.
Threshold: 0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm
l 63: > -48 dBm
Value Range Value N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-02-02-001 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells
Relationship None
5.3.2.10 Distance handover Value N (DistanceN) / Value P (DistanceP)

Full name Distance handover Value N/Value P
Abbreviation DistanceN / DistanceP
5-71


TA (distance), if P of the N values rises above relevant threshold value,
then perform handover. The handover is due to MS being out of the cell
service range.
Parameter "DistanceN" defines the relevant N value, and parameter
Description "DistanceP" defines the relevant P value.
Value N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.2.11 PBGT handover Value N (PBGTHoN) / Value P (PBGTHoP)

Full name PBGT handover Value N/Value P
Abbreviation PBGTHoN / PBGTHoP
Value_N and Value_P in PBGT handover. In PBGT handover, if there are P

values of PBGT in N PBGT satisfying the handover determination condition,
Description the PBGT handover conditions are satisfied.
Value N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline
5-72


Relationship None
5.3.3 Handover Condition Parameters

The interface of handover condition parameters is shown in Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12 Handover Condition Parameters
5.3.3.1 Max time advance threshold between MS and BTS (DistanceThs)

Full name Max time advance threshold between MS and BTS
Abbreviation DistanceThs
3GPP Name None
5-73


TA (distance), if P of the N values rises above relevant threshold value,
then perform handover. The handover is due to MS being out of the cell
Description service range.
Value Range Common cell: 0 ~ 63; Extended cell: 0 ~ 219
Unit None
Default value 63
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.3.2 MIN interval between inter-cell handover (HoMinInterval, s)

Full name MIN interval between inter-cell handover
Abbreviation HoMinInterval
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter specifies the interval value for which MS waits before the
actual inter-cell handover occurs. Such a timer is more predominant for MS
at the boundary regions between two cells, where inter-cell handovers
occur frequently. This parameter helps restrict frequent inter-cell handover
and guarantees call quality.
Inter-cell handover takes place when the timer exceeds the defined interval
value from the last inter-cell handover of MS. This parameter affects only
the inter-cell handover, but not common intra-cell or inter-cell concentric
handover. In addition, micro-cell has its own handover policy, so this
parameter is only effective for macro-cell layer and its above layer.
For macro-cell, the default value can be 5; for micro-cell, the default value
Description can only be 0.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
5-74

Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.3 Handover back penalty (HoBackPenalty)

Full name Handover back penalty
Abbreviation HoBackPenalty
3GPP Name No
3GPP reference No
This parameter describes the time limit for handover back to the original
cell. In other words, after handover is performed from cell A to cell B, it is
Description not allowed to perform handover from cell B back to cell A within the time
limit.
This parameter is supported from V6.20.21.
Value Range 0 ~ 60
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.4 Prior layer selecting parameter on signal level/quality (LayerPriority)

Full name Prior layer selecting parameter on signal level/quality
Abbreviation LayerPriority
5-75

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides the priority to select and sequence the candidate
cells for handover. Received signal level and signal quality decides the
candidate cells for handover. Three options are available:
l First hand over to adjacent cells at the upper layer of the local cell, then
to those at the same layer, and finally to other adjacent cells;
l First hand over to adjacent cells at the same layer of the local cell, then
to those at the upper layer, and finally to other adjacent cells;
l All adjacent cells are treated in the same way.
This parameter determines to select one of above three methods. During
handover control process, this parameter has higher priority than normal
adjacent cells.
Value range:
l 1 (UPPER_LAYER): adjacent cell at above layer first, same layer
next,other adjacent cells finally;
l 2 (SAME_LAYER): adjacent cell at same layer first, above layer next,
other adjacent cells finally;
l 3 (SAME_LAYER): All adjacent cells are treated in the same way.
Description Note: In general, micro cell adopts option 1 Macro cell adopts option 2.
Value Range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.5 Handover to same layer other band neighbor cell for PBGT permitted
(PbgtHoLayer_0)
Full name Handover to same layer other band neighbor cell for PBGT permitted
Abbreviation PbgtHoLayer_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-76

This parameter describes if Handover to same layer other band neighbor

Description
cell for PBGT is permitted.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.6 Handover to neighbor cell with no layer relation for PBGT permitted
(PbgtHoLayer_1)
Full name Handover to neighbor cell with no layer relation for PBGT permitted
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes if Handover to neighbor cell with no layer relation

Description
for PBGT is permitted.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-77

5.3.3.7 Handover to upper layer neighbor cell for PBGT permitted (PbgtHoLayer_2)
Full name Handover to upper layer neighbor cell for PBGT permitted
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes if handover to upper layer neighbor cell for PBGT
Description
is allowed.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.8 Handover to under layer neighbor cell for PBGT permitted (PbgtHoLayer_3)
Full name Handover to under layer neighbor cell for PBGT permitted
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes if handover to under layer neighbor cell for PBGT
Description
is allowed.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-78

5.3.3.9 Synchronism (HoPatternInd_0)

Full name Synchronism (HoPatternInd_0)
Abbreviation HoPatternInd_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description TA of the destination cell is same as that of the source cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-02-02-003 Handover Mode
Relationship None
5.3.3.10 Asynchronism (HoPatternInd_1)

Full name Asynchronism (HoPatternInd_1)
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description TA of the destination cell is unknown.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
5-79

Relationship None
5.3.3.11 Pseudo-synchronization (HoPatternInd_2)

Full name Pseudo-synchronism (HoPatternInd_2)
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description MS is able to calculate TA of the destination cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.12 Pre-synchronism (HoPatternInd_3)

Full name Pre-synchronism (HoPatternInd_3)
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines the TA available for BSC.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
5-80

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.13 Downlink rapid handover threshold (DLRapidHoThs)

Full name Downlink rapid handover threshold
Abbreviation DLRapidHoThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
After getting a series of measurement reports, you can do the decisions for
downlink rapid handover.
The downlink rapid moving is one reason to cause handover. The decision
Description process is as follows: do the handover if the latest downlink level values
(without average processing) is higher than the sum of relevant threshold
values and offset values. The handover reason is downlink rapid handover.
DLRapidHoThs defines the threshold value.
Management
Object Cell
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
5.3.3.14 Downlink rapid handover N (DLRapidHoN)

Full name Downlink rapid handover N
5-81

Abbreviation DLRapidHoN
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description process is as follows: do the handover if the latest downlink level values
DLRapidHoN defines the value N.
Management
Object Cell
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
5.3.3.15 Downlink rapid handover offset of high speed (DLRapidHoOffset_0)

Full name Downlink rapid handover offset of high speed (DLRapidHoOffset_0)
Abbreviation DLRapidHoOffset_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
process is as follows: do the handover if the latest downlink level values
Description
DLRapidHoOffset_0 defines the offset threshold value for downlink rapid
handover if the train speed is higher than 250km/hr.
5-82

Management
Object Cell
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
5.3.3.16 Downlink rapid handover offset of middle speed (DLRapidHoOffset_1)

Full name Downlink rapid handover offset of middle speed
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description
handover if the train speed is 150 ~ 250 km/hr.
Management
Object Cell
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
5-83

5.3.3.17 Downlink rapid handover offset of low speed (DLRapidHoOffset_2)

Full name Downlink rapid handover offset of low speed
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description
handover if the train speed is lower than 150km/hr.
Management
Object Cell
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
5.3.3.18 Downlink rapid handover enable (HoControl_23)

Full name Downlink rapid handover enable
Abbreviation HoControl_23
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-84

Description This parameter determines if downlink rapid handover is allowed.
Management
Object Cell
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
5.3.4 Handover Control Parameters

The interface of handover control parameters is shown in Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13 Handover Control Parameters
5.3.4.1 Allow SDCCH handover (HoControl_0)

Full name Allow SDCCH handover
5-85

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if allow SDCCH handover.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-02-02-004 SDCCH/SDCCH Handover
Relationship None
5.3.4.2 Allow intra-cell handover attempt due to uplink interference (HoControl_1)

Full name Allow intra-cell handover due to uplink interference
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if allow intra-cell handover attempt due to uplink

Description interference.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-86

5.3.4.3 Allow intra-cell handover attempt due to downlink interference (HoControl_2)

Full name Allow intra-cell handover due to downlink interference
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines whether to allow intra-cell handover attempt due

Description to downlink interference.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.4 Allow handover due to distance (HoControl_3)

Full name Allow handover due to distance
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines whether to allow handover due to distance..
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-87

5.3.4.5 Allow standard PBGT handover (HoControl_4)

Full name Allow standard PBGT handover
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines whether to allow standard PBGT handover.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.6 Allow automatic handover based on traffic (HoControl_5)

Full name Allow automatic handover based on traffic
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines whether to allow automatic handover based on

Description traffic.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
5-88

Relationship None
5.3.4.7 Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink interference
(HoControl_8)
Full name Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink interference
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines whether to allow intra-cell handover in super TRX

Description channel due to downlink interference.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.8 Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink interference
(HoControl_9)
Full name Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink interference
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines whether to allow intra-cell handover in super TRX

Description channel due to uplink interference.
5-89

Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.9 Allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT
(HoControl_10)
Full name Allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines whether to allow adjacent cells handover in super

Description TRX channel due to PBGT
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.10 Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority (HoControl_11)

Full name Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority
3GPP Name None
5-90

3GPP reference None
This parameter determines whether to allow dynamic adjustment of han-

Description dover priority.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.11 Allow rapid handover (HoControl_12)

Full name Allow rapid handover
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines whether to allow rapid handover.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-91

5.3.4.12 Allow Macro-Micro delay handover (HoControl_13)

Full name Allow Macro-Micro delay handover
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines whether to allow Macro-Micro delay handover.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.13 Allow Micro-Micro delay handover (HoControl_14)

Full name Allow Micro-Micro delay handover
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if to allow Micro-Micro delay handover.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-92

5.3.4.14 Allow force transfer handover (HoControl_16)

Full name Allow force transfer handover
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines whether to allow forced transfer handover.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-02-02-003 Directed-Shift Handover
Relationship None
5.3.4.15 Allow quality handover in uplink (HoControl_19)

Full name Allow quality handover in uplink
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter describes whether quality handover in uplink is allowed.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-93

5.3.4.16 Allow level handover in uplink (HoControl_20)

Full name Allow level handover in uplink
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter describes whether level handover in uplink is allowed.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.17 Allow quality handover in downlink (HoControl_21)

Full name Allow quality handover in downlink
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter describes whether quality handover in downlink is allowed.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-94

5.3.4.18 Allow level handover in downlink (HoControl_22)

Full name Allow level handover in downlink
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter describes whether level handover in downlink is allowed.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.19 The priority of the handover from Macro cell to Micro cell (MacroMicroHoPrio)
Full name The priority of the handover from Macro cell to Micro cell
Abbreviation MacroMicroHoPrio
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes whether the macro-micro handover decision has

Description
higher priority than the PBGT handover decision.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-95

5.3.4.20 C/I Limited Handover Support (HoControl_24)

Full name C/I Limited Handover Support
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether the function of handover for C/I limited adjacent
cell is supported. Suppose A is the service cell, B and C are adjacent cells of A,
and B is the C/I limited adjacent cell of C. If B and C all satisfy the handover
Description condition and the C/I limited adjacent cell's handover threshold is also satisfied,
then the adjacent cell C should be filtered during the adjacent cell handover, in
other words, C can not be taken as an adjacent cell for handover.
Management
Object Cell
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
5.3.5 Other Parameters

The interface of other parameters is shown in Figure 5-14.
5-96

5.3.5.1 Penalty time for handover failure (HoFailPenalTime)

Full name Penalty time for handover failure
Abbreviation HoFailPenalTime
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the penalty time for destination cell if MS fails to
handover to the destination cell. During the penalty time, inter-cell handover
Description within BSC will not occur. This parameter determines penality duration.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 7
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-97

5.3.5.2 Difference of dynamic priority (DynPrioOffset)

Full name Difference of dynamic priority
Abbreviation DynPrioOffset
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines a tolerable dynamic priority difference between the

destination cell and local cell during a handover when using direction-based
handover algorithm. During handover, if the first cell’s dynamic handover
priority is higher than that of the second cell but the second cell is in MS
moving direction, then the direction-based handover algorithm works if the
difference between the two cells’ handover priorities is within the tolerable
Description difference. MS is handover to the second cell.
Value Range 1~7
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.3 PBGT difference (PbgtOffset)

Full name PBGT difference
Abbreviation PbgtOffset
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines a tolerable power budget difference between desti-

nation cell and the local cell during a handover. During handover, if the first
cell’s PBGT is higher than that of the second cell but the second cell is in MS
moving direction, then the direction-based handover algorithm works if the
difference between the two cells’ PBGTs is within the tolerable difference.
MS is handover to the second cell. This parameter indicates the allowable
Description difference.
5-98

Value Range 0 ~ 20
Unit dB
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.4 Layer control value for handover on traffic (TrafficHoLayrCtl)

Full name Layer control value for handover on traffic
Abbreviation TrafficHoLayrCtl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Layer selecting parameter on service quality handover. This parameter,

together with Frequency control value for handover on traffic, decides the
adjacent cell’s frequency band and layer selected during traffic handover.
When traffic handover condition is satisfied, as for the layer relation, four
choices are available for call selection and candidate cell arrangement. This
parameter decides which choice shall be selected. When implementing
traffic-based handover control in traffic process, this parameter has higher
priority than that of adjacent cells.
l 0: N, Not defined;
l 1: SAME, Adjacent cell and this cell are in the same layer (PBGT han-
dover is possible);
l 2: UPPER, Adjacent cell is upper layer of this cell (when this cell is
micro-cell);
l 3: LOWER, Adjacent cell is lower layer of this cell (when this cell is
Description macro-cell)
Value Range 0~3
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
5-99

Relationship None
5.3.5.5 Frequency control value for handover on traffic (TrafficHoFreqCtl)

Full name Frequency control value for handover on traffic
Abbreviation TrafficHoFreqCtl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the control value of layer for traffic handover, i.e.
which frequency band should be handover to.
l GSM900 frequency band P-GSM (ARFCN = 1 ~ 124)
l EXT900 frequency band E-GSM (ARFCN = 0 ~ 124, 975 ~ 1023)
l DCS1800 frequency band DCS1800 (ARFCN = 512 ~ 885)
l PCS1900 frequency band PCS1900 (ARFCN = 512 ~ 810)
Description l GSM850 frequency band (ARFCN = 128 ~ 251)
Value Range GSM900, EXT900, DCS1800, PCS1900, GSM850
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.6 Threshold of traffic for handover (TrafficThs, %)

Full name Threshold of traffic for handover
Abbreviation TrafficThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-100

If TCH occupation rate of a cell is greater than this parameter value (num-
ber of occupied TCH channels / number of total TCH channels, not including
blocked idle channels), then it indicates the cell is too busy, and traffic han-
Description dover is triggered for the cell.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 70
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.7 Lag time for PBGT between different layers (PbgtHoParam_0,s)

Full name Lag time for PBGT between different layers
Abbreviation PbgtHoParam_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
To more effectively control traffic distribution in the cell at different layers,

while doing PBGT decision, add PBGT decision offset level in the cell at
different layers within certain duration, which is lag time for PBGT between
Description different layers.
Value Range 0 ~ 300
Unit s
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-101

5.3.5.8 Level offset for PBGT to up layer (PbgtHoParam_1)

Full name Level offset for PBGT to up layer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Description upper layer within certain duration.
Value Range 0 ~ 48
Unit None
Default value 24
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.9 Level offset for PBGT to low layer (PbgtHoParam_2)

Full name Level offset for PBGT to low layer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Description lower layer within certain duration.
Value Range 0 ~ 48
Unit None
Default value 24
Change mode Offline
5-102

Relationship None
5.3.5.10 The threshold for starting PBGT handover (PbgtHoStartThs)

Full name The threshold for starting PBGT handover
Abbreviation PbgtHoStartThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When the current cell's downlink level is less than the start level threshold
Description
for PBGT handover, the PBGT handover decision is performed.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.11 Handover from macro to micro (MacroMicroStartThs)

Full name Handover from macro to micro
Abbreviation MacroMicroStartThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When the current cell's downlink level is less than or equal to the start level
Description threshold for macro-micro handover, the macro-micro handover decision is
performed.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
5-103

Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.12 Hysteresis timer when traffic handover (TrafficHysteresisTm, s)

Full name Hysteresis timer when traffic handover
Abbreviation TrafficHysteresisTm
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When there are many traffic handovers initiated in the current cell, the
Description interval between two traffic handovers must be larger than the hysteresis
time specified by this parameter.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit Second
Default value 7
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6 Handover Algorithm Parameters

The interface of handover algorithm parameters is shown in Figure 5-15.
5-104

Figure 5-15 Handover Algorithm Parameters
5.3.6.1 Traffic handover threshold (TrafficLevThs)

Full name Traffic handover threshold
Abbreviation TrafficLevThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used for traffic handover. For the original handover con-
dition that adjacent cell’s level must be higher than that of this cell, modify it
so that adjacent cell’s level must be higher than this threshold. In this way,
traffic handover can be improved greatly. This threshold must be less than
the PBGT threshold in reverse direction. Otherwise, it may result in toggle
Description handover.
Value Range 0 ~ 48
Unit None
Default value 24
Change mode Offline
5-105

Relationship None
5.3.6.2 Level offset during penalty (PenaltyLevOffset)

Full name Level offset during penalty
Abbreviation PenaltyLevOffset
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to perform an offset on the downlink level of this cell
Description in the penalty period.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6.3 Uplink interference quality offset (QOffSetUl)

Full name Uplink interference quality offset
Abbreviation QOffSetUl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-106

Check the relation between level and quality to judge whether there is any
interference in service judgment channel when handover occurs in the cell.
rxqual-ul >= QoffSetUl + FQSS (RXLEV_UL+SOffSetUl) or rxqual-dl
>= QOffSetDl + FQSS (RXLEV_DL+SoffSetDl). Where, rxqual-xx is
uplink/downlink quality, QoffSetxx is uplink/downlink quality offset,
RXLEV_XX is uplink/downlink level, SoffSetxx is uplink/downlink level
offset.
After interference is confirmed, when service party requests channel from
database, which shall tell original occupation condition of database, then
Description the database select proper channels based on this information.
Value Range 0~2
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.6.4 Uplink interference level offset (SOffSetUl)

Full name Uplink interference level offset
Abbreviation SOffSetUl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
offset.
5-107

Value Range 0 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.6.5 Downlink interference quality offset (QOffsetDl)

Full name Downlink interference quality offset
Abbreviation QOffSetDl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
offset.
Value Range 0~2
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5-108

5.3.6.6 Downlink interference level offset (SOffSetDl)

Full name Downlink interference level offset
Abbreviation SOffSetDl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
offset.
Value Range 0 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.6.7 Invalid intra-handover time (TMaxiHo)

Full name Invalid intra-handover time
Abbreviation TMaxiHo
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-109

If MS performs handover continuously in the cell, it indicates great

interference in this position and no appropriate channel is available.
In such a case, MS should be forbidden to perform handover within a
certain time. The judgment method is as follows: If handover occurs within
the invalid intra-handover time, then the previous handover is considered to
have no influence on interference, the counter HoCount increases by 1 and
restart TMaxIHo. If handover occurs after the invalid intra-handover time,
the previous handover is considered valid and clear the counter to 0.
If the counter value reaches the value of MAX count of invalid intra-handover
parameter, then it indicates not to attempt handover within a certain period.
Description Perform penalty in intra-cell penalty mode.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 16
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6.8 MAX count of invalid intra-handover (MaxiHo)

Full name MAX count of invalid intra-handover
Abbreviation MaxiHo
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
If MS performs handover continuously in the cell, it indicates great

interference in this position and no appropriate channel is available.
In such a case, MS should be forbidden to perform handover within a
certain time. The judgment method is as follows: If handover occurs within
the invalid intra-handover time, then the previous handover is considered to
have no influence on interference, the counter HoCount increases by 1 and
restart TMaxIHo. If handover occurs after the invalid intra-handover time,
the previous handover is considered valid and clear the counter to 0.
If the counter value reaches the value of MAX count of invalid intra-handover
parameter, then it indicates not to attempt handover within a certain period.
Description Perform penalty in intra-cell penalty mode.
5-110

Value Range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6.9 MAX path loss threshold on force handover (MaxLossThs)

Full name MAX path loss threshold on force handover
Abbreviation MaxLossThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Directed handover is performed only for one designated cell and it is

restricted by a tolerable level difference MaxLevDiff. This level difference
is lower than PBGT handover threshold in reverse direction, thus to avoid
oscillating handover.
Directed handover should not cause congestion in the destination cell.
Therefore, HoForceResThs is set. Perform forced handover only when the
destination cell's resource is less than the threshold.
Select users with small path loss and small TA for forced handover. Users
perform handover when their path loss are less than MaxLossThs and
TA is less than MaxTAThs. This algorithm applies to cases such as
dual-frequency networking, 900M cell and 1800M cell share the same site
address.
When MAX time advance threshold on force handover (MaxTAThs) is 63,
the forced handover decision is made only according to the path loss.
When MAX path loss threshold on force handover (MaxLossThs) is 150,
the forced handover decision is made only according to TA.
The N value of force handover parameter and P value of force handover
parameter are used for decision in actual situations. In other words,
handover conditions are met if HoForceP of HoForceN measurement
reports satisfy requirement.
Description The path loss L = BS_TXPWR - AV_RXLEV_DL
5-111

BS_TXPWR is transmission power of the carrier where occupied timeslot

locates. It depends on the carrier’s maximum transmission power,
static attenuation power, and power control. AV_RXLEV_DL is the
downlink-receiving level.
Therefore, forced handover shall meet the following requirements:
l Level of the destination cell must be higher than that of the local cell by
MaxLevDiff;
l Available resource of destination cell must be higher than transfer re-
served resource threshold HoForceResThs;
l Path loss L must be less than MaxLossThs, and TA must be less than
MaxTAThs;
l Destination cell is forced transfer cell.
Value Range 0 ~ 150
Unit None
Default value 110
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6.10 MAX time advance threshold on force handover (MaxTaThs)

Full name MAX time advance threshold on force handover
Abbreviation MaxTAThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Description TA is less than MaxTAThs. This algorithm applies to cases such as
5-112

address.
The path loss L = BS_TXPWR - AV_RXLEV_DL
MaxLevDiff;
MaxTAThs;
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6.11 N value of force handover (HoForceN)

Full name N value of force handover
Abbreviation HoForceN
3GPP Name None
5-113

3GPP reference None

address.
MaxLevDiff;
MaxTAThs;
Description l Destination cell is forced transfer cell.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
5-114

Relationship None
5.3.6.12 P value of force handover (HoForceP)

Full name P value of force handover
Abbreviation HoForceP
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

address.
MaxLevDiff;
Description MaxTAThs;
5-115

Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.7 Subcell Parameters

The interface of subcell parameters is shown in Figure 5-16.
Figure 5-16 Subcell Parameters
5.3.7.1 Dual band power offset (DuleBandOffset)

Full name Power compensation between frequencies.
Abbreviation DuleBandOffset
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the value to compensate power in the second cell in dual band
Description cell.
5-116

Value Range 0 ~ 50
Unit dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.7.2 The MAX of path loss (PathLossMax)

Full name The MAX of path loss
Abbreviation PathLossMax
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It is one of subcell handover parameters, indicating threshold parameters

Description while subcell 2 do path loss handover decision for subcell 1.
Value Range 0 ~ 150
Unit dB
Default value 126
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.7.3 The MIN of path loss (PathLossMin)

Full name The MIN of path loss
5-117

Abbreviation PathLossMin
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
One of the subcell handover parameters, the minimum path loss. If by-
PathLoss≤PathLossMin and TA≤SubCellTAMin, the second subcell channel
will be selected first; if byPathLoss>PathLossMin or TA>SubCellTAMin, only
Description the channel of the first subcell is available.
Value Range 0 ~ 150
Unit dB
Default value 120
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.7.4 The MAX of time advance (SubCellTAMax)

Full name The MAX of time advance
Abbreviation SubCellTAMax
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It is one of sucell handover parameters, indicating threshold parameters

Description while subcell 2 does TA handover decision for subcell 1.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode
Offline

5-118

Relationship None
5.3.7.5 The MIN of time advance (SubCellTAMin)

Full name The MIN of time advance
Abbreviation SubCellTAMin
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It is one of sucell handover parameters, indicating threshold parameters

Description while subcell 1 does TA handover decision for subcell 2.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.7.6 N value of subcell handover (SubCellN)

Full name N value of subcell handover
Abbreviation SubCellN
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is one of the conditions used to decide inter-subcell han-

dover. The judgment process is as follows: For the latest N value of subcell
handover sample average values, if SubcellP (P value of subcell handover
parameter) of the SubcellN values satisfy the condition, then perform han-
Description dover.
5-119

Value Range 1 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.7.7 P value of subcell handover (SubcellP)

Full name P value of subcell handover
Abbreviation SubCellP
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is one of the conditions used to decide inter-subcell han-

dover. The judgment process is as follows: For the latest N value of subcell
handover sample average values, if SubcellP (P value of subcell handover
parameter) of the SubcellN values satisfy the condition, then perform han-
Description dover.
Value Range 1 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5-120

5.3.7.8 Subcell handover algorithm (HoControl_17)

Full name Subcell handover algorithm
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines two handover modes of subcell handover algorithm:

Description Concentric Handover; Handover based on path loss and TA.
Value Range Concentric handover, Handover based on path loss and TA
Unit None
Default value Concentric handover
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.4 UTRAN Handover Control Parameters

UTRAN handover control has two tabs.
5.4.1 Basic Properties 1

The interface of basic property 1 parameters is as shown in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 Basic Properties 1 Parameters
5-121

5.4.1.1 Punishment period of UTRAN cell when handover failure (HoFailPenalTm3G)

Full name Punishment period of UTRAN cell when handover failure
Abbreviation HoFailPenalTm3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines a protection period to prevent immediate handover

after handover failure. Its unit time is the period of measurement or pretreat-
Description ment measurement report.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 7
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.1.2 Slippery window size for calculating Ec/No or RSCP average value to be zero
(HoWindow3G)
Slippery window size for calculating Ec/No or RSCP average value to be
Full name zero
Abbreviation HoWindow3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In GSM system, BSC uses the power level measurement data to manage
and control handover decisions. BSC uses average values instead of
original values of measurement data for handover decisions. It helps
prevent negative impact on network performance caused by abrupt
changes in measurement data. Average on measurement value in UTRAN
adjacent cell also shall be required.
HoWindowUTRAN of Ec/No or RSCP average is the window size to
calculate Ec/No or RSCP average in adjacent UTRAN cell, that is, sample
Description count used through average calculation.
5-122

Value Range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.1.3 Number that measurement value allowed to be zero (ZeroAllowed3G)

Full name Number that measurement value allowed to be zero
Abbreviation ZeroAllowed3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, MS can report to BSS the measurement

data of at most six adjacent cells with strongest signal strength. Thus the
measurement results might not be consecutive. For cells whose signal
strength is less than -110 dBm, the measurement data are not reported.
This parameter gives flexibility in measurement data averaging. However,
excessive occurrences of zero indicate that the adjacent cells are of poor
signal strength. If the number of zeroes in used for average calculation
exceeds Number of zero allowed in AV, then measurement average equals
to sum of reported values divided by Neighboring cell .
To be specific, during averaging, if the count of 0s in the sampling count
exceeds “ZeroAllowed”, these sampling values are hardly reliable, and
the measurement average will be the sum of the reported values divided
by NCellWindow. If the count of 0s in the reported values does not
exceed “ZeroAllowed”, these sampling values are much reliable and the
measurement average will be the sum of the reported values divided by
Description (NCellWindow – the count of 0s).
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
5-123

Relationship None
5.4.1.4 UTRAN handover (ServiceHo)

Full name UTRAN handover
Abbreviation ServiceHo
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference Section 48.008
This parameter indicates UTRAN handover priority control. MSC sends Ser-
vice Handover parameter to BSC through ASSIGNMENT REQUEST and
HANDOVER REQUEST messages. Service Handover parameter has three
values, including prefer to UTRAN handover, not prefer to UTRAN handover,
disallow to UTRAN handover, taking actions on handover decision on sub-
sequent BSC. ServiceHo can be configured as the default value used while
MSC doesn't deliver Service Handover parameter, or configured as BSC
forcedly using the mode set by ServiceHo, but do not use Service Handover
Description parameter delivered by MSC.
Handover to UTRAN first; Not Handover to UTRAN first; Not allow to Han-
dover to UTRAN; According to MSC, default handover to UTRAN first; Ac-
cording to MSC, default not handover to UTRAN first; According to MSC,
Value Range default not allowed to handover to UTRAN.
Unit None
Default value According to MSC, the default value is Handover to UTRAN first.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-124

5.4.1.5 FDD/TDD handover (FDDTDDPrio)

Full name FDD/TDD handover
Abbreviation FDDTDDPrio
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the priority control of FDD/TDD handover. When

FDD adjacent cell and TDD adjacent cell exist together, to control selection
sequence of target cell, we use FDDTDDPrio parameter to show if to prefer
Description to FDD cell handover or TDD cell handover.
Value Range Priority to FDD; Priority to TDD.
Unit None
Default value Priority to FDD
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.1.6 Threshold for load sharing (LoadHoRSCPThsFDD)

Full name Threshold for load sharing
Abbreviation LoadHoRSCPThsFDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to traffic handover. Firstly you shall configure a

traffic handover threshold and inter-system handover switch.
This parameter is used to handover decision in 3G cell after traffic is
overloaded. BSC reserves at least HoRSCP_N_FDD RSCP average
values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of
the latest HoRSCP_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the
sum of LoadHoRSCPThsFDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, it can be used
as traffic handover from GSM to UTRAN.
Description This parameter value shall be lower than HoRSCPThsFDD.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
5-125

Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.1.7 Ec/No threshold when handover from GSM to 3G for load sharing
(LoadHoEcNoThsFDD)
Full name Ec/No threshold when handover from GSM to 3G for load sharing
Abbreviation LoadHoEcNoThsFDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

overloaded. BSC reserves at least HoEcNo_N_FDD RSCP average values
for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of the latest
HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum of
LoadHoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN, it can be used as traffic
handover from GSM to UTRAN.
Description This parameter value shall be lower than HoEcNoThsFDD.
Value Range 0 ~ 49
Unit None
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-126

5.4.1.8 RSCP threshold when handover from GSM to TDD for load sharing
(LoadHoRSCPThsTDD)
Full name RSCP threshold when handover from GSM to TDD for load sharing
Abbreviation LoadHoRSCPThsTDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

overloaded. BSC reserves at least HoRSCP_N_TDD RSCP average
values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_TDD out of
the latest HoRSCP_N_TDD average values are larger than or equal to the
sum of LoadHoRSCPThsTDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, it can be used
as traffic handover from GSM to UTRAN.
Description This parameter value shall be lower than HoRSCPThsFDD.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2 Basic Properties 2

5-127

5.4.2.1 Inter system handover supported (InterSysHoCtrl)

Full name Inter system handover supported
Abbreviation InterSysHoCtrl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if intersystem handover within BSC is allowed. This

Description parameters determines if BSC can issue handover of 3G system.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.2 Directed retry to UTRAN cell allowed (InterSysHoCtrl)

Full name Directed retry to UTRAN cell allowed
Abbreviation InterSysRdCtrl
5-128

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if allow directed retry to UTRAN cell. When no

service channel is allocated in this cell, you can try redirected to adjacent
cell under allowed case by corresponding function switch. If this parameter
Description is configured as Yes, it can be redirected to 3G adjacent cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.3 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Threshold (HoRSCPThsFDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Threshold
Abbreviation HoRSCPThsFDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BSC reserves at least HoRSCP_N_FDD RSCP average values for a

UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of the latest
HoRSCP_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sume
of HoRSCPThsFDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to
UTRAN takes place and the adjacent cell is taken as candidate destination
Description cell for handover.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
5-129

Relationship None
5.4.2.4 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value N (HoRSCP_N_FDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value N
Abbreviation HoRSCP_N_FDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_FDD aver-

age values are larger than or equal to the sum of HoRSCP_THS_FDD and
Description HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.5 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value P (HoRSCP_P_FDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value P
Abbreviation HoRSCP_P_FDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_FDD aver-

age values are larger than or equal to the sum of HoRSCP_THS_FDD and
Description HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
5-130

Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.6 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Threshold (HoEcNoThsFDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Threshold
Abbreviation HoEcNoThsFDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
BSC reserves at least HoEcNo_N_FDD RSCP average values for a

UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of the latest
HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sume
of HoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to
Value Range 0 ~ 49
Unit None
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.7 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value N (HoEcNo_N_FDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value N
5-131

Abbreviation HoEcNo_N_FDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are

larger than or equal to the sum of HoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetU-
Description TRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.8 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value P (HoEcNo_P_FDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value P
Abbreviation HoEcNo_P_FDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are

larger than or equal to the sum of HoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetU-
Description TRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place.
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-132

5.4.2.9 Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Threshold (HoRSCPThsTDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Threshold
Abbreviation HoRSCPThsTDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines a threshold value for handover from GSM to UTRAN
cell. BSC at least HoRSCP_N_TDD reserves RSCP average values for
a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_TDD out of the latest
HoRSCP_N_TDD average values are larger than or equal to the sume
of HoRSCPThsTDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.10 Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value N (HoRSCP_N_TDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value N
Abbreviation HoRSCP_N_TDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-133

Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.11 Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value P (HoRSCP_P_TDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value P
Abbreviation HoRSCP_P_TDD
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Value Range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
5-134

Relationship None
5.5 UTRAN Cell Control Parameters

UTRAN cell control parameters have four sub-interfaces.
5.5.1 Basic Properties 1 Parameters

5.5.1.1 Channel location of si2quater broadcast (SI2QuaterPos)

Full name Channel location of si2quater broadcast
Abbreviation SI2QuaterPos
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates channel location of si2quater broadcast.
5-135

0, 1
l 0: Broadcast on normal BCCH block
l 1: Broadcast on extended BCCH block (AGCH_BLOCK reservation
Value Range value will be 1)
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.2 CS measurement type reported by UE (ReportTypeCS)

Full name CS measurement type reported by UE
Abbreviation ReportTypeCS
3GPP Name REPORT_TYPE
It indicates enhanced measurement report for UE or measurement report

Description message.
0, 1
l 0: Adopts ‘enhanced measurement report’ message, if at least one
BSIC is configured for each frequency in BA list; otherwise, adopt ‘en-
hanced measurement report’ message, otherwise using normal mea-
surement report.
Value Range l 1: Adopts ‘normal measurement report’ message
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-136

5.5.1.3 Measurement threshold of UE performing UTRAN cell reselection (Qsearch_I)

Full name Measurement threshold of UE performing UTRAN cell reselection
Abbreviation Qsearch_I
3GPP reference Qsearch_I
3GPP Name 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
This parameter indicates the measurement threshold of UE performing

UTRAN cell reselection. UE starts UTRAN reselection cell measurement
when average receiving level RLA_C of this cell is lower than (parameter
Description value: 0 ~ 7) or higher than (parameter value: 8 ~ 15) the threshold.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15

l 0 ~ 6: Indicates field strength L = -98 + n*4 dBm
l 7: Indicates always
l 8 ~ 14: Indicates field strength L = -78 + 4*(n-8) dBm
Value Range l 15: Indicates never
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.4 Threshold when UE performs search under specialized mode (Qsearch_C)

Full name Threshold when UE performs search under specialized mode
Abbreviation Qsearch_C
3GPP Name Qsearch_C
This parameter defines a threshold. When average receiving level RLA_C of

the cell falls below (parameter value: 0 ~ 7) or higher than (parameter value:
Description 8 ~ 15) this threshold, UE searches the UTRAN adjacent cell.
5-137

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15

l 0 ~ 6: Indicates field strength L = -98 + n*4 dBm
l 7: Indicates always
l 8 ~ 14: Indicates field strength L = -78 + 4*(n-8) dBm
Value Range l 15: Indicates never
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.5 Initial parameter instead of qsearch_c before UE receiving qsearch_C

(QsearchCInit)
Full name Initial parameter instead of qsearch_c before UE receiving qsearch_C
Abbreviation QsearchCInit
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to search and measure the cell data while MS does
Description not receive Qsearch_C on SACCH.
0, 1
l 0: Indicates using Qsearch_I parameter
Value Range l 1: Indicates always measuring
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-138

5.5.1.6 CS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report (SvrBandRprtCS)

Full name CS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report
Abbreviation SvrBandRprtCS
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the number of adjacent cells with the same frequency
band as in serving cell, which are included in the measurement report or the
Description strongest cell list.
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.7 Max number of GSM neighbor cells (IndexStartEMR)

Full name Max Number In Adjacent GSM cell
Abbreviation IndexStartEMR
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the max number of adjacent GSM cells.
Value Range 32 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 32
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-139

5.5.1.8 CS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells (FDDrepQntCS)

Full name CS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells
Abbreviation FDDrepQntCS
3GPP Name FDD_REP_QUANT
Description It indicates whether MS uses RSCP or Ec/No to report measurement.
0, 1
l 0: RSCP, receiving power of CPICH scramble of UTRAN cell at UE, the
unit is dBm.
l 1: Ec/No, ratio of the receiving power to thermal noise of CPICH scram-
Value Range ble of UTRAN cell, the unit is dB.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.9 MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_Qmin)

Full name MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell
Abbreviation FDD_Qmin
3GPP Name FDD_Qmin
This parameter indicates when the cell reselects the UTRAN adjacent cell,
the value of Ec/No of the UTRAN cell must be larger than or equal to the
Description value defined by this parameter.
5-140

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0 = -20 dB
l 1 = -6 dB
l 2 = -18 dB
l 3 = -8 dB
l 4 = -16 dB
l 5 = -10 dB
l 6 = -14 dB
Value Range l 7 = -12 dB
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.10 CS max number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report

(FDDMulRatrrptCS)
Full name CS max number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report
Abbreviation FDDMulRatrrptCS
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the maximum number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent

cells included in packet measurement report or strongest cell list. If
UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells are not full, the vacancies are used for GSM
adjacent cells. (If TDD technology is available, the vacancies are used for
Description TDD cells).
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
5-141

Relationship None
5.5.1.11 FDD reselection offset (FDD_Qoffset)

Full name FDD reselection offset
Abbreviation FDD_Qoffset
3GPP Name FDD_Qoffset
This parameter is used to reselect the UTRAN adjacent cell if the following
requirements are satisfied:
l Received signal code power (RSCP) of this adjacent cell is higher than
average receiving level RLA_C of this cell.
l RSCP of the adjacent cell is higher than RLA_C of all adjacent GSM
cells by at least FDD_Qoffset (FDD reselection offset) for more than 5
seconds. FDD_Qoffset of the cell increases by 5 dB if the cell is rese-
lected 15 seconds earlier.
l Ec/No (code-noise ratio) of this adjacent cell is larger than or equal to
designated FDD_Qmin (minimum value of code-noise ratio of UTRAN
reselected cell).
If more than one UTRAN cell meets above conditions, then select the cell
Description which has the largest RSCP.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
Unit None
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-142

5.5.1.12 A minimum threshold of RSCP for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection

(FDD_RSCPmin)
Full name A minimum threshold of RSCP for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection
Abbreviation FDD_RSCPmin
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference 3GPPTS44.018 V6.12.0
When a GSM cell is reselected to an adjacent 3G cell, its RSCP should

be larger than or equal to that of the GSM cell. If the adjacent 3G cell's
measurement value is RSCP, FDD_RSCPmin indicates the reselection threshold
Description FDD_RSCP_threshold for that 3G adjacent cell.
This paramter is broadcast to MS in SI2quater on BCCH, and broadcast to MS in
PSI3quater on PBCCH and PACCH.
Management
Object Cell
0 ~ 15
(-114+2*n) dBm, that is,
l 0: -114 dB
Value Range
l 1: -112 dB
......
l 15: -84 dB
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
5.5.1.13 Applies an offset to FDD_Qmin value (FDD_Qmin_Offset)

Full name Applies an offset to FDD_Qmin value
Abbreviation FDD_Qmin_Offset
5-143

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference 3GPPTS44.018 V6.12.0
This parameter must work with FDD_RSCPmin, and the working principle is
Description the same as that of FDD_RSCPmin.
Management
Object Cell
0~7
(2n)dB, that is,
Value Range l 0: 0dB
......
l 7: 14dB
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
5.5.1.14 Require UE to send UTRAN class-mark change message early (ECSC_3G)

Full name Require UE to send UTRAN class-mark change message early
Abbreviation ECSC_3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether UE is required to send UTRAN classmark

Description change message early.
5-144

Yes/No
l No: It is not allowed to send the UTRAN classmark change message.
l Yes: Whether UE sends the UTRAN class mark change message is
controlled by the system parameter ECSC and UE. (Because UE might
not use the parameter ECSC, this property is represented by the param-
Value Range eter ES IND in CLASSMARK2 and CLASSMARK3.)
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2 Basic Properties 2 Parameters

5-145

5.5.2.1 CS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell (ReportRateCS)

Full name CS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell
Abbreviation ReportRateCS
3GPP Name REPORTING_RATE
It indicates frequency of measurement reports in adjacent cell, refer to "CS

Description adjacent cell report priority".
0, 1
l 0: normal
Value Range l 1: Low
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.2 CS multiband report indication (MulBndRprtCS)

Full name CS Multiband report indication
Abbreviation MulBndRprtCS
This parameter is to control the number of reports of different adjacent cells

Description except the serving cell.
5-146

0, 1, 2, 3
l 0: MS reports the survey results of six known and allowed adjacent cells
with the strongest NCC according to the signal intensity, regardless of
which frequency band adjacent cells are in.
l 1: MS reports the measurement result of one adjacent cell with the
strongest signal in the frequency bands in adjacent cell list (excluding
frequency band of serving cell). In the remaining locations, MS reports
the adjacent cells in the frequency band of local cell. If there are still
more locations remaining, MS reports the second strongest adjacent
cell, regardless of their frequency bands.
l 2: MS reports the measurement result of two adjacent cells with the
cell, regardless of their frequency bands.
l 3: MS reports the measurement result of three adjacent cells with
strongest signal in the frequency bands in adjacent cells list (excluding
Value Range cell, regardless of their frequency bands.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.3 CS offset which is added when UE reports RXLEV value (ScaleOrdCS)

Full name CS offset which is added when UE reports rxlev value
Abbreviation ScaleOrdCS
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-147

This parameter defines the added offset when UE reports signal field
intensity. If the field intensity of a certain GSM adjacent cell is n dBm, then
when mapping to RXLEV (0 ~ 63), UE will map n+ ScaleOrdCS to the
original value corresponding to n. It applies only in the case that ‘enhanced
measurement report’ message is used.
If the field intensity of adjacent cell exceeds -48 dBm, the real value can be
reported by setting this parameter. UE includes the SCALE value when it
reports ‘enhance measurement report’ message. If SCALE_ORD = 2, UE
Description uses the value of cell that reports the best signal level.
0, 1, 2
l 0: 0 dB
l 1: 10 dB
Value Range l 2: Automatic, determined by UE
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.4 TDD reselection offset (TDD_Qoffset)

Full name TDD reselection offset
Abbreviation TDD_Qoffset
3GPP Name TDD_Qoffset
When cell is reselected to 3G TDD adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be higher
Description than the least offset of RLA_P in all GSM adjacent cells.
Value Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
Unit None
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
5-148

Relationship None
5.5.2.5 CS MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells in measurement report

(TDDMulRatRrptCS)
Full name CS MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells in measurement report
Abbreviation TDDMulRatRrptCS
3GPP Name XXX_MULTIRAT_REPORTING
This parameter indicates the maximum number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent

cells included in measurement report or strongest cell list. If UTRAN/TDD
adjacent cells are not full, the vacancies are used for GSM adjacent cells (If
Description FDD technology is supported, remained part is given to FDD cell).
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.6 CS UE report invalid cell level allowed (InvldBSICRprtCS)

Full name CS UE report invalid cell level allowed
Abbreviation InvldBSICRprtCS
3GPP Name INVALID_BSIC_REPORTING
When BCC is not configured, NCC is permitted for BSIC of some GSM cells.
This parameter indicates if the system allows UE to report field intensity of
Description such cells.
5-149

Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.7 CS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in BSIC decoding frame indication

(SearchPrioCS3G)
Full name CS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in BSIC decoding frame indication
Abbreviation SearchPrioCS3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if to allow UE to search UTRAN adjacent cells in

the frame where BSIC decoding is needed. If yes, then UE can use at most
Description 25 frames for search in 13 seconds.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.8 GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (RprtOffsetCS850)

Full name GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset
5-150

Abbreviation RprtOffsetCS850
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
when reporting to GSM850M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
higher than or equal to RprtThoCS850, and RepPrioCS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetCS850 value is
Description firstly reported.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Value Range 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 dB ~ 42 dB, each level is 6 dB.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.9 GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoCS850)

Full name GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold
Abbreviation RprtThoCS850
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When reporting to GSM850M adjacent cells, only when signal level in the
cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS850 (dimensionless, corresponding
to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for
different RXLEV), it can be reported.
As to if it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level,
Description RepPrioCS, MulBndRprtCS and RprtOffsetCS850.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
l 1 ~ 6: corresponding to 6 dB ~ 36 dB, 6 dB per level
Value Range l 7: never
Unit None
5-151

Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
5-152

3GPP reference None
cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS900 (dimensionless, corresponding
different RXLEV), it can be reported.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-153

Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS1800 (dimensionless, correspond-
ing to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship
for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to if it can be reported in cer-
tain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, MulBndRprtCS and
Description RprtOffsetCS1800.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5-154

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When reporting to GSM1900M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When reporting to GSM1900M adjacent cells, only when signal level

in the cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS1900 (dimensionless,
corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping
relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
5-155

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.16 UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (FDDRprtOffsetCS)

Full name UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset
Abbreviation FDDRprtOffsetCS
3GPP Name XXX_REPORTING_OFFSET
when reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoCS, and RepPrioCS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and FDDRprtOffsetCS value is
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.17 UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (FDDRprtThoCS)

Full name UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold
Abbreviation FDDRprtThoCS
3GPP Name XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD
5-156

When reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the
cell is higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoCS (dimensionless, corresponding
different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to if it can be reported in certain
period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, FDDMulRatRrptCS and
Description FDDRprtOffsetCS.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.18 UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (TDDRprtOffsetCS)

Full name UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset
Abbreviation TDDRprtOffsetCS
when reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoCS, and RepPrioCS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and TDDRprtOffsetCS value is
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-157

Relationship None
5.5.2.19 UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (TDDRprtThoCS)

Full name UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold
Abbreviation TDDRprtThoCS
When reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the
cell is higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoCS (dimensionless, corresponding
different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to if it can be reported in certain
period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, TDDMulRatRrptCS and
Description TDDRprtOffsetCS.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3 GPRS Parameters 1

The interface of GPRS parameters 1 is shown in Figure 5-21.
5-158

Figure 5-21 GPRS Parameters 1
5.5.3.1 PS offset which is added when UE reports RXLEV value (ScaleOrdPS)

Full name PS offset which is added when UE reports rxlev value
Abbreviation ScaleOrdPS
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the added offset when UE reports signal field
intensity. If the field intensity of a GSM adjacent cell is n dBm, then when
mapping to RXLEV (0 ~ 63), UE will map n+ScaleOrdPS to the original
value corresponding to n. It applies only in the case when the PACKET
ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT message is used.
If the field intensity of adjacent cell exceeds -48 dBm, the real value can
be reported by setting this parameter. If the field intensity of adjacent cell
exceeds -48 dBm, the real value can be reported by setting this parameter.
If SCALE_ORD = 2, UE uses the value of cell that reports the best signal
Description level.
5-159

0, 1, 2
l 0: 0 dB
l 1: 10 dB
Value Range l 2: Automatic, determined by UE
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.2 PS measurement type reported by UE (ReportTypePS)

Full name PS measurement type reported by UE
Abbreviation ReportTypePS
3GPP Name REPORT_TYPE
This parameter indicates that UE uses PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT

Description or PACKET ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT message.
0, 1
l When PBCCH is configured:
0: Use the PACKET ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT message
to send the measurement report.
1: Use the PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT message to send
the measurement report.
l When PBCCH is not configured:
0: If each frequency in BA (GPRS) list is configured with at least one
BSIC, use the PACKET ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT
message to send the measurement report; otherwise, use the PACKET
MEASUREMENT REPORT message to send the measurement report.
1: Use the PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT message to send
Value Range the measurement report.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-160

Relationship None
5.5.3.3 PS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report (SvrBandRprtPS)

Full name PS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report
Abbreviation SvrBandRprtPS
3GPP Name SERVING_BAND_REPORTING
This parameter defines the number of adjacent cells with the same frequency
band as in serving cell, which are included in the PS measurement report or
Description the strongest cell list.
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.4 PS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell (ReportRatePS)

Full name PS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell
Abbreviation ReportRatePS
3GPP Name REPORTING_RATE
It indicates frequency of measurement reports in adjacent cell, refer to "PS

Description adjacent cell report priority".
5-161

0, 1
l 0: normal
Value Range l 1: Low
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.5 Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell (Qsearch_P)

Full name Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell
Abbreviation Qsearch_P_0/Qsearch_P_1
3GPP Name Qsearch_P
Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell.

Searching 3G cell when signal level is lower than threshold 0 ~ 7
(corresponding to -98, -94, ..., , -74dBm), threshold 7 indicates always
searching; or searching while above threshold 8~15 (-78, -74, ..., -54 dBm),
Description threshold 15 indicates never search.
Idle state and transmission state.

Unit None
Default value Idle state and transmission state. The default value is 15.
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-02-03-004 Inter-system NCCR
Relationship None
5-162

5.5.3.6 FDD GPRS reselection offset (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset)

Full name FDD GPRS reselection offset
Abbreviation FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0/FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1
3GPP Name FDD_GPRS_Qoffset
When cell is reselected to 3G FDD adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be higher

Value range is 0 ~ 15.
l 0 indicates always selecting adjacent cells of this 3G FDD;
l 1 = -28 dB;
l 2 = -24 dB
......
Value Range l 15 = 28 dB
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.7 TDD GPRS reselection offset (TDD_GPRS_Qoffset)

Full name TDD GPRS reselection offset
Abbreviation TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0/TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1
3GPP Name TDD_GPRS_Qoffset
When cell is reselected to 3G TDD adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be higher
5-163


l 0 indicates always selecting adjacent cells of this 3G TDD;
l 1 = -28 dB;
l 2 = -24 dB
......
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.8 PS MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_QminPS)

Full name PS MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell
Abbreviation FDD_QminPS_0/FDD_QminPS_1
3GPP Name FDD_Qmin
When a cell reselects this 3G adjacent cell, the cell's Ec/No value must be
Description larger than or equal to that of this 3G adjacent cell.

l 0 = -20 dB;
l 1 = -6 dB;
l 2 = -18 dB;
l 3 = -8 dB;
l 4 = -16 dB;
l 5 = -10 dB;
l 6 = -14 dB;
Value Range l 7 = -12 dB
Unit None
Change mode Offline
5-164

Relationship None
5.5.3.9 Offset of FDD_QminPS (FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS)

Full name Offset of FDD_QminPS
Abbreviation FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_0/FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_1
3GPP Name FDD_Qmin_Offset
Description Offset of FDD_QminPS

l 0 = 0 dB;
l 1 = 2 dB;
l 2 = 4 dB;
l 3 = 6 dB;
l 4 = 8 dB;
l 5 = 10 dB;
l 6 = 12 dB;
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.10 PS MIN RSCP of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_RSCPminPS)

Full name PS MIN RSCP of UTRAN reselecting cell
5-165

Abbreviation FDD_RSCPminPS_0/FDD_RSCPminPS_1
3GPP Name FDD_RSCPmin
When the cell is reselected to a 3G adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be larger
Description than or equal to this value.

l 0 = -114 dBm;
l 1 = -112 dBm;
l 2 = -110 dBm;
l 3 = -108 dBm
......
l 14 = -86 dBm
Value Range l 15 = -84 dBm
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.11 Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP (FDDRprtTho2PS)

Full name Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP
Abbreviation FDDRprtTho2PS_0/FDDRprtTho2PS_1
3GPP Name FDD_REPORTING_THRESHOLD_2
Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP (when not specified in

Description "byFDDRepQuant")

Unit None
5-166

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.12 PS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells (FDDRepQntPS)

Full name PS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells
Abbreviation FDDRepQntPS
3GPP Name FDD_REP_QUANT
Description It indicates whether MS uses RSCP or Ec/No to report measurement.
0, 1
l 0: RSCP, receiving power of CPICH scramble of UTRAN cell at UE, the
unit is dBm.
l 1: Ec/No, ratio of the receiving power to thermal noise of CPICH scram-
Value Range ble of UTRAN cell, the unit is dB.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.13 PS max number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report

(FDDMulRatRrptPS)
Full name PS max number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report
Abbreviation FDDMulRatRrptPS
3GPP Name None
5-167

3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the maximum number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent

cells included in packet measurement report or strongest cell list. If
UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells are not full, the vacancies are used for GSM
adjacent cells. (If TDD technology is available, the vacancies are used for
Description TDD cells).
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.14 PS multiband report indication (MulBndRprtPS)

Full name PS Multiband report indication
Abbreviation MulBndRprtPS
MS in single-frequency GSM system needs only to report contents of

six adjacent cells with the strongest signals in a frequency band, when
reporting the survey result of adjacent cells to the network.
In multi-band networking, MS can enter with priority into a specific frequency
band during handover. The MS reports the survey result according to the
signal intensity and the frequency band of the signals, according to the
actual situation.
MulBndRprtPS is used to notify MS to report contents of adjacent cells in
multiple frequency bands. It is one of the system control parameters.
The setting of this parameter is subject to traffic in each frequency band.
General principles to set the parameters are as follows: 0: If the traffic of
each frequency band is almost equivalent, and the operator has no choice
over the frequency band. 3: If the traffic of each frequency band is quite
different, and the operator hopes that MS enters a specific frequency band
Description with priority.
5-168

0, 1, 2, 3
l 0: MS reports the survey results of six known and allowed adjacent cells
with the strongest NCC according to the signal intensity, regardless of
which frequency band adjacent cells are in.
l 1: MS reports the measurement result of one adjacent cell with the
frequency band of serving cell). In the remaining space, MS reports ad-
jacent cell in local cell frequency band. If still more space is available,
MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, regardless of which frequency
bands they are in.
l 2: MS reports the survey result of two adjacent cells with the strongest
signals in the frequency bands (excluding that of local cell) in adjacent
cell table. In the remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell
frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports the remain-
ing adjacent cells, regardless of which frequency bands they are in.
l 3: MS reports the survey result of three adjacent cells with the strongest
signals in the frequency bands (excluding that of local cell) in adjacent
cell table. In the remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell
frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports the remain-
Value Range ing adjacent cells, no matter what frequency bands they are at.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.15 TDD multi report PS (TDDMulRatRrptPS)

Full name TDD multi report PS
Abbreviation TDDMulRatRrptPS
3GPP Name XXX_MULTIRAT_REPORTING
5-169

This parameter indicates the MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cell in-
cluded in measurement report. If UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells are not full, the
vacancies are used for GSM adjacent cells (If FDD technology is supported,
Description remained part is given to FDD cell).
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4 GPRS Parameters 2

The interface of GPRS parameters 2 is shown in Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22 GPRS Parameters 2
5.5.4.1 PS UE report invalid cell level allowed (InvldBSICRprtPS)

Full name PS UE report invalid cell level allowed
Abbreviation InvldBSICRprtPS
5-170

3GPP Name INVALID_BSIC_REPORTING
When BCC is not configured, NCC is permitted for BSIC of some GSM cells.
This parameter indicates whether the system allows UE to report the field
Description intensity of such cell.
Yes/No
l YES: Allow UE to report the field intensity of ‘NCC permitted but BCC
invalid’ cells
l NO: Do not Allow UE to report the field intensity of ‘NCC permitted but
Value Range BCC invalid’ cells
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.2 PS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication

(SearchPrioPS3G)
Full name PS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication
Abbreviation SearchPrioPS3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if to allow UE to search UTRAN adjacent cells in

the frame where BSIC decoding is needed. If yes, then UE can use at most
Description 25 frames for search in 13 seconds.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
5-171

Relationship None
5.5.4.3 Reselect priority control of 2G/3G (ServiceCC)

Full name Reselection priority control of 2G/3G (ServiceCC)
Abbreviation ServiceCC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter specifies the reselecting priority control mode of 2G/3G.
Reselect 3G preferentially; Do not reselect 3G preferentially; Do not allow

to reselect 3G; Determined by SGSN, prefer to reselect 3G acquiescently;
Value Range
Determined by SGSN, do not prefer to reselect 3G acquiescently;
Determined by SGSN, do not allow to reselect 3G acquiescently.
Unit None
Default value Reselect 3G preferentially
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
Related interfaces
None
Impact on service
None
5.5.4.4 GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (RprtOffsetPS850)

Abbreviation RprtOffsetPS850
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-172

higher than or equal to RprtThoPS850, and RepPrioPS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetPS850 value is
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.5 GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoPS850)

Abbreviation RprtThoPS850
cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoPS850 (dimensionless, corresponding
different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported within
a certain period, it also depends on the signal level, RepPrioPS, MulBndR-
Description prtPS and RprtOffsetPS850.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-173

Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.7 GSM 900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoPS900)
5-174

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-175

Relationship None

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
5-176

3GPP reference None
When reporting to GSM1900M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-177

Relationship None
5.5.4.12 UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (FDDRprtOffsetPS)

Full name UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset
Abbreviation FDDRprtOffsetPS
when reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoPS, and RepPrioPS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and FDDRprtOffsetPS value is
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.13 UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold (FDDRprtThoPS)

Full name UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold
Abbreviation FDDRprtThoPS
5-178

When reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the
cell is higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoPS (dimensionless, correspond-
for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in
certain period, it also depends on the signal level, RepPrioPS, FDDMulRa-
Description tRrptPS and FDDRprtOffsetPS.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.14 UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (TDDRprtOffsetPS)

Full name UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset
Abbreviation TDDRprtOffsetPS
when reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoPS, and RepPrioPS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and TDDRprtOffsetPS value is
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-179

Relationship None
5.5.4.15 UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold (TDDRprtThoPS)

Full name UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold
Abbreviation TDDRprtThoPS
When reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the
cell is higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoPS (dimensionless, correspond-
for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to whether it can be reported in
certain period, it also depends on the signal level, RepPrioPS, TDDMulRa-
Description tRrptPS and TDDRprtOffsetPS.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6 Adjacent Cell Parameters

This section introduces adjacent cell parameters.
5-180

5.6.1 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters

The interface of adjacent interference cell parameters is shown in Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-23 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters
5.6.1.1 Interference cell No. (IntfObjectId)

Full name Interference cell No.
Abbreviation IntfObjectId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Interference cell No.
Value Range 1~6
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.1.2 Related cell DN (RelationDN)

Full name Related cell DN
Abbreviation RelationDN
5-181

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines BSS external cell DN: EcId or related BSS equipment
Description DN: BscId-SiteId-BtsId.
Value Range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGB-02-02-005 Double BCCH Allocation List
Relationship None
5.6.2 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters

The interface of adjacent cell handover and reselection parameters is as shown in Figure
5-24.
Figure 5-24 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters
5-182

5.6.2.1 Adjacent cell handover and reselection ID (HoResObjectId)

Full name Adjacent cell handover and reselection ID
Abbreviation HoResObjectId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is a unique identification of adjacent cell handover and res-

Description election object.
Value Range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.2 Priority of handover (Hopriority)

Full name Priority of handover
Abbreviation Hopriority
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, cell priority shall be considered in sequenc-

ing candidate cells. Therefore, there are three decisive factors to sequence
the candidate cells: priority, traffic, and radio conditions. Priority and traffic
affect the cell sequencing most. If they lead to the same result, sequence
the cells according to the radio conditions. The larger the value, the higher
Description level of priority.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
5-183

Relationship None
5.6.2.3 MAX power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax)

Full name Max power level of MS
Abbreviation MsTxPwrMax

When BSC controls the power, the parameter is the maximum transmission
power that can be used by MS in the cell. MS max power level is also a
parameter used by BSC to calculate PBGT value.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5-184

5.6.2.4 Min power level for handover access (RxLevMin)

Full name Min power level for handover access
Abbreviation RxLevMin
This parameter defines the minimum receiving intensity level (on BCCH)
required for MS to handover to this cell. It is one of parameters to decide
preferred cells during handover control. MS in the serving cell constantly
monitors the signal intensity on BCCH of adjacent cells. Adjacent cells
with the minimum receiving intensity level higher than this parameter are
potential candidates for handover. MS with receiving level larger than
minimum receiving level indicates that MS is at the edge of the serving cell.
cells, MIN access level increases the resulting C1 and C2 to decrease the
cell effective coverage range. However, the value of this parameter cannot
be too large. Otherwise, large value change can bring ‘void area’ across
cell boundaries to result in sudden call drop problem. With this measure for
traffic balance, it is suggested that the level value shall not exceed -90dB.
At the preliminary running stage of the network, this parameter can be
usually set as 10 (that is, -101 dBm ~ -100 dBm) or lower, which is higher
than the MS receiving sensitivity –102 dBm. However, when the network
capacity is expanded or the radio coverage in a cell is not a problem, this
Description parameter of the cell can be increased by 2 (dB).
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5-185

5.6.2.5 Min threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT (HoMarginPbgt)

Full name Min threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT
Abbreviation HoMarginPbgt
3GPP Name None

received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The PBGT
value of an adjacent cell is also one of the causes for handover. The
decision process is as follows: If the PBGT value of an adjacent cell is
greater than the relevant threshold of this cell, handover shall be performed
to find a more suitable cell.
This parameter defines the threshold used to determine PBGT handover
Description from an adjacent cell to local cell.
0 ~ 100
l 0: -24 dB
l 1: -23 dB
......
Value Range l 100: 76 dB
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.6 Min threshold of signal level for handover on power level (HoMarginRxLev)
Full name Min threshold of signal level for handover on power level
Abbreviation HoMarginRxLev
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-186

According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received

average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. In handover caused by
the level, adjacent cells shall be screened and sequenced. This parameter
defines the signal strength threshold to determine handover from adjacent
Description cell to local cell.
0 ~ 100
l 0: -24 dB
l 1: -23 dB
......
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.7 Min threshold of signal level for handover on quality (HoMarginRxQual)

Full name Min threshold of signal level for handover on quality
Abbreviation HoMarginRxQual
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

the quality, adjacent cells shall be screened and sequenced. This parameter
defines the signal quality threshold to determine handover from adjacent cell
Description to local cell.
0 ~ 100
l 0: -24 dB
l 1: -23 dB
......
Unit None
5-187

Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.8 Max level difference of force handover (MaxForceHoDiff)

Full name Max level difference of force handover
Abbreviation MaxForceHoDiff
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In order to avoid handover oscillations in cells, a tolerable level difference

for forced handover is required, which shall be lower than PBGT handover
threshold in the reverse direction. This parameter defines the maximum level
Description difference value for forced handover.
Value Range 0 ~ 48
Unit None
Default value 9
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.9 Handover force resource threshold (HoForceResThs)

Full name Handover force resource threshold
Abbreviation HoForceResThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-188

Directed handover should not cause congestion in the destination cell. When
resource of object cell is lower than the congestion threshold, forced han-
Description dover can be implemented.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.10 Neighboring cell layer (NCellLayer)

Full name Neighboring cell layer
Abbreviation NCellLayer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter provides the handover policies in multi-layer network

technology and dual-frequency network technology. Multi-layer radio
coverage can be formed in the same physical area.
The handover policies will not be detailed in this manual. In brief, limiting the
PBGT handover defined in the specifications at one layer can reduce the
number of handovers during the call, thus improving the system reliability
and communication quality. The policy of handover between a macro cell
layer and a micro cell layer mainly depends on the moving speed of MS. An
MS at higher moving speed will try to stay at the macro cell layer (upper
layer of the micro cell layer), and an MS at lower moving speed will try to
enter the micro cell layer (lower layer of the macro cell layer). Only in case
of PBGT handover and handover towards undefined layer being allowed
will the undefined cell of the service area be considered as a candidate cell.
"Same layer of the home cell": Adjacent cell and local cell are in the
same layer (PBGT handover is possible). "Upper layer of the home cell":
Adjacent cell is the upper layer of local cell (when the local cell is a micro
cell). "Lower layer of the home cell": Adjacent cell is the lower layer of local
Description cell (when the local cell is a macro cell). For details, refer to Appendix.
5-189

Undefined, Same layer of the home cell, Upper layer of the home cell, Lower
Value Range layer of the home cell
Unit None
Default value Same layer of the home cell
Change mode Offline
ZGO-02-02-001 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells

Relationship None
5.6.2.11 CS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioCS)

Full name CS adjacent cell report priority
Abbreviation RepPrioCS
3GPP Name REP_PRIORITY
Adjacent cells are reported according to the following priorities:

l Adjacent cell with same frequency band. have the following features:
BSIC of color code is valid; Its measured field intensity ranks high
among cells in the same frequency band and is larger than or equal
to the lower limit specified by RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents
frequency band of serving cell.
l Adjacent cell in the frequency band different from that of the serving cell
must have the following features: BSIC of color code is valid. Its mea-
sured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same frequency band
and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoCSXXX.
Here, XXX represents the frequency band different from that of serving
cell.
l Other access technologies, such as UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells. The
cell’s scramble is correct. Its measured field intensity ranks high among
cells with the same access technologies and is larger than or equal to the
lower limit specified by XXXRprtThoCS. Here, XXX represents access
technologies like UTRAN/FDD.
For above priorities, if the priority’s location has surplus, then leave it
to adjacent cell of the next priority. For access technology such as
Description UTRAN/FDD, or frequency band such as GSM 900, the cell with high
5-190

RepPrioCS is preferred. For cells with same RepPrioCS, the cell with
greater sum of RprtThoCSXXX (or XXXRprtThoCS) and RprtOffsetCSXXX
(or XXXRprtOffsetCS) is preferred.
Value Range Low; High
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.12 PS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)

Full name PS adjacent cell report priority
Abbreviation RepPrioPS
This parameter defines the priority of adjacent cells to report the

measurement report during PS traffic operation.
to the lower limit specified by RprtThoPSXXX. Here, XXX represents
and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoPSXXX.
cell.
lower limit specified by XXXRprtThoPS. Here, XXX represents access
Description technologies like UTRAN/FDD.
5-191

UTRAN/FDD, or frequency band such as GSM 900, the cell with high
RepPrioPS is preferred. For cells with same RepPrioPS, the cell with
greater sum of RprtThoPSXXX (or XXXRprtThoPS) and RprtOffsetPSXXX
(or XXXRprtOffsetPS) is preferred.
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.13 Target cell traffic threshold (TargetCellTrafficThs)

Full name Target cell traffic threshold
Abbreviation TargetCellTrafficThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter specifies the threshold of the target cell's traffic. This value
determines if it shall be handed over to this cell. If the traffic in target cell is
Description more than this threshold, do not handover to this cell.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 75
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-192

5.6.2.14 Handover threshold from macro to micro (MacroMicroHoThs, dbm)

Full name Handover threshold from macro to micro
Abbreviation MacroMicroHoThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter specifies the cell's signal strength threshold for handover
Description
between macro-cell and micro-cell.
l > -48 dBm

l -50 ~ -49 dBm
......
Value Range
l -109 ~ -108 dBm
l -110 ~ -109 dBm
l < -110 dBm
Unit dBm
Default value -91 dBm ~ -90 dBm
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.15 Counter of handover threshold from macro to micro (MacroMicroHon)

Full name Counter of handover threshold from macro to micro
Abbreviation MacroMicroHon
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This counter counts the number of the signal strength being higher than
Description
the macro-micro handover threshold value.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
5-193

Relationship None
5.6.2.16 The direction fo neighbour cell (NCellDir)

Full name The direction of neighbour cell
Abbreviation NCellDir
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter identifies the direction relation between adjacent cell and local
Description
cell. You can set the direction information for each adjacent cell.
Management
Object Cell
Value Range Direction A, Direction B, No direction
Unit None
Default value No direction
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
5.6.2.17 Related cell DN

Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
User can click Select to select cell or external cell. User can also check
Description Mutual to set mutually reselection and handover cell.
5-194

Value Range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.18 Is related cell (IsRelatedCell)

Full name Is related cell
Abbreviation IsRelatedCell
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Only the cell related to the serving cell can be a candidate in rapid fading
handover. This is a parameter of adjacent cell and is used to indicate whether
Description adjacent cell is related to the serving cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.19 Is handover forced neighbor cell (IsHoForceNcell)

Full name Is handover forced neighbor cell
Abbreviation IsHoForceNcell
5-195

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In the case of 1800M and 900M network sharing site, it is better to handover
subscribers of 900M network to 1800M network. At this time, you can do
directional handover traffic.
Forced handover is a method for on-site traffic adjustment. The forced
handover direction is definite, i.e. 1800M sector in the same direction. To
avoid influence on other cells, the forced handover is performed only for
Description a specific object cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.20 CCN supported (CCNSupport)

Full name CCN Support
Abbreviation CCNSupport
3GPP Name CCN-ACTIVE
CNN mode refers to cell alternating notificaiton. When BSS supports CCN
mode, if MS does cell reselection in NC0 and NC1 modes, PACKET CELL
CHANGE NOTIFICATION message notification shall be delivered to network
in normal case. After network receives this message, it can send specific
Description system message about standby cell to MS.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
5-196

Relationship None
5.6.2.21 The number of C/I limited cell (CILimitedNum)

Full name The number of C/I limited cell
Abbreviation CILimitedNum
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the number C/I limited adjacent cells of the service cell.
Description
Management
Object Cell
Value Range 0~5
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
5.6.2.22 The objectID list of C/I limited cell

Full name The objectID list of C/I limited cell
Abbreviation LimitedObjectId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-197

This parameter gives the index list of C/I limited adjacent cells.
Description
Management
Object Cell
Value Range For C/I limited adjacent cells, the value range is 0 ~ 255.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
5.6.2.23 The threshold list of C/I limited cell

Full name The threshold list of C/I limited cell
Abbreviation CILimitedThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter gives the threshold list of C/I limited adjacent cells.
Description
Management
Object Cell
Value Range For C/I limited adjacent cells, the value range is 0 ~ 63.
Unit None
Default value 63
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features None
Relevant
parameters None
5-198

Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
Impact on
service None
5.6.3 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters

The interface of adjacent cell handover parameters is shown in Figure 5-25.
Figure 5-25 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters
5.6.3.1 Adjacent cell handover object ID (HoObjectId)

Full name Adjacent cell handover object ID
Abbreviation HoObjectId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter is a unique identification of adjacent cell handover object.
Value Range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
5-199

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.2 Priority of handover (HoPriority)

Full name Priority of handover
Abbreviation HoPriority
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, cell priority shall be considered in sequenc-

ing candidate cells. Therefore, there are three decisive factors to sequence
the candidate cells: priority, traffic, and radio conditions. Priority and traffic
affect the cell sequencing most. If they lead to the same result, sequence
the cells according to the radio conditions. The larger the value, the higher
Description level of priority.
Value Range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.3 Max power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax)

Full name Max power level of MS
Abbreviation MsTxPwrMax
5-200


When BSC controls the power, the parameter is the maximum transmission
power that can be used by MS in the cell. MS max power level is also a
parameter used by BSC to calculate PBGT value.
Value Range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.6.3.4 Min power level for handover access (RxLevMin)

Full name Min power level for handover access
Abbreviation RxLevMin
5-201

This parameter defines the minimum receiving intensity level (on BCCH)
required for MS to handover to this cell. It is one of parameters to decide
preferred cells during handover control. MS in the serving cell constantly
monitors the signal intensity on BCCH of adjacent cells. Adjacent cells
with the minimum receiving intensity level higher than this parameter are
potential candidates for handover. MS with receiving level larger than
minimum receiving level indicates that MS is at the edge of the serving cell.
cells, MIN access level increases the resulting C1 and C2 to decrease the
cell effective coverage range. However, the value of this parameter cannot
be too large. Otherwise, large value change can bring ‘void area’ across
cell boundaries to result in sudden call drop problem. With this measure for
traffic balance, it is suggested that the level value shall not exceed -90dB.
At the preliminary running stage of the network, this parameter can be
usually set as 10 (that is, -101 dBm ~ -100 dBm) or lower, which is higher
than the MS receiving sensitivity –102 dBm. However, when the network
capacity is expanded or the radio coverage in a cell is not a problem, this
Description parameter of the cell can be increased by 2 (dB).
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
......
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.6.3.5 Min threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT (HoMarginPbgt)

Full name Min threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT
5-202

Abbreviation HoMarginPbgt
3GPP Name None

received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The PBGT
value of an adjacent cell is also one of the causes for handover. The
decision process is as follows: If the PBGT value of an adjacent cell is
greater than the relevant threshold of this cell, handover shall be performed
to find a more suitable cell.
This parameter defines the threshold used to determine PBGT handover
Description from an adjacent cell to local cell.
0 ~ 100
l 0: -24 dB
l 1: -23 dB
......
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.6.3.6 Min threshold of signal level for handover on power level (HoMarginRxLev)
Full name Min threshold of signal level for handover on power level
Abbreviation HoMarginRxLev
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

the level, adjacent cells shall be screened and sequenced. This parameter
defines the signal strength threshold to determine handover from adjacent
Description cell to local cell.
5-203

0 ~ 100
l 0: -24 dB
l 1: -23 dB
......
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.6.3.7 Min threshold of signal level for handover on quality (HoMarginRxQual)

Full name Min threshold of signal level for handover on quality
Abbreviation HoMarginRxQual
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

the quality, adjacent cells shall be screened and sequenced. This parameter
defines the signal quality threshold to determine handover from adjacent cell
Description to local cell.
0 ~ 100
l 0: -24 dB
l 1: -23 dB
......
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
5-204


Relationship None
5.6.3.8 Max level difference of force handover (MaxForceHoDiff)

Full name Max level difference of force handover
Abbreviation MaxForceHoDiff
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In order to avoid handover oscillations in cells, a tolerable level difference

for forced handover is required, which shall be lower than PBGT handover
threshold in the reverse direction. This parameter defines the maximum level
Description difference value for forced handover.
Value Range 0 ~ 48
Unit None
Default value 9
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.9 Handover force resource threshold (HoForceResThs)

Full name Handover force resource threshold
Abbreviation HoForceResThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-205

Directed handover should not cause congestion in the destination cell. When
resource of object cell is lower than the congestion threshold, forced han-
Description dover can be implemented.
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.10 Neighboring cell layer (NCellLayer)
Full name Neighboring cell layer
Abbreviation NCellLayer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter provides the handover policies in multilayer network

technology and dual-frequency network technology. Multilayer radio
coverage can be formed in the same physical area.
The handover policies will not be detailed in this manual. In brief, limiting the
PBGT handover defined in the specifications at one layer can reduce the
number of handovers during the call, thus improving the system reliability
and communication quality. The policy of handover between a macro cell
layer and a micro cell layer mainly depends on the moving speed of MS. An
MS at higher moving speed will try to stay at the macro cell layer (upper
layer of the micro cell layer), and an MS at lower moving speed will try to
enter the micro cell layer (lower layer of the macro cell layer). Only in case
of PBGT handover and handover towards undefined layer being allowed
will the undefined cell of the service area be considered as a candidate cell.
"Same layer of the home cell": Adjacent cell and local cell are in the
same layer (PBGT handover is possible). "Upper layer of the home cell":
Adjacent cell is the upper layer of local cell (when the local cell is a micro
cell). "Lower layer of the home cell": Adjacent cell is the lower layer of local
Description cell (when the local cell is a macro cell). For details, refer to Appendix.
5-206

Undefined, Same layer of the home cell, Upper layer of the home cell, Lower
Value Range layer of the home cell
Unit None
Default value Same layer of the home cell
Change mode Offline
ZGO-02-02-001 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells

Relationship None

Ajacent cells are reported according to the following priorities:

cell.
Description UTRAN/FDD, or frequency band such as GSM 900, the cell with high
5-207

(or XXXRprtOffsetCS) is preferred.
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 75
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-208

5.6.3.13 Handover threshold from macro to micro (MacroMicroHoThs, dbm)

Full name Handover threshold from macro to micro
Abbreviation MacroMicroHoThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter specifies the cell's signal strength threshold for handover
Description
between macro-cell and micro-cell.
l > -48 dBm

l -50 ~ -49 dBm
......
Value Range
l -109 ~ -108 dBm
l -110 ~ -109 dBm
l < -110 dBm
Unit dBm
Default value -91 dBm ~ -90 dBm
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.14 Counter of Handover Threshold from Macro to Micro (MacroMicroHoN)

Full name Counter of handover threshold from macro to micro
Abbreviation MacroMicroHoN
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This counter counts the number of the signal strength being higher than
Description
the macro-micro handover threshold value.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
5-209

Relationship None
5.6.3.15 The direction fo neighbour cell (NCellDir)

Full name The direction of neighbour cell
Abbreviation NCellDir
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter identifies the direction relation between adjacent cell and local
Description
cell. You can set the direction information for each adjacent cell.
Management
Object Cell
Value Range Direction A, Direction B, No direction
Unit None
Default value No direction
Change mode Offline
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
5.6.3.16 Is related cell (IsRelatedCell)

Full name Is related cell
Abbreviation IsRelatedCell
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-210

Only the cell related to the serving cell can be a candidate in rapid fading
handover. This is a parameter of adjacent cell and is used to indicate whether
Description adjacent cell is related to the serving cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.17 Is handover forced neighbor cell (IsHoForceNcell)

Full name Is handover forced neighbor cell
Abbreviation IsHoForceNcell
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
In the case of 1800M and 900M network sharing site, it is better to handover
subscribers of 900M network to 1800M network. At this time, you can do
directional handover traffic.
Forced handover is a method for on-site traffic adjustment. The forced
handover direction is definite, i.e. 1800M sector in the same direction. To
avoid influence on other cells, the forced handover is performed only for
Description a specific object cell.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-211


Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description User can click Select to select cell or external cell.
Value Range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.4 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters

The interface of adjacent cell reselection parameters is shown in Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters
5-212

5.6.4.1 Adjacent cell reselection object ID (ReSelObjectId)

Full name Adjacent cell reselection object ID
Abbreviation ReSelObjectId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter is a unique identification of adjacent cell reselection object.
Value Range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.4.2 Adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)

Full name Adjacent cell report priority
This parameter indicates adjacent cell report priority, broadcasted to MS in

SI2quater, PSI3ter and PSI3quater. It corresponds to adjacent cell list, indi-
Description cating the priority of measurement report in adjacent cell.
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-213


Full name CCN supported
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
DN (BssId-SiteId-BtsId-Hold) of the handover cell or DN (EcId) of the

external cell.
Description User can click Select to select cell or external cell.
Value Range None
5-214

Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.5 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters

The interface of UTRAN adjacent cell handover and reselection parameters is as shown
in Figure 5-27.
Figure 5-27 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters
5.6.5.1 Adjacent UTRAN cell handover and reselection object ID (S3GHoRSObjectId)

Full name Adjacent UTRAN cell handover and reselection object ID
Abbreviation S3GHoRSObjectId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
5-215

This parameter is a unique identification of UTRAN adjacent cell handover

Description and reselection object.
Value Range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.5.2 RSCP offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell (HoRSCPOffset3G)

Full name RSCP offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell
Abbreviation HoRSCPOffset3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that

UTRAN adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE
communication within it.
This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity for
uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a
Description UE to handover to different adjacent cells.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-216

5.6.5.3 Ec/No offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell (HoEcNoOffset3G)

Full name Ec/No offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell
Abbreviation HoEcNoOffset3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that

UTRAN adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE
communication within it.
This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity for
uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a
Value Range 0 ~ 49
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5-217


cell.
Description (or XXXRprtOffsetCS) is preferred.
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.5.5 PS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)

Full name PS adjacent cell report priority
5-218


and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoPSXXX.
cell.
Description (or XXXRprtOffsetPS) is preferred.
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5-219

Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 75
Change mode Offline
5-220

Relationship None
5.6.5.8 Relation DN
Full name Relation DN
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to determine DN of the UTRAN external cell.

Description User can click Select to select the cell.
Value Range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.6 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters

The interface of UTRAN adjacent cell handover parameters is shown in Figure 5-28.
5-221

Figure 5-28 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters
5.6.6.1 UTRAN HO ID (S3GHoObjectId)

Full name UTRAN HO ID
Abbreviation S3GHoObjectId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is a unique identification of UTRAN adjacent cell handover

Description object.
Value Range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.6.2 RSCP offset handover (HoRSCPOffset3G)

Full name RSCP offset handover
5-222

Abbreviation HoRSCPOffset3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that UTRAN
adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE communica-
tion within it. This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity
for uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.6.3 Ec/No offset handover (HoEcNoOffset3G)

Full name Ec/No offset handover
Abbreviation HoEcNoOffset3G
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that UTRAN
adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE communica-
tion within it. This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity
for uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a
Value Range 0 ~ 49
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
5-223

Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the priority of CS adjacent cell report. Priorities of the adjacent

cell are as follows:
1. Adjacent cell with same frequency band as the serving cell. These cells
must have the following features:
l BSIC of color code is valid.
l Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same fre-
quency band and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified
by RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents the frequency band dif-
ferent from that of serving cell.
2. Adjacent cells at different frequency band from the serving cell. These
cells must have the following features:
l BSIC of color code is valid.
l Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same fre-
quency band and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified
by RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents the frequency band dif-
ferent from that of serving cell.
3. Other access technologies, such as WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells. These
cells must have the following features:
l The cell's scramble is correct.
l Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells with the same
access technologies, such as WCDMA/FDD, and is larger than or
equal to the lower limit specified by XXXRprtThoCS. Here, XXX rep-
resents access technologies like WCDMA/FDD.
4. The remaining GSM adjacent cells which have valid BSIC, or GSM ad-
jacent cells with permitted NCC but invalid BCC, or adjacent cells with
other access technologies such as WCDMA/FDD. if such a cell’s Rep-
PrioCS and REPORTING_RATE are low, then the reporting frequency
is low too.
Description For the above priorities:
5-224

l If the priority’s location has surplus, then leave it to adjacent cell of the
next priority.
l For access technology such as WCDMA/FDD or frequency band such
as GSM900, the cell with higher RepPrioCS is preferred.
l For cells with same RepPrioCS, the cell with the larger sum of Rprt-
ThoCSXXX (or XXXRprtThoCS) and RprtOffsetCSXXX (or XXXRprtOff-
setCS) is preferred.
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Value Range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 75
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-225

5.6.6.6 Relation DN
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to determine DN of the UTRAN external cell.

Value Range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.7 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters

The interface of UTRAN adjacent cell reselection parameters is shown in Figure 5-29.
Figure 5-29 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters
5-226

5.6.7.1 Adjacent UTRAN cell reselection object ID (S3GrsObjectId)

Full name Adjacent UTRAN cell reselection object ID
Abbreviation S3GrsObjectId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is a unique identification of UTRAN adjacent cell reselection

Description object.
Value Range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.7.2 CS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)


Ajacent cells are reported according to the following priorities:
Description and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoPSXXX.
5-227

cell.
(or XXXRprtOffsetPS) is preferred.
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
5-228

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.7.4 Relation DN
Abbreviation None
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
DN (BssId-SiteId-BtsId-Hold) of the handover cell or DN (EcId) of the

external cell.
Value Range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.7 Frequency Hopping System Parameters

The interface of frequency hopping system parameters is shown in Figure 5-30.
5-229

Figure 5-30 Frequency Hopping System Parameters
5.7.1 Frequency hopping No. (FhsId)

Full name Frequency hopping No.
Abbreviation FhsId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter is a unique identification of frequency hopping system.
Value Range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline

Relevant parameters Frequency No.
Relationship None

5.7.2 Hopping sequence No. (HSN)

Full name Hopping sequence No.
Abbreviation HSN
3GPP Name Hopping sequence number
5-230

According to GSM 05.02 Frequency Hoping Algorithm, MAI is a function of

TDMA Frame number (FN), Hoping Sequence Number (HSN) and Mobile
Allocation Index Offset (MAIO). HSN determines the operation track of
frequencies during the frequency hopping process. Using different HSN
for cells having same MA can avoid frequency utilization conflict between
adjacent cells during the frequency hopping process.
Different timeslots can share the same group of MA and corresponding
HSN. When HSN = 0, it is a special frequency hopping (i.e. circular
frequency hopping)
HSN can be derived from BCC of the cell, because cells using the same
MA also have the same BCCH.
For example, if HSN ∈ [(BCC×6)+1, (BCC×6)+6], then each cell may use
any of the 6 HSNs. The remaining 0 and 49 ~ 63 are used in other special
Description cases. For simple implementation, directly use 0 by default.
Value Range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline

Relationship None

5.7.3 Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode)

Full name Frequency hopping mode
Abbreviation FreqHopMode
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter indicates the mode of frequency hopping.
Value Range RFID freqhop; Base band freqhop
Unit None
5-231

Default value RFID freqhop
Change mode Offline

Hopping GROUP ID (BhGroupId)

Relevant parameters MA frequency list No. (MaFreqNum)
When this parameter's value is Base band freqhop, the BhGroupId

parameter can be set.
When this parameter is set as "RFID freqhop", adding and deleting
Relationship
operation can be performed for the "MA frequency list No. (MaFreqNum)"
parameter. When this parameter is set as "Base band freqhop", the Add
button and the Del button disappear from the interface.

5.7.4 Hopping group ID (BhGroupId)

Full name Hopping group ID
Abbreviation BhGroupId
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the hopping group id.
Value Range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 0, indicating that TRX is not involved in baseband frequency hopping.
Change mode Offline
Relevant parameters Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode)
When the "FreqHopMode" parameter's value is Base band freqhop,

Relationship
this parameter can be set.
Service will be affected. If the parameter is modified, all current

Impact on service services of corresponding frequency point will be interrupted
immediately.
5-232

5.7.5 MA Frequency List Number (MaFreqNum)

Full name MA Frequency List Number
Abbreviation MaFreqNum
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter provides a list of absolute RF channel number in a

frequency hopping group. It is a CA sub-set of the home cell. The related
information will be notified to MS when MS is notified of which channel
should be used.
Description User can click Add or Del to perform adding or deleting operation.
Value Range Based on frequency setting
Unit None
Default value Based on frequency setting
Change mode Offline

ZGO-04-03-004 Baseband Frequency Hopping
Relevant Features ZGO-04-03-002 Support of 64 Frequencies Hopping
Relevant parameters Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode)
When the "FreqHopMode" parameter is set as "RFID freqhop", adding

and deleting operation can be performed for this parameter. When the
Relationship
"FreqHopMode" parameter is set as "Base band freqhop", the Add button
and the Del button disappear from the interface.

5-233

5-234

Chapter 6
System Control Parameters
Table of Contents
Operation Control Parameters....................................................................................6-1
FUC Parameters ......................................................................................................6-23
Handover Parameters of BCCH ...............................................................................6-28
Handover Parameters of SD.....................................................................................6-32
IBS Parameters........................................................................................................6-48
Performance Management Parameters ....................................................................6-50
Baseband Frequency Hopping TRX Exchange Parameters......................................6-54
GPRS Operation Control Parameters .......................................................................6-57
6.1 Operation Control Parameters

The interface of Operation Control Parameters for system control is shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 Operation Control Parameters
6-1

6.1.1 Assign query enable (AssQueEnable)

Full name Assign query enable
Abbreviation AssQueEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Whether queuing is allowed if it fails to obtain channel in assignment.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit Yes
Default value Allow
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.2 Internal redirection enable (InDrEnable)

Full name Internal redirection enable
Abbreviation InDrEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Determine if to allow channel request from other cells in BSC if no any

Description
channel is requested.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-2

Chapter 6 System Control Parameters
6.1.3 Outer redirection enable (OutDrEnable)

Full name Outer redirection enable
Abbreviation OutDrEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Determine if to allow channel request from the cells out of BSC if no any
Description
channel is requested.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.4 Assign preemption enable (AssPreEmpt)

Full name Assign preemption enable
Abbreviation AssPreEmpt
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Determine if to allow preemption of the channel occupied by the subscriber

Description
with lower priority if no any channel is requested.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
6-3

Relationship None
6.1.5 BSC intracell handover enable (HoIntraEnable)

Full name BSC intracell handover enable
Abbreviation HoIntraEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to allow intra-cell handover.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.6 BSC intercell handover enable (HoInterEnable)

Full name BSC cell handover enable
Abbreviation HoInterEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to allow inter-cell handover.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
6-4

Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.7 BSC outer handover enable (HoOutEnable)

Full name BSC outer handover enable
Abbreviation HoOutEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to enable BSC outer handover
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.8 SDCCH handover enable (ShoEnable)

Full name SDCCH handover enable
Abbreviation ShoEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to enable SDCCH handover
6-5

Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.9 TCH/F handover enable (TfHoEnable)

Full name TCH/F handover enable
Abbreviation TfHoEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to enable TCH/F handover
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.10 TCH/H handover enable (ThHoEnable)

Full name TCH/H handover enable
Abbreviation ThHoEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
6-6

Description Determine if to enable TCH/H handover
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.11 Handover queue enable (HoQueEnable)

Full name Handover queue enable
Abbreviation HoQueEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to enable handover queue
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.12 Handover preemption enable (HoPreEmpt)

Full name Handover preemption enable
Abbreviation HoPreEmpt
6-7

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to allow forced release.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.13 Handover check arithmetic choose (HoA)

Full name Handover check arithmetic choose
Abbreviation HoA
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It is used to identify which kind of handover decision algorithm is used.

0: DZD handover algorithm 1
Description
......
10: reserved
Value Range [0, 10]
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-8

6.1.14 Handover request response (HoAck)

Full name Handover request response
Abbreviation HoAck
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if MSC shall respond messages on BSC outer handover
Value Range No Need, Need
Unit None
Default value No need
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.15 Force FACCH (FacchOnly)

Full name Force FACCH
Abbreviation FacchOnly
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
First use TCH/F service channel on immediate assignment of channel

Description
request.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
6-9

Relationship None
6.1.16 Continuum handover trigger (HoTrigger)

Full name Continuum handover trigger
Abbreviation HoTrigger
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description For internal use, assign the number of handover
Value Range [0, 65535]
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.17 Handover reason tip (HoCauseInd)

Full name Handover reason tip
Abbreviation HoCauseInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description For internal use, assign the reason of handover
6-10

[0, 7]
0: no handover
Value Range
1 ~ 2: inra-cell handover
3 ~ 7: inter-cell handover or external handover
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.18 Local cell position number (LAC)

Full name Local cell position number
Abbreviation LAC
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description For internal use, assign the position number at local cell on handover.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.19 Local cell identification (CI)

Full name Local cell identification
6-11

Abbreviation CI
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description For internal use, assign the number of local cell on handover.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.20 Outer cell target number (OutCellNum)

Full name Outer cell target number
Abbreviation OutCellNum
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description For internal use, assign the number of external target cell on handover.
Value Range [0, 3]
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-12

6.1.21 Outer cell position number 1 (OutLAC1)

Full name Outer cell position number 1
Abbreviation OutLAC1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
For internal use, assign the position number 1 of external target cell on
Description
handover.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description
handover.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-13


3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description
handover.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.24 Outer cell number 1 (OutCI1)

Full name Outer cell number 1
Abbreviation OutCI1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description For internal use, assign the number 1 of external target cell on handover.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
6-14

Relationship None

Abbreviation OutCI2
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

Abbreviation OutCI3
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Unit None
6-15

Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.27 Outer RNC 1 (OutRNC1)

Full name Outer RNC 1
Abbreviation OutRNC1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description For internal use, assign the RNC_ID 1 of external 3G target cell on handover.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
6-16

Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.30 Old BSS to new BSS information (OldToneWctrl)

Full name Old BSS to new BSS information
Abbreviation OldToneWctrl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
6-17

It describes the content that shall be sent for "Old BSS to New BSS
Description
information" information in HANDOVER REQUIRED message.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.31 Access Control (AccessCtrl)

Full name Access Control
Abbreviation AccessCtrl
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to do access control
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.32 Resume set option (ResumeSetOpt)

Full name Resume set option
6-18

Abbreviation ResumeSetOpt
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to enable RESUME switch.
Value Range Open, Close
Unit None
Default value Close
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.33 Handout queue sign (HandOutQueInd)

Full name Handout queue sign
Abbreviation HandOutQueInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Identify if to allow queue on inter-BSC handover.
Value Range Handout queue disable, Handout queue enable
Unit None
Default value Handout queue disable
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-19

6.1.34 Send cell prefer indication (SendCellPreferInd)

Full name Send cell prefer indication
Abbreviation SendCellPreferInd
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to include Cell Prefer Ind in full layer 3 message
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.35 IPA AMR start mode (IpaAMRStartMode)

Full name IPA AMR start mode
Abbreviation IpaAMRStartMode
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Start rate used by IPA AMR
Value Range Default, Max speed
Unit None
Default value Default
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-20

6.1.36 TDD cell handover enable (TdHoEnable)

Full name TDD cell handover enable
Abbreviation TdHoEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if to allow TDD cell handover
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.37 Sending HO detect message to MSC during intra-BSC HO

with IPA (InBscHoSendHoDet)
Full name Sending HO detect message to MSC during intra-BSC HO with IPA
Abbreviation InBscHoSendHoDet
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
For intra-BSC handover with IPA, when the link establishment indication is
received, if the newly requested voice version is different from the old voice
version, it is necessary to send the handover detect message to MSC to
reduce the no-voice duration in a call. If the handover detect message has
Description
been sent when IPA is sent to MSC, and if the handover failure message is
received (the intra-cell handover failure is due to assignment failure), it is
necessary to send the handover failure message to MSC.
6-21

Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.1.38 ICM optimize when intra BSC handover (AmrHoOpt_0)

Full name ICM optimize when intra BSC handover
Abbreviation AmrHoOpt_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether ICM optimization should be performed for

intra-BSC handover. If this parameter is set as 'Yes', when the response
message for pre-handover notification is returned from BTS, BSC sends ICM
Description and startmode, which are contained in the handover command message, to
MS, and the two values are those in the response message for pre-handover
notification. Otherwise, the two values are those set at background.
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-22

6.1.39 ICM optimize when inter BSC handover (AmrHoOpt_1)

Full name ICM optimize when inter BSC handover
Abbreviation AmrHoOpt_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether ICM optimization should be performed for

inter-BSC handover. If this parameter is set as 'Yes', when the response
message for pre-handover notification is returned from BTS, BSC sends ICM
Description and startmode, which are contained in the handover command message, to
MS, and the two values are those in the response message for pre-handover
notification. Otherwise, the two values are those set at background.
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.2 FUC Parameters

The interface of FUC Parameters for system control is shown in Figure 6-2.
6-23

Figure 6-2 FUC Parameters
6.2.1 Use system message method when MSC overload or link

block (MSCSysInfoFlc)
Full name Use system message method when MSC overload or link block
Abbreviation MSCSysInfoFlc
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
FUC is done by system message method while all MSC overloaded or SP

congested (FUC shall be started for this kind of overload).
Use system message method, that is, disable some MSs from accessing
Description
network according to the ACCN parameter in system message. Use FUC
method, that is, disable some MSs from accessing network according to the
number of random access on RACH.
Value Range System message method, FUC method
Unit None
Default value FUC method
Change mode Offline
6-24

Relationship None
6.2.2 Start system message method (CPUSysInfoFlc)

Full name Start system message method
Abbreviation CPUSysInfoFlc
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Enable system message method if CPU utilization of CMP increases up to

Description
the CPU threshold o system message control method.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.2.3 Start system message method, start limit(%)

(CPUSysInfoCTLCPU)
Full name Start limit of system message method
Abbreviation CPUSysInfoCTLCPU
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
FUC caused by CPU utilization of CMP uses CPU threshold of system

message control method. It means if CPU utilization exceeds this threshold
Description
and "Start system message method" parameter is Yes, FUC can be done
by system message control method.
6-25

Unit %
Default value 65
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.2.4 Start FUC flow control (CPUFucFlc)

Full name Start FUC flow control
Abbreviation CPUFucFlc
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Enable FUC flow control if CPU utilization of CMP increases up to the CPU
Description
threshold of FUC flow control method.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.2.5 Start limit of FUC flow control (CPUFucCtlCPU, %)

Full name Start limit of FUC flow control
Abbreviation CPUFucCtlCPU
6-26

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
FUC caused by CPU utilization of CMP uses CPU threshold of FUC control
Description method. It means if CPU utilization exceeds this threshold and Start FUC
flow control parameter is Yes, flow can be controlled by FUC flow control.
Unit %
Default value 75
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.2.6 The maximum control level for MSC overload or link block
(MSCFlcMaxLevel)
Full name The maximum control level for MSC overload or link block (MSCFlcMaxLevel)
Abbreviation MSCFlcMaxLevel
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates allowed maximum control level while MSC is overloaded or link is

Description
blocked.
Value Range [0, 10]
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-27

6.3 Handover Parameters of BCCH

The interface of Handover Parameters of BCCH for system control is shown in Figure
6-3.
Figure 6-3 Handover Parameters of BCCH
6.3.1 Handover BCCH (CanBCCHEx)

Full name Handover BCCH
Abbreviation CanBCCHEx
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to indicate if dynamic configured BCCH function is enabled

by BSC. When this function is enabled, network can enable dynamic configured
Description
BCCH function. Specially, for which cell can enable this function, it is based on if
the cell can dynamically enable dynamically configured BCCH function.
Management
Object BSC
Value Range Yes/No
6-28

Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features ZGO-03-04-001 Automatic BCCH Recovery
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
6.3.2 Scan BCCH (ScanBCCH)

Full name Scan BCCH
Abbreviation ScanBCCH
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to indicate the scanning duration for idle BCCH channel
by the network when dynamic configured BCCH function is enabled in the cell.
When network enables dynamic configured BCCH function, the network may
Description
periodically check idle BCCH carrier state in the cell according to this parameter,
to decide conversion condition. This parameter can reflect response time for this
case due to network BCCH carrier failure.
Management
Object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 3000
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
6-29

6.3.3 BCCH starting delay (BCCHDelay)

Full name BCCH starting delay
Abbreviation BCCHDelay
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The initial delay for BCCH switchover. The user shall check the state of BCCH
Description carrier after timer timeout. Formally start switchover flow if switchover is required
indeed.
Management
Object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 1200
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
6.3.4 BCCH finishing delay (ReBCCHEx)

Full name BCCH finishing delay
Abbreviation ReBCCHEx
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
The initial delay for BCCH switchover. The user shall check the state of BCCH
Description carrier after timer timeout. Formally start switchover flow if switchover is required
indeed.
6-30

Management
Object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 1200
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
6.3.5 Delay of TRX forcible release (TrxRel)

Full name Delay of TRX forcible release
Abbreviation TrxRel
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates delay of TRX forcible release. During BCCH handover, if you select
the carrier with existing service as BCCH carrier after handover, you can inform
Description
the service and handover to other carrier. Release the service on this carrier
after timer is timeout.
Management
Object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
6-31

Related
interfaces None
6.3.6 The MAX cells' amount of simultaneously handover

(MaxChangeProc)
Full name The MAX cells' amount of simultaneously handover
Abbreviation MaxChangeProc
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It controls the MAX number of cells that can be handovered simultaneously in a

Description
module.
Management
Object BSC
Value Range [1, 8]
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
6.4 Handover Parameters of SD

The interface of Handover Parameters of SD for system control is shown in Figure 6-4.
6-32

Figure 6-4 Handover Parameters of SD
6.4.1 Dynamic configuration SDCCH (CanSDCCHDyn)

Full name Dynamic configuration SDCCH
Abbreviation CanSDCCHDyn
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to indicate if dynamic configured SDCCH function is

enabled by BSC. When this function is enabled, network can enable dynamic
Description
configured SDCCH function. Specially, for which cell can enable this function, it is
based on if the cell can dynamically enable dynamic configured SDCCH function.
Management
Object BSC
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Features ZGB-03-02-003 Dynamic Configuration of SDCCH
Relevant
parameters None
6-33

Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
6.4.2 Scan SDCCH (ScanSDCCH)

Full name Scan SDCCH
Abbreviation ScanSDCCH
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to indicate the scanning duration for idle SDCCH channel
by the network when dynamic configured SDCCH function is enabled in the cell.
When network enables dynamic configured SDCCH function, the network may
Description
periodically check idle SDCCH channels in the cell according to this parameter, to
decide conversion condition. This parameter can reflect response time for this
case due to insufficient SDCCH channel resource.
Management
Object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
6.4.3 Delay of TS forcible release (TsRel)

Full name Delay of TS forcible release
Abbreviation TsRel
6-34

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates delay of TS forcible release. During dynamic config SDCCH converted

Description to TCH, first handover the service on this timeslot to other timeslots, and release
the service on this timeslot after timer is timeout.
Management
Object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
6.4.4 Delay protection (MaxDelay)

Full name Delay protection
Abbreviation MaxDelay
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is delay protection timer, which is used to indicate response

timeout timer after waiting for BTS configuration finishing while dynamic config
Description
BCCH or SDCCH function is enabled and dynamic conversion condition is met.
Restart flow after timer is timeout.
Management
Object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 1800
Change mode Offline
6-35

Relevant ZGO-03-04-001 Automatic BCCH Recovery, ZGB-03-02-003 Dynamic

Features Configuration of SDCCH
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
6.4.5 TCH->SDCCH limit (MinSDCCH)

Full name TCH->SDCCH limit
Abbreviation MinSDCCH
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to indicate if dynamic configured SDCCH function is

Description enabled and conversion threshold from TCH to SDCCH. Only when idle SDCCH
is lower than this threshold, the conversion from TCH to SDCCH can be done.
Management
Object BSC
Value Range [2, 64]
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
6.4.6 SDCCH->TCH delay (TimeToTch)

Full name SDCCH->TCH delay
6-36

Abbreviation TimeToTch
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to enable dynamic config SDCCH function in the cell.
After TCH is dynamically converted to SDCCH channel and SDCCH channel is
Description idle, to prevent from frequent channel conversion, a time limit will be added for
the conversion from SDCCH channel to TCH channel. During this limit, SDCCH
channel can not be converted to TCH channel.
Management
Object BSC
Value Range [0, 24]
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relevant
Relevant
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None

The interface of Other Parameters for system control is shown in Figure 6-5.
6-37

6.5.1 B2 support AMR (V2TruSupportAMR)

Full name B2 support AMR
Abbreviation V2TruSupportAMR
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
if B2 carrier on BTSV2 site supports AMR voice algorithm determines if

Description
service on B2 carrier can use AMR voice version.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-38

6.5.2 CHR Enable (ChrEnable)

Full name CHR Enable
Abbreviation ChrEnable
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if call history record function is enabled.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.3 NC2 support (NC2support)

Full name NC2 support
Abbreviation NC2support
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if to support NC2.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
6-39

Relationship None
6.5.4 MR server IP (MRSvrIP)

Full name MR server IP
Abbreviation MRSvrIP
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description MR server IP
Value Range Input IP with 4 bytes, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx is 0~255)
Unit None
Default value 0.0.0.0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.5 MR server port (MRSvrPort)

Full name MR server port
Abbreviation MRSvrPort
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description MR server TCP port
Unit None
Default value 0
6-40

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.6 BER weight (VoiceQualWeight_0)

Full name BER Weight
Abbreviation VoiceQualWeight_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Voice quality inspects the weight of influence factors. This parameter

Description indicates BER weight. The system calculate the weight of voice quality level
while adding or reducing these influence factors.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.7 FER weight (VoiceQualWeight_1)

Full name FER Weight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
6-41


Description indicates FER weight. The system calculates the weight of voice quality level
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.8 Handover frequency weight (VoiceQualWeight_2)

Full name Handover frequence weight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Description indicates handover frequency weight. The system calculate the weight of
voice quality level while adding or reducing these influence factors.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-42

6.5.9 DTX weight (VoiceQualWeight_3)

Full name DTX weight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Description indicates DTX weight. The system calculate the weight of voice quality level
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.10 Coding decode weight (VoiceQualWeight_4)

Full name Coding decode weight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Description indicates coding decode weight. The system calculate the weight of voice
quality level while adding or reducing these influence factors.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
6-43

Relationship None
6.5.11 ABIS transmission error code weight (VoiceQualWeight_5)

Full name ABIS transmission error code weight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Description indicates the weight of Abis transmission error code. The system calculate the
weight of voice quality level while adding or reducing these influence factors.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.12 Delay weight (VoiceQualWeight_6)

Full name Delay weight
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None

Description indicates delay weight. The system calculate the weight of voice quality level
6-44

Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.13 A port resource block threshold (Reslimit_0)

Full name A port resource block threshold
Abbreviation Reslimit_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It describes proportion threshold while alarm occurs by PCM at A-interface.
Unit %
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.14 NSVC resource block threshold (Reslimit_1)

Full name NSVC resource block threshold
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
6-45

Description It describes proportion threshold while alarm occurs by NSVC at Gb interface.
Unit %
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.15 Channel resource block threshold (Reslimit_2)

Full name Channel resource block threshold
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It describes proportion threshold while alarm occurs in radio channel.
Unit %
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.16 Subcell busy threshold (Reslimit_3)

Full name Subcell busy threshold
6-46

3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
Description It is used as constraint condition for traffic shift and frag concentration.
Unit %
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.5.17 ABIS alarm delay time (AbisAlmDelayTime)

Full name ABIS alarm delay time
Abbreviation AbisAlmDelayTime
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
On disconnection at Abis, if the time from disconnection to recovery is shorter

Description
than the delay time, do not send the disconnection alarm.
Value Range [0, 60]
Unit Second
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-47

6.5.18 DTX factor (Info_0_8)

Full name DTX factor
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
If the cell is IP access, MS uses DTX mode, and downlink discontinuous

Description transmission is enabled, the final allocated Abis bandwidth equals to normal
service bandwidth multiplied by this factor.
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Uplink discontinuous transmission (DtxUplinkBcch), Downlink discontinuous

Relevant parameters
transmission (DtxDwlink)
If MS shall use DTX mode and downlink discontinuous transmission is

Relationship
enabled, this parameter is valid.
6.6 IBS Parameters

The interface of IBS Parameters for system control is shown in Figure 6-6.
6-48

Figure 6-6 IBS Parameters
6.6.1 The method of intelligent TRX power off (Info_0_0)

Full name The method of intelligent TRX power off
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When IBS shutdown function is enabled, this parameter indicates the decision
Description
condition applied to select shutdown TRX.
Value Range The traffic of each line, peak value occupied by the channel
Unit None
Default value The traffic of each line
Change mode Offline
Relevant Features ZGO-04-04-002 Intelligent TRX Shutdown
Relationship None
6-49

6.7 Performance Management Parameters

The interface of Performance Management Parameters for system control is shown in
Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7 Performance Management Parameters
6.7.1 PingPong handover duration (PingPongDura, s)

Full name Pingpong handover duration
Abbreviation PingPongDura
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
ping pong handover counter that measures the number of handovers out and
Description
in the original cell within this period.
Value Range [0, 60]
Unit s
6-50

Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.7.2 Number of measurement reports for dropped connections

(LatestMeasureRptNum)
Full name Number of measurement reports for dropped connections
Abbreviation LatestMeasureRptNum
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
On call drops, you shall determine which reason causes the call drop based
Description on average level and quality. This parameter is used to control the average
number.
Value Range [1, 10]
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.7.3 Uplink quality threshold (DropBadQualULThs, RQ)

Full name Uplink quality threshold
Abbreviation DropBadQualULThs
3GPP Name None
6-51

3GPP reference None
On call drops, if uplink quality is better than this threshold, it measures as

Description
call drop due to poor uplink quality.
Value Range [0, 7]
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.7.4 Downlink quality threshold (DropBadQualDLThs, RQ)

Full name Downlink quality threshold
Abbreviation DropBadQualDLThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
On call drops, if downlink quality is better than this threshold, it measures as

Description
call drop due to poor downlink quality.
Value Range [0, 7]
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-52

6.7.5 Uplink signal strength threshold (DropLowSigStrULThs)

Full name Uplink signal strength threshold
Abbreviation DropLowSigStrULThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
On call drops, if uplink level is not more than this threshold, it measures as
Description
call drop due to low uplink level.
Value Range [0, 63]
Unit None
Default value 12
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.7.6 Downlink signal strength threshold (DropLowSigStrDLThs)

Full name Downlink signal strength threshold
Abbreviation DropLowSigStrDLThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
On call drops, if downlink level is not more than this threshold, it measures as
Description
call drop due to low downlink level.
Value Range [0, 63]
Unit None
Default value 12
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-53

6.7.7 Excessive TA threshold (DropExcessiveTAThs)

Full name Excessive TA threshold
Abbreviation DropExcessiveTAThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
On call drops, if the distance (represented by TA value) between MS and

Description network is not less than this threshold, it measures as call drop due to too
distant TA.
Value Range [0, 63]
Unit None
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.8 Baseband Frequency Hopping TRX Exchange

Parameters
The interface of Baseband Frequency Hopping TRX Exchange Parameters for system
control is shown in Figure 6-8.
6-54

Figure 6-8 Baseband Frequency Hopping TRX Exchange Parameters
6.8.1 Baseband frequency hopping TRX exchange support

(Info_0_1)
Full name Baseband frequency hopping TRX exchange support
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates whether baseband hopping TRX exchange is supported. If a TRX

Description fails in baseband hopping set, the system automatically removes failed TRX
from hopping set. If the failed TRX restores, move it into original hopping set.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-55

6.8.2 Baseband Frequency hopping TRX Exchange scan timer

(Info_1_0)
Full name Baseband Frequency hopping TRX Exchange scan timer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
It identifies the exchange period required by periodically scanning the TRX of

Description
baseband frequency hopping.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 3000
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.8.3 Baseband frequency hopping TRX configuration timer

(Info_1_16)
Full name Baseband frequency hopping TRX configuration timer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
After baseband hopping exchange, you shall update the configuration for the
Description
site. This parameter defines the timer to wait for response from the site.
Unit 100 ms
6-56

Default value 1800
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.8.4 Baseband frequency hopping TRX exchange check delay

timer (Info_2_0)
Full name Baseband frequency hopping TRX exchange check delay timer
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When detecting the exchange is required for baseband hopping TRX, the
Description system may delay for a period to check if the exchange is required again.
This parameter defines the delay period.
Unit 100 ms
Default value 600
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.9 GPRS Operation Control Parameters

The interface of Operation Control Parameters for system control is shown in Figure 6-9.
6-57

Figure 6-9 GPRS Operation Control Parameters
6.9.1 Two phase access (TwoPhaseAccess)

Full name Two phase access
Abbreviation TwoPhaseAccess
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether the two phase access mode is used
Description
forcedly.
Value Range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-58

6.9.2 Send radio status to SGSN (GBMsgSndInd_0)

Full name Send radio status to SGSN
Abbreviation GBMsgSndInd_0
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether to send the radio status message to SGSN.
The message is sent in the following cases:
1. MS is not in the coverage range, the message containing the cause
"radio connection with MS is disconnected".
2. Radio quality is too poor, the message containing the cause "radio quality
is not good".
Description 3. The network side requires MS to perform cell reselection, the message
containing the cause "cell reselection command".
4. The network side can not require MS to perform cell reselction or
internal rerouting, the message containing the cause "preparing for cell
reselection".
5. PCCO fails, the message containing the cause "cell reselection failure".
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.9.3 Send LLC discard to SGSN (GBMsgSndInd_1)

Full name Send LLC discard to SGSN
Abbreviation GBMsgSndInd_1
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
6-59

This parameter indicates whether to send discarded LLC frame to SGSN.

When this parameter is set as 'Yes', the message is sent to notify SGSN
Description
of the deleted LLC frame in the cell.
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6.9.4 Threshold of quality in radio status (RadStaQuaThs)

Full name Threshold of quality in radio status
Abbreviation RadStaQuaThs
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
After N3105 overflows, the radio status message is sent to SGSN. The radio
status message contains two types of cause to SGSN: 0 and 1. 0 indicates
the radio connection with MS is disconnected, and 1 indicates the radio
Description quality is poor. Whether the cause value is 0 or 1 depends on the result
of comparing this parameter's value and the radio quality contained in the
downlink ack message.
Value Range [0, 31]
Unit None
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
6-60

Relationship None
6.9.5 Send packet TBF release to MS when BSS abnormal

(PacketTBFRel)
Full name Send packet TBF release to MS when BSS abnormal
Abbreviation PacketTBFRel
3GPP Name None
3GPP reference None
When the network side becomes abnormal, this parameter is used to decide
Description whether the TBF release message should be sent to MS.
Yes/No
Value Range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
6-61

6-62

Appendix A
Flow Control Policy Values
Barred
Overload Class Rxlev_Ac- Penalty Cell select Max-
Level Number cess_Min Time Offset Tx-integer Retrans
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 -1 (255)
2 0 1 0 0 2 -2 (254)
3 1 2 0 -2 (254) 3 -3 (253)
4 2 3 0 -3 (253) 4 -3 (253)
5 3 4 0 -4 (252) 4 -3 (253)
6 4 4 0 -4 (252) 4 -3 (253)
7 5 4 11111 -3 (253) 4 -3 (253)
8 6 4 11111 -2 (254) 4 -3 (253)
9 7 4 11111 -1 (255) 4 -3 (253)
10 8 4 11111 0 4 -3 (253)
11 9 4 11111 0 4 -3 (253)
12 10 4 11111 0 4 -3 (253)
A-1

A-2

Appendix B
Power Values
GSM900 GSM1800
MS Output MS Output
Value Power (dBm) Value Power (dBm)
0~2 39 29 36
3 37 30 34
4 35 31 32
5 33 0 30
... ... ... 1 28
16 11 ... …
17 9 13 4
18 7 14 2
19~31 5 15 ~ 28 0
B-1

B-2

Appendix C
Cell Layer Number Values
Adjacent Cell
GSM GSM
Current Sectoral GSM 900M GSM 900M 1800M 1800M
Cell Cell Macro Cell Micro Cell Macro Cell Micro Cell Pico Cell
Sectoral
Cell N N N N N N
GSM 900M
Macro Cell N SAME LOWER N LOWER LOWER
GSM 900M
Micro Cell N UPPER SAME UPPER N LOWER
GSM
1800M
Macro Cell N N LOWER SAME LOWER LOWER
GSM
1800M Mi-
cro Cell N UPPER N UPPER SAME LOWER
Pico Cell N UPPER N UPPER N N
C-1

C-2

Appendix D
Corresponding Relationship
between Parameter Interface
and Database Values
The following introduces the corresponding relationship between the parameter interface
and parameter values in the database.
Table of Contents
Ÿ BSC Function Parameters Interface........................................................................ D-1
Ÿ GERAN External Cell Parameters .......................................................................... D-8
Ÿ UTRAN External Cell Parameters ........................................................................... D-8
Ÿ Cell Parameters...................................................................................................... D-9
Ÿ Cell Object Parameters......................................................................................... D-19
D.1 BSC Function Parameters Interface

D.1.1 Basic Property Parameters
l Support MNC 3 digits (MNC3Digits)
Interface Value Database Value
2 digits 0
3 digits 1
l Net Type (Net)
CTCN 1
CMCN 2
China Unicom Communication Network

(CUCN) 3
Railway Telecom Network (RLTN) 4
China Netcom (CNC) 5
D-1

National Farm Transition Network (NFTN) 6
Network 7 7
Network 8 8
l SP Type (SpType)
Signaling End Point (SEP) 1
Signaling Transfer Point (STP) 2
Signaling terminal end point (STEP) 3
l Is TC Type (TCType)
Inner TC 0
Outer TC 1
l Global time zone (GlobalTimeZone)
(GMT-12:00) Enewetak, Kwajalein Island -720
(GMT-11:30) Midway Island, Samoan Islands -690
(GMT-11:30) Midway Island, Samoan Islands -660
(GMT-10:30) Hawaii -630
(GMT-10:00) Hawaii -600
(GMT-09:30) Alaska -570
(GMT-09:00) Alaska -540
(GMT-08:30) Western Standard Time (USA

and Canada) -510
(GMT-08:00) Western Standard Time (USA

and Canada) -480
(GMT-07:30) Arizona -450
(GMT-07:00) Arizona -420
(GMT-06:30) Mexico -390
(GMT-06:00) Mexico, Saskatchewan -360
(GMT-05:30) Bogota, Lima -330
D-2

Appendix D Corresponding Relationship between Parameter Inter-
face and Database Values
(GMT-05:00) Bogota, Lima, Eastern Standard

Time (USA and Canada) -300
(GMT-04:30) San Diego -270
(GMT-04:00) San Diego -240
(GMT-03:30) Newfoundlander -210
(GMT-03:00) Brasilia, Buenos Aires -180
(GMT-02:30) Mid-Atlantic -150
(GMT-02:00) Mid-Atlantic -120
(GMT-01:30) Cape Verde Islands, Azores Is-

lands -90
(GMT-01:00) Cape Verde Islands, Azores Is-

lands -60
(GMT-0:30) Greenwich Mean Time, London -30
(GMT) Greenwich Mean Time, London 0
(GMT-0:30) Greenwich Mean Time, London 30
(GMT+01:00) Berlin, Roman, Paris 60
(GMT+01:30) Berlin, Roman, Paris 90
(GMT+02:00) Helsinki, Cairo, Athens 120
(GMT+02:30) Helsinki, Cairo, Athens 150
(GMT+03:00) Baghdad, Kuwait, Riyadh,

Moscow 180
(GMT+03:30) Teheran 210
(GMT+04:00) Baku, Tbilisi 240
(GMT+04:30) Kabul 270
(GMT+05:00) Islamabad, Karachi 300
(GMT+05:30) Calcutta, Madras, Bombay, New

Delhi 330
(GMT+06:00) Alma-ata, Dacca 360
(GMT+06:30) Rangoon 390
(GMT+07:00) Bangkok, Djakarta 420
(GMT+07:30) Bangkok, Djakarta 450
(GMT+08:00) Beijing 480
(GMT+08:30) Beijing 510
(GMT+09:00) Seoul, Tokyo 540
D-3

(GMT+09:30) Adelaide, Darwin 570
(GMT+10:00) Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney,

Guam 600
(GMT+10:30) Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney,

Guam 630
(GMT+11:00) Magadan, The Solomon Islands 660
(GMT+11:30) Magadan, The Solomon Islands 690
(GMT+12:00) Wellington, Marshall Islands 720
(GMT+12:30) Wellington, Marshall Islands 750
(GMT+13:00) Nuku'alofa 780
D.1.2 Radio Basic Property Parameters

l DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt)
DCS1800 0
PCS1900 1
l MSC version ID (MSCVer)
Release 98 or older 0
Release 99 or newer 1
D.1.3 Other Parameters

l Preferred speech version (half) (PreferSpeechVer)
PreferSpeechVer is a jointed field in the database, half-rate is jointed with full-rate.
Jointing mode: adding by bit after shifting
PreferSpeechVer = (PreferSpeechVer_0<<2) + PreferSpeechVer_1

PreferSpeechVer _0: half-rate
PreferSpeechVer _1: full-rate
D-4

Note:
In this manual, the shift jointing mode is expressed by a formula. For instance, (Prefer-
SpeechVer_0<<2) + PreferSpeechVer_1, meaning the value of PreferSpeechVer_0 is shifted
two bits to left and jointed with the value of PreferSpeechVer_1.
Not specify the preferred version 0
Half-rate version 1 1
Half-rate version 3 3
l Preferred speech version (full) (PreferSpeechVer)

PreferSpeechVer is a jointed field in the database, half-rate is jointed with full-rate.
Jointing mode: adding by bit after shifting
PreferSpeechVer = (PreferSpeechVer_0<<2) + PreferSpeechVer_1
PreferSpeechVer _0: half-rate
PreferSpeechVer _1: full-rate
Not specify the preferred version 0
Full-rate version 1 1
l TFOControl
TFOControl is a jointed field in the database. Joining mode: adding by bit after shifting
TFOControl = (TFOControl_3<<3) + (TFOControl_2<<2) + (TFOControl_1<<1) +
TFOControl _0.
TFOControl_0: TFO Enabled
TFOControl_1: coding/decoding type optimization enabled
TFOControl_2: coding/decoding type unmatched enabled
TFOControl_3: AMR optimization mode
D.1.4 AMR Half Method Parameters

l Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM)
IsAmrICM is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with AMR full-rate.
Jointing mode: IsAmrICM (full) + IsAmrICM (half), jointed by string.
D-5

Initial codec mode 0
Startmode codec 1
l Start mode (AmrStartMode)

AmrStartMode is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with AMR
full-rate. Jointing mode: AmrStartMode (full) + AmrStartMode (half), jointed by string.
l Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb)
IsAmrNscb is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate. Jointing
mode: IsAmrNscb (full) + IsAmrNscb (half), jointed by string.
l Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds)
AmrThresholds is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate.
Jointing mode: AmrThresholds (full) + AmrThresholds (half), jointed by string from top
to bottom.
l Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)
AmrHysteresis is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate.
Jointing mode: AmrHysteresis (full) + AmrHysteresis (half), jointed by string from top
to bottom.
D.1.5 AMR Full Method Parameters

l Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM)
IsAmrICM is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with AMR full-rate.
Jointing mode: IsAmrICM (full) + IsAmrICM (half), jointed by string.
Initial codec mode 0
Startmode codec 1
l Start mode (AmrStartMode)

AmrStartMode is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with AMR
full-rate. Jointing mode: AmrStartMode (full) + AmrStartMode (half), jointed by string.
l Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb)
IsAmrNscb is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate. Jointing
mode: IsAmrNscb (full) + IsAmrNscb (half), jointed by string.
l Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds)
AmrThresholds is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate.
Jointing mode: AmrThresholds (full) + AmrThresholds (half), jointed by string from top
to bottom.
D-6

l Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)

AmrHysteresis is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate.
Jointing mode: AmrHysteresis (full) + AmrHysteresis (half), jointed by string from top
to bottom.
D.1.6 GPRS Other Parameters 1

l Cn
Cn is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.
l Nn
Nn is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.
l Xn
Xn is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.
D.1.7 GPRS Other Parameters 2

l NACC supported (NACCSupport)
Not support NACC 0
Support NACC, not support LLC framework

conversion 1
Support NACC, also support LLC framework

conversion. 2
l BSC's net operation mode (NMO)
Network Operation Mode 1 0
l Downlink TBF retry (DITBFRetry)
Not retry 0
Retry 1 times 1
Retry 2 times 2
D-7

D.1.8 EDGE Parameters

l SGSN version ID (SGSNVer)
Release 98 or older 0
Release 99 or newer 1
l R99 Ind (R99Ind)
non-R99 version 0
R99 version 1
D.2 GERAN External Cell Parameters

l Cell type (CellType)
Umbrella cell 0
Macro Cell 1
Micro cell 2
Pico Cell 3
Extended range cell 4
l Frequency band (FreqBand)
GSM900 0
EXT900 1
DCS1800 2
PCS1900 4
GSM850 7
D.3 UTRAN External Cell Parameters

l UTRAN cell type (CellType3G)
FDD 0
D-8

TDD 1
l UTRAN cell Band width(BandWidth3G)
0 (3.84Mcps) 0
1 (1.28Mcps) 1
D.4 Cell Parameters

D.4.1 Basic Parameters 1
l Cell type (CellType)
Umbrella cell 0
Macro Cell 1
Micro cell 2
Pico Cell 3
Extended range cell 4
l Frequency band (FreqBand)
GSM900 0
EXT900 1
DCS1800 2
PCS1900 4
GSM850 7
l Frequency band of subCell (SubFreqBand)
GSM900 0
EXT900 1
DCS1800 2
PCS1900 4
D-9

GSM850 7
l GPRS service supported (PsSupport)
No 0
GPRS service support 1
Support EDGE 2
l Common control channel configuration (CcchConf)
CCCH uses one physical channel, not com-

bined with SDCCH 0
One basic physical channel used by CCCH, use

with SDCCH 1
Two basic physical channels used by CCCH, do

not use with SDCCH 2
Three basic physical channels used by CCCH,

do not use with SDCCH 4
Four basic physical channels used by CCCH,

do not use with SDCCH 6
D.4.2 Basic Parameters 2

l AMR codec adjust mode (AmrAdjMode)
AMR rapid speed mode 0
Adjustment interval for configuration 1
D.4.3 Other Parameters

l CipherMode
CipherMode is a jointed field in the database, consisted of CipherMode-0 ~

CipherMode-7. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
D-10

D.4.4 System Parameters

l InterfBoundary
It is a jointed field in database, consisting of InterfBoundary_0 ~ InterfBoundary_5.
Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
D.4.5 GPRS Other Params1 Parameters

l SI13 sending position (Si13Locate)
BCCH Norm 0
BCCH Ext 1
l Packet access priority threshold (PriAcThr)
Disallow packet access 1
Allow packet access with the priority level 1 2
Allow packet access with the priority level 1-2 3
Allow priority 6
D.4.6 GPRS Cell Options Parameters

l T3168
0.5 0
1 1
1.5 2
2 3
2.5 4
3 5
3.5 6
4 7
l T3192
D-11

500 0
1000 1
1500 2
0 3
80 4
120 5
160 6
200 7
l DRX mode holding time (DrxTimeMax, s)
0 0
1 1
2 2
4 3
8 4
16 5
32 6
64 7
l Packet control acknowledgment type (CtraCKType)
4 access burst 0
RLC/MAC control block 1
l Access burst type (AccessType)
8 bits 0
11 bits 1
l N3102 decrease step (PanDec)
4 0
D-12

8 1
12 2
16 3
20 4
24 5
28 6
32 7
l N3102 increase step (PanInc)
4 0
8 1
12 2
16 3
20 4
24 5
28 6
32 7
l N3102 MAX (PanMax)
4 0
8 1
12 2
16 3
20 4
24 5
28 6
32 7
l GPRS Phone Init Coding

GPRS Phone Init Coding is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode:
1*16Kbps+2~4*16Kbps jointed by string.
l GPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_0)
D-13

InitAttachExch is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: adding InitAttachExch_0

by bit after shifting bit, that is, (InitAttachExch_1<<1)+InitAttachExch_0).
InitAttachExch_0: GPRS phones init code can be changed dynamically.
InitAttachExch_1: EGPRS phones init code can be changed
D.4.7 GPRS NC Survey Parameters

l Packet Idle mode (NcRepPerI, s)
0.48 0
0.96 1
1.92 2
3.84 3
7.68 4
15.36 5
30.72 6
61.44 7
l Packet transmission mode (NcRepPerT, s)
0.48 0
0.96 1
1.92 2
3.84 3
7.68 4
15.36 5
30.72 6
61.44 7
l Network control order (CtrlOrder)
NC0 0
NC1 1
NC2 2
l NC hold time in non-drx mode (NcNoDrxPer, s)
D-14

No non-DRX mode 0
0.24 1
0.48 2
0.72 3
0.96 4
1.2 5
1.44 6
1.92 7
l Extended measurement report order (ExMeaOrder)
EM0 0
EM1 1
l Type of extended measurement report (ExtRepType)
Type 1 0
Type 2 1
Type 3 2
l Report period of extended measurement (ExtRepPer, s)
60 0
120 1
240 2
480 3
960 4
1920 5
3840 6
7680 7
D.4.8 GPRS Power Control Parameters

l Power control measurement channel (PcMeasChan)
D-15

BCCH 0
PDCH 1
D.4.9 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters

l Cell reselection offset(ReselOffset)
ReselOffset is a jointed field in database by ReselOff_0 and ReselOff_1. Jointing
mode: ReselOff_0 + ReselOff_1 jointed by string.
l Temporary offset of cell reselection(TempOffset)
TempOffset is a jointed field in database by TempOffset_0 and TempOffset_1. Jointing
mode: TempOffset_0 + TempOffset_1 jointed by string.
0 0
10 1
20 2
30 3
40 4
50 5
60 6
Large infinite 7
l Penalty time of cell reselection(PenalTime)

PenalTime is a jointed field in database by PenalTime_0 and PenalTime_1. Jointing
mode: PenalTime_0 + PenalTime_1 jointed by string.
l Interval of reselecting the same cell(T_Resel)
T_Resel is a jointed field in database by T_Resel_0 and T_Resel_1. Jointing mode:
T_Resel_0 + T_Resel_1 jointed by string.
5 0
10 1
15 2
20 3
30 4
60 5
D-16

120 6
300 7
l Threshold of HCS signal level(HCS_Thr)

HCS_Thr is a jointed field in database by HCS_Thr_0 and HCS_Thr_1. Jointing mode:
HCS_Thr_0+HCS_Thr_1 jointed by string.
l HCS priority(PrioClass)
PrioClass is a jointed field in database by PrioClass_0 and PrioClass_1. Jointing
mode: PrioClass_0 + PrioClass_1 jointed by string.
l C31 hysteresis(C31_Hyst)
C31_Hyst is a jointed field in database by C31_Hyst_0 and C31_Hyst_1. Jointing
mode: C31_Hyst_0 + C31_Hyst_1 jointed by string.
l GPRS cell reselection hysteresis(ReselHys)
ReselHys is a jointed field in database by ReselHys_0 and ReselHys_1. Jointing
mode: ReselHys_0 + ReselHys_1 jointed by string.
l Routing reselection hysteresis (RaReselHys)
RaReselHys is a jointed field in database by RaReselHys_0 and RaReselHys_1.
Jointing mode: RaReselHys_0 + RaReselHys_1 jointed by string.
l Random access attempt permitted (RadAcRetry)
RadAcRetry is a jointed field in database by RadAcRetry_0 and RadAcRetry_1.
Jointing mode: RadAcRetry_0 + RadAcRetry_1 jointed by string.
l Usage of cell reselection offset (C32_Qual)
C32_Qual is a jointed field in database by C32_Qual_0 and C32_Qual_1. Jointing
mode: C32_Qual_0+C32_Qual_1 jointed by string.
l GPRS access minimal signal level (RxLevAsMin)
RxLevAsMin is a jointed field in database by RxLevAsMin_0 and RxLevAsMin_1.
Jointing mode: RxLevAsMin_0 + RxLevAsMin_1 jointed by string.
l HCS exist (HCS_Exist)
HCS_Exist is a jointed field in database by HCS_Exist_0 and HCS_Exist_1. Jointing
mode: HCS_Exist_0+HCS_Exist_1 jointed by string.
l GPRS MAX initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCch)
MsTxMaxCch is a jointed field in database by MsTxMaxCch_0 and MsTxMaxCch_1.
Jointing mode: MsTxMaxCch_0 + MsTxMaxCch_1 jointed by string.
D.4.10 GPRS Channel Parameters

l Interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt)
D-17

2 0
3 1
4 2
5 3
6 4
7 5
8 6
9 7
10 8
12 9
14 10
16 11
20 12
25 13
32 14
50 15
l Interval period of packet access attempt (S)
12 0
15 1
20 2
30 3
41 4
55 5
76 6
109 7
163 8
217 9
l MAX Times of Attempt(MaxRetrans)
MaxRetrans is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.
D-18

1 0
2 1
4 2
7 3
l Access Control Level(AccCtrlClass)

AccCtrlClass is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top
to bottom.
l Access Persist Level(PersistLev)
PersistLev is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.
D.4.11 EDGE Parameters

l EGPRS Phone Init Coding (EGPRSInitAttSelt)
It is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
MCS1 0
MCS2 1
MCS3 2
MCS4 3
MCS5 4
MCS6 5
MCS7 6
MCS8 7
MCS9 8
D.5 Cell Object Parameters

D.5.1 TRX Information Parameters
l TRX type (TrxType)
Common TRX 0
D-19

Extended TRX 1
l Static power level (PwRreduction)
Max output power 0
Max output power -2dB 1
Max output power +1.5dB 253
Max output power +1dB 254
Max output power +0.5dB 255
D.5.2 Channel Information Parameters

l TS Channel Combination
TCH/F 0
TCH/H(0, 1)+FACCH/H(0, 1)+SACCH/TH(0, 1) 1
TCH/H(0, 0)+FACCH/H(0, 1)+SACCH/TH(0,

1)+TCH/H(0, 1) 2
SDCCH/8+SACCH/C8 3
FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH 4
BCCH+SDCCH/4 5
BCCH+CCCH 6
BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH 7
SDCCH+CBCH 8
PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH 12
PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH 13
PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH 14
l Ps Service Preference Property
D-20

No preference 255
GPRS preference 0
EDGE preference 1
EDGE exclusion 2
EGPRS2–A Preference 3
EGPRS2–A dedicated 4
D.5.3 Power Control Parameters

l Power Control Level and PwrDecrLimit
They form a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.
l Increase uplink level Threshold (PcULInclLevThsThs), Value P (PcULInclLevThsP),
and Value N (PcULInclLevThsN)
bottom, according to the sequence: FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR.
l Decrease uplink level Threshold (PcULRedLevThsThs), Value P (PcULRedLevThsP),
and Value N (PcULRedLevThsN)
l Increase uplink quality Threshold (PcULInclQualThsThs), Value P
(PcULInclQualThsP), and Value N (PcULInclQualThsN)
l Decrease uplink quality Threshold (PcULRedQualThsThs), Value P
(PcULRedQualThsP), and Value N (PcULRedQualThsN)
l Increase downlink level Threshold (PcDLInclLevThsThs), Value P
(PcDLInclLevThsP), and Value N (PcDLInclLevThsN)
l Decrease downlink level Threshold (PcDLRedLevThsThs), Value P
(PcDLRedLevThsP), and Value N (PcDLRedLevThsN)
D-21

l Increase downlink quality Threshold (PcDLInclQualThsThs), Value P

(PcDLInclQualThsP), and Value N (PcDLInclQualThsN)
l Decrease downlink quality Threshold (PcDLRedQualThsThs), Value P
(PcDLRedQualThsP), and Value N (PcDLRedQualThsN)
l Power increasing step (db) (PwrIncStep)
It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom,
according to the sequence: FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR.
l Power decreasing step (db) (PwrRedStep)
l MAX power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax)
l MIN power level of MS (MsTxPwrMin)
l MIN power level of BS (BxTxPwrMin)
l MIN interval of power control (PcMinlnterval)
D.5.4 Handover Control Parameters

l Frequency control value for handover on traffic (TrafficHoFreqrCtl)
GSM900 0
EXT900 1
DCS1800 2
PCS1900 4
GSM850 7
l HoPatternInd
D-22

HoPatternInd is a jointed field. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shift.

HoPatternInd=(HoPatternInd4<<3)+(HoPatternInd3<<2)+(HoPatternInd2<<1)+
HoPatternInd1
HoPatternInd1: Synchronization handover
HoPatternInd2: Asynchronization handover
HoPatternInd3: Pseudo-synchronization handover
HoPatternInd4: Pre-synchronization handover
l HoControl
HoControl is a jointed field. Jointing mode: adding by bit after shifting:
HoControl=(HoControl18<<17)+(HoControl17<<16)+(HoControl16<<15)+(HoControl15<<14)+(H
HoControl1: Allow SDCCH handover
HoControl2: Allow inter-cell handover due to uplink interference
HoControl3: Allow inter-cell handover due to downlink interference
HoControl4: Allow handover due to distance
HoControl5: Allow standard PBGT handover
HoControl6: Allow automatic handover based on traffic
HoControl7: Allow handover based on direction
HoControl8: Allow handover based on homocentric circularity
HoControl9: Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink
interference
HoControl10: Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink
interference
HoControl11: Allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT
HoControl12: Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority
HoControl13: Allow rapid handover
HoControl14: Allow Macro-Micro delay handover
HoControl15: Allow Micro-Macro delay handover
HoControl16: Allow internal handover based on TA
HoControl17: Allow force transfer handover
HoControl18: Subcell handover algorithm
l Subcell handover algorithm (HoControl18)
Concentric handover 0
Path loss and TA handover 1
D-23

D.5.5 UTRAN Cell Control Parameters

l Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell (Qsearch_P)
Qsearch_P is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: Qsearch_P_0+Qsearch_P_1
jointed by string.
Qsearch_P_0: idle state
Qsearch_P_1: packet transmission state
l FDD GPRS reselection offset (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset)
FDD_GPRS_Qoffset is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0+FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1 jointed by string.
FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0: idle state
FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1: packet transmission state
l TDD GPRS reselection offset (TDD_GPRS_Qoffset)
TDD_GPRS_Qoffset is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0+TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1 jointed by string.
TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0: idle state
TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1: packet transmission state
l PS MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell
FDD_QminPS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
FDD_QminPS_0+FDD_QminPS_1 jointed by string.
FDD_QminPS_0: idle state
FDD_QminPS_1: packet transmission state
l Offset of FDD_QminPS_0(FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS)
FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_0+FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_1 jointed by string.
FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_0: idle state
FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_1: packet transmission state
l PS MIN RSCP of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_RSCPminPS)
FDD_RSCPminPS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
FDD_RSCPminPS_0+FDD_RSCPminPS_1 jointed by string.
FDD_RSCPminPS_0: idle state
FDD_RSCPminPS_1: packet transmission state
l Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP(FDDRprtTho2PS)
FDDRprtTho2PS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
FDDRprtTho2PS_0+FDDRprtTho2PS_1 jointed by string.
FDDRprtTho2PS_0: idle state
D-24

FDDRprtTho2PS_1: packet transmission state
D.5.6 UTRAN Handover Control Parameters

l UTRAN handover (ServiceHo)
Handover to UTRAN first 0
Not handover to UTRAN first 1
Not allow to handover to UTRAN 2
According to MSC, default handover to UTRAN

first 3
According to MSC, default not handover to

UTRAN first 4
According to MSC, default not allowed to han-

dover to UTRAN 5
l FDD/TDD handover (FDDTDDPrio)
Priority to FDD 0
Handover to TDD cell should be performed 1
D.5.7 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters

l Neighboring cell layer (NCellLayer)
Undefined 0
Same layer of the home cell 1
Upper layer of the home cell 2
Lower layer of the home cell 3
D.5.8 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters

l Neighboring cell layer (NCellLayer)
Undefined 0
Same layer of the home cell 1
D-25

Upper layer of the home cell 2
Lower layer of the home cell 3
D.5.9 Frequency Hopping System Parameters

l Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode)
Base band freqhop 1
RFID freqhop 2
D-26

Figures
Figure 1-1 Starting NE Agent .................................................................................... 1-3
Figure 1-2 Selecting NE Management > Configuration Management .................... 1-3
Figure 1-3 Configuration Management Interface ....................................................... 1-4
Figure 1-4 Selecting Apply Mutex Right .................................................................. 1-5
Figure 1-5 Information Dialog Box ........................................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-6 Successfully Applying Mutex Right........................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-7 Selecting Release Mutex Right .............................................................. 1-6
Figure 1-8 Selecting Export Network Plan Data ...................................................... 1-6
Figure 1-9 Selecting MOC to Be Exported ................................................................ 1-7
Figure 1-10 Selecting Attributes to Be Exported for MOC.......................................... 1-7
Figure 1-11 Selecting File Type to Be Exported......................................................... 1-8
Figure 1-12 Setting Saving Path and File Name for Data .......................................... 1-8
Figure 1-13 Parameter Data ..................................................................................... 1-8
Figure 1-14 Selecting Batch Apply Network Plan Data......................................... 1-10
Figure 1-15 Selecting File Type to Be Imported....................................................... 1-10
Figure 1-16 Applying Network Planning Data in Batch ............................................ 1-11
Figure 2-1 Radio Basic Property Parameters ............................................................ 2-1
Figure 2-2 Other Parameters .................................................................................. 2-11
Figure 2-3 Channel Allocation Control Parameters.................................................. 2-25
Figure 2-4 Timer 1 Parameters ............................................................................... 2-35
Figure 2-5 Timer 2 Parameters ............................................................................... 2-50
Figure 2-6 GPRS Max Retrying Times Parameters ................................................. 2-67
Figure 2-7 GPRS Timer Parameters ....................................................................... 2-76
Figure 2-8 AMR Half Method Parameters ............................................................... 2-92
Figure 2-9 AMR Full Method Parameters ................................................................ 2-97
Figure 2-10 GPRS Other Parameters 1 ................................................................ 2-102
Figure 2-11 GPRS Other Parameters 2................................................................. 2-108
Figure 2-12 BVC Flow Control Parameters ........................................................... 2-120
Figure 2-13 FUC Flow Control Map Parameters ................................................... 2-128
Figure 2-14 EDGE Parameters ............................................................................. 2-134
Figure 2-15 eMLPP Set ........................................................................................ 2-143
Figure 2-16 Ater Timer Parameters....................................................................... 2-161
I
Figure 3-1 Basic Property Parameters for GERAN External Cell ............................... 3-1
Figure 3-2 GPRS Property Parameters for GERAN External Cell.............................. 3-8
Figure 3-3 UTRAN External Cell Parameters .......................................................... 3-24
Figure 4-1 Basic Parameters 1.................................................................................. 4-2
Figure 4-2 Basic Parameters 2................................................................................ 4-17
Figure 4-3 Basic Parameters 3................................................................................ 4-34
Figure 4-4 Optional Parameters .............................................................................. 4-50
Figure 4-5 Cell Selection Parameters...................................................................... 4-61
Figure 4-6 Service Process Additional Parameters ................................................. 4-70
Figure 4-7 System Parameters ............................................................................... 4-82
Figure 4-9 GPRS Basic Parameters........................................................................ 4-95
Figure 4-11 GPRS Other Parameters 2................................................................. 4-110
Figure 4-13 GPRS Cell Options Parameters ......................................................... 4-139
Figure 4-14 GPRS NC Survey Parameters ........................................................... 4-149
Figure 4-15 GPRS Power Control Parameters ...................................................... 4-156
Figure 4-16 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters ................................................... 4-161
Figure 4-17 GPRS Channel Parameters ............................................................... 4-185
Figure 4-18 EDGE Parameters ............................................................................. 4-197
Figure 5-1 TRX Information Parameters.................................................................... 5-2
Figure 5-2 Channel Information Parameters ........................................................... 5-10
Figure 5-3 IP Parameters........................................................................................ 5-19
Figure 5-4 Panel Parameters .................................................................................. 5-22
Figure 5-5 Power Control Parameters..................................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-6 Power Survey Parameters ..................................................................... 5-28
Figure 5-7 Power Adjustment Threshold Parameters .............................................. 5-35
Figure 5-9 GPRS Power Control Parameters .......................................................... 5-48
Figure 5-10 Handover Pretreatment Parameters..................................................... 5-53
Figure 5-11 Handover Threshold Parameters.......................................................... 5-62
Figure 5-12 Handover Condition Parameters .......................................................... 5-73
Figure 5-13 Handover Control Parameters.............................................................. 5-85
Figure 5-14 Other Parameters ................................................................................ 5-97
II
Figures
Figure 5-15 Handover Algorithm Parameters ........................................................ 5-105

Figure 5-16 Subcell Parameters............................................................................ 5-116
Figure 5-17 Basic Properties 1 Parameters........................................................... 5-121
Figure 5-21 GPRS Parameters 1 .......................................................................... 5-159
Figure 5-22 GPRS Parameters 2 .......................................................................... 5-170
Figure 5-23 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters............................................... 5-181
Figure 5-24 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters ........................ 5-182
Figure 5-25 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters .................................................. 5-199
Figure 5-26 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters ............................................... 5-212
Figure 5-27 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters ........... 5-215
Figure 5-28 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters ..................................... 5-222
Figure 5-29 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters .................................. 5-226
Figure 5-30 Frequency Hopping System Parameters ............................................ 5-230
Figure 6-1 Operation Control Parameters ................................................................. 6-1
Figure 6-2 FUC Parameters.................................................................................... 6-24
Figure 6-3 Handover Parameters of BCCH ............................................................. 6-28
Figure 6-4 Handover Parameters of SD .................................................................. 6-33
Figure 6-6 IBS Parameters ..................................................................................... 6-49
Figure 6-7 Performance Management Parameters.................................................. 6-50
Figure 6-8 Baseband Frequency Hopping TRX Exchange Parameters ................... 6-55
Figure 6-9 GPRS Operation Control Parameters .................................................... 6-58
III
Figures

Glossary
3GPP
- 3rd Generation Partnership Project
AMR
- Adaptive Multiple Rate
Abis
- Abis Interface between BSC and BTS
BCCH
- Broadcast Control CHannel
BER
- Bit Error Rate
BSC
- Base Station Controller
BSS
- Base Station System
BTS
- Base Transceiver Station
CHR
- Call History Record
DSP
- Digital Signal Processor
DTX
- Discontinuous Transmission
FACCH
- Fast Associated Control Channel
FER
- Frame Error Rate
FUC
- Frame Unit Controller
GERAN
- GSM/EDGE Radio Access Network
GSM
- Global System for Mobile Communication
MR
- Meaturement Report
V
MS
- Mobile Station
MSC
- Mobile Switching Center
NSS
- Network Subsystem
SDCCH
- Stand alone Dedicated Control Channel
TCH
- Traffic Channel
TCP
- Transfer Control Protocol
TDD
- Time Division Duplex
TDMA
- Time Division Multiple Access
TRX
- Transmitter and Receiver
TS
- Time Slot
VI

SJ-20100414142254-017-ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20.21) Base Station Controller Radio Parameter Reference

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

SJ-20100414142254-017-ZXG10 iBSC (V6.20.21) Base Station Controller Radio Parameter Reference

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

ZXG10 iBSC

Base Station Controller

Revision No. Revision Date Revision Reason

R1.4 20101030 Revise the global resource parameters.

R1.1 20100530 Updated(In Chapter 1 Overview, the description of "Change

R1.0 20100430 First edition

Serial Number: SJ-20100414142254-017

Publishing Date: 20101030

Chapter 2 BSC Function Parameters........................................................ 2-1

Chapter 3 External Cell Parameters.......................................................... 3-1

Chapter 4 Cell Parameters......................................................................... 4-1

Chapter 5 Cell Object Parameters............................................................. 5-1

Chapter 6 System Control Parameters..................................................... 6-1

Appendix A Flow Control Policy Values.................................................. A-1

What Is in This Manual

Chapter 2, BSC Function Introduces the BSC function parameters.

1.1 Introduction to BSS Radio Parameters

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

1.2 Method of Modifying Radio Parameters

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-1 Starting NE Agent

3. Click Start, the system automatically starts this NE.

Figure 1-2 Selecting NE Management > Configuration Management

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

5. Click Configuration Management, the system enters into configuration management

Figure 1-3 Configuration Management Interface

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-4 Selecting Apply Mutex Right

Figure 1-5 Information Dialog Box

Figure 1-6 Successfully Applying Mutex Right

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-7 Selecting Release Mutex Right

1.3 Method of Modifying Parameters in Batch

Figure 1-8 Selecting Export Network Plan Data

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-9 Selecting MOC to Be Exported

Figure 1-10 Selecting Attributes to Be Exported for MOC

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-11 Selecting File Type to Be Exported

6. Open the exported data file, as shown in Figure 1-13.

Figure 1-13 Parameter Data

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

d. If multiple objects among which reference relationship exists should be deleted,

b. In the Excel template, the work sheet name cannot be modified.

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-14 Selecting Batch Apply Network Plan Data

Figure 1-15 Selecting File Type to Be Imported

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-16 Applying Network Planning Data in Batch

1.4 The Format to Explain Parameters

Table 1-1 Format to Explain Radio Parameters

Full name Chinese parameter name on the interface

Abbreviation Abbreviation for English parameters

3GPP Name Parameter name in 3GPP protocol

3GPP reference 3GPP protocol version number for parameter reference

Description Descriptive text for this parameter.

Management Object Involved object by the parameter

Value range of this parameter. If the parameter is in mapping form, actual

Unit Parameter unit

Default value Default value and its description on parameter interface

SJ-20100414142254-017|20101030 ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Online = After a parameter’s value is modified, it is immediately synchronized

Relevant functions and features of the network that corresponds to this

Parameters which have data restriction relationship with the parameter.